A.C.E. 2/ACE CD 2.iso/FILES/DOCS/DPAINT5D.LHA/DeluxePaint5.doc

Text File | 1995-05-18 | 649.4 KB | 16,224 lines

                      DELUXE PAINT V - MANUAL
                      =======================

                                                  TYPED BY SHARD - N&B
EPILEPSY WARNING

PLEASE READ BEFORE USING THIS GAME OR ALLOWING YOUR CHILDREN TO USE IT

Some  people  are  susceptible  to   epileptic   seizures   or   loss of
consciousness  when exposed to certain flashing lights or light patterns
in  everyday  life.    Such  people  may  have  a seizure while watching
television images or playing certain games.  This may happen even if the
person has no medical history of epilepsy or has never had any epileptic
seizures.

If  you  or  anyone  in  your  family  has  ever had symptoms related to
epilepsy  (seizures  or  loss of consciousness) when exposed to flashing
lights, consult your doctor prior to playing.

We  advise  that  parents  should  monitor  the  use  of  games by their
children.    If  you  or  your  child  experience  any  of the following
symptoms:  dizziness,  blurred  vision,  eye or muscle twitches, loss of
consciousness,  disorientation,  any involuntary movement or convulsion,
while  playing  the  game,  IMMEDIATELY discontinue use and consult your
doctor.

PRECAUTIONS TO TAKE DURING USE

Do not stand too close to the screen.  Sit a good distance away from the
screen, as far away as the length of the cable allows.

Preferably play the game on a small screen.

Avoid playing if you are tired or have not had much sleep.

Make sure that the room in which you are playing is well lit.

Rest for at least 10 to 15 minutes per hour while playing a game.



INTRODUCTION
------------

Deluxe  Paint  V  is an upgraded and enhanced version of Elevtronic Arts
premier  colour  paint  program  for  the  Amiga,  Deluxe Paint IV.  Its
improved  and  more versitile range of paint and animation features were
designed  to  meet  the basic needs of amateur artists, while satisfying
the rigorous requirements of graphics and video professionals.

If you're new to computer graphics, you'll want to read the next section
For New Artists Only, before you move on to the rest of the introduction
to  Deluxe  Paint V.  If you're an experienced computer graphics artist,
you might want to move directly to About this Manual.

FOR NEW ARTISTS ONLY

You  are  about  to  discover  that  Deluxe  Paint V can help you create
prototypes  of your designs more quickly and easily than any traditional
medium.  You'll move from inspiration to execution in minutes instead of
hours.    We  think that Deluxe Paint V's power and versitility can help
you develop a new approach to graphic art.  You'll soon find that Deluxe
Paint  V  is  ideal  for  creating  graphic  design  comps,  video   and
traditional  animation,  video titling, desktop presentations, and other
desktop publishing applications.

Deluxe  Paint  V  lets  you  do  things  that would be difficult, if not
impossible,  using  traditional  methods.    For example, you can easily
rotate  a  picture  or  flip  it  to create its mirror image.  Shrink or
expand an image as you wish, pick it up, and place it precisely.  Or you
can  create  a mathematically exact tonal range for your colours just by
specifying  the  beginning  and ending shades and the number of steps in
between.

You  can  also  move  images from one part of the picture to another, or
copy an image and paste it anywhere in your picture.  Create a forest of
leaves  just  by  drawing  a  single leaf and pasting it throughout your
picture.   And make global changes to the colours in your artwork with a
few keystrokes.

Deluxe  Paint  will  also  help  you  find more efficient ways to create
traditional drawing, painting, and animation effects.

You  can  save  all  your  work  on  disk  so  you  don't have to create
everything  from scratch each time you work on a design.  This means you
can  collect  a  library  of  images  (called clip art) to use in future
designs.    Because you can save versions of your picture as you go, you
can  always  return  to an earlier state of a design and pick it up from
there,  if you like.  Finally because you can print as many originals of
a  picture as you need, or make unlimited copies of your data disks with
no degradarion from one generarion to the next, there need never be just
one original of a picture to lose or spill coffee on.

So,  welcome  to the world of computer generated art.  As you begin this
great  artistic adventure, we think you'll be impressed and delighted by
Deluxe Paint V.

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

When you need help or simply want more information about Deluxe Paint V,
this  manual  is  the best resource.  But you don't have to memorise the
manual  to  master the program.  We've organised the information here so
you can quickly learn how to use the program in a manner that best suits
your style and experience.

The  manual  assumes  that  you know your way around your Amiga.  If you
just  recently  acquired  your  computer familiarise yourself with Amiga
terminology and techniques before using Deluxe Paint V.  You do not have
to  become  an  Amiga  expert.    But, selecting, dragging, pointing and
clicking  should  not  be  a mystery to you; nor should menus, submenus,
windows, and requesters sound strange.

If  any  of  these  terms  are  unfamiliar, take a few minutes to browse
through  your  Amiga  User's  guide,  and  make  sure you read Hints and
Reminders  while  using  Deluxe  Paint,  below  for  some  special tips.
Knowledge  of basic Amiga operations and features will help you learn to
use Deluxe Paint V quickly and adeptly.

EVERY USER SHOULD READ

Before  starting to work with Deluxe Paint V there are three things that
every user ought to do.

Read  Whats  New at the end of this introduction for a brief description
of Deluxe Paint V's exciting new features.  It's especially designed for
artists  who  are  familiar  with previous versions of Deluxe Paint, and
beginners will also find much useful information.

Briefly  review  the  Table  of  Contents  to  locate  areas  of special
interest.  Note that Chapters 4-7 assume familiarity with the more basic
parts of the program.

Carefully  read  Getting  Started  to  be  sure  you have all the proper
equipment  and  software.    If  you  have  a  hard  drive,   follow the
instructions  in  Installing on a Hard Drive below for installing Deluxe
Paint V on it.

After  you've  read  Whats  New,  reviewed  the  Table  of Contents, and
installed  DeluxePaint  V,  use the manual in whatever way suits you and
your  work.   Follow our Guided Tour or strike off on your own.  You can
always  consult  Reference  if  you  need help or want more information.
Here  are  a  few  approaches  you  can  take  to  learn Deluxe Paint V,
depending on your knowledge of computer graphics programs.

BEGINNING COMPUTER GRAPHICS USERS

Work  though  Getting  Started  and  the  Guided  Tour - in order and in
detail.    These  chapters  describe the fundamentals of the program and
introduce  some  advanced techniques.  You'll start creating with Deluxe
Paint  V right away and learn about its more complex functions as you go
along.    After  you've  worked  through the Guided Tour move On to what
interests you.  We highly recommend Chapter 4, Painting Tutorials.  Keep
the  manual  close  by  so you can consult Reference to learn more about
other program features when you're ready.

EXPERIENCED COMPUTER GRAPHICS USERS

If  you're already familiar with Deluxe Paint IV quickly scan Whats New,
for  new information.  You'll find an introduction to some of the unique
paint  features of Deluxe Paint V there.  Move on whenever you're ready.
Use  Chapters  4  -  8,  and the Appendixes to learn more about powerful
program  features  like  colour  mixing,  the  LightTable, stencils, and
animation.

THOSE WHO DONT READ MANUALS

If  you  don't  read  manuals  as a rule, we still hope that you'll read
Getting Started.  Keep this manual nearby so you can consult it when you
need to.

HINTS AND REMINDERS WHILE USING DELUXE PAINT V

Manual Conventions
Several  special  elements  in  the  manual  text  are  designed to make
learning Deluxe Paint V easier.

Filled  squares  indicate  action  items  or  steps.    They mark how to
sections  that  present  something you should do to understand a program
feature or function.

Outline  squares  indicate  a  list of features, functions, or contents.
They do not indicate action items.

A  note  preceded  by  this  symbol   indicates   important   additional
information,  a  warning,  or  a  condition.  Be sure to read every item
that's labelled this way.

DeluxePaint V's menu options and keystrokes appear in the text in simple
boldface  type.  Every menu option is thoroughly described in Chapter 8,
Reference.

This  special  monospace  typeface  indicates characters that you should
type.

Refers  to  the  Return  key  (sometimes  called  the Enter key) on your
keyboard.  Return is indicated on some keyboards by the Enter symbol.

Refers  to  the Backspace key indicated by the left arrow symbol on some
keyboards.

Refers to the Control key (Ctrl) on your keyboard.

Refers  to  the  Amiga  key(s)  on  the bottom row of your keyboard Some
computers show these as Commodore key(s) "C=".

You  can access many Deluxe Paint tools and functions directly from your
keyboard.   For example, typing the capital letter S activates, the Show
Page option, just as if you had chosen the option from the Picture menu.
These  keyboard  commands  ARE case sensitive, so when we show a command
that requires a capital letter, like Q for Quit, make sure you hold down
the  Shift key as you type the letter.  As you become more familiar with
the  program,  you'll  find  that  these keyboard shortcuts can save you
time.

USING THE MOUSE

In  this  manual,  we'll  use  the  term  click  a few different ways to
describe some standard mouse actions

CLICK means press and quickly release the left mouse button.

DOUBLE CLICK means press and quickly release the left mouse button twice.

RIGHT CLICK means press and release the right mouse button.

DRAGGING THE MOUSE

When you are asked to DRAG the mouse to perform some operation, we mean,
hold  down  the  LEFT  mouse button and move the mouse, unless otherwise
indicated.

PAINTING WITH THE MOUSE

The  two  mouse buttons let you switch between foreground and background
colours while painting.

Pressing  the  left  mouse  button  paints  with  the current foreground
colour;  pressing  the  right  mouse  button  paints  with  the  current
background  colour.    You can paint with either colour using any of the
painting  tools.   Likewise, clicking a colour in the palette selects it
as  your  foreground colour, while right clicking a colour selects it as
your background colour.

REQUESTERS

Requesters  display items that you can choose.  They always require some
input from you.  Some requesters let you modify the way a tool operates;
other requesters let you load or save files.

ACTION BUTTONS

Action buttons activate operations or commands made in the requester, or
respond  to  a  prompt.    Clicking  an action button usually closes the
requester.  The OK button accepts any changes made to settings since the
requester was opened.  Cancel closes the requester without accepting any
changes.

The  highlighted  item  in  the requester is the one currently selected.
Any action buttons you click will affect the item currently selected.

SCROLL BARS

Scroll bars are used to move (scroll) through a list of items that's too
large  to  appear  in one window of a requester.  For example, there are
too  many  file  names  to  fit  in one window of Figure 2.  You have to
scroll the window to see the names of files that are not visible.  There
are three ways to scroll through a list.

Click the arrows on either end of the scroll bar.

Drag the scroll box to either end of the scroll bar.

Click the shaded area on either side of the scroll box.

EDIT BOXES

Edit  boxes  let  you  enter  file  names  or other information from the
keyboard.    Click  in  the  edit  box to place the cursor then type any
prinitable  characters.    Press  the backspace key to delete characters
left of the cursor.  Press Del to delete characters under the cursor.

Review  these  brief  descriptions if you see something on screen that's
unfamiliar.    When you're ready to paint, move on to Chapter 1, Getting
Started.

CHECK BOXES

Check  boxes  indicate if an item is turned on or off.  When on, the box
has  a  check mark.  When off the box is empty.  To change the check box
setting, click on the box.

CYCLE GADGETS

Cycle  gadgets  contain  a list of options.  The displayed option is the
selected  option.    Position the cursor over the cycle gadget and click
the  selection  button  to  cycle  through the options.  Cycle backwards
through the options by Shift clicking.

RADIO BUTTONS

Radio  buttons  allow  you  to  select one option from a fully displayed
list.  Each option in the list has a radio button next to it.

Selected  radio buttons are highlighted and appear indented.  Unselected
radio buttons are one colour and appear raised above the screen.

Select  a  radio  button  by clicking on it.  Clicking on a radio button
deselects any previously selected option in the list.


WHATS NEW IN DELUXE PAINT V?

If  you  are familiar with Deluxe Paint IV you'll quickly master the new
features  and  enhanced  functionality  of Deluxe Paint V.  You probably
wont  need to spend a lot of time working through this manual, but there
are  some special options here that you wont want to miss.  This section
briefly  describes  the major additions and improvements to the software
and  directs  you  to the areas where you'll find more information.  For
the  straightforward changes, the best place to find information quickly
is in Chapter 8, Reference.

The major enhancements and updates in the software are as follows:

TRUE COLOUR SUPPORT
Deluxe  Paint  V supports 24-bit colour data through the use of a 24-bit
backing store.  You can now Load, Edit, and Save 24-bit IFF data.

AREXX SUPPORT
The  popular  inter  process  scripting/communications language ARexx is
supported.    ARexx  can  be  used  to  control  programs internally and
externally  on  the  Amiga  as  well   as   provide   recordable   macro
functionalities to Deluxe Paint.

NATURAL MEDIA
Natural  Media  Types  and Textured Background modes enable emulation of
stylistic  painting modes/effects such as water colour, oils, and chalk.
The  ability  to paint on textured backgrounds also enhances the natural
feeling of painting and drawing.

IMPROVED AIRBRUSH
The Airbrush now offers realistic spray with adjustable radius settings.

LOADING ANIMS DIFFERENT SIZES
Load  any  size  Anim,  including virtual pages.  Create and edit larger
than screen animations.

CAMERA MOVES
This  new  feature allows scrolling backgrounds and zoom in and zoom out
type moves.

IMPROVED GRADIENT/TRANSLUCENCY CONTROL
User  defined  controls  for  gradient  transluceney.   New and improved
gradient  dithering  in  all  modes  (Smooth,  Adjustable  Pattern,  and
Adjustible Random type gradient fills).

LIGHT TABLE ENHANCEMENTS
Different  dimming  options  for LightTable.  Multiple levels of dimming
for LightTable, user definable LightTable settings (Layers, Dim levels).

INDIVIDUAL PALETTES PER FRAME
You can now create, edit, load, and save multiple palette animations.

ANIMATION FADE/ TRANSLUCENCY OPTIONS
From  within  the  Move Requester you can specify a beginning and ending
level of translucency for the custom brush or animnbrush being moved.

ANIMATION RATE CHANGES PER FRAME
Set the animation frame rate or pause on a per frame basis if so desired

KEY FRAME ANIMATION
Using the Move requester the user will be able to interactively position
their brush or animbrush on start and end key frames in their animation.

PRESSURE SENSITIVE TABLET SUPPORT
Cycle  pressure, size, translucency and reverse size settings.  Requires
a supported pressure sensitive tablet.

CORRAL BRUSH PICKUP
A new brush pickup mode much like a freehand drawing tool.

SEED-FILL PICKUP
This  "magic  wand"  tool  allows you to pick up a custom brush from the
screen by simply clicking on the object.

IMPROVED FILE FORMAT SUPPORT
Support for Anim Op 8 format.

IMPROVED SPEED
Code  optimisition  has  increased  the  speed  of some functions in the
program.

ENHANCED INTERFACE
Standard  Amiga  keyboard  commands for applications.  localisation, and
better user definable preferences for most Program settings.

ENHANCED PRINTING OPTIONS
Storyboard  printing - Animboard allow you to print a storyboard of your
animation.    Expanded  printing  control and support for system printer
preferences have been added.

PICTURE PREVIEWS
You  can  now  view and save a picture preview to the file or file icon.
The file's icon will also be an image preview.

NEW PLAYER, DELUXE PLAYER
Deluxe Player provides support for ARexx and multiple palette anims, and
the ability to play anims from your hard drive.

MOUSE/TABLET TRACKING
Tracking   and   smoothing   for   better   looking    freehand drawing.
Mouse/tablet movements are buffered and smoothed.

COLOUR PANEL ENHANCEMENTS
You  now  have  the option to turn on and off the grid around the colour
cells  to  do  side by side colour comparisons.  RGB and HSV sliders are
shown  simultaneously.    Also   included   are   Colour   Cell extended
selections, true RGB colour cells (no longer HAM), a standardised design
and look for all colour panels, and a larger and enhanced mixing area.

STATUS GAUGE
Status  gauges  provide  visual  feedback on the progress of many Deluxe
Paint operations.

ANIMATION RATE STATUS
If  your  computer  system cannot maintain the specified animation rate,
you  can  call  up  a  speedometer  while the animation is running.  The
speedometer will visually provide you with the estimated animation rate.



CHAPTER 1 - GETTING STARTED
---------------------------

This chapter briefly describes the contents of your Deluxe Paint package
and the computer hardware and software you will need to use the program.
It also describes how to:

Organise your disks
Install Deluxe Paint on a hard drive
Start Deluxe Paint
Open a file
Quit the program

SOFTWARE

Your Deluxe Paint package contains four (4) floppy disks.

The  Program  disk  contains  the  installation  program, Deluxe Paint V
program, Deluxe Paint font, Deluxe Paint Libraries, ReadMe file, and the
Deluxe Player animation player.  The Deluxe Player program lets you play
your  animations  outside of Deluxe Paint (you'll find information about
the Deluxe Player in Appendix C).

The  Media  disk contains textures, media types, brushes, example moves,
colour sets, and two colour fonts that you can use in your own work.

The  Examples  disk  contains  pictures, a few animation files, and some
AnimBrushes  to give you some ideas of what you can do with Deluxe Paint
V's animation features.

The Extras disk contains the gallery, AGA art, and system patches.

THE READ ME FILE

Before  you do anything else, read the ReadMe file on your Program disk.
This  file contains information about the program that was not available
before the manual went to press.  To read the ReadMe file:

Double click on the ReadMe icon.

This  opens  a  text window that, at a minimum, lists the title, version
number,  and  copyright information about the program.  If you need help
using  the  ReadMe file, press h on the keyboard to see a screen of text
viewer key board commands.  To exit the ReadMe file:

Press q on the keyboard

HARDWARE

To use Deluxe Paint V you need:

An Amiga computer with at least 2 megabytes (MB) of random access memory
(RAM).   Four MB of RAM (or more) are highly recommended For AGA models,
2 MB are required (4 MB required for 24-bit RGB buffer editing);

Amiga DOS 2.04 or greater (2.1 or 3.1 recommended):

Analogue RGB or Multisync Colour Monitor;

One  floppy  drive  and  a  hard  drive or two floppy drives (hard drive
highly recommended):

If  your  Amiga has only floppy drives, we recommend that you not double
click on file icons to start DeluxePaint and load a file.  Instead start
Deluxe  Paint  and  then  load  the  file  by  choosing  Load   from the
appropriate menu.

Some initialised floppy disks, or a hard drive for saving your work.

If  you  want  to  print  the  artwork you create, you'll need a printer
capable of reproducing black and white or colour graphics.  Consult your
Amiga  Users  Guide  for information about connecting printers and other
peripherals to your computer.

RECOMMENDED CONFIGURATION

Amiga 68040 CPU, Amiga DOS 2.1 or higher, AGA chipset, 2 MB of Chip RAM,
2 MB Fast RAM, 100 MB hard drive, multisync monitor.

ORGANISING YOUR DISKS

We assume that you already know how to initialise and copy disks, create
and rename drawers, and move files from one disk to another.  If you are
not  familiar  with  all  of these basic actions, we suggest you consult
your Amiga Users Guide before going any further.

INSTALLING ON A HARD DISK

If  you  use a hard disk drive, you will probably want to install Deluxe
Paint  on  it  (if  you don't have a hard disk, see Installing on Floppy
Disks  below)  The  following steps assume that you started the computer
with a standard Workbench that has been configured properly to support a
hard disk.

IMPORTANT

You'll  need  a  minimum  of 1 MB (3.5 MB recommended) of available disk
space and to install Deluxe Paint V on your hard drive.  If you choose a
mini mum install, the art samples will not be installed.

The  install  program  will  install  Deluxe Paint V to a drawer of your
choice,  and lets you copy the program fonts, which need to be installed
in your sys tem, in your FONTS; drawer.

1.    Insert Program Disk into drive DF0;, The Program Disk icon appears
on your workbench.  Double click the disk icon to open the disk.

2.    Double click on the ReadMe icon.  The ReadMe file contains informa
tion  that didn't make into this manual before press time.  When you are
finished reading the ReadMe file, close it.

3.    Double  click  on  the  Install icon.  Instalation of Deluxe Paint
begins.  Follow the on screen prompts.

Deluxe Paint V installs the following on your hard drive:

Deluxe Paint application.

Deluxe  Player  application  and  Deluxe  Player  ReadMe text file.  The
Deluxe  Player  ReadMe  file contains instructions and information about
the Player.

Deluxe Paint ReadMe text file.

Picture drawer.

Brush drawer.

Catalogues drawer.

Textures drawer.

Media drawer.

Libs drawer.

Patterns drawer.

Anim drawer.

AnimBrush drawer.

Fonts drawer.

Colours drawer.

Move drawer.

4.    When prompted, remove the Program Disk, and insert the Media Disk,
then click Proceed.

5.   When prompted, remove the Media Disk, and insert the Examples disk,
then click Proeeed.

6.  When prompted, remove the Examples Disk, and insert the Extras disk,
then click Proceed.

7.    Follow  the  onscreen  prompts.    When  Deluxe  Paint is finished
installing,  a  dialogue appears asking if you'd like to run the program
now.  Click Yes.  The registration screen appears.

8.   At the registration screen, enter your name, your company name, and
the  Deluxe  Paint registration number on the registration card included
in your Deluxe Paint package.

9.   When you're finished with registration, click Use.  Deluxe Paint is
now  installed  on  your  hard  drive,  and  the Screen Format requester
appears (see below).

INSTALLING ON FLOPPY DISKS

If  you  don't have a hard drive, we strongly recommend that you install
Deluxe  Paint onto working copies of the original disks.  This will help
protect  the  originals  from accidental damage, and you will be able to
make  new  copies  if  necessary.   Also, make sure you have one or more
blank initialised disks handy for saving your work.

FLOPPY USERS

Before installing on floppy disks, read the following notes:

You must have four (4) formatted Amiga disks prepared before you install
to floppies.

Floppy disk installation requires two disk drives.

When  prompted  to  insert a Workbench disk during a floppy install, you
must insert your Workbench disk in DF1; (not DF0:)

You  must  have  the rexxsupport.library and rexxsyslib.library files in
your sys:libs drawer.  The program will not function without them.

When  you  are  sure  you  have met the above requirements, proceed with
floppy installation;

1.  Insert Program Disk into drive DF0; The Program Disk icon appears on
your workbench.  Double click the disk icon to open the disk.

2.    Double click on the ReadMe icon.  The ReadMe file contains informa
tion  that didn't make into this manual before press time.  When you are
finished reading the ReadMe file, close it.

3.    Double  click  on  the Install icon.  Installation of Deluxe Paint
begins.  Follow the onscreen prompts to choose Floppy Install and insert
floppies as necessary to complete the installation.

Installation onto floppies can take up to half an hour, so be patient.

4.   When Deluxe Paint is finished installing, a dialogue appears asking
if  you'd  like  to  run  the progtam now.  Click Yes.  The registration
screen appears.

5.   At the registration screen, enter your name, your company name, and
the  Deluxe  Paint registration number on the registration card included
in your Deluxe Paint package.

6.   When you're finished with registration, click Use.  Deluxe Paint is
now  installed  on  your  floppy  disks, and the Screen Format requester
appears (see below).

STARTING DELUXE PAINT V

Double click the Deluxe Paint program icon to run the application.

When  you start Deluxe Paint, the program presents a requester (a window
that  requires  some  input  from  you)  inviting you to select a screen
format.   The screen format requester is updated from Deluxe Paint IV or
AGA, and contains new options.

You  can  choose  your  display  mode  from the list that appears in the
Choose  Display Mode window or type in your own mode in the Display Mode
text  gadget.    Text  Overscan and Standard Overscan dimensions are now
found in the Preferences directory of your system.

There  are  several  factors that determine which screen modes appear in
the Choose Display Mode window; The chipset you're using, the version of
your  operating  system, your Monitors setting, and Mode Names setting.
Adjusting  any  or  all  of  these  items may change the availability of
certain screen modes and dimensions.

Choose  Display  Mode;  Click  on  one of the available display modes to
select  that  mode.  The display modes that appear are dependent on what
is  in  your  Monitors  Drawer  at  boot  up.   Deluxe Paint reads which
monitors you have available for use and automatically makes their screen
modes available to the Screen Format requester.  Note; Your monitor must
be  capable  of  displaying  the modes you have in your Monitors drawer.
For example, a 1084 monitor won't display Multiscan modes.

Screen Size; Click the button to cycle through the available sizes.  The
Custom  option allows you to choose the size of the screen using the two
text boxes (width, height).

Page  Size;  Select Screen to make the page size the same as the current
screen  size  dimensions.    Select Keep Same to retain the current page
size  for  new documents.  If the current page size is too small for the
current screen dimensions, it is incrased, but won't affect the image.

Palette  Size;  This  slider  defaults  to  the  maximum colours for the
selected display mode, but can be set to a lower number if desired.

Retain Picture; Click this check box to retain the current picture (this
is on by default).

Backing  Store;  Cycle  between  None (default) or 24bit RGB for using a
backing store to enable 24 bit colour.

Click Use to use the current settings.

You'll  see  the Workbench screen for a moment, then the Painting Screen
appears.

The  Painting Screen is your canvas or paper.  It's where you'll create,
colour,  edit, and manipulate your art.  Animations you load also appear
here.

The Toolbox contains the brushes, shape tools, and tool-modifiers you'll
use  to create and edit your artwork.  You can select a tool by clicking
on it.

The  Palette contains the colours representing a portion of your current
colour spectrum (sometimes called a colour universe).  This is where you
select the colour you want to paint with.

Directly  above the palette is the Colour Indicator.  The two rectangles
dis  play  the  colours  you're  currently  using  to  paint.  The inner
rectangle  shows  the  foreground  colour  -  the  colour  your brush is
currently using.  The default foreground colour is grey.  You can choose
a  different foreground colour by clicking on any colour in the palette.
The outer rectangle shows the current background colour - the colour you
are  painting  on  or  over.   This colour is black by default.  You can
choose a different background colour by right clicking on it.

If  this  is  your  first time using Deluxe Paint, we recommend you work
through the next chapter, where you will learn how to use many of Deluxe
Paint's tools and techniques.

LOADING A PICTURE

Before  we  leave  this chapter, let's load a picture so you can see how
it's done.

Let's load the one called Venus.

Venus  is  on  the Deluxe Paint Examples disk.  If you don't have a hard
drive  (so  that the files from the Examples disk are not in the DPaintV
drawer  on  your hard drive) make sure your copy of the Examples Disk is
in one of your floppy drives.

Move  your  cursor to the top of the screen so that it is over the Title
Bar.

Whenever you move the cursor to the Title Bar, the cursor changes into a
pointer.

Press and hold down the right mouse button.

The  Menu  Bar  replaces  the  Title Bar and you see a row of menus.  In
addition,  you  see  one  of  the menus extending down into the painting
area.

As you move your pointer from left to right along the Menu Bar, one menu
after  another  extends down, each one displaying its options.  We'll be
look  ing at each menu item in detail later, but for now we just need to
use tbe first two options from the left most menu, the Picture menu.

Hold  down  the  right mouse button, and drag the pointer all the way to
the  left  on  the Menu Bar to display the options in the Picture menu.
Drag  the  pointer  down to Load, and release the button.  This displays
the Load Picture Requester.

Click  <VOL>  Examples;  in the requester to look at the contents of the
Examples Disk.

DPaintV;Picture  appears in the Drawer edit field, and the names of four
directories appears in the window.

Click the Picture Drawer in the requester.

If  necessary  you could scroll through these file names by dragging the
scroll  box up and down.  Or you could scroll through the names one at a
time by clicking the up and down arrows.

Click on the file named Venus.LoRes.

Notice that when you click on the file name the name appears in the edit
field beside File.  If you wanted, you could type the file name into the
edit field, though it is usually easier to click it.

Click OK, or Double-click the filename.

The  disk drive spins for a few moments, and then the picture appears on
the screen.

QUITTING DELUXE PAINT

To  exit  Deluxe  Paint, choose Quit from the Picture menu.  If you have
made  changes to the current image since it was last saved, Deluxe Paint
will  ask whether you want to save your current changes.  If you wish to
save  your  changes  before  quitting,   click   Save.      (You'll find
instructions  on  saving  docu-  ments  in  the  next chapter).  To exit
without saving changes to the image, click Don't Save.

TECHNICAL SUPPORT

If  you  have  questions about operating Deluxe Paint, and cant find the
answers  in  this manual, our Technical Support department can help.  If
your  question  is  not  urgent,  please  write  to  us at the following
address;

Electronic Arts Technical Support
PO Box 7578
San Mateo, CA 94403-7578

Please  be  sure  to  include  the  following   information   with   any
correspondence:

the  version of Deluxe Paint you are using (You'll find this information
in the About option of the Picture menu;

the Amiga model you are using (1200, 2000, 4000, etc);

your Kickstart and Workbench version numbers;

amount of random access memory (RAM) installed in your Amiga

additional  system  configuration  notes  (for  example,  number of disk
drives, type and make of monitor, printer, etc)

If you would like to speak to someone directly call us at [phone]
Monday through Friday between 8:30 am and 4:30 pm PST.  Again, please be
sure  to  have  information  about your version of Deluxe Paint and your
computer  handy  when  you call.  This information will help us help you
more quickly.

If  you  live  outside  of the United States, you can contact one of our
other offices.

In the United Kingdom,             In Australia and New Zealand
contact;                           contact;
Electronic Arts Limited            Electronic Arts Pty Ltd
P O Box 835                        PO Box 432
Slough SL3 8XU UK                  Southport, QLD 4215
Phone [phone]              Within Australia call;
                                   Phone; [phone]
                                   Within New Zealand call;
                                   Phone; [phone]
                                   between 9am-5pm Eastern
                                   Standard Time

WHATS NEXT?

The  next  chapter, Guided Tour (1), introduces you to many of the funda
mnental  features of Deluxe Paint V.  We've designed the exercises there
to  be  both  easy  and  informative.  If Deluxe Paint is the first high
quality  paint program you've used, we recommend that you go through all
the exercises, in order.  This will give you a solid foundation that you
can  build  on  when  you  move  on  to  other  parts  of   the program.
Experienced  graphic  artists  should  at  least page through the Guided
Tour.


CHAPTER 2 - GUIDED TOUR
-----------------------

The  next  two  chapters  take  you  on  a tour of Deluxe Paint Vs basic
features  They  serve as an introduction to the programs painting tools,
and  provide  several  advanced painting techniques using simple step by
step instructions.

If  you  are a relative newcomer to computer graphics, we recommend that
you  work  through  these chapters from beginning to end.  If you are an
experienced  computer  artist,  you might quickly review the material to
become  familiar  with  Deluxe Paint Vs unique paint features.  Once you
are  comfortable  with  the program, you can turn to chapter 4, Painting
Tutorials  to learn more about graphic techniques, or go off on your own
if you wish Use Chapter 8, Reference, to answer any questions that might
come up.

In this chapter you'll learn how to:

Start a new Deluxe Paint V picture

Select basic tools and paint with them

Create edit, and move objects

Modify the screen, selected shapes, and tools

Create a custom brush

Save your work

The  step  by  step  instructions in the Guided Tour assume that you are
using  Deluxe  Paint on a floppy system.  If you have installed all four
Deluxe  Paint  disks  on  your  hard drive, you wont have to insert your
copies of the various program disks when we request them.

PAINTING SCREEN

Start  Deluxe  Paint  V.  If you need a reminder of how to start the pro
gram, see Starting Deluxe Paint V in Chapter 1.

From  the Choose Screen Format requester, select a Lo-Res mode with a 32
Colour palette and click Use.

After you have selected your screen format, the Painting Screen appears.

The area to the left of the Toolbox is called the page or printing area.
The normal page size is the same as the screen size.

In  the  next chapter Guided Tour (2), you'll learn how you can make the
page larger than the screen, See Page Size.

TITLE BAR

The Title Bar lists the name of the program and the current brush mode.

It  also  reports  whether or not you are using certain program options.
For  example,  if  you  choose  to see the coordinates of the mouse, the
current  fill  type,  or angles of rotation, you can turn those features
on, and see that they are active in the Title Bar.  See User Feedback in
the Title Bar in Reference for more detailed information.

MENUS

The  menus  in Deluxe Paint work just like other Amiga menus.  To select
an  option from a menu, point to the Title Bar and press the right mouse
button to display the Menu Bar.

Drag  the  pointer to a menu name to open that menu.  Pull the highlight
down  to  one of the menu options and release the mouse button to select
that option.

PALETTE

You  select  the  colour  you  want to paint with from the palette.  The
maximum  number  of  colours in the palette depends on the screen format
you  are  using.    You'll  learn more about screen formats and how they
affect  the  number of colours available when you read the next chapter,
or  you  can skip ahead and look in Reference under Screen Format in the
Picture Menu.

THE COLOUR INDICATOR

The Colour Indicator looks like one rectangle sitting on top of another.
The  smaller  rectangle shows the foreground colour.  This is the colour
your  brush  paints  with.    You  can change this colour at any time by
clicking one of the other colours in the Palette.

Move the pointer to one of the colours in the Palette and click.

Notice  that  any  changes to the foreground colour are reflected in the
Colour  Indicator,  and  that the colour you selected is surrounded by a
grey border in the palette.

The larger rectangle, the page, and the first colour in the palette, are
all the same colour - black.  Black is Drluxe Paint's default background
colour.    If you were to paint with the background colour directly onto
the  background,  it  would  appear  to  have  no effect, as if you were
applying  black  paint  to  a  black page.  Painting with the background
colour is a way of erasing an image on the page.

You  can  change the background colour at any time by right clicking one
of the other colours in the palette.

Move the pointer to one of the colours in the Palette and right-click

Although  the  larger  rectangle  is  now composed of the new background
colour,  the painting area (page) is still the prior background colour.
This is because Deluxe Paint assumes that you want to maintain the prior
background  colour  as  a  "wash"  over  the  current background colour.
Deluxe Paint will keep the painting area.  Try it now.

Click  the  Toolbox  icon labelled CLR directly above the Palette.  This
clears  the screen of the old background colour and replaces it with the
new one.

UNDO

Before  going  any further, lets look at UNDO, one of the most important
tools  in  the  Toolbox.   Clicking UNDO will generally "undo" your last
paint ing action.

Click UNDO now to bring back the old background colour.

UNDO  reverses  your  last  action,  provided  there  has  not  been  an
intervening  mouse  click.  For example, if you were to click CLR twice,
UNDO would not reverse the clear command.

PAINTING WITH THE MOUSE

Now that you've seen how to choose colours from the Palette, let's use a
brush to create our first freeform drawing.

Select  foreground  and  background  colours  from  the palette.  Choose
contrasting  colours, such as blue for the foreground and light grey for
the background.

Click CLR to cover your page with the new background colour.

Move the pointer over to the page, where it turns into a cross-hair with
a dot (the brush) in the centre of it.

Hold  down the left mouse button, and draw a small circle on the screen.
Dont  worry  about  quality  for  the  moment.   Fill in the circle with
foreground colour.  Release the mouse button to stop painting.

Now  press  the  right  mouse  button  and draw all over your filled -in
circle.

The  right mouse button has the effect of erasing your drawing, although
what  you  are  really  doing  is  painting over it with the back ground
colour.  This is called erasing to the background.

REMINDER
Follow this simple rule: use the left mouse button for painting with the
foreground colour, and the right button for painting with the background
colour.    This  parallels the rule we noted above for selecting colours
from the Palette: select the foreground colour by clicking with the left
button and the background colour by clicking with the right button.

PICKING COLOURS OFF THE SCREEN

So  far  you've  been  selecting  your  colours  by clicking them in the
Palette.    Deluxe  Paint also lets you select colours directly from the
screen.    This  is useful if you are working on fine details, or if you
are  working with many shades of the same basic colour.  For example, if
you are painting a rose using eight different shades of red, it might be
easier  to pick the colour you need directly from the screen rather than
choosing it from the Palette.

Click  anywhere in the Colour indicator and move the pointer back to the
screen.    The  pointer  changes  to  an eye dropper cursor.  Point to a
colour on the screen and click either the left or the right mouse button
to select a new foreground or background colour respectively.

KEYBOARD EQUIVALENTS
An  even  easier  way  to  select  a  colour from the screen is to use a
keyboard  equivalent.    Keyboard  Equivalents  are  shortcuts for doing
something  you  would otherwise do with the mouse in this case, it might
be  tiresome to click the Colour indicator every time you wanted the eye
dropper  to  choose a colour from the picture.  The shortcut is to press
the  comma  (,) key to get the eye dropper, and then click a colour.  By
using  the  keyboard  equivalent, you never have to move the cursor from
your picture.

Practice  painting  with the mouse for a while and try selecting colours
from  the  screen.    Remember you can always click UNDO to reverse your
last  action,  or  CLR to clear the screen and start afresh.  As soon as
you're  ready  move  on  to the next section, where we will be examining
Deluxe Paint's collection of brushes and tools.

BUILT IN BRUSHES

So  far  you've  been  painting  with the single pixel brush that is the
default  brush  selected when you start the program.  Pixel is short for
picture  element.    A  pixel  is  the  smallest unit you can see on the
screen.

The Deluxe Paint Toolbox includes ten built in brushes; four round ones,
four square ones, and two made up of a number of separate pixels.

To  select  a  brush,  move the pointer over the desired brush shape and
click.

Clicking  a  brush  shape  highlights  it  to  indicate  that  it is the
currently  selected brush.  As you'll see this convention applies to all
the other tools in the Toolbox.

You  can  enlarge or reduce the size of the current brush without contin
ually returning to the Toolbox, Press the equals (=) key to increase the
size  of  the  brush.  Press the minus (-) key to reduce the size of the
brush.

Another way to size your built in brush is to click on it in the Toolbox
with  the  right mouse button.  This gives you a size icon (four outward
pointing arrows).  With the cursor on the page, hold down the left mouse
button and drag the mouse to size the brush.  When you release the mouse
button, your brush is the new size.

With  your new brush selected, paint as before, using the left button to
draw  with the brush colour and the right button to draw (or erase) with
the background colour.

In  the next section we will look at the other drawing tools and see how
they interact with the brushes.

THE PAINTING TOOLS

The  ten  icons  below  the  built  in  brushes (in two columns of five)
control  the  printing  tools.    Because any brush can operate with any
given  painting  tool,  you  have a wide variety of combinations at your
fingertips.

ITS A RULE!
To select a painting tool, click on it.

We'll describe the tools in order moving left to right and top to bottom:

The  Dotted  freehand  tool allows fast freehand drawing.  No matter how
fast you draw this tool keeps up with you, making it ideal for sketching
out  a  shape  quickly  before  concentrating  on the intricate details.
Note,  however,  that  the  faster  you  go, the bigger the gaps in your
drawing.    Once you have roughed out a shape, you can refine your image
using  some  of  the  other tools at your disposal.  Try drawing with it
using some of the other brushes to get a feeling for how it works.

The  Continuous  Freehand/Freehand Shape tool paints unbroken lines, but
it  doesn't  keep up with you if you draw fast.  It's better suited than
the Dotted Freehand tool for slower more precise drawing.

Try  the  Continuous  Freehand  tool  with different brushes and see how
brush  size  affects  speed.  The smaller the brush, the better it is at
keeping up with your painting strokes.

Notice  that  the  Continuous  Freehand  tool  icon  has a diagonal line
running  from  its top right to its bottom left corner.  This is because
it  is  actually  two  tools  in  one  - the top left one draws unbroken
freehand  lines,  while  the one at bottom right creates freehand shapes
filled with the current foreground or background colour

To create a filled shape:

Click the lower right part of the Continuous Freehand tool and paint any
shape.

When  you release the mouse button, the shape you painted is filled with
either  the  foreground  or  background  colour depending on which mouse
button you pressed when you painted the shape.  If you release the mouse
button  before you close the shape Deluxe Paint closes the shape for you
with  a  straight  line from your cursor position to where you began the
shape.

The  Straight  Line  tool lets you draw straight lines of any length and
angle just by dragging the mouse.

Select the Straight Line tool, and then move the cross hair to the point
on the page where you want the line to begin.

Now  hold  down  the  left mouse button to anchor the line at that point
and, drag the mouse to the point where you want the line to end.

When  you  release the button, you have a straight line in your selected
brush  colour and brush size.  You can also draw straight lines with the
background colour by using the right mouse button.

The  Curve  tool  draws a curved line between two points on the painting
area.  It works just like the Straight Line tool except that it requires
an additional mouse click to complete the shape.

Select the Curve tool and move the cursor to the painting area.

At the spot where you want to begin the curve, press the mouse button to
anchor the shape.  This is the first endpoint.

Drag  the  line to the point where you want the curve to end (the second
endpoint), and release the button.

Slowly move the ursor away from the endpoints.

You'll  notice  that the line is still "active" and forms an arc between
the  endpoints.    The line will curve to follow the cross hair wherever
you move it.

When  the  curve  is  the  shape  you  want,  click to freeze it at that
position.

With  a  little practice, you'll be able to make curves of any shape and
size,  giving  you  much more flexibility than any collection of plastic
templates with their limited selection of shapes and sizes.  Try joining
a  series  of  curves  to  make  flowing  shapes  with  changes in curve
direction.

The  Fill  tool  fills any enclosed shape with the current foreground or
background colour.

Select the Continuous Freehand Shape tool.

Draw  an  enclosed  shape,  a circle for example, with the largest round
built-in brush.

Select  the Fill tool, and move the cursor (which now looks like a paint
can) to the enclosed shape.  Click to fill the shape.

You  can  fill  with  the current foreground colour by clicking the left
button,  or  with  the  current  background colour by clicking the right
button.

The  fill tool fills all the way to the boundaries of an enclosed shape.
If  the  shape  is  not completely enclosed, the paint will leak out and
fill  the  entire  page.  If this ever happens, you can stop the filling
process by pressing the space bar.  This aborts the current fill command
and returns the screen to its pre-command state.

The  paint  can spout, the so called activation point, is the small (one
pixel)  gap  at  the base of the fill cursor.  You must put this part of
the  tool  inside  the  enclosed  shape  before you click to fill.  With
careful manoeuvring, you can fill a space as small as one pixel, so long
as the point coincides with that space.

Deluxe  Paint  has  a  full  featured  airbrush with adjustable tips and
nozzles.    By  using  the  Airbrush  in  combination with the different
brushes,  you  can  create a variety of effects, ranging from a fine one
pixel  spray  to a coarse spray made with the big brushes.  In addition,
you  can  choose  between  two  distinct  modes:  the  Old  Style  pixel
"splatter" airbrush used in previous incarnations of Deluxe Paint, and a
new  smooth Standard airbrush that more accurately emulates the painting
style  of  a real airbrush.  In the following chapter we will see how to
adjust  the  width  of the spray and other airbrush options, but for now
let's try it as is.

Select the Airbrush and try painting with it using the various brushes.

Try  it  with the three and five-pixel brushes, and then try it with the
big brushes.  Note that, just like a regular airbrush, if you press down
on  the  mouse  button  without moving the mouse, the paint continues to
build up in one spot.

If  you  want to try the Standard Airbrush, click the Airbrush tool icon
again.   Try painting with the Standard Airbrush - note how the paint is
applied  more  smoothly  and  the  paint gradually becomes opaque as you
spray an area.

The  Rectangle tool lets you draw squares or rectangles, either unfilled
or  filled  with  the  current  brush  or  background  colour.  Like the
Continuous Freehand tool, the Rectangle tool has a diagonal line running
from  its  top  right to its bottom left corner.  Let's try making a few
rectangles.

Click the top left half of the icon.  Move the pointer onto the painting
area, where it changes into a large crosshair.

Hold  down  the  left  mouse  button to anchor one of the corners of the
rectangle, and drag the mouse away from the anchor point.

You  can  drag  the mouse down and to the right (in which case the first
button  press  anchors the rectangle's top left corner), or in any other
direction  you wish.  In any case, the rectangle is completed as soon as
you  release  the  button.  Note that it is unfilled and bordered by the
current  foreground  colour.   You can also create an unfilled rectangle
bordered by the background colour by using the right mouse button.

To  create  a  filled  rectangle,  click  the  lower  right  part of the
Rectangle icon and repeat the procedure above.

This  time,  the  rectangles  you  create will be filled with either the
foreground  or  the  background colour, depending on whether you pressed
the left or right mouse button.

Making Squares
If  you hold down the Shift key as you draw with the Rectangle tool, you
can constrain the rectangle so that its height and width are equal.

Because  the  Amiga's  pixels  are  not  perfectly square, "constrained"
rectangles will not appear square on the screen.  You can compensate for
this  at  the  painting  stage, or by selecting Be Square from the Prefs
menu.

The Circle tool works like the Rectangle tool.  Select the top left part
of  the  icon to get an unfilled shape; select the bottom right to get a
filled  shape.    Whether  your  circle  is  drawn  in the foreground or
background colour depends on which mouse button you press down while you
draw.

Circles  are  painted  from  the  centre  outward, so it's easy to put a
circle around anything just by starting to paint from where you want the
centre of the circle.

The  Ellipse tool works just like the Circle tool, except that the shape
is still "active" after you release the mouse button.

Select  the  Ellipse  tool.  Remember, top left for unfilled, and bottom
right for filled shapes!

Move  the  pointer to the painting area, and draw an ellipse by dragging
the mouse.  Release the button.

Slowly  move  the  mouse.  Even though you have released the button, the
ellipse continues to change shape as you move the mouse.

When  your  ellipse is the shape and size you want, press down the mouse
button and hold it there.

Now you can rotate your ellipse until it has just the right tilt.

Drag  your  cursor around the ellipse and watch your shape rotate.  When
it  is  in  just the right position, release the mouse button.  The menu
bar displays the angle of rotation.

When  you  complete  your ellipse, the small cross hair changes into the
large cross hair to let you know that Deluxe Paint is ready for the next
ellipse.

The  Polygon  tool  lets  you keep drawing straight lines until you have
created  a  closed figure.  Like the Rectangle, Circle, and Ellipse, the
Polygon  tool  can create both filled and unfilled shapes.  Heres how it
works.

Select the Polygon tool.

Move  the  cross hair into the paining area and click once to anchor the
starting point of your polygon.

Drag  out a line, and click a second time to complete the first line, as
if you were using the Straight Line tool.

You'll  notice that your cross hair is still connected to the first line
by a second straight line.

Click  again  to finish that line, and so on until you have created your
shape.

To complete the polygon:

Move the cross hair to your starting point, and click.

If you are creating a filled polygon, it will be filled with the current
foreground  colour.    If  you right click on the starting point, you'll
fill with the current background colour.

TIP
Because it can sometimes be a little tricky to end up on the exact pixel
you  started  with,  you  can  complete  a filled polygon at any time by
pressing  the  space  bar.  This automaically connects the last anchored
point  to  the  point of origin and fills it with the current foreground
colour.

Use the filled Polygon tool to draw several five pointed stars.

ANYTHING CAN BE A BRUSH

The  Brush Selector is a special tool that is an essenial part of Deluxe
Paint's  versatility.  With the Brush Selector anything can be a brush -
any piece of artwork or text you put on the screen.

Select  the  Brush  Selector,  and  move the cursor over to the painting
area.

Your  cursor  is now a large cross hair that reaches to the edges of the
screen Let's make one of the filled stars you drew with the Polygon tool
into a brush.

Put  the  centre  of the cross hair to the upper left of the star.  Drag
the  cursor  to  the  lower  right of the star, as if you were using the
Rectangle  tool to enclose the star in a box.  Release the mouse button.

When  you  release  the  mouse button, the cursor has a copy of the star
attached to it.  This star is your new brush!

To  stamp  a  star  in a new location, simply click.  There's no need to
stop with one - go ahead and star spangle the screen.

If  any  parts  of  your brush consist of the current background colour,
those parts will be transparent.  In other words, whenever you pick up a
brush, its as if you are picking up only the non background colours; any
background  colours  in  the  brush will remain invisible even after you
change  to  a  new  background  colour.   This means that you can create
brushes  with  intricate outlines without fear of picking up a rectangle
of the surrounding background colour.

Let's try one more trick.

Click the Brush Selector again and select a star from the painting area.
But this time use the right mouse button to drag the cross hair over the
star.

Unlike  the  last  exercise,  which  yielded  two  stars  - one unmoving
original,  plus the one on your brush - this time you are picking up and
moving  just  the  one  star.  While the first feature lets you copy and
move  anything  on  the screen, the second lets you move images from one
part of the screen to another, while leaving no trace behind.

Deluxe Paint's text editor lets you place text anywhere on the page, and
the Brush Selector lets you pick it up and reposition it if you dont get
it quite right the first time.

To enter text on the page:

Select the Text tool.

Move the cursor to the page. The pointer turns into the text cursor.

Click where you want to begin a line of text.

Type on the keyboard.

The  text  will  automatically  "wrap"  around  to the next line when it
reaches the end of the line.

You  can  delete  text by pressing the backspace key as long as you HAVE
NOT  clicked  elsewhere  on  the  screen.  When you click elsewhere (the
Toolbox for example), text becomes a bit mapped image, and can no longer
be edited as text.

CHANGING COLOURS

You  can change the colour of your text as often as you like by choosing
a different foreground colour from the Palette.

Select a new foreground colour and type some more.

To leave the text mode, click on another tool, or press ESC.

You'll  learn  how  to use the Choose Font Requester to select different
fonts, type sizes, and type styles in the next chapter, Guided Tour (2).
See the section Modifying Tools.

The  Grid  lets  you  apply  paint  on  the  page  in accordance with an
invisible grid and restricts your painting tools to the grid points.

If you need some room to work, click CLR.

Select  the Grid, and then click the Dotted Freehand tool.  Now paint on
the screen.

With  Grid  and the Dotted Freehand tool selected, you can print only on
the  points  of the grid, making it easy to fill the screen with a polka
dot pattern (we'll see other methods for pattern design later).

You'll  learn  how  to adjust the spacing between the grid points in the
next chapter, Guided Tour (2).  See the section Modifying Tools.

The  Symmetry  tool  lets you print symetrically over the entire page at
the same time.

Click  the  Symetry  tool,  [If  the  Grid is selected from the previous
exercise,  turn  it  off] Use the Dotted Freehand tool to paint whatever
you like.

Your  brush now consists of a number of mirror images of itself.  As you
move  the brush around, all the mirror images move as well, producing an
effect much like that of a kaleidoscope.  When you paint, you are laying
down a number of identical mirror images about a fixed origin.  With all
tools  except  the Dotted and Continuous Freehand tools and the Airbrush
tool,  the  mirror  images are drawn after you release the mouse button.
With the Dotted and Continuous Freehand tools and the Airbrush tool, all
the images are drawn at the same time.

You'll learn how to customise the Symmetry settings in the next chapter,
Guided Tour(2).  See the section Modifying Toolws.

You  can  magnify  any  section  of  your work and view it alongside the
standard-sized image.  To magnify a section of your work:

Click  the  Magnify  icon.    When you move the cursor onto the page, it
becomes a rectangular outline.

Move the outline to the part of the image you want to magnify and click.

The part of the image included in the rectangle now appears magnified on
the  right  part  of  the  screen.   You can use any tool to perform any
function on either side of the screen.  You can scroll around your image
using  the  four  arrow  keys;  this  moves  the  image around under the
"magnifying glass." In addition, by pointing your cursor anywhere on the
unmagnified  portion  of the screen and pressing n, you can magnify that
part of the picture.

Once  you  have  magnified  a  part of your picture, you can increase or
decrease the amount of magnification by clicking the Zoom tool.

Click the Zoom icon to increase the magnification.  Right click the icon
to reduce the magnification.

Deluxe  Paint's  Magnify and Zoom tools let you carry out precision work
on  your  pictures by magnifying each pixel up to 400 times its original
size.

To quit magnify mode, click the Magnify icon a second time.

TOOLBOX SUMMARY

This  completes  our  brief  review of Deluxe Paint's versatile range of
tools.  You'll find additional and more detailed information about every
tool scattered throughout the manual, and gathered in Reference.

Before  we  continue  our  tour  of  Deluxe  Paint V in the next chapter
[Guided Tour (2)], take a moment to learn how to save your artwork.

SAVING YOUR WORK

It's  important  to  learn  how  to  save  the pictures (or "files") you
create.    We'll  begin  by  saving  whatever  you drew in the preceding
sections.

Move the pointer up to the far left side of the Title Bar.

Press  and  hold down the right mouse button.  This exposes the Menu Bar
and extends the Picture menu.

Select Save.

The Save Picture requester appears.

Notice  that this requester is like the Load Picture requester in almost
every  respect.  You'll use the Save Picture requester to provide Deluxe
Paint  with  the  information  it needs to save your files in its proper
classification.   The Drawer edit box tells Deluxe Paint which drawer to
save  the  file in.  By using drawers to classify your pictures, you can
keep  related  images  together, in the same way you keep related papers
together  in  one  file  folder.    For  example  the  setting  might be
DF1:lo-res,  which means that the drawer exists on a disk in your second
disk drive ("DF1") and that the drawer is named "lo-res".

The  File edit box is where you enter the name of your picture the first
time you save it.

If you want to save your current creation, this is your chance to do so.

Insert a blank, formatted disk in any drive, for example, DF1.

Click  the Volume button.  The name of the drive that contains the blank
disk should appear in the window (<DEV> DF1;)

Click  on  the  disk name in the window.  In our example DF1; appears in
the Drawer edit box.

Click  anywhere  in  the  File  edit box and type in a name for your new
file.

Click Ok.

The  disk drive will spin for a few moments; when the red light goes out
the file is saved.

The  next  time  you  save  this  file  (its a good idea to save work in
progress  every  15  minutes  or  so,  so  that  power  failure or other
breakdown  doesnt  turn  hours  of  work into a bitter memory), the Save
Requester  uses this same information, which means you wont need to type
anything  more  unless you want to change the file name.  You might want
to  do  this  to  save  it  under another name, if you want to save each
version as a separate file.  In that case, you would click the File edit
box as before, backspace over the old file name (or over those parts you
wish to change) and type in the new name.  Or you could just keep adding
suffixes, such as 1, 2, 3, etc,, to signify succeeding versions.

You  can  specify drawer names in the same way: click in the Drawet edit
box, backspace over the old name, and type in the new name, You can open
any  drawer already on the disk, but you cannot create one from the Save
Requester.    See  your Amiga User Guide for information on creating new
drawers.

For more information on all the options available from the Load and Save
requesters, see Reference.

Right  now  you might want to take a break.  When youre ready move on to
the next chapter Guided Tour (2), where you'll learn how to modify tools
and work with many other powerful features of Deluxe Paint.


CHAPTER 3 - GUIDED TOUR (2)
---------------------------

This  chapter  continues  the tour of Deluxe Paint's painting tools.  It
concentrates on the programs sophisticated editing tools, describes tool
modifiers,  previews  the  Anim  menu,  and  introduces several painting
techniques using simple step by step instructions.

If  you are a relative newcomer to computer graphics, we again recommend
that  you  work through this chapter from beginning to end.  If you have
some experience with computer graphics software, you can probably become
familiar  with this material quickly.  You can use this chapter to learn
how  Deluxe  Paint  handles  features  you  have  encountered  in  other
programs.    Feel  free to skip around and read only those sections that
interest you at the time.

When  you  are comfortable with the program, turn to Chapter 4, Painting
Tutorials  to  learn  how  the  program  creates  and handles colour, or
Chapter  5,  Working with Perspective to learn more about Deluxe Paint's
graphic  power.   If you go off on your own, use Chapter 8, Reference to
answer any questions that might come up.

In this part of the Guided Tour you'll learn how to:

Create and edit custom brushes

Manipulate the variaty of program screen formats

Modify tool functionality and operation

Mix and cycle colours from the Palette

Use keyboard equivalents with the mouse button down

Use the various painting modes

Control AnimBrushes and Animpainting

WHAT YOU'LL NEED TO CONTINUE THE TOUR

To  complete  the  examples  in  this  section, you'll need your working
copies of the Deluxe Paint Program and Media disks.  If you want to save
your  work,  you'll  need  an  initialised  disk  with  a fair amount of
available space for saving large files.

The  step  by  step  instructions  in the tour assume that you are using
DeluxePaint  on  a  floppy system.  If you have installed all the Deluxe
Paint  Disks on your hard drive, you won't have to insert your copies of
the Deluxe Paint disks when we request them.

Start  Deluxe  Paint and use the default screen format settings.  If you
already  have the program running, we recommend that you restart so that
the tools and option settings are all set to their defaults.

CUSTOM BRUSHES

As  we  saw in Guided Tour (1), Deluxe Paint's "anything can be a brush"
feature  lets  you  select  any  image  on the screen and define it as a
brush.    If  you  wish, you can keep a selection of brush images on the
spare  page  (use  Spare  in the Picture menu) and move them over to the
main  page  by  picking  them  up as brushes.  Or you can have two spare
custom brushes in RAM (use the Spare and Copy/Paste options in the Btush
menu).    In addition, you can load and save brushes as though they were
pictures.

CREATING A RECTANGULAR BRUSH

Here's a reminder of how to create a brush out of an on screen image:

Select the Brush Selector

Move  the cursor to the painting area.  The cursor becomes a large cross
hair.

Drag  the  cross  hair  to form a rectangle around the image you want to
pick  up.  When you release the mouse button, an exact copy of the image
is attached to your cursor.

REMEMBER!
When  you drag the Brush Selector with the left button held down, Deluxe
Paint makes a duplicate of the image and attaches it to the cursor while
leaving  the  original image in place on the page.  If you use the right
mouse  button to surround the image, the image itself becomes the brush,
as  if  the  original  image  had  been  lifted  up  off the page.  This
technique  provides  an  ideal  method for picking up objects and moving
them around the page as you experiment with different compositions.  See
also Fixing the Background in Painting Tutorials.

Paint with your new brush or use it to create filled or unfilled shapes,
just as you would with any of the built-in brushes.

CREATING A BRUSH WITH AN IRREGULAR SHAPE

Though  it's often convenient, you arent limited to creating rectangular
brushes.    Deluxe  Paint  lets you corral any image, so you can pick up
shapes  from  a  "crowded" background, and make a brush in any shape you
wish.  Here's how to corral an image:

If  the  Brush Selector icon is highlighted, click the tool icon.  If it
is not selected, double-click it.

The  Brush  Selector  icon  changes  to a polygon shape to show that the
polygon/ corral brush selector is active.

Click  around the shape you wish to define, just as if you were making a
polygon  with  the Polygon tool.  Or click and drag to draw in free hand
mode as you would with the Freehand drawing tool.

As  soon as you complete the polygon, the complex shape becomes your new
brush.

Another  useful  method is the "magic wand" Brush Selector mode.  To use
the magic wand:

Triple  click  the Brush Selector to select it.  The Brush Selector icon
now looks like a magic wand.

Clicking  the left mouse button picks up the entire area contiguous with
the  seelected  pixel  (ie.  the contiguous shape connected to the pixel
without  being  broken  by the background colour).  For instance, if you
click  in  the middle of a filled circle, the entire circle is picked up
as a brush.

The  left  button-right  button  convention works with both of the above
methods,  too.  Corralling the shape with the left button duplicates the
shape,  while  corralling  with the right button lifts the shape off the
background.   As with the Polygon tool, pressing the space bar completes
the  polygon  for you, so you dont have to search for the starting pixel
in order to complete it.

THE TRANSPARENT COLOUR

When  you  pick  up  a  custom  brush,  some  parts of your brush may be
transparent.      There  are  two  rules for determining which colour is
transparent:

If  AutoTransp in the Prefs menu is turned off (the default setting), or
if  any  one  corner of the brush is a different colour from the others,
the current background colour is transparent.

If  AutoTransp  is  turned on and every corner of your brush is the same
colour, that colour is transparent.

Lets  see  how  these  two rules work in practice with a couple of brief
examples.

To  set  up  for our example, click black in your palette with the right
mouse  button  to  make it the background colour, and click CLR to clear
your screen.

Use  the  Dotted  Freehand tool to scrawl randomly over the screen using
several different colours.

THE BACKGROUND COLOUR IS TRANSPARENT

Now  you  should  have  a  black screen, because by default black is the
background colour with several colours scrawled over it.

Click  the  Brush Selector icon, and move the cross hair to the painting
area.

Select a rectangular area that contains some black.

When  you  release  the  mouse button, the black areas of your brush are
transparent  because  black  was the background colour when you selected
the  brush.    Move the brush around to confirm this: the painting shows
through  the areas where there used to be black.  Any parts of the brush
that  consisted  of  background  colour when the brush was first created
remain  transparent,  even  after you change background colours.  But if
you  want  to  change the tansparent colour you can do that, too.  We'll
show you how in a moment.

When  the  Solid  Body  option  from  the  Brush  menu is turned on, the
translucent  pixels  of  a  custom brush that are surrounded by a colour
change  to  the  solid  colour.    The outside area of the brush remains
transparent.

THE CORNER COLOUR IS TRANSPARENT

Now  let's see what happens when you select an area with all corners the
same colour.

Move  the pointer to the far right of the Title Bar, and press the right
mouse button.

The  Menu  Bar appears.  Drag the mouse left, and the Prefs menu extends
down.

Choose the AutoTransp option.  Display the menu a second time to confirm
that  AutoTransp  now has an check mark beside it.  This means that it's
turned on.

Double  click  the  Brush  Selector icon to activate the polygonal brush
selector.

Select  an  area  of  any shape.  Make sure that you always click on the
same  colour,  but  not on black (since this is the background color and
wont illustrate what we want to see).

This  creates  a brush in which the colour you clicked on is transparent
because  AutoTransp  is turned on, and all corners of your brush are the
same colour.

We used the polygonal Brush Selector for our example, but the AutoTransp
option  is  especially  useful  for  picking  up  a shape from any solid
background without having to change the current background colour.

CHANGING THE TRANSPARENT COLOUR

You  can  change which colour in your brush is transparent by choosing a
new  background  colour and then choosing Brush>Change Transparency from
the Colour menu.  Let's try a quick example.

Click  the  Brush  Selector  and select a rectangular area that contains
some  of  the  current  background  colour  so  that your brush has some
transparent areas.

Choose  a  new  background colour by clicking on a colour in the Palette
with the right mouse button.

Notice  that  simply  changing  the  current  background colour does not
change  the  transparent  areas of your brush.  You accomplish that with
the next command.

Choose Brush>Change Transparency from the Colour menu.

The  transparent  areas  of  your  brush  change  from  the areas of the
original  background  colour  to  the  areas  of  the current background
colour.  You can do this as many times as you like to change transparent
areas.

A BRUSH IS A LITTLE PICTURE

From  the Brush menu you can treat brushes just like full pictures.  You
can  Load and Save them just as you can other pictures.  When you load a
saved brush, it comes equipped with its own palette and ranges, the ones
that  were  in  effect  when  the brush was first saved.  If the current
picture  is  using  a  palette  different  from that of the newly loaded
brush,  you  can  change  the  current  palette to the brushs palette by
selecting  Palette>Use Brush Palette from the Colour menu.  On the other
hand,  if  you  want  to  use  the  newly  loaded brush with the current
palette,  select  Brush>Remap  from  the  Colour  menu.   The "Load With
Palette" check box gadget in the Options panel allows for automatic "Use
Brush Palette" loading.

Other options in the Brush and Colour menus let you resize, reshape, and
recolour brushes in various ways.

Your  Deluxe Paint Media disk contains a number of saved brushes.  Let's
load one now just to see how it works:

Insert  the Media disk into any drive, Select Load from the Brush menu.
Click <VOL> Media: in the Load Brush requester.

Click <DIR> Brush. The Drawer edit box reads Media:Brush.

Double click Bobsled and the file will load automatically.

The  Bobsled  brush  is attached to your cursor but it's colours are not
correct.

Choose  Palette>Use  Brush  Palette  from  the  Colour menu.  Select the
Continuous Freehand tool and paint with the brush.

Do  you  see  why this brush is called Bobsled?  Feel free to experiment
with  some  of  the  saved  brushes.    Select Palette>Use Brush Palette
whenever  you  load  a  brush to ensure that you are seeing it as it was
when it was saved.

If you would like to see colour cycling in action, load the brush called
Fireworks.

Select MultiCycle from the Prefs menu.

Select Cycle from the Mode menu.

Select  Palette>Use  Brush Palette and then press the Tab key before you
start drawing with it.

"Fireworks"  comes  complete  with  colour cycling information, and is a
spectacular  example  of  the  power of this feature.  See Tutotial Two:
Working  With  Ranges  in  the  next  chapter for more demonstrations of
colour cycling.

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

The following are some additional features relating to custom brushes.

HANDLE
This  feature,  which  is  available  from the Brush menu, allows you to
specify  where the cursor will sit in your custom brush.  In the default
setting  the  cursor  sits  at the centre of the custom brush.  When you
select  Handle>Rotate,  the  brush  handle moves to the lower right hand
corner  of the brush.  Each successive choice of the Rotate option moves
the handle to a different corner, and then back to the center.

Once  you  have  selected  the  handle attached to the corner, the brush
handle  attaches  itself  to the ending corner when you enclose a brush.
For example, if you pick up your brush by dragging downward from left to
right,  the  brush  handle  will  attach  itself to the lower right hand
corner,  whereas  if you pick up the brush by dragging upward from right
to left, the handle will attach itself to the top left hand corner.

The  Handle  feature  is  especially  important in the perspective mode,
because  you  can rotate a brush about its handle, whether the handle is
at the centre or on one of the corners.

PERSPECTIVE

Deluxe  Paint's Perspective feature (in the Effect menu) lets you rotate
a brush about any of the three axes of three dimensional space to define
a  plane  of  operation,  and  then  work  within  that  plane to create
perspective  effects.    Perspective is a big subject to cover, so we've
dedicated  an entire chapter to cover it.  Working with Perspective.  If
you  are  interested  in 3D painting or in 3D animation, be sure to work
through Chapters 6 and 7.

FAST FB

Fast  FB  stands  for  Fast  Feedback, and with Fast FB selected (it the
Prefs  menu), lines, filled shapes, and unfilled shapes are drawn with a
single  pixel  line  instead  of  the full custom brush until you finish
drawing,  at which point your shape is repainted with the custom brush.
This  makes for faster drawing.  Try painting an unfilled rectangle with
a custom brush both ways to see how Fast FB works.

DELUXE PAINT V SCREEN

Some  of Deluxe Paint's features affect the entire screen, while others,
such  as the tools and the brushes, affect the screen selectively.  This
section considers those features that have a screen wide effect.

HIDING THE TOOLBOX AND TITLE BAR

Deluxe Paint lets you paint on the entire screen, even under the Toolbox
and the Title Bar

To  remove  these  two  items  from the screen, press the F10 key.  This
removes  them both if they are both present.  Press F10 a second time to
bring them back.

To hide just the Title bar (or to bring it back, if its hidden) press F9.

Note that you can still access the Menu Bar even when its invisible.

Move  the cursor to the top of the screen (except upper left corner) and
press  the  right  mouse  button  to  display the Menu Bar.  You can now
select any menu item in the regular fashion.

You  can access the tools as well, even with the Toolbox hidden, through
the  keyboard  equivalents.    See  Appendix  B  for  a complete list of
keyboard commands.

PAGES

Deluxe Paint gives you two separate pages with which to work.  You could
use  one  of  the pages for creating background images and the other for
creating  foreground images.  You could then move parts from one page to
the  other  to  complete  your  composition.   When you are working on a
picture  the  spare  page  is always the page you are currently viewing.
When  you are working on an animation, the spare page is identified with
the  word  Scratch  in  the  menu  bar; this page can be larger than the
screen.  This makes it possible to create scrolling backgrounds and such
with  the  new  Camera Move requester.  As we shall see in a moment, the
spare  page  is  not entirely independent of the other page or animation
frames.

SWITHCHING PAGES

When you first open a new file or load a picture from disk, Deluxe Paint
opens one of the two pages.

Load  any image from the Picture Drawer on your copy of the Deluxe Paint
Examples disk.

To  move  from one page to the other, choose Spare>Swap from the Picture
menu, or press j on the keyboard to "jump" to the other page.

In  addition,  because  the  Toolbox is not really part of the page (but
actually  sits  "above"  it), whatever tools you had selected before you
switched  will  still  be selected after you switch pages.  This way you
can  retain  the  same tool settings, giving you continuity as you work.
Note  that this continuity rule does not apply to the Fix Background and
Stencil  commands,  which  do not carry over from one page to the other.
See  the following section for information on fixing the background, and
Tutorial  Three: The World of Stencils in the next chapter for exercises
involving the Fix Background and Stencil features.

PAGE SIZE

Deluxe Paint lets you work on page sizes ranging from 320 pixels wide by
200  pixels  high  and  up.   The page size limit depends on your screen
format,  memory  size, and the number of colours in your palette.  Note,
however,  that  your  page  size  can  never be smaller than the current
screen  resolution  For  example,  if you are using HiRes 640x400 screen
format,  your  page  cannot be smaller than 640x400.  In addition to the
three  pre  set  page  sizes (Screen: Full Page: Overscan), Deluxe Paint
lets  you  specify  any  height  and  width  through  the  Set Page Size
requester  (by  selecting  Custom  and  enter ing width and height pixel
settings).  To display this requester, choose Page Size from the Picture
menu.

If  you  are  working  on  a  page  size larger than the screen, you can
preview  the  entire page at any time by selecting the Show Page command
from the Picture menu.  Your current work area will appear surrounded by
a  rectangle.    You  can move this rectangle to work on another area by
holding  down  the  left  mouse  button.    Dragging  the rectangle, and
releasing  the mouse button when the area you want to paint is enclosed.
You  can  return  to  your  current page without moving the rectangle by
pressing the space bar.

SCROLLING THE PAGE

If  you  are  working  on a page that is larger than the screen, you can
also scroll the page with the arrow keys on the keyboard.  Think of them
as  moving  the  screen rather than the picture: pressing the down arrow
moves  the  screen  down,  so  it  looks like the page is moving up.  To
scroll  the  page  in  screen size increments, hold down the Alt key and
press the arrow keys.

A more efficient way to scroll the page is to place your cursor over the
area  you want to move and press the n key.  If the page can scroll that
far,  the  area under your cursor will be centred in the screen.  If the
page  isn't  big  enough  to  centre  the  area,  it will move as far as
possible.

SCREEN RESOLUTIONS

Deluxe Paint supports many different screen resolutions.  You can switch
from one to another even during a single work session, but be aware that
changing formats in he middle of a job can result in loss of information
(such  as  your  current brush, the spare page, the last requester used,
etc).  Its important to save your work before changing screen formats.

You  should develop the habit of saving your work every 15 or 20 minutes
in  any  case,  but  it becomes especially important to do so if you are
about to change formats.

As  we  noted  in Guided Tour (1) you're asked to select a screen format
each  time  you  start  Deluxe  Paint,  through the Choose Screen Format
requester.    In  addition,  you  can  display  the Choose Screen Format
requester  at any time by selecting Screen Format from the Picture menu.
Each screen format has its own linitations and memory requirements.

Please  note  that  to  switch on the 24-bit backing store and work with
true colour, you need 4MB of free RAM.

PALETTE

This section introduces you to the basics of the Palette.  You can learn
about the colour requesters by working through the tutorials in the next
chapter  or  by reading the relevant parts of the Reference section (see
Palette in the Colour menu).

COLOUR MIXER

The  Colour  Mixer  lets you mix your own custom set of colours from the
total  number  of  available  colours  (4096  on  non-AGA machines, 16.7
million  on  AGA Amigas, or 16.7 million on any Aniga with backing store
turned on).  You can mix colours using either the RGB (Red, Green, Blue)
or  HSV  (Hue, Saturation, Value) colour systems.  The number of colours
you  can work with at any one time is dependent on the screen format and
number  of colours you selected in the Screen Format requester.  See the
Display  Information  box  in  the  Screen  Format  requester  for  more
information on your currently selected screen mode.

To  Display  the  Colour  Mixer  choose Palette>Mixer On from the Colour
menu, or right click the Colour Indicator.

You can quickly modify the currently selected colour on any of the three
variables  (RGB  or  HSV)  by  dragging  the appropriate sliders left or
right.

To  select  more  than  one  contiguous colour click to select the first
colour,  and  then Alt click on the last color.  All the colours between
the two colors are selected.

To  select more than one discontiguous colour, click to select the first
colour,  and  then Shift-click on any other colours you wish to select.
Only  the  colours  you  click  are selected; the colours in between the
selected colours arent selected.

ARRANGING COLOURS IN THE PALETTE

EX  (for  "Exchange") and COPY let you swap or copy colour from one part
of the Palette to another.

To  exchange  the  position of two colours; Click a colour, click EX and
then  click  a  second  colour.   The two colours exchange places on the
Palette.

To  copy  a  colour  over another; Click a colour click Copy and click a
second colour.  This copies the first colour into the second

These two functions make it easier to create the colour spreads for your
work.

CREATING SPREADS

The  Palette Requester lets you create colour spreads to give you subtle
shades of the same hue or equally spaced gradations across hues.

To  create  a spread of colours, click the first colour for your spread,
click SPREAD, and then click the last colour for the spread.

Deluxe  Paint  looks  at the first and last colours in the spread and at
the  number  of  steps  in  between,  and  then calculates the series of
intervening  shades  For  example, if your first colour is blue and your
last  colour  is  yellow, Deluxe Paint calculates the intervening shades
and  hues,  to  give  you a series of blues, blue-greens, greens, yellow
greens,  and  yellows.    Unlike  traditional  colour  mixing,   if your
modifications  are  not to your satisfaction, you can always reverse the
last change by clicking UNDO, or you can cancel all the changes you made
by clicking Revert.

DEFINING RANGES

Good  colour ranges are important for effective Colour Cycling, Gradient
Fill,  and  some  Painting  Modes.  Colour Cycling and Gradient Fill are
treated  in  the  Tutorial Two: Working with Ranges in Chapter Four, and
you'll  find  information about Painting Modes later in this chapter and
in  the  Reference  Right  now, we'll take just a quick look at where to
define ranges.

You can define up to eight colour ranges of up to 256 individual colours
each (in AGA modes) and assign a cycling speed (RATE) to each range.

Choose  Ranges...    from the Colour menu.  The Range requester replaces
the Palette at the bottom of the screen.

The  Range  requester lets you put colours from your palette along a bar
to  define a range.  This flexible way of defining ranges lets you place
the  colours  in  different  orders from how they appear in the palette.
Also,  it  is  now easier to use the same colour in more than one range.
You'll learn how to use this requester in the next chapter.

PALETTE AND SCREEN FORMATS

Deluxe  Paint works from a colour universe that contains as many colours
as  your  Amiga  supports (4096 on non-AGA machines, 16.7 million on AGA
Amigas, or 16.7 million on any Amiga with backing store turned on).  The
maximum number of colours available in each format is listed below.  The
number  of  colours  you  can have at any time depends on your available
memory  and  compurer  model:  if your page is large or you have a large
brush, you may not be able to choose the maximum number of colours.

Lo-Res
256 (AGA) or 32 (non-AGA) colours in standard LoRes (64 if your computer
supports Extra Halfbrite: 4096 in the special HAM mode)

Med-Res
256 (AGA) or 16 (non-AGA) colours

Interlace
256 (AGA) or 32 (non-AGA) colours in standard LoRes (64 if your computer
supports Extra Halfbrite: 4096 in the special HAM mode)

Hi-Res
256 (AGA) or 16 (non-AGA) colours

HAM
262000+ (AGA) or 4096 (non AGA) colours

24-bit Backing
16.7 million colours available

See the Reference for general information on the various Screen formats.
Appendix  D:  Amiga  Display  Modes gives a technical explanation of the
relationship between screen formats and the number of colours available.
See  also  Appendix  A: Memory Management for more information on memory
usage.

MODIFYING TOOLS

You've  already  learned  that you can activate any tool by clicking its
icon  in  the  Toolbox.   A tool remains active until you select another
tool  or in some cases, deselect it by clicking the icon a second time.
Examples  of  the  latter kind of tool are the Grid and the Symmetry and
Magnify tools, which are toggled on and off by each mouse click.

In  most  cases,  right  clicking  a  tool  icon  lets  you  modify some
fundamental  aspect  of that tool.  The following summarises the effects
of right-button mouse clicks on the tools in the Toolbox:

BUILT IN BRUSHES

You can change the size of any of the built in brushes in the Toolbox.

Right-click the brush.

Move  the  cursor  over to the painting area.  The cursor changes to the
size icon (four outward-pointing arrows)

Hold  down either mouse button and drag diagonally to adjust the size of
the brush.

AIRBRUSH

You  can adjust a number of Airbrush settings with the Airbrush Settings
requester.

Right click the Airbrush icon. The Airbrush Settings requester appears.

The available options are:

Airbrush Type
Choose between Old Style or Standard.  Old Style is the airbrush used in
previous  incarnations  of Deluxe Paint: pixels of the foreground colour
are  randomly  sprayed  within  the radius setting of the airbrush.  For
Standard  the  program paints similar shades of the foreground colour to
create  a  seamless,  blending effect.  In Standard mode the colours you
paint with are affected (tinted) by the colour you paint on.

Radius
Use the slider or text box to set the airbrush radius from 1-100 pixels.
The larger the number, the larger the sprayed area.

Flow
Changes  the  opacity  of  paint sprayed when Standard mode is selected.
Use  the slider or text gadget to set a value from 1-100, with 100 being
maximum opacity.

Size
This button lets you resize the nozzle.

Click  the  button and then move the cursor over to the painting area.
The cursor changes to the size icon.

Hold  down either mouse button and drag diagonally to adjust the size of
the solid circle, which represents the spray area.

You can also adjust the airbrush size while painting by typing + or - to
increase or decrease the size.

STRAIGHT LINE, CURVE, AND UNFILLED SHAPE TOOLS

A right click on any of these tools brings up the Spacing requester.

The  Spacing requester lets you control the distance between "splats" in
your  lines.    This  lets  you  choose  whether a line is continuous or
dotted.   If you want a dotted line, you can define the line in terms of
the  total  number  of dots (N Total) or by the number of pixels between
dots (Every Nth Dot).

Choose Airbrush to use the Airbrush tool with any of the tools that uses
the  Spacing requester.  This is especially useful for smooth airbrushed
curves and circles.

FILL AND SHAPE TOOLS

Right clicking any of these icons brings up the Fill Type requester.

This  requester lets you choose one of several fill types for your fills
and filled shapes.  Many features of the Fill Type Requester are covered
in Tutorials Two: Working with Ranges and in the Reference section.

BRUSH SELECTOR

Right-clicking the Brush Selector restores the last custom brush.  Thus,
if  you  had  created a custom brush (see Custom Brushes in this chapter
for  details) and then made some modifications, right clicking the Brush
Selector  would  restore you to the previous custom brush.  This feature
is  also  useful if you create a custom brush and then select a built-in
brush.  Right clicking the Brush Selector restores the custom brush.

TEXT TOOL

Right-clicking  the  Text  tool displays the Choose Font requester.  You
use  this requester to choose fonts and styles for the Text tool to use.


To  select a different type font, size, and/or style, display the Choose
Font requester.

Click  a  font from the window.  Choose from the available font sizes by
clicking  on  the  up  and  down arrows.  Click any of the Style buttons
(Bold,  Italic,  Underline),  to  apply any font style you want.  If you
like the results, click OK.

A  special  feature  of the Choose Font requester is the ability to load
fonts  from  a fonts directory on a different disk.  To do this, use the
Font  Dir...    command from the Prefs menu.  In addition, your Examples
disk contains two special coloured fonts.

Insert the Deluxe Paint Examples disk in any drive.

Select  Font  Dir...    from  the Prefs menu.  The Choose Font Directory
requester appears.

Click  the Volumes button, and select the Examples disk from the list of
volumes that appears.

Select the Karafonts drawer, and then click OK to select the drawer.

Right  click  ion  the Text tool, and the Choose Font requester appears.
In a moment, the fonts list from your Examples disk appear in the Choose
Font requester.  Let's use one of the fonts.

Click  the  font  named ChiselScript and click OK, A message asks if you
want  to  use the font's palette.  Click Yes, Place your text cutsor and
type away!

If  you  want  to  move your text once it's on the screen, use the Brush
Selector  to pick it up and move it around.  If you are adding text to a
picture,  there  are  two  good  tips  you  should know.  If you fix the
background  (Effect>Background>Fix)  before you type the text, you'll be
able  to  move  the text without harming the picture.  Another way to do
this  is to jump to the Spare page to type your text and then pick it up
as a brush to place on your picture.

GRID AND SYMMETRY TOOLS

Right-clicks  on these tool icons let you modify aspects of gridding and
symmetry.

You can also control the spacing between the points.

Click on the Grid icon to turn on the grid.

Use  the  Dotted  Freehand tool to paint in the painting area.  The dots
show you the current position of the grid.

Right  click  the Grid icon to bring up the Gridding requester.  You can
now  set  the  spacing for both the X and the Y coordinates by typing in
the  actual spacing in the calibration boxes.  The spacing is calibrated
in pixels.

Click  in  the  X  spacing  edit  box, delete or backspace to remove the
existing  value,  and  then type in the new value - try 20.  Do the same
with the Y spacing.  Click OK.

Now  try  painting with the Dotted Freehand tool to see how the grid has
changed.

You can also recalibrate the gridding by using a visual method.

Display the Gridding requester.

Click Adjust.

You  are  returned  to the page with a cursor that looks like a matrix.
This  matrix  represents  the  current  grid values in graphic form.  To
change  the  values, press and hold down the left mouse button, drag the
mouse  until  the matrix is the desired size and shape, and then release
the button.

The  new  grid  is  based  on  this matrix.  You can also reposition the
points  of  the grid using Adjust: move the matrix so that its cells are
in the desired position and click the left button.

If  you  are  in perspective mode and you right click the Grid icon, the
Perspective  requester  appears.  This requester lets you set a grid for
three  dimensional  space  and  also  lets  you choose other Perspective
settings.    (See  Chapter Five; Using Perspective or the description in
Referenre of the Perspective>Settings option in the Effect menu).

You  can  change  the settings for the type of symmetry you use by right
clicking the Symmetry tool.  This brings up the Symmetry Requester.

You'll  find  a brief explanation of each of the options in the Symmetry
requester  in Reference.  For now, if you feel adventurous, try changing
the settings and paintind with different shapes.

PAINTING MODES

The options in the Mode menu control the way your brush applies paint to
the  page.    In this section, we'll look at a few of the modes.  You'll
find information about all modes in Reference.

To look at some of these modes, you'll need paint on the screen, so lets
load a picture.

Load the picture Venus from the Art Disk.

First  lets  look at a couple of modes that change print already the the
page - these are Smear, Shade, Blend, and Smooth.

Select  the  largest round built in brush, the Dotted Freehand tool, and
Colour 0 (black).

Choose  Smear from the Mode menu, move the brush down to Venus eye, hold
down the left mouse button, and drag back and forth across her eye.

Notice  that  instead  of laying down black paint, your brush smears the
paint  already  on  the  screen.  Smear mixes the existing pixels rather
than changing their colours.

Choose  Smooth  from  the Mode menu, hold down the left mouse button and
drag your brush once along the edge of Venus' chin.

Again,  the  brush  uses colours other than black to paint with.  Smooth
reduces  the  contrast  between  two   adjoining   areas   by   painting
intermediate  shades  along the boundary of the two areas.  Smooth looks
at  the  current palette and finds the colours closest to the ones under
the brush.  If the palette contains a wide selection of colours close to
the  ones under the brush, it will have more colours to choose from.  In
our case, there are many colours between the dark brown of the chin line
and  the  yellows  of  Venus'  face,  so Deluxe Paint does a good job of
smoothing the edge.

Some  of the painting modes change the way the colours of your brush are
used.    In particular Matte and Colour determine whether a custom brush
will  paint  with  the  colours  in the brush, or the current foreground
colour Let's see how that works.

Click CLR to clear the screen.

Choose  Load  from  the Brush menu and load the brush named MultiCycleMe
from  the  Brush drawer of your Examples disk.  Choose Palette>Use Brush
Palette from the Colour menu.

When  you  load  a  custom  brush,  your  painting mode is automatically
changed to Matte.  Matte paints with the colours in your custom brush.

Drag the custom brush straight down your page to paint a broad stripe of
several greenish blues and reds.

Now choose Colour from the Mode menu and drag the brush down again.

This time your stripe is all one colour, because Colour uses the current
foreground colour and the shape of your custom brush to paint.

Choose Cycle from the Mode menu and drag another stripe.

Now  your  brush  paints  a  stripe  with  bands   of   colour   running
horizontally.    Notice  that  the  colours  change  in the order of the
colours  in  your palette.  Cycle uses the ranges in the Range requester
and  cycles  the  colours as it paints.  This is a good example of where
ranges affect the way a painting mode works.

Finally choose MultiCycle from the Prefs menu.  Select the Straight line
tool and drag a line straight down from the top of the page

MultiCycle  tells  Deluxe  Paint  to  cycle  each  colour  in your brush
individually  when  you use the Cycle mode.  Since your brush is made up
of many colours, they create a many coloured pattern.  Press the TAB key
to see how psychedelic you can paint with colorcycling and MultiCycle.

EXTRA HALF BRITE MODE

Hbrite  mode  is  only available if you are using 64 colours.  So, let's
change our screen format now.

Choose  Screen Format from the Picture menu.  In the requester, select a
Halfbrite mode and click Use.

Now  your  palette  should contain 64 colours.  The first 32 colours are
the  same  colours  you had in Lo Res format.  The second 32 colours are
Halfbrite equivalents of the first 32.

Let's take a look at how Hbrite paints.

Choose  Load  from  the  Picture  menu  and  load  the picture named New
Star-Hall  from  the  Picture  drawer  of  your Examples disk.  When the
requester asks if you want to change the screen format, click NO.

Now  select  the  largest  built in brush and the Dotted Freehand tool.
Choose Hbrite from the Modes menu.  Scrawl anywhere on the picture using
the left mouse button.

Notice  that  when  you  paint  with the left button in Hbrite mode, any
colours  that  are  the  first 32 in your palette are changed from their
Halfbrite  equivalent.    This  makes  it look as though your picture is
getting  darker.    Hbrite  mode  is  a great way to add shadows to your
pictures.

Now scrawl over your picture again, but use the right mouse button.

Any  areas  of  your  picture  that  are  already in one of the first 32
colours of your palette are unaffected by your paint, but areas that are
painted with any of the 32 Halfbrite colours become lighter.

We've demonstrated only a few of the painting modes in this section.  Be
sure  to  take  the  time  to  review  the  description  of the modes in
Reference.

Clever  use  of  painting  modes  can  save you time and help you create
interesting effects.

Before you move onto the next section, choose Colour from the Mode menu.
This is the default mode.

KEYBOARD EQUIVALENTS

Most  artists  have found that Deluxe Paint's extensive list of keyboard
equivalents  helps  them  work  more  quickly  and  efficiently.  We are
committed  to  making  the  keyboard  commands an integral and important
feature of Deluxe Paint.  The most important thing to remember about our
keyboard  equivalents  is  that you can use most of them while the mouse
button  is  down!!!    This  means  that  you  can use multiple features
simultaneously.

A  simple example of where using the keyboard equivalents comes in handy
is in the case of trying to pick up a brush very precisely.  Here's what
you might do:

Click  the  Brush Selector.  Move the cross hair to the area you want to
magnify  and  press  m  to turn on magnification.  Begin surrounding the
area  you  want  to pick up and, while the mouse button is down, press m
again  to  turn  off  magnification.    Move the cross hair to the other
corner  of  the area you want to select and press m again to magnify for
precise  selection.  Finally, release the mouse button and you have your
brush.

This  is  just  one example.  There are more throughout the program.  In
particular,  when  you begin working with animation you'll find that the
keyboard  equivalents  let  you  do  many things that otherwise would be
impossible.    If  you  ever  need to use a menu option or other command
while  the  mouse  button  is  down,  go  ahead  and  try  the  keyboard
equivalent; it usually works.

You'll  find  a  complete listing of keyboard equivalents at the back of
this manual in Appendix B.

LOOKING AHEAD

Before  you  move  on to the next chapter, or off on your own to explore
Deluxe  Paint,  we want to introduce you to a few of the interesting and
powerful  features  of  the program.  You'll find more information about
these features throughout the manual.

FIXING THE BACKGROUND

This  section  shows a very powerful feature that lets you paint on your
picture without fear of accidentally messing it up.

Load  the  picture WorldMap from your copy of the Examples disk.  If you
are  prompted  by  a screen message asking you if you want to change the
Screen format or the number of colours, click Yes.

Choose Background>Fix from the Effect menu.

What  you  have  just  done  is  remarkably  simple,  and yet remarkably
powerful.      You have fixed the picture onto the background so that it
cannot be removed.  Try it.

Click CLR and see what happens. Thats right - nothing.

The picture is fixed, which means you can draw over it any way you like.

Select a thick brush and scrawl on the picture.  Do it with the airbrush
if  you  like.    Then  scrawl using the right mouse button and see what
happens.

When you have the background fixed, painting with the right mouse button
is  truly  erasing!  Note that you can paint on the picture and then fix
the  background  again to fix the new version.  You can erase everything
you  painted  since the last fix with a single click and you can "unfix"
the  background  as  easily as you fixed it: just choose Background>Free
from  the Effect menu.  This restores everything back to normal, so that
clicking CLR clears the entire picture.

We'll look more closely at this feature in the next chapter when we look
at  custom  brushes  and  the  way  they  interact  with the background.
Meanwhile,  feel  free  to  experiment  further  with this feature.  Art
restorers should have it so easy!

In  particular,  the combination of right button brush selection and Fix
Background  lets  you  lift  any  complex  shape  off a fixed background
(provided the shape was applied after the background was fixed), without
lifting  up  any of the background, Deluxe Paint preserves in memory all
those  parts  of  a fixed background that are covered by unfixed shapes,
which means that you can move the shapes around the page and uncover the
previously hidden background.

ANIMPAINTING

We realise that you may have just started painting on a computer for the
first  time.  But we'll take a daring leap forward to show you animating
on  a  computer.  Right now we'll show you a special kind of painting on
multiple  frames.    Just follow the steps carefully and you'll see some
wonderful results.

Choose  AnimBrush>Load  from the Anim menu.  Insert the Examples disk in
any  drive and click the Volumes button so that Examples disk appears in
the window.

Click Examples to select the disk volume.

Click the AnimBrush drawer in the window.

Double-click the file named "Sweep anbr"

When  the  requester  closes, you'll have an AnimBrush of a Karate black
belt  attached  to  your  cursor.  An AnimBrush is special in that it is
made up of many cels (short for celluloids) that flip as you paint.

Choose  Palette>Use  Brush Palette from the Colour menu to see the brush
in its own palette.

Click the brush down once.

Move the mouse, and click the brush down again

Notice  that  now  your  brush looks different.  Each time you click the
button the brush moves to the next cel.

Paint freehand across the screen to see all of the cels of the AnimBrush.

ANIMATION FRAMES

Above,  we  had  you painting with an AnimBrush on a single screen.  Now
let's  look at what happens if you paint one cel of the brush on each of
several  screens.   This is one way to create animations in Deluxe Paint
V.

Select Dark blue as your background colour and clear the screen.

Choose  Frames>Set # from the Anim menu.  (The Set Frame Count requester
appears).    Enter 20 in the Count field (You do this by clicking at the
right end of the field, backspacing over the existing number, and typing
the new number) Click OK.

In  a  flash,  you  have  20  animation  frames to paint on.  Notice the
numbers 1/20 on the left side of the Title Bar.  This tells you that you
are on frame 1 of 20 frames.  Let's paint!

ANIMPAINTING

Animpainting  is  simply  the  process  of painting at the same time the
animation  frames flip.  In most ways it is like regular painting, since
Deluxe Paint flips the frames for you.

Right  click on the Straight Line tool to display the Spacing Requester.
Click  the N Total button to highlight it.  Click in the edit field next
to  N  Total  and  set the number to 20.  Click OK to exit the requester
with the new settings.

Now  your  lines  will  paint exactly 20 stamps of the brush between the
start  and  end  points  of  the  line.  Using the N Total option of the
Spacing  requester  is an effective way to animate across a simple path,
as you'll see in a moment.

Press Shift 7 to set your AnimBrush back to its first cel.

Select  the  Straight  Line  tool.  Hold down the Alt key and drag out a
line from left to right across the screen.

When  you  let  go  of your line and the Alt key you'll see Deluxe Paint
paint your AnimBrush on each frame of your 20 animation frames.

When Deluxe Paint is finished painting press 5 on the keyboard.

The  Karate  expert shows all of his best moves.  Press 4 if you want to
see  your  aninmation  play  continuously.    If the animation moved too
quickly, press the left arrow key repeatedly to slow down the play rate.
Press the Spacebar to stop the animation.

TEXTURES AND MEDIA

A powerful new feature of Deluxe Paint V is the ability to mimic natural
textures  and media.  Using these tools, you can duplicate the effect of
drawing  with  traditional media such as water colour on rough paper for
example.    While  media  and textures work best in higher colour modes,
they can be used in any screen mode.

Here's  a quick demonstration to get you started.  First, we'll load and
use a background texture.

Select  Texture>Load...    from  the  Effect   menu.    The Load Texture
requester appears.

Click on the Textures drawer (in your Deluxe Paint directory or from the
Media disk), and select the Heavycanvas texture file.  Click OK.

When  you select a texture, the screen's appearance doesn't change until
you paint the texture onto it.

Select  a  light grey foreground colour and a background colour of black
to show the canvas texture.

Use  the  filled  square tool to paint the texture onto a portion of the
screen.

You  can actually see the background texture on the screen, and when you
paint  on  it  your  brush  will  react as if you were printing over the
texture.

Next, we'll load a media library to fully take advantage of our texture.

Select  Media>Open...    from  the  Effect  menu.    The Media requester
appears.

Click  on  the  Media drawer (in your Deluxe Paint directory or from the
Media disk), and select the Oil media library.  Click OK.

When  you draw on the screen now, you'll get the effect of an oil pastel
crayon  on  heavy  canvas.  There isnt any difference between drawing on
the  square where the canvas texture is visible other than the fact that
you  can  see  the  background texture plainly - the oil foreground will
appear  the  same in either case, and will show the effect of drawing on
the canvas texture.

Try  drawing  with both the freehand tool and the airbrush (try both the
Old  Style  and  Standard airbrush modes from the Airbrush requester and
compare  the results).  Now your Amiga can duplicate natural drawing and
painting methods with no messy cleanup!

SUMMARY

This  chapter  completes  the  Guided  Tour of Deluxe Paint V> Chapter 4
presents  some  painting tutorials, which will help you learn how to get
the  most out of the way the program uses colours and palettes.  Because
Deluxe  Paints colour capacity is one of the programs strongest and most
versatile  features,  we  highly  recommend  that  you  work through the
exercises we have described here.


CHAPTER 4 - PAINTING TUTORIALS
------------------------------

The  six  tutorials  in this chapter introduce some of the most powerful
painting  features of Deluxe Paint V.  Each tutorial is independent from
the  others,  so  you  can  choose  to  complete only the exercises that
interest you.

TUTORIAL ONE: WORKING WITH COLOURS

This  tutorial  will  walk  you  through using the Deluxe Paint V colour
requesters.

Start  Deluxe  Paint V fresh, and at the Screen Format requester, choose
Lo-Res 16 colours.

Sixteen  colours  is far from the maximum number of colours you can work
with,  but  it  is  a  good  place for us to begin explaining the colour
manipulation features of Deluxe Paint V.

MANIPULATING THE PALETTE

In  this  section  of  the  tutorial,  we'll  look  at  the ways you can
manipulate  your  palette.    This  will  help  you make best use of the
colours available to you in non HAM modes.

THE TOOLBOX PALETTE (WHAT YOU CAN PAINT WITH)

You may remember from the Guided Tour that the number of colours you can
paint  with  depend  on  the  Screen  Format you choose to work in.  The
important  thing  to remember in all modes except HAM and 24-bit backing
store  modes is that all of the colours you can paint with appear in the
palette  area  below  the toolbox.  If you are ever confused about which
colours  are  available to you, look at the Palette below the Toolbox to
see your colours.

Of  course,  you can change these colours to create the ones best suited
to the artwork you have in mind.  The common way to change colours is to
use the Palette Mixer.

THE PALETTE MIXER

Move the cursor over the Colour Indicator and click with the right mouse
button.

Right  clicking on the Colour Indicator displays the Palette Mixer.  You
can  also  display  this  requester  by  choosing Palette Mixer from the
Colour  menu, or by pressing p on your keyboard.  Use the method that is
most natural for you.

Palette vs. Colour Sets
One of the first things you'll notice about the Palette Mixer is that it
may  contain  more  slots  than  there  are colours in your Palette.  In
Deluxe  Paint  V  you  are  able  to mix and spread colours outside your
palette  as a way to "experiment" with colours before committing to them
in the picture.

There  are  16  colour slots to a row, and 16 rows numbered 0 through 15
for 256 colour slots in the Mixer.  We call this collection of slots the
Colour  Set.  The Palette is a smaller number of colours included in the
Colour  Set.    In the Palette Mixer the Palette colours are arranged in
rows 0-3.  When the Grid is turned on (it is off by default) the top and
left edges of each colour are outlined in white.  The top and left edges
of  non-palette colours are outlined in blue when the Grid is turned on.

When you first open the Palette Mixer, you have only palette colours and
the  rest  of  the  slots  are  empty.  Empty slots are indicated with a
checked  pattern.    If you try to paint with one of these colour slots,
you'll see that the colour is white by default.

RGB/HSV Sliders
First let's look at how you can change the colours that already exist in
your pallette.

Click on the bright red in the Palette Mixer and paint on the screen.

As you can see, you can still paint on your image when the Palette Mixer
is displayed.

Now,  drag the RGB or HSV sliders in the Palette Mixer to alter the red.

Notice that the colour on the screen changes as you change the colour in
your  palette.   The red in the Colour Mixer is a Palette colour, so the
colour  you  placed  on the screen is tied directly to the colour in the
Palette.  This is true of most Screen Format settings in Deluxe Paint V.
HAM and 24-bit backing store modes are the exception.  In these modes it
is  possible  to  paint  on the screen with colours that are not in your
palette.    We'll  explore  these  two  colour  models  in  a  moment in
Introduction to RGB and HSV Colour Models.

Deluxe  Paint  V  lets  you  set your colour values using either the RGB
(red, green, blue) or HSV (hue, saturation, value) models.  You'll learn
more about both of these colour models in a moment.

UNDO
Click  UNDO  in the Mixer to undo the change to the palette.  You'll see
both the colour in your palette and the colour on the screen restored to
red.

You can undo any change to a colour in your palette so long as you don't
click  any  other  colour  before  you  click  UNDO.  Undo remembers and
reverses  only  the  most recent change.  If you wanted to return to the
palette  and colour set you had when you first opened the Palette Mixer,
you would click REVERT.  The UNDO button makes it possible to experiment
with  colours  in  your picture and return to the original easily if you
don't like your experiment.

Copy and Exchange
You  can  rearrange  the  colours  in your palette by using the COPY and
EX(change) buttons.

With  the  red  colour selected, click COPY and click on the first empty
slot of your palette to copy the red there.

Click  the  Yellow  in your palette and copy it to the empty slot beside
the new red.

With  the  new yellow colour selected, click EX and click on the new red
to swap the positions of these colours.

Copy  and  Exchange  are  straigtforward ways to arrange colours in your
palette.    Perhaps the most important way you'll use them is to arrange
your palette for creating spreads between colours.

Spreading Colours
Spreading  colours is an effective way to get subtle shades of a colour.
Let's create a spread of colours from white to dark blue.

Click  on  the white in your palette colours.  Click SPREAD and click on
the dark blue at the right end of your palette colours.

Now  you  have  a  spread  of colours from white to blue with the colour
settings for each of the slots mathematically calculated to give you the
most  evenly  spread  colours  based  on the number of slots between the
white and the blue.

*  Note  that Deluxe Paint uses the HSV model to build its spread.  This
means  that  when  you  spread  between  blue  and yellow the colours in
between will run through the greens in the colour wheel.

Nany other functions in the program (including Ranges) use the RGB model
to  calculate  spreads  of  colour.    It is important to understand the
distinction  between these two colour models and how to use them to your
advantage.   If you arent already familiar with these two colour models,
be  sure  to  work  through  the section Introduction to the RGB and HSV
Colour Models below for an explanation of basic colour theory.

Colour Set
Now  that  there are no red; or yellows in your palette (though there is
one  of  each  in  your  Colour Set), we want to illustrate an important
concept.

SPECIAL NOTE

In any colour mode other than HAM or 24-bit backing store, if you try to
paint  with  a  colour  from the Colour Set that is not in your palette,
Deluxe  Paint  paints  with the colour in your palette that most closely
matches the Colour Set colour.

Here's an example:

Click on the red in your colour set and paint with it on the screen.

You should see that you are painting with the darker of the two greys in
your  palette,  because  this grey is the colour in your palette that is
closest to red in the RGB colour cube.  (You'll learn more about the RGB
colour cube later in this section).

Click on the yellow in your colour set and paint with it on the screen.

You  should  see that you are painting with the lighter of the two greys
in  your  palette.    As  we mentioned above, the best way to know which
colours  you  can  actually paint with when you are in any screen format
other  than  HAM  or  24  bit  backing  store  is to look at the palette
underneath the Toolbox.

The Mixing Area
The  mixing  area  lets you mix colours together the way an artist mixes
paint.    Like the extra colour slots in the Colour Set, the Mixing Area
can contain any of the possible colours, but unless you are using HAM or
24  bit  backing  store  modes,  you will be able to paint only with the
colours you place in your palette.  Lets mix a new colour right now.

Choose  the third round built in brush from the toolbox.  Choose the red
colour  from your Colour Set and paint with it in the Mixing Area.  Then
choose the yellow and paint into the red.

You'll  see  the  two colours mix together to form oranges.  As you mix,
your brush spreads the mixed colours, but each time you click down, your
brush starts over with yellow automatically so you can gradually add the
yellow to the red.

A second way to mix a new colour is drop exitting colours into the Mixer
Wells  on  either  side  of  the  Mixing  Area.    The   two colours are
automatically  blended  together  in  the Mixing Area to create a colour
spread.

Choose  red  from  the Colour Set, and drop it into the well on the left
side of the Mixing Area.

Choose  yellow and drop it in the right well.  The colours are gradually
blended together across the Mixing Area.

To  move  any of your new colours into the Colour Set, use the Pick icon
button at the lower right of the Palette Mixer.

Click  on  an  empty  slot  in the Colour Set, Click the Pick icon (Your
pointer  changes  to  an  eyedropper).   Click on a colour in the Mixing
Area.

The  colour  you  clicked  on is added to the Colour Set in the slot you
chose.

To clear the Mixing area to any colour and start over, you copy a colour
to the colour mixer.

Click  on black in the Mixing Palette.  Click the COPY button.  Click in
the Mixing Area to clear it to black.

Arrange Palette Requester
Although  we moved a few colours in the palette using the Palette Mixer,
the  best  place  to  accomplish palette color set arrangement is in the
Arrange Palette requester.

Choose Palette>Arrange from the Colour menu.

This requester lets you see eight rows of colours at a time, and you can
quickly scroll through the other eight rows with the up and down arrows.
Each  click on the arrows to the right of the colour rows moves the rows
up  or  down  by  one.   The number in the upper center of the requester
shows  the  number  of  the  row  at  the top of the list.  When you are
looking  at  the  first  eight  rows  (rows 0-7), this number is 0, when
you're  looking  at the last four rows (rows 8-15), the number is 8.  If
you  hold  down  the  Shift  key  when you click on the arrows, you move
directly to the first or last eight rows.

The  buttons  in  this  requester work just like the ones in the Palette
Mixer.    The  SPREAD option is especially useful in the arrange Palette
requester  because  it  lets you easily spread over multiple rows in the
set without having to scroll time rows.

The SELECT button allows you to select a contiguous range of colours.

Select the first colour in the range, and then click SELECT.  The cursor
changes  to an eyedropper.  Move the pointer to the last colour you want
to select and left click.  All the colours in the range are selected.

You can also select a contiguous range with the keyboard by Alt clicking
with the mouse.

To select a non contiguous range, Shift click on each colour you want to
select.   The colors in between the selections are not selected.  Deluxe
Paint  remembers  the  order  of  the  colours selected when you copy or
exchange them.

LOADING AND SAVING PALETTES AND COLOUR SETS

Deluxe Paint V also lets you load and save Palettes and Colour sets.  If
you continue on to the Ranges tutorial, you'll see an example of loading
a Colour Set.  Otherwise we recommend that you look in the Reference for
information on how to use these features.

INTRODUCTION TO THE RGB AND HSV COLOUR MODELS

In  this  exercise,  you'll be looking at the Reference Palette to learn
how  Deluxe  Paint  mixes  red,  green,  and blue to form other colours.
You'll  also  see  the  relationship  between  the  RGB  and  HSV  (hue,
saturation, value) colour systems.

Choose  Load  from the Picture menu and load the picture named Reference
Palette from the Picture drawer of the Examples disk.

If  you  see  the  message asking if you want to change screen format to
that of the file, click Yes.

The  Reference  Palette picture shows you a matrix of the colours in the
colour  spectrum:  Red,  Orange, Yellow, Green, Blue, and Violet.  These
are  the  colours  that  are produced when you mix coloured pigment.  In
effect  these  are  the  colours  a traditional painter would work with.
This  is  not  the  spectrum produced when you mix coloured light.  That
spectrum  produces  the  colours  Red,  Yellow,  Green,  Cyan, Blue, and
Magenta.

Choose  Palette>Mixer On/Off to display the Palette Mixer.  Click on the
main screen to activate it.  Press F10 to hide the Menu Bar and Toolbox.

Now  let's  look at the RGB and HSV values of some of the colours in the
Reference Palette.

Click  the  Dropper  icon  in  the  Palette Mixer and then click the red
square  in  the  row  labelled  Pure Colour.  Look at the sliders in the
Mixer.

In RGB terms, your Mixer shows that a pure red is all red colour with no
green or blue.

In  HSV  terms,  pure red is hue 0 with full saturation and full value.
Saturation  is  the relative amount of colour to white, and value is the
relative  lightness or darkness of a colour.  Value is often referred to
as Luminosity.  To see exactly what this means, let's change the sliders
a bit.

Drag  the  saturation  (S)  slider  all  the way to the left to see what
happens  to  the  colour.  Drag the saturation slider back to the right.
Now drag the value (V) slider all the way to the left.

As you drag the saturation slider left, the red gets lighter until it is
white.   As you drag the value slider left, the red gets darker until it
is  black.   Regardless of the hue or saturation, a value of zero always
produces black.

The  meaning  of  the  saturation  and value sliders is exactly what the
matrix  in  the Reference Palette shows.  Notice that the colours in the
Low  Satutarion  row are all pale - they don't contain much colour.  The
colours  in  the  Low  Value  row  are  dark  they  don't  contain  much
luminosity.   The colours in the Pure Colour row contain full saturation
and full value.

Hue  simply refers to the position of a colour on the colour spectrum or
rainbow  -  Red,  Yellow, Green, Cyan, Blue, or Magenta, and the various
shades  in  between.    Figure 4.6 shows the positions of colours on the
Colour Wheel.

Let's look at another colour in the Reference Palette.

Click  the  Dropper icon and then click on the yellow square in the Pure
Colour row.

The  RGB sliders show that yellow contains the maximum amount of red and
green,  but  no  blue.    Yellow is said to be the "complement" of blue.
Each of the primary colours has a complement.  In the RGB colour system,
the  relationship  of the primary colours and their complements are best
thought  of  as a cube in which each dimension is measured in one of the
three  primary  colours, as shown in Figure 4.7.  The complement of each
primary  colour is positioned at the opposite corner of the cube.  Thus,
moving  downward  on  the  edge of the cube to add red to green produces
yellow (R15, G15, B0) the complement of blue, which is positioned at the
opposite  corner  from  blue.  If you look back at Figure 4.6 you'll see
that  in the HSV colour system, the complements are also directly across
the circle from the primary colour - yellow is directly across the wheel
from blue.

Notice that black is the absence of colour (R0, G0, B0) and white is the
maximum  level  of  the three colours (R15, G15, B15).  The line running
diagonally  through the centre of the cube from black to white shows the
positions  of  the greys, which are formed by combining equal amounts of
red, green, and blue.  Thus R8, G8, B8 would yield a medium grey.  Let's
try this in practice.

In the Mixer, drag each of the RGB sliders to 8.  Once all three primary
colours are at 8, you have medium grey.

Look  at  the position of the value slider in your Colour Palette; it is
at the same level as the red, green, and blue sliders.

Note  that  if you are using an AGA machine the RGB scale is from 0-255,
not 0-5, so in the example above, to get a medium grey you'd set the RGB
sliders to 129, 129, 129.

The  mixing  of  greys  is one area where the HSV system excels.  Rather
than  moving all of the RGB sliders to the same position, you can simply
drag  the  saturation  slider all the way to the left and move the value
slider  to  the  level of grey you want.  The position of the hue slider
will have no effect, because there is no colour (no saturation) in grey.

Move  the hue slider left and right and notice how the grey you produced
doesnt  change.  Now move the value slider left and right to see how the
RGB  sliders  move  along  with  the  value  slider, always staying in a
perfect line.

Can  you  change  the  colour  back  to  yellow?  Remember yellow is the
complement of blue.

Move the red (R) and green (G) sliders all the way to the right and move
the blue (B) slider all the way to the left.

Now  that  you  know the basics, try mixing a few colours you like using
either  one  of the two colour mixing systems.  Here's a trick you might
also consider; mix a few palettes that you particarly like and save then
using  the  Palette>Save  option  in  the  Colour  Menu.    You can then
automatically  produce that palette by loading it from the Colour Menu.
There is also some sample palettes included in the Colours drawer of the
Media disk.

Before  we leave the topic of colour mixing, let us just summarise a few
important points.

Your  Amiga  and Deluxe Paint mix colours using the RGB system, and this
system is represented by the colour cube.

If  you want to find any pure colour, you can do so using the HSV system
by  moving  the  saturation  and value sliders far to the right and then
scrolling the hue slider until you find the colour you want.

I  you need to produce a grey, you can do so by setting all three of the
RGB  colours  to  the same level, or by setting the saturation slider to
the left and adjusting the value slider to the grey level you want.

Besides  providing a sample spectrum for our colour mixing tutorial, the
Reference  Palette  is  useful  for adjusting your monitor to match your
printouts  Reload  the picture to restore it to its original colours and
print out a copy on your colour printer.  Then adjust your monitor until
the colours on your screen look the same as those on the paper

TUTORIAL TWO: WORKING WITH RANGES

In  this  section  you'll learn how to build a Range for use in gradient
fills  and  as  colour  cycling.    Deluxe  Paint  V has moved the range
functions  out  of  the  Palette  Mixer  requester  to  make ranges more
versatile in all colour settings.  First we'll show you how to work with
ranges in 32 colour mode, since this mode illustrates the basic concepts
you  need  to  master.    The  tutorial Painting in HAM will explain how
Ranges work in HAM.  So, before you begin:

Change your Screen Format to Lo Res 320 x 200 with 32 colours.

Before you begin building a range, we'll have you load a Colour Set that
contains a pleasant spread of colours to paint the range with.

Choose Colour Set>Load from the Colour menu.

When  the  first  Load Colour Set requester appears, load file Range.set
from the Colours drawer on the Media disk.

Once  the  Colour  Set  is  loaded, you are presented with a second Load
Colour Set requester that is similar to the Arrange Palette requester.

This  requester allows you to choose which colours you want to load from
the colour set to add to your current colour set.  And you can choose to
add  colours  to  your  current set, or you can overwrite the colours in
your  colour  set  with  the  new  colours.   This requester chooses all
colours  by  default.   We want to load all of the colours from this new
colour set and overwrite the colours that are in our current colour set.
To do this:

Click the Overwrite button.

The Overwrite button loads colours into your current colour set starting
at  colour  0.    After  the  Colour  Set is loaded: the Arrange Palette
requester is automatically displayed so that you can arrange the colours
as you like.  The Palette you'll see contains two spreads of colour that
paint smooth gradients even in the Low Resolution mode we are using now.
These spreads of colour were created by mixing the colour at each end of
the  spreads  in  the  Palette Mixer and then using the SPREAD option to
generate the colours between.

BUILDING THE RANGE

Choose Ranges from the Colour menu to display the Range requester.

The  Range Requester is Deluxe Paint's way of building ranges for use in
painting gradients or cycling colours.  You can build up to eight ranges
for  each  document, and these ranges are saved with the file.  When you
start  the  program,  it  contains a default set of colours in the first
range.    In  our case the default range contains the greys in the lower
half  of  the  palette.  We'll leave this range in place and build a new
one.    The  slider  in  the upper left corner of the requester lets you
choose the current range being used by the program.

Click to the right of the slider to move to range 3.

Range 3 should still be empty and ready for us to work with.  To build a
range,  you  place  colours on the bar just as you saw them in the first
range.  If Range 3 is not empty, click the CLEAR button.

Click on the last yellow in the requester.

Your  cursor becomes a rectangular bead, and the colour indicator in the
upper  right corner of the requester shows that you are holding a yellow
colour.

Move  the  cursor  to  the first mark on the range bar and click.  (Your
yellow  colour  appears  on the bar and your cursor reverts to an arrow)
Place the second yellow on the bar the same way.

TIP
You  can speed up the process of placing colours on the bar by selecting
a range of colours and placing them on the range bar.  We'll do it now:

Select the red colour in your palette.

Click  SELECT or hold down the Alt key and then click on the last yellow
color  in  the  range  you  want  to select.  All colours in between and
including the two selections are highlighted.

Click the co1ours in place on the range bar.  The entire range is placed
on the range bar.

You don't need to put the colours right next to each other on the bar to
build  an  effective range.  And you dont need to put the colours in the
same  order  that  they  appear  in  the palette.  We're doing this only
because  this  is  the most conveinient way to work with ranges in modes
other  than HAM.  We'll show you some other variations on ranges when we
look at gradients in HAM and at Colour Cycling later in this tutorial.

Click and hold the SHOW button to see the range painted as a gradient.

You'll  see  a  gradient  painted  with  your  current range in both the
requester  and  in  a  bar above the requester.  The gradient inside the
requester  shows you the gradient using all of the colours available for
that  gradient in the Amiga colour universe of 4096 colours.  If you are
not  working  in  HAM  mode  (and we're not) the second gradient appears
above  the  requester  to show you how the gradient will look using your
current  palette.   Since our range was built from colours that exist in
the  palette,  and  we  placed  all  of the colours on the range bar our
gradient looks spectacular.

THE REVERSE BUTTON

The  REV (Reverse) button beside your new gradient does exactly what its
name implies - it reverses positions of your colours on the range bar.

Click  REV  once to see how it reverses the colours on the range bar and
repaints the gradients.

SMOOTH, PATTERN, AND RANDOM DITHER

At  the moment, the gradients you see for your range are painted using a
regular  pattern  that  produces an even transition between colours.  If
you want to exercise a little more control over your gradients or if you
want  to  eliminate  the  smooth transitions altogether, you can do this
with the Random button and Dither slider at the bottom left of the Range
requester.  When vou click the Random button, your gradients are painted
using a Random dither that you control with the Dither slider.

Click the Random button at the left of the requester.

Notice  that this cycles from Random to Pattern to Smooth, and then back
to  Random.   Click and hold SHOW and notice that now your gradients are
redrawn using a random dither.

Drag  the Dither slider all the way to the right to see how this affects
your  gradients.    Drag  the  slider all the way to the left to see the
gradient with no dither.

Click  the  Random  button  again  to  check  out the Pattern and Smooth
dithers.

Now  that you've seen how most of the Range controls work, let's move on
to painting with this range to see how it is used in gradient fills.

Click OK to close the Range requester.

GRADIENT FILLS

As  we  mentioned above, one of the areas of Deluxe Paint V where ranges
are  used  is  in the painting of gradient fills.  There are two general
types of gradient fills to know about in Deluxe Paint V.  The first type
of  gradient  is  the  linear style that has been supported since Deluxe
Paint III.  The second is a "directional" gradient that lets you specify
the  angle  of any linear gradient, and the central point for any radial
style  gradient.    We'll  show  you  how  to  draw one of each of these
gradients.

FILL TYPE REQUESTER

As  mentioned  in  the Guided Tour, the Fill Type requester is where you
choose  what type of fill your filled shapes and the Fill tool will use.
You  display  this  requester  by right clicking on the Fill tool or any
filled shape tool.

Right-click  on  the  Fill  tool in the Toolbox to display the Fill Type
requester.

The  lower  section of the Fill Type requester contains an assortment of
options  for  filling with a range.  You can choose which of your Ranges
you want to fill with, and how the program should perform the fill.  The
requester also shows you a representation of your current range and lets
you set the Dither just as you would in the Range requester.

LINEAR FILLS

The  first  three  icons  in the gradient area of the Fill requester are
fills  that  were  supported from Deluxe Paint III on.  Let's paint with
the first of these options to see what they are like.

Click the left/right arrows icon in the requester.

If  you  aren't  already  looking  at  Range  3  (yellow  to red) in the
requester, click in the Range box, delete the current number, type 3 and
press  Return to change to range 3.  You'll see the range painted in the
requester, Click OK.

Select the Filled Circle tool and draw a circle that is about two inches
wide.

In  a  moment  Deluxe  Paint paints a circle that is filled horizontally
with  your  gradient  from left to right.  The other two options in this
row  work  essentially  the  same  way.   They paint linear fills either
horizontally  or  vertically.    Try them out for yourself or see Figure
4.13 for an illustration of these gradients.

DIRECTIONAL GRADIENTS

Deluxe  Paint  V  introduces  new gradients that allow you to define the
direction  of  the  gradient  at  any  angle.    There are two styles of
gradients: linear gradients and radial gradients.

Linear Gradients
The two linear gradients are LINE and SHAP(E).  When you fill with these
gradients,  you  use  a "Directional" line to indicate the angle of your
gradient.

Select  the  Filled Circle tool, and press Shift - F to display the Fill
Type Requester.  Select the LINE option and Pattern dither and click OK.

Draw another filled circle that is about two inches wide.

When  you  release the mouse button, your cursor changes to a cross-hair
with a line connecting it to the centre of the circle.  We call this the
"directional"  line,  and  you  use  it  to define the direction of your
gradient.  Let's paint this linear gradient at an angle.

Position the cross hair so that your line extends up and to the right at
an angle of about 45 Degrees (as in Figure 4.11) and click.

This new circle is painted with a gradient at 45 degrees.

Radial Gradients
The  three radial gradients are CIR(CULAR), CON(TOURS), and HI(GHLIGHT).
When  you  fill  with  these gradients, you use the directional line and
cross hair to indicate the point from which the gradient will radiate.

Display  the  Fill  Type  requester.   Select the CIR option and Pattern
Dither  and  click  OK.    Draw  another filled circle that is about two
inches wide.

When  the directional line appears, place the line at a 45 degree angle,
but  this time make sure the cross hair is mid-way between the centre of
the circle and its edge as in Figure 4.12.  Click the mouse button.

This  time  your  circle is filled with a gradient that radiates outward
from  the  point  where  you  clicked.  The gradient is painted with the
first  colour of your range as the highlight colour where you click.  If
you  clicked  outside the circle, the gradient would still use the point
where  you  clicked  as the point from which the gradient would radiate,
and the effect would be different.  Give it a try if you like.

The  figure  below  shows  an  example  of  each  of  the gradient fills
available  in Deluxe Paint V drawn using the yellow to red gradient.  If
you  like, experiment with the other gradient fill types and play around
with  the Random dither setting too.  We also recommend that you try the
radial  gradients  with  different  shapes  to  get  a  feel  for  which
combination  of fill and shape gives the best results.  Of course "best"
is entirely a matter of personal taste

COLOUR CYCLING RANGES

In  the  Gradient  Fills  section you learned how to use a range to fill
shapes  with  a gradient.  You can also use these same ranges and others
to  create  colour  cycling  animations.    The  simplest type of colour
cycling  uses  ranges  of consecutive colours just like the one we built
for painting the gradients in the example above.  Deluxe Paint also uses
two other types of colour cycling that allow you to use colours that are
not  in  your  palette  in  a colour cycling range.  We'll walk you very
quickly  through  each  of the different versions of colour cycling, and
then  have  you look at some colour cycling brushes that are included on
your Media disk.

CONVENTIONAL COLOUR PALETTE CYCLING

The  simplest  form  of  colour cycling makes each of the colours in the
cycling range move over to use the colour in the next slot in the range.
This  type of colour cycling requires that you use multiple colours from
your  palette  to  perform  the  colour  cycle.    By cleverly combining
colours,  you  can  simulate animation with this kind of colour cycling.
There  are several examples of this type of colour cycling on your Media
disk.  Let's take a look at two of them now:

The Running Man
Choose Load from the Brush menu and load the Cycle2 brush from the Brush
drawer on the Media disk.

Your Brush is now several images of a running stick figure.

Choose  Palette>Use  Brush  Palette  from the Colour menu to change your
palette to the palette of the brush.

Make  Colour 0 your background colour and click CLR to clear your screen
to black.

Stamp down the brush and press the Tab key to start colour cycling.

Each  position  of  the running man was drawn in a different colour from
Range  1.  Because five of the six colours in this range are black, only
one frame shows at a time, as the white colour cycles into each position
in  the  palette.    The remaining five images are invisible against the
black  background (Display the Colour Mixer and change the black colours
in this range to any non-black colour to see all the frames).

The Spinning Wheel
Load  the  brush  Cycle1  from your Media disk; stamp down the brush and
press Tab to turn on colour cycling.

This  colour  wheel  was drawn as a circle with lines radiating out from
the  centre.    The  pie-shaped  pieces  were then filled with adjoining
colours  in Range 2 of the Range requester.  Thus, as the colours in the
wheel cycle, the wheel appears to spin.

The  brushes  Birds,  Snowball,  StormNight,  and  Fireworks  are  other
examples  of  this kind of colour cycling animation.  Load each of them,
change  to  the  brush palette or use the "Load With Palette" option and
turn on colour cycling to see how they work.

SINGLE REGISTER COLOUR CYCLING

Cycling Deluxe Paint V also allow you to cycle a single register through
a  range  of  colours.  Rather than have you load an example to see this
effect, we'll have you build one from scratch.

Choose Palette>Default Palette from the Colour menu.

Display  the Ranges requester and move the slider to range 2.  Click the
Clear button beside the range to clear it.

Click  on  the  third colour in the palette (bright red) and place it on
the  left  side of the Range bar.  Place the bright yellow in the middle
of the range bar.  Click the Show button to show your new range.

Now  you have a gradient that runs from red to yellow in the requester.
(The  gradient  above  the requester looks a bit less impressive because
you  dont  have  all of the in between colours in your palette to make a
smooth  gradient)  At the moment, your range uses two colour "registers"
that is colours from your palette to build the range.  You can tell that
the  colours on the Range Bar are colours from your palette because each
of  the  colour  beads  has  a  little  dot  above  it.  This little dot
indicates  that  the colours are from the palette.  The secret now is to
change  the yellow to a non palette colour.  We do that by "picking" the
RGB value we want from the gradient in the requester.

Press  the  Comma  (,) key on the keyboard or the eyedropper icon to get
the eyedropper cursor.  Move the cursor to the bright yellow area of the
gradient in the requester and click to pick that bright yellow colour.

A  new bead is now your cursor and the colour indicator in the requester
shows that the colour is bright yellow.

Click this new colour bead directly over the yellow bead in your range.

Notice  that  the  new  yellow bead on the Range Bar does not have a dot
above  it.   This indicates that the colour is not from the palette, but
instead  is  an  RGB  value  that the program will use for gradients and
colour cycling.

Press the comma key or eyedropper icon again, pick a bright red from the
left  side  of  the  gradient,  and place it on the far right end of the
Range Bar.

Your Range Bar and gradient should now look like the one shown in Figure
4.14.

Move  the  Rate  slider in the requester to 50 and click OK to close the
requester.

Choose  the bright red in the palette and paint with it.  Then press Tab
to start the colours cycling.

You  should  now  see  your  bright  red colour cycle through orange and
yellow  and  back to red repeatedly.  Notice that the red colour in your
Toolbox  also cycles through orange and yellow but that no other colours
in  the  Toolbox  change.  You are cycling the colour on your screen but
using only a single colour register!

As  you  might  well  imagine,  this  new form of colour cycling is very
useful for stobing effects of causing an area of your picture to fade in
and out without giving up a lot of colours to do it.

HYBRID CYCLES

You  can combine the conventional colour cycling with RGB colours in the
range to create moving images that also strobe.  We've included a couple
of  these  on the disk to give you the idea.  Take a look at them now if
you  think  that you'll be using colour cycling in your pictures.  These
cycles are of special interest.

Choose Load from the Brush menu and load the Cycle Circle brush from the
Brush drawer.

Choose  Palette>Use  Brush  Palette  from the Colour menu to change your
palette to the palette of the brush.

Your Brush is now a blue and white circle.

Stamp down the brush and press the Tab key to start colour cycling.

Notice  that  although the original brush did not contain any yellows in
it,  as the wheel turns, yellow and gold colours strobe into the cycle.
If  you  display  the  Range  requester and examine Range1, you'll see a
combination of palette colours (colour beads with the dot above) and RGB
colours (without the dot).  The brushes Fountain and Lighthouse also use
this  range  and  demonstrate  practical  uses  for  this type of colour
cycling.

TIP
If  you  want  to  create your own colour cycling pictures that use this
hybrid  style of colour cycling, create a conventional cycle range first
and  paint  the  picture  so  that it animates correctly when you cycle.
Then  add the RGB colours to the cycle range to incorporate the strobing
effect.

TUTORIAL THREE: PAINTING IN HAM

Through  the wonders of HAM mode, the Amiga computer lets you paint with
4096  colours  simultaneously.   In the right hands, this mode can yield
wonderful results.  If you are not already familiar with painting in HAM
from  some  other product, it will likely take you some time to get used
to this mode.  This section will walk you through a tour of HAM as it is
implemented  in Deluxe Paint V.  If you are unfamiliar with HAM and plan
to  work in HAM at all, we strongly recommend that you work through this
section.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN

Start  the  program  fresh  and  at  the Screen Format requester, choose
Lo-Res 320 x 200 and HAM.

THE HAM PALETTE

The  first thing you'll notice when you start the program in HAM mode is
that  the Toolbox Palette now has arrows and a letter in the space below
it.

The  arrows  let  you scroll through the colours in your Colour Set, and
the letter tells you which of the groups of 16 colours you are currently
looking at.

Click  the right arrow below the palette several times to scroll forward
through the Colour Set.  Click the left arrow to scroll backward through
the Colour Set.

You  can  move quickly to the beginning or end of the Palette by holding
down the Shift key when you click the arrows.

Hold  down  the  Shift key and click the right arrow to move to the last
group of colours.  Shift click the left arrow to move to the first group
of colours.

The  first  group  of colours in the Colour Set (the "a" group) contains
your  actual  Palette colours.  The other colours are simply part of the
Colour Set, but unlike in other modes, you can actually paint with those
extra colours.

NOTE
The HAM8 Palette consists of 64 colours in 4 groups of 16.

So whats the difference between a Palette colour and a Colour Set colour
in HAM?  We're glad you asked?

HAM RAMPING

When  you  paint in HAM, any colours that are not in your Palette (group
"a"  of the colours below the Toolbox; see Note above), are displayed on
the  screen by copying the colour in the pixel to the left and modifying
one  of  the  RGB  components  of  the  colour  (You'll find a technical
explanation  of  how  this  is accomplished in Appendix D).  Because HAM
mode can change only one of the colour components at a time, it can take
up  to  three  pixels to reach the colour you really want to paint with.
This  transition  from one colour to the next is called a "ramp".  Let's
take a look at an example.

Choose the largest square built in brush and the Freehand tool.

Press P to display the Arrange Palette Colour Panel.

In  the Mixer, COPY colour 0 (black) to colour 15 (lavender).  Now click
SPREAD  and spread between the two blacks.  This will change all of your
palette colours black.

AGA  users  can copy colour 0 to colour 63 and do a spread between these
two colours.

Click  on white in your colour set, paint a filled square on the screen,
and press m to magnify it.

You should see that your white square has a ramp on the left side.  From
black  the colour changes to green, then to yellow and finally to white.
The  ramp  required  three pixels to reach white because the change from
black  to  white  requires  a  modification  to  each of the R, G, and B
components of the colour, and there are no intermediate colours.

If  there  were an intermediary colour in the palette, the ramp might be
accomplished  in more or less than three pixels and result in a smoother
transition from black to white.  Let's look at an example:

Choose Palette>Default Palette from the Colour menu.

Now  you  are  back  to the standard HAM palette.  This palette contains
some  intermediate  greys and an assortment of colours spaced throughout
the colour cube.

Click  on  color 16 or choose a white that is not in the palette.  Paint
another  square  on the magnified screen.  (AGA users can choose a white
in the colour set).

Notice  that  this  time the ramp is four pixels across, but the colours
used  in  the ramp are much closer to the target colour of white, so the
ramp is not as noticeable.  Deluxe Paint chose a colour from the palette
to  start  its ramp with.  The colour it chose is colour 3, which has an
RGB value of 13, 13, 13, very close to white.  When Deluxe Paint chooses
a  colour from the palette to begin a ramp, it searches the palette from
the  left  and  chooses  the  first  colour  that is acceptable.  And to
determine  which  colour is closest, the program compares the colours in
the palette with the colour you are painting with.

So  far  we've  been showing you what happens to the HAM colour that you
are  painting  down  and  how  Deluxe Paint ramps to create that colour.
Keep  in  mind,  however that if the colour you are painting ON is a HAM
colour,  the  program  will have to compute a ramp to create that colour
also,  so  you  will  see  a ramp on the right side of your brush.  When
Deluxe  Paint  creates  this ramp, priority is given to the brush colour
when selecting a colour from the palette to begin a ramp.

When  you  paint with a HAM colour using the single pixel brush, you are
actually  painting  with the closest colour that the program can ramp to
in  a  single  pixel.  If you need to do detail work, you should put the
colours for the fine details in the palette (the first 16 colours of the
colour set, or 64 in AGA HAM8 mode).

The  construction of a useful palette is an important part of successful
painting in HAM.  With a little experience, you'll find the palette that
works best for you.

COMBINING IMAGES

If you plan to combine images in HAM by loading in custom brushes, it is
best  to create all of the separate images using the same palette.  This
is  especially true if you are using HAM animbrushes to be combined with
a HAM background.

We  included  a  HAM  background  (Aquarium  Background)   and   two HAM
animbrushes  (AngelFish  and  BettaFish) on the Examples disk for you to
experiment with.  These images all use the same palette, so they combine
fairly  well.    Load  the background image and create frames to use the
anim-  brushes against the background.  The brushes look especially good
when stamped with Translucency set to 30 percent.

When  you load a 32 colour or higher brush into a HAM picture, the brush
is  automatically  remapped  to use the current picture's palette so the
brush  will immediately look correct on the screen.  The brush's palette
is  also  loaded  intact, so you can choose Palette>Use Brush Palette if
you  want  to use the brush palette.  Then load the brush again to remap
to the brush palette.

When  you load a brush that is 16 colours or less into HAM, the brush is
not  remapped.   You can choose to either use the brush palette or remap
the brush.

Remember  that  DeluxePaint  V loads and saves palettes and colour sets.
This  should make it much easier and faster for you to combine palettes.


HAM Fringing

Fast Adjust
Sometimes  when  you  are  moving a brush on the screen in HAM mode, you
will  see fringe on the right side of your brush.  This happens when the
colours  in the picture are HAM colours, that is, not from the 16 colour
palette.    Deluxe  Paint attempts to correct the fringing when you hold
the  brush  still  so  that you can see how the image will actually look
when you stamp down the brush.  If you turn off the FastAdjust option in
the Prefs menu (this option in ON by default), Deluxe Paint will attempt
to  correct the fringing effect even when you are moving the brush.  The
advantage  is  that  your brush will always look its best, but the brush
will also move more slowly when you move it around on the screen.

Recompute
HAM  Fringing  will  be  espccially noticeable when you load images from
some other programs that support HAM.  If you load an image from another
program  and  find that the fringing effect along the right side of your
brush  is  severe, choose the Recompute option in the Colour menu.  This
option  remaps the picture to its own palette to eliminate the fringing.

Changing a Pictures Colours in HAM
Many  artists  are accustomed to adjusting the colours in their image by
changing  the  RGB  values  of  the  colour  in  the  palette  and  thus
automatically  changing  all  instances  of  the  colour in the picture.
Since  HAM  colours  are  not  tied  to the palette, you cannot directly
change  them  by  changing the RGB values.  You can, however, change the
colours  globally  with  the BG>FG option in thc Colour menu.  Here's an
example of how to do it:

Choose Palette>Default Palette from the Colour menu

If it is not already displayed, press p to display the Colour Mixer

Click on an empty colour slot in the Mixer

If  there are no empty slots, create some using the Delete button in the
Mixer.  Make sure the empty slots you create are not one of the first 16
colours

Change the RGB slider settings to 12, 13, 0, (AGA users: 63, 53, 0)

This  should  produce  a bright yellow colour that is slightly different
from  the  yellow in the palette.  Because it is not one of the first 16
colours,  it is a HAM colour.  Paint on the screen with this new yellow.


Click  on  another empty slot in the Mixer and change the RGB sliders to
15,  3,  4,  (AGA  users:  63, 6, 8,).  This should produce a bright red
colour.

With  the  right mouse button, click on the yellow colour you created to
make it your current background colour.

At  this point the Colour Indicator in the Colour Mixer should show that
your  foreground  colour  is  bright  red  and your background colour is
bright  yellow.    You  should  also  have  some  of  the  bright yellow
background  colour  painting  in  your picture.  In the next step, we'll
change the yellow colour in your picture to the red colour.

Choose BG>FG from the Colour menu

After  a few moments, Deluxe Paint repaints your picture with all of the
yellow turned to red.

The  BG>FG  option changes every instance in the picture of your current
background colour into the current foreground colour.  In our particular
case  this meant that every pixel in the picture that had the RGB values
15 3, 4 (yellow) changed to the foreground colour (red).

As  you  saw  it  takes a moment for Deluxe Paint to search through your
image  to change all of the pixel colours, but it performs this function
much more rapidly than you ever could.

Colour Processing Options

To  give  you  greater  flexibility  when  working  with  HAM  images in
particular, Deluxe Paint V includes some effects for painting.  The most
notable  of these are the Translucency and Process options in the Effect
menu.  We'd like to show you a couple of these very quickly just to give
you an idea of why they are there and how to use them.

Before you begin:

Load the picture titled Retrospective from the Examples Disk.

Translucency
The  translucency  option lets you combine a specified percenrage of the
colours in your brush with the colours in the image.  This is especially
useful  for overlaying one image on another.  Let's try a quick example.

Select  the  Brush  Selector tool and pick up the eye image in the upper
right portion of the picture as a brush

Press F10 to hide the Menu Bar and Toolbox.

Choose Translucency>On/Off from the Effect menu (or press Alt-t)

Press F9 to redisplay the Menu Bar

Notice that a T appears in the Menu Bar to tell you that Translucency is
on.

Move  the  brush over the image of the earth viewed from space and stamp
down the brush

You'll  see  Deluxe  Paint  overlay  50% of the eye image over the earth
image.    You  can  also  change  the  level of translucency by choosing
Translucency>Settings  from  the  Effect  menu  or  press Ctrl-t.  Since
Translucency  is  an  effect rather than a mode, it will also change the
way  shapes  are  painted  on  the  screen.    And,  you can combine the
Translucency  effect with any of the Process effects to exercise greater
control over the strength of the process effect.

Choose Translucency>On/Off from the Effect menu to turn Translucency off

The  Proecss  options  in  the  Effect menu let you paint with different
combinations  of  the  HSV  levels  of  your  brush.  Tint paints with a
combination  of Hue and Saturation.  Hue paints with only the hue of the
brush,  if  you're  painting  with a solid colour, this is a good way to
convert  a  colour  image  to  a  monochromatic  image as we'll see in a
moment.  Value paints with only the value of your foreground colour, and
is  a great way to add shadows or highlights to an image or even just to
lighten the image overall.  We'll take a quick look at the Hue option to
give you an idea of how the Process options work.

Choose  Process>Hue  from the Effect Menu to make it the current process
option.  Then Choose Process>On/Off to turn the Proeess option on.

A  P appears in the Menu Bar to tell you that one of the Process options
is active.

Press F10 to display the Toolbox.  Choose the light pink as your current
foreground colour.  Select the Filled Rectangle tool.

Press  F10 again to hide the Tool box.  Draw a filled rectangle over the
eye image in the upper right corner of the picture.

In a moment, the eye is painted over with pink and all of the colours in
the image are shifted to pink.  Using the Hue option does not affect the
Saturation or Value, of the colours in the image, so the resulting image
is  a  monochromatic  version of the eye.  If you want to see the effect
against the original, repeatedly press u to undo and redo the change.

As  we  mentioned  above,  the  Translucency  and Process options can be
combined.      Try  some  combinations  of options on other areas of the
picture.    For  example, try the Tint option with Translucency set to a
high number to very lightly tint an area of the picture.

Tutorial Four: Gradient Translucency

A  new  feature  of  Deluxe  Paint V allows you to create gradients with
variable  translucencies.  This feature can be used in any mode, but the
more  colours  available, the better the effect.  This effect works best
in HAM modes, 24 bit backing store mode, and if avilable, AGA modes.  To
get  a good effect in lower colour modes, create good colour spreads and
build  contiguous colour ranges.  In this tutorial you will learn how to
create  a  gradient  translucency  in HAM and how to use some of the new
features to Deluxe Paint's Range Colour Panel.

To  begin  this tutorial, please reload the Retrospective ham image from
the picture drawer of the Examples Disk.  Select Yes if the program asks
you to change modes.

Hit F10 to turn off the menus and toolbox.

Display  the  Range Colour Panel use the menu or press Ctrl-r to display
it.

If  there  is a range already defined for range 1, click CLEAR to delete
it.

Select  the  yellow colour in your palette and place it on the left-most
bead of the range line.

Now that the yellow colour is selected (white outline) you can give that
colour a starting fade value/translucency.  Click on the Fade slider and
move it all the way to the right.  As you do this you will notice that a
small square bead appears below the yellow colour and changes from black
to  white  as  you  increase the fade slider.  Black is an indication of
pure  colour or opaqueness and white is an indication of no colour (100%
translucency).    The  values  range from 0 (fully opaque) to 255 (fully
translucent).    Deluxe Paint will allow you to place fade values on any
individual colour bead in your range up to 256 colours.

NOTE
You  can  add fade values to bead positions even if there are no colours
attached  to  that  bead.   This is useful for extra customising of your
gradient translucency.  Select a bead line (it will turn white) and give
it  a  fade value You'll see that the square fade bead appears below the
bead line even though there's no colour attached.

Slide  the slider under your colour bead all the way to the right.  (The
number  at  the  right of the slider and under the pick icon should read
224;  this  indicates  the  bead number that is at the right edge of the
bead line).

Select  the  red  colour  in your palette and place it on the right most
bead line.

We  don't  need  to  adjust  the  fade  value of the red colour for this
tutorial,  but if you wanted to you could.  For this tutorial lets leave
it at 0 fade.  If you click on the fade slider, you will in fact see the
black square bead appear.

We've  now created a HAM gradient that goes from a translucent yellow to
an  opaque  red.  Deluxe Paint automatically interpolates the in between
fade  values.    Click and hold the SHOW button to see what the gradient
looks  like.    You  should be able to see through of the screen and see
that it gradually gets opaque to the right.

Let's  do  a  gradient  fill  to see what it looks like combined over an
image.

Click  OK  to  close  the range requester, then press F10 to display the
menu bar and Toolbox.

Press F (Shift-f) or right click on the fill tool in the Toolbox

The Fill requester should have range 1 as its current range.

Choose the Hi button and Smooth Dither and click OK.

Press C (Shift-c) or choose the Filled Circle tool from the Toolbox.

Draw  a circle over the little girls head in the Retrospective.ham image
to give her a space helmet.

Experiment  with the gradient translucency effect.  It's a very powerful
feature  and  can  be  combined  with  lots of different features within
Deluxe Paint V.

This section covered only a small part of the world of HAM painting.  We
hope  that  the  ideas we've presented here helped you better understand
HAM mode and that you'll experiment freely with the new options designed
for this mode.

Tutorial Five: The World of Stencils

In  the  following set of exercises you will learn how to create and use
stencils  within  Deluxe  Paint V.  Although stencils are primarily used
for producing quick, uniform lettering by amateur signwriters, they have
uses  that  go  far  beyond  that.    Airbrush artists, for example, use
stencils (which they call friskets) to cover certain areas of their work
while they airbrush other areas.

Deluxe Paint makes it easy to create a stencil for any part of an image,
without the need to redraw the image.  All you do is specify the colours
that  make up the stencil, and Deluxe Paint does the rest, no matter how
intricate the image.

Here's  how  it  works:  when you make a stencil for a particuiar set of
colours,  you  lock (and thus protect) any parts of the picture that are
made up of those colours.  This means that when you have a stencil for a
particular set of colours, you cannot paint over those colours until you
turn  the  stencil  off.  It also means that you can essentially paint a
picture  backwards,  from  the foreground to the background, because you
can use stencils to mask any foreground objects from the colours you are
using for the background objects.

Before You Begin

Choose  Load from the Picture menu and load the picture named StencilSet
from the Picture drawer.

Click  "Yes"  when  Deluxe  Paint  asks  if  you want to change modes to
320x200 32 colours.

Distant Snowcaps

The  left  part of the StencilSet picture shows a distant mountain range
behind  a  green  field and under a colourful sky.  (If you followed the
preceding  tutorial,  you'll notice that both the sky and the field were
created  with  a  Gradient Fill, in a fraction of the time it would take
using  more  traditional  techniques).   Note that the mountain range is
actually  made up of three ranges, with the more distant ones painted in
lightest  shades  than the nearer ones.  In this exercise, we will put a
snowcap on the most distant range with out disturbing any other parts of
the  picture.   This would be a tall order for any other graphic medium,
but  is  surprisingly easy with Deluxe Paint.  Lets see how Deluxe Paint
does it:

Choose  Stencil>Make  from  the  Effect menu to display the Make Stencil
requester.    Click  Clear, click on Colour 8 (the one at the top of the
second column), click Invert, and then click Make.

With  four  simple  clicks  you  have created a stencil that locks every
colour  in  the  picture except Colour 8, the colour of the most distant
mountain  range.    The first click created the picture of any stencils,
the  second  selected  the  stencil colour, the third click inverted the
stencil configuration (making everything except Colour 8 a stencil), and
the  fourth  made  the stencil.  To let you know that you have a stencil
active, an "S" appears on the Title Bar.

Note  that  clicking  Invert  simply   inverts   the   current   stencil
configuration, saving you the trouble of clicking all the colours except
the  one  you  want to paint on.  This is useful if you want to paint on
one or two selected colours to the exclusion of the rest; if you want to
create  a  stencil  to lock only one or a few colours, you don't need to
use invert.

The next step is to paint the snow on the distant mountain range:

Press p to display the Mixer.  Change Colour 1 (the second colour in the
palette)  from  grey to white by dragging the RGB sliders all the way to
the right.

Select  white  as  the  foreground  colour and then select the one pixel
brush  and  the  Airbrush  tool.    Move  the cursor over to the distant
mountain range and spray a snowcap on it.

Because  every colour except that of the most distant mountain range has
been  locked,  you  can  spray without fear of splattering any adjoining
colours.

Note  that  although the white you are spraying on the mountain range is
onc of the locked colors, it is not itself locked while you are applying
it.   This means that you can paint over it with another colour (such as
the  final  colour  of  the  mountain, if you don't like the look of the
snowcap) redo as though it were unlocked.

To  lock  a  recently  applied  colour, just select Stencil>Remake.  You
don't  need  to  display  the  Stencil  requester  again,  because   the
configuration is still as you want it.  This also means that you can use
the "Again" key (a) to update your stencil, if Remake was your last menu
command

Tip
The  Again  rule  is  simple:  press  a  whenever you want to repeat the
immediately  preceding  menu command, to save you moving the mouse up to
the  Menu  Bar  and through menu and submenu options.  If your last menu
command  produced  a  requester,  then pressing a will produce that same
requester, without the need for menu selections.

Sunrise in the Rockies

In  this exercise, we make the sun rise behind the mountains, so we need
to lock every colour except the sky.  Here's how:

Display the Make Stencil requester (Colour 8 should be the only unlocked
colour  in  the  requester).    Now  click Colour 8 to lock it, and then
click.   Colours 0 (black) and 12 through 16 (the sky colours) to unlock
them.  (Colour 12 is halfway down the second column, and Colour 16 is at
the top of the third column).  Click Make.

You have now locked every colour in the landscape except the sky colours
Now let's make the sun rise:

Choose Stencil>On/Off from the Effect menu to turn the stencil off.

In Deluxe Paint V your stencil affects picking up a brush - you can only
pick  up  areas that are not in the stencil.  Since the orange shades in
the  sun are part of the stencil, you turned off the stencil momentarily
to pick up that area of the picture.

Click  the  Brush  Selector,  move  the large cross hair over to the sun
image  (on  the  far  right  of the screen) and pick it up with the left
mouse button.  Move the brush over to the mountain range.

Choose Stencil>On/Off from the Effect menu to turn the stencil on.

Did  you  see  the sun move behind the mountains and then peek through?
This  is because every colour except the sky colours and the back ground
is  locked,  and  so  will  not accommodate the sun brush.  When you are
satisfied  with  the placement of the sun, click to stamp an image of it
there.

Cutting some Z's

In  this  exercise  we  will  explore  further aspects of Deluxe Paint's
powerful  stencil editor.  In particular, you'll see how to turn stencil
colours on and off from any part of your picture, not just from the Make
Stencil requester.

(Display  the  Make  Stencil  requester  and  click  Clear  to clear the
stencil.   Now move the cursor outside the requester and click the large
Z  shape.    Click  Invert and then click Make to return to the painting
screen.

Did  you  notice  that when you clicked the Z the Make Stencil requester
responded  by  locking  that  colour?   This means that you can lock and
unlock  colours  directly  from  your image just by clicking them.  Note
that  clicking  with  the left mouse button adds a colour to the stencil
and  clicking  with  the  right  mouse  button deletes a colour from the
stencil.    And  to make it easy to find the colours you want to lock or
unlock,  you  can  move  the  Make  stencil requester to any part of the
screen  just  by moving the cursor to the top of the requester, pressing
the left mouse button, and dragging it to a new position.

Now let's see what we can do with the stencil we just created:

Press the ' (accent grave/tilde) key to turn off the stencil.

Pressing  ' is the same as choosing Stencil>On/Off from the Effect menu.
This  is a very important keyboard equivalent for working with stencils.

Click  the  Brush Selector and pick up the textured area to the right of
the Z.

Press ' to turn on the stencil.

Move the cursor over to the Z and watch what happens.

Did  you  see  the  textured brush appear behind the Z?  Because all the
colours  except  the  Z  are  locked,  it  looks like you're viewing the
textured  brush  through  a  Z  shaped  window.   Now when you place the
textured  brush  behind  the  Z  and click, you will fill the Z with the
textured pattern.

Fixing the Background

By  using  a  combination of stencils and fixing the background, you can
define  a  stencil  by area rather than colour.  This lets you confine a
stencil  to  a  particular area of the page, without forcing you to lock
every instance of a particular colour.  Let's take a closer look:

Make  sure  the  stencil is off and then pick up the small clump of pine
trees  from  the  right  hand  side  of the page.  From the Effect menu,
choose Background>Fix.

You  have just fixed the picture to the background (the "B" in the Title
Bar  tells you so), which means you can always return to that picture by
clicking CLR.  Thus, you can stamp pine trees all over the landscape and
then  return  to the original picture at any time.  You can also fix the
background  successively, updating the picture from the previous "fix".
(As  we  saw  earlier,  you  can  use  the "Again" key (a) to repeat the
immediately preceding menu command).

For  the  purpose  of this exercise, go ahead and stamp at few clumps of
pine  trees in front of the closest mountain range.  Now let's turn that
collection of pine trees into a stencil:

From the Effect menu, select Background>Lock FG.

This last action turned the foreground (ie.  everything you added to the
picture  since  fixing  the  background)  into  a  stencil  but  without
affecting  any  other  part of the picture that uses those same colours.
Try  it  and  see your pine tree bush over to the pine forest and you'll
see  that your stencil goes behind the forest but in front of everything
else.    You can remove the stencil either by turning the stencil off or
making a stencil by locking colours.

The  colour and area methods are mutually exclusive, so using one method
automatically  negates  the  other.    And  as  is the case with regular
stencils,  clicking  CLR  does  not  clear  the  stencilled area - it is
protected until you turn it off just like the fixed background.

Painting a Stencil

A  more  powerful way to define a stencil by area is to "print" it.  You
can  do  this  with  Deluxe  Paint V's Stencil>Paint option.  Painting a
stencil  can  be  invaluable  for  protecting  areas that are not easily
defined  by  colour.    In  the  next  few  steps  we'll show you how to
"cookie-cut"  an area of your image to create the first of the two logos
in the StencilSet image.

At  this  point  you should still be working with the StencilSet picture
from the exercise above.  If you still have Fixed Background active from
the previous exercise, choose Background>Free from the Effect menu.

Choose  Stencil>Make  from the Effect menu.  Click Clear and Make in the
requester to clear your stencil.

When  you  use  Stencil  Paint,  you  can  either  add  to  an  existing
colour-based  stencil  or  you  can start from scratch.  When you choose
this  option.   Deluxe Paint calculates the stencil based on the colours
that  are  selected  in the Make Stencil requester and then presents you
with  a  screen  that you can use to add or subtract areas from.  So, to
start  from  scratch, you need to clear the Make Stencil requester as we
did above.

In  the  next  few steps, you'll pick up a brush to print in the stencil
with  and turn on Stencil Paint to paint down your stencil.  Then you'll
reverse the stencil and pick up a new brush.

Click the Brush Selector tool and pick up the red, yellow and green logo
as a custom brush.

Choose Stencil>Paint from the Effect menu.

In  a  moment,  your image is dimmed and a lower case "s" appears in the
Menu Bat to show that you are in Stencil Paint mode.

Move your brush over to the mountain range so that the sunrise is in the
lower part of the circle and click with the left mouse button.

Painting  with  the left mouse button adds to the stencil (which you see
as  lighter  colours) and painting with the right mouse button subtracts
from the stencil.  By clicking down your brush, you created a stencilled
area that is the shape of the brush.  Now exit Stencil Paint and reverse
the stencil.

Choose Stencil>Paint to turn off the mode and create your stencil.

It's important to correctly turn off the Stencil Paint mode the same way
you entered it.  If you try to use other options while in Stencil Paint,
Deluxe  Paint  may  turn off the mode for you, but there is no guarantee
that in those instances it will save the changes to the stencil.  If you
think  you'll  be  using  this feature a lot, you should get used to the
keyboard equivalent: Ctrl-s.

Choose  Stencil>Reverse  to reverse your stencil so that all areas exept
the logo shaped area of the mountain range is protected.

Choose  the Brush Selector tool.  Pick up the mountain range as a brush.
And press the ' (accent grave) key to turn off the stencil.

Now  you  should  be  holding a brush like the first of the logos in the
StencilSet.

With  a  little  creativity  you  can  combine Stencil Paint and the new
gradient  fills  we  showed  you  earlier  in the chapter to create some
stunning effects.

Stencils in HAM

When  you're  working  in  HAM  or  24  bit backing store mode, the Make
Stencil  requester  is  a  bit  different  from the one you see in other
modes.  This requester doesn't attempt to show you which of the possible
colours  you  have  locked.  Instead, it gives you powerful ways to lock
colours  individually  or  based on a tolerance level.  It then lets you
view  the  stencil  as  you would by choosing Stencil>Show.  In the next
pages  we'll  take  a  quick  look  at  the features of the Make Stencil
requester in HAM mode.

Due  to  the  heavy  computational  and  memory requirements of the Make
Stencil  option  in HAM, this feature will be somewhat slow on lower-end
Amigas.   If your Amiga has no more than 2MB of RAM or 512K of Chip RAM,
we  recommend  that you use the Stencil>Paint feature to create stencils
in HAM.  However, if you are patient you might want to work through this
section: it might be just the thing for you.

Before we begin:

Choose Screen format from the file menu and change your screen format to
Lo-Res 320x200 HAM.

If you don't already have the StencilSet picture loaded, load it now and
choose NO to converting to the Screen format of the file.

Choose  Stencil>Make  from  the  Effect menu.  You'll see a Make Stencil
requester like the one in Figure 4.18.

The  Clear,  Invert,  Make  and Cancel buttons in this requester perform
essentially  the  same function as they do in the Make Stencil requester
in  other  modes.    The  important new concepts we want to show you are
Show, Fine Tune, and Tolerance.

Tolerance

The  tolerance setting lets you click on a single colour in your picture
and  simultaneously lock (or unlock) all "similar" colours in the image.
The  tolerance number determines how different a colour can be and still
be  considered  "similar"  to  the  one you clicked on.  A low Tolerance
number requires that the colours be very similar, while a high Tolerance
number  locks  colours  that  may  be very different from the colour you
clicked.    The  range  of  Tolerance  values  runs  from 0 to 48.  At 0
tolerance,  only  colours  rhat are identical to the colour you click on
will be affected.  At 48 tolerance, all colours will be affected.

TECHNICAL NOTE
Tolerance is calculated in the RGB cube colour space.  Each increment of
tolerance  represents  a  change  of  1  on any of the RGB values of the
colour you clicked on.

To  see  how tolerance works in a practical application, we'll use it to
lock the green colours in the StencilSet image.  When you first open the
Make  Stencil  requester, Tolerance is set at 4.  We'll leave it at four
as we choose our first colour.

Move the cursor down to the bottom of the green grass area of the sunset
image and click once on the lightest green.

Click  on a colour with the left mouse button tells Deuxe Paint that you
want  to  lock  that  colour.    Notice that the colour appears in a box
beside  the  Tolerance  option and a black "lock" bracket appears beside
the  colour  to  show  that you have locked it.  You could click Make to
exit  the  requester  with your stencil, but instead, we'll use the Show
button to confirm that we locked the colours we wanted.

Click the Show check box to show your stencil.

After  a  moment  of  calculations, Deluxe Paint will dim your image and
show your stencil as lighter areas in the imagejust as if you had chosen
Show  from  the Stencil sub-menu.  You'll see that many more greens than
the  one  you  clicked  on  are  stencilled.    But  not  all greens are
stencilled,  because  your tolerance was set to only 4.  You'll also see
that  part  of  the green triangle from the Electronic Arts logo and the
green of the trees is also stencilled.

Now suppose that you actually wanted to select more greens than the ones
that were stencilled in this first attempt.  You can do this in two ways
either  click on another green that is not stencilled to lock it and all
colours  to  it or increase the tolerance setting.  Let's try the latter
method now.

Click  in  the  tolerance  edit field to the right of the number 4, back
space to delete it, and change the number to 8.  When you press Enter or
click  outside  the  requester,  Deluxe Paint automatically recalculates
your  stencil, and after a moment it shows you your stencil with the new
tolerance value.

Now you'll see that two thirds of the greens are selected in your image.

If you need to select a large area of your image quickly, high tolerance
numbers  can  help  you  a lot.  However, to get that help you sacrifice
some  control  over  which  colours  get stencilled.  Of course, you can
always  go  back  and  adjust  the  stencil with the Fine Tune option as
you'll see below.

Fine Tuning the Stencil

Now  that  you've  seen  how to add to the stencil and use the Tolerance
setting,  we'll  take  a  quick  look at fine tuning the stencil.  We're
going  to  use Fine Tune to subtract a colour from your stencil, but you
can also use Fine Tune to add colours to the stencil.

Click the Fine Tune option to turn it on.

Activate  the  screen  by left clicking on one of the greens not in your
stencil.

Move  the  cursor  over  to the middle of the stencilled grass and click
with the right mouse button to subtract a colour.

Deluxe  Paint  recalculates your stencil and shows your stencil with the
colour removed.

Fine  Tune  lets you add or subtract single colours from your locked set
without  having to change the tolerance level.  Fine Tune always adds or
substracts  only  the  colour  you  click  on,  though you are certainly
welcome to click on wharever colours you like.

Tutorial Six: Textures and Media

Deluxe  Paint  and  its  creator have always tried to bring the best and
latest  computer  graphics trends to all Amiga users.  One of the latest
trends  has  been  to  emulate  natural media printing and compositing.
Every  major computer platform has a print program that emulates natural
media.  We are the first commercial Amiga program to bring natural media
painting  and  effects  to  all  Amiga  users, and no special additional
hardware or files are needed.  In this section you will learn how to use
textured  backgrounds,  media  libraries  and  how to best combine these
tools  with  other  Deluxe  Paint  features  to  create some interesting
natural looking artwork.

Switch Screen format to Lo Res HAM.

Load  the  file TextureMap.Lores from the Picture drawer of the Examples
disk.

Click No if the program asks you to change modes

Select Palette>Default Palette from the Colour Menu.

Your map should turn to two shades of grey and black.

Open the Ranges colour panel or press Ctrl-c

Click to range 2, then press the CLEAR button if there is a range defined.

Select the light blue colour in your palette (colour 10) and place it in
the left most bead line.

Slide the Range slider below the bead line all the way to the right.

Select the purple colour in your palette (colour 13) and place it on the
right most bead line.

You  should  now  have  a gradient that goes from light aqua colour to a
deep purple colour.

Click OK to close the ranges colour panel.

Now  let's  create  a  stencil  to  lock  out the continent when we do a
gradient rectangle fill.

Select Stencil>Make from the Effects menu or press the - key to bring up
the Make Stencil requester

Click the Fine Tune check box, and left click on any continent (the dark
grey colour)

Click  on  the  Make button in the requester to create a stencil for the
continents.

Select  Texture>On/Off  from  the  Effect  menu.   (When you select this
choice  for  the  first  time  in  your  work session, Deluxe Paint will
automatically  bring  up the Load Texture window and turn on the texture
for  you  once  it is loaded).  Select the Brush Stroke texture from the
textures  directory  of  the  Media  disk.    You  now  have  a textured
background loaded into memory.

Right  click  on  the  Filled  Rectangle  tool to bring up the Fill Type
requester

Choose  the  standard  Vertical Fill and the Smooth Dither gradient Make
sure the blue gradient you created is the current gradient.  Click OK to
choose the filled rectangle tool.

Press F10 to turn off the Menus and Toolbox

Take  your  cursor  and  create a filled rectangle from the bottom right
corner  of your image to the top left corner of your image.  In a moment
you will see that Deluxe Paint has allowed you to create a textured fill
with  a gradient.  You need not combine the texture with a gradient, but
as  you  can  see  the  effect  is a very nice one.  You can repeat this
process  one  or  two more times and Deluxe Paint will act as if you are
building up layers of paint on a textured background.

You  won't  need  your  stencil anymore, so choose Stencil>Free from the
Effect Menu.

Select  Texture>Load  from  the  Effect  menu  and load the EmbossedHair
texture file.

Press  F10  to  turn  on the toolbar if it isn't on already.  Select the
light green colour in your toolbox palette.

Bring  up  the Fill Type requester by right clicking on the fill tool or
pressing  F  (Shift-f).    Choose  Solid and click OK to choose the Fill
tool.

Click  on  the continent of Africa with the Fill tool.  You should see a
hair-like texture fill the area you clicked on.

Choose  another  colour,  load  up  another  texture  and   fill another
continent  or  go  on to the next step when you are ready - don't let us
interrupt your creative endeavours.

Press  j to swap to the spare page or select Spare>Swap from the Picture
Menu.

Load  the  WorldMap.Lores  file  from the Picture drawer of the Examples
disk.  Click No at the change format message.

Press  j to swap back to your TextureMap image.  Load the Wall file from
the textures drawer of the Media disk.

Turn on translucency (Alt-t). It should be set to 50% by default.

Select Rub Thru from the Mode Menu.  Press F10 to turn off the menus and
toolbar.

Select the sketch tool (press s) and start rubbing through part of North
America.  Because you have translucency on you are not rubbing through a
full  opaque  image only 50% of the image (or whatever your translucency
settings  are)  rubs  through.   The amount rubbed through is also being
affected  by the texture currently loaded.  You can turn off the texture
to  see  the difference in how it reacts as you paint.  You can also try
different  combinations of having the translucency off, process on, etc.


Select Colour from the Mode menu or press F2.

Now  let's see what effect media types have on images.  Please note that
media  type libraries will not work by themselves, they require that you
have a texture loaded into Deluxe Paint V.

Select  Media>Open...  from the Effect menu and load the file Chalk from
the media drawer of the media disk.

Choose  the Sketch tool or your preferred drawing tool and start drawing
some lines on the screen.  You'll notice that you get a slow build-up of
colour  depending  on  what  your current colour is and what texture you
have loaded.  Change your foreground colour and draw again.

Load the felttip media library as you did the chalk one.  Drawing on the
screen  with  this media library will affect the colours underneath your
brush  more  rapidly  than  the  chalk brush, and the colours under your
brush  will  lean  to dark values very quickly, just as a dirty felt tip
pen going over other colours would.

The other media libraries will give you different effects.  Oil will mix
much  more  with  the  colours  underneath  your  brush just like an Oil
Pastel.   Water colour will give you a soft textured tint of the current
foreground colour.

Experiment  with  these  and any other media libraries, we've made Media
libraries  and  Textures  as flexible and customisable as possible.  The
combina  tions  of effects in Deluxe Paint V are endless, so be creative
and  experiment  with  as much of the program as you can.  With a little
practice you'll be creating digital masterpieces in no time.

Tutorial Seven: Using Macros

In  the  following  tutorial, you'll learn how to record your actions as
macros.    Once  you record a macro, you can save it to a file, edit it,
and  execute  it as many times as you need.  Macros are great timesavers
for repetitive tasks.

Recording Your Actions

The Record Macro command lets you record your keyboard and mouse actions
and save them as a macro you can execute from the User menu

Menu Commands

Sure,  Deluxe  Paint has many keyboard shortcuts, but there are probably
some  menu  commands  that you use frequently that don't have a built in
keyboard  shortcut.    You  can  create  your  own  macros  to  bring up
requesters  at the touch of a button.  Let's create a macro for bringing
up the Load Media requester.

Choose  Record  Macro  from  the  Macro  menu.    Your  actions are auto
matically  recorded  from the time you select this menu command (and the
menu  item is checked while recording) to the moment you reselect Record
Macro.

Choose  Effect>Media>Open  to  open  the Load Media requester.  Select a
Media  file  if you wish to open one; otherwise click Cancel (it doesn't
matter which action you take for the purposes of our macro)

You  can  record your mouse and keyboard actions when using Deluxe Paint
menus and requesters, but you can't record file specific actions such as
opening  a Media file.  That's why it doesnt matter whether you click OK
or Cancel in the preceding step.

Choose Macro>Record Macro again to stop recording the macro.  The Assign
Macro requester appears.

Select macro slot Macro #1 and press OK.

To  test  the macro you just created, select User>Macro #1 (or type A-1)
thc  Load  Media  requester appears.  You just created a macro!  For the
remainder of your Deluxe Paint session, you can type A-1 to bring up the
Load Media requester without having to select it from the Effect menu.

Automatic Signature

Let's  try  something  a  little  more  fun.    How about recording your
signature so you can automatically put your signature on a painting?

Make  sure  that  the  Record  Details  option  in the Macro menu is not
checked  (it  is  checked  by  default) this will reduce the size of our
macro file.

Choose Record Macro from the Macro menu

Click  on  the  smallest  brush in the toolbox (the 1-pixel brush in the
upper left corner).

Write your name in the lower right corner of the screen.

Choose Macro>Record Macro again to stop recording the macro.  The Aasign
Macro requester appears.

Select macro slot Macro #2 and press OK.

Clear  the  screen,  and  then select User>Macro #2 (or type A-2).  Your
signature is written on the lower right corner of the screen.

Recording  your  signature is hardly the most useful task you can assign
to  a  macro.  Try recording and saving actions such as drawing a figure
and then cutting it out as a brush.

Saving And Loading Macros

Now that we've recorded a couple of macros, let's experiment with saving
and loading macros.

Saving a Macro

The  macros  you've  created so far are stored only in RAM - if you exit
the  program,  they will be lost.  Let's save the first macro to disk so
we can permanently assign it to a macro slot.

Select  Save  As...    from  the  Macro  menu.  The Save Macro requester
appears.

Click  the  Macro  #1 radio button, and then click OK.  A standard Amiga
save requester appears.

Type  the filename LoadMedia.dprx in the File text gadget.  (Macro files
should use the .dprx extension).  Click OK to save the file.

Loading a Macro

After  you  save  a  macro  to disk, you can assign it to any of the ten
macro  slots.    If you save your preferences to disk before exiting the
program,  any  assigned  macro  files  will automatically be loaded into
their respective slots.  Thus, you can keep up to ten macros assigned to
the  keyboard  shortcuts  A-1-  A-0  at  any one time.  In the following
exercise, we'll load the macro file we just created into the first macro
slot.

Select  Load...  from the Macro menu.  The Load Macro requester appears.

You may notice that our LoadMedia.dprx file is in fact already placed in
the  Macro #1 slot.  Deluxe Paint automatically places the macro file in
the  appropriate  slot  when  you  save a macro.  But we'll pretend that
you're loading a macro file from the beginning.

Each  of  the  ten  macro  slots  has a question mark (?) to its right.
Clicking  this  button  brings  up  an Amiga file load requester for the
respective  macro  slot.  Click the button to the right (of Macro #1.  A
Load Macro file load requester appears.

Double  click  on  the  file  LoadMedia.dprx.  The macro file we created
above is selected, and you return to the Load Macro requester.

Click OK to accept the macro assignment

You have now created a permanent macro file and assigned it to the first
macro  slot.    However,  if you quit the program now, no macros will be
assigned when Deluxe Paint is restarted.  If you want to save your macro
assignments permanently, choose Prefs>Save to save all your Deluxe Paint
preferences settings as tooltypes.

Only  macro  files  that  have been assigned to macro slots are saved as
tooltypes.    If  a  macro has been created in memory but not saved to a
file  and  assigned  to  a slot, the macro will be lost even if you save
your preferences before you exit Deluxe Paint.

In this tutorial you've learned how to record your actions and save them
to macro files that can be assigned to keyboard shortcuts.  However, you
can  do  much  more  with ARrexx macro files than simply record and play
back  your  actions.    You  can  also write your own macro scripts from
scratch, or edit macro files recorded in Deluxe Paint.  See the Appendix
F for more on the world of ARexx macros.

This  section  explaines  Deluxe   Paints   powerful   Perspective mode.
Perspective  lets  you  paint  in  three dimensions, which can give your
pictures a true feel ing of depth.  perspective is a complex feature, so
we  strongly  recommend that you become familiar with the program before
you  venture  into  this  area.  We've tried to make this explanation as
clear  as  possible,  but be sure that the steps we list assume that you
understand other program features.

Three Dimensional Model

When  you paint in Perspective mode, you are working with a three-dimen-
sional  representation of the two dimensional space that is available on
your  screen.    To  visualise this model it might help to think of your
computer screen as the front side of a box.

Usually,  when  you  paint,  the  mouse  moves  your  brush  in only two
directions;  horizontally  and vertically.  But when you move and rotate
your  brush in Perspective mode, you add a third direction to the motion
backward  and  forward.   To move the brush into the distance or towards
you, you'll move it on the Z axis of th system shown above.

You'll  learn  more  about  the coordinate system later in this chapter.
For  now  just  remember  that  in  its  default  settings,  the  screen
coordinates  operate  as shown in Figure 5.1; the axis runs horizontally
across  the  screen,  the  Y  axis  runs  vertically and the Z axis runs
backward into the screen

Rotating a Brush in 3D Space

The  key to working in Perspective is rotating the brush.  In this brief
section,  we'll  show  you  how  to  rotate your brush using the numeric
keypad.  Before you begin, you need a brush to rotate.

Load the Dolphin brush from the Media disk.

If  you are NOT in HAM, choose Palette>Use Brush Palette from the Colour
menu.  If you are in HAM, move to the next step.

After you have a brush, you can enter Perspective mode.

Choose  Perspective>Do  from  the  Effect  menu to enter the Perspective
mode.

A  small  cross hair appears in the middle of the screen to indicate the
Perspective  Centre  (or  line of view), and your brush is enclosed in a
wire  frame  with  a large cross-hair over it.  In our example, you will
also see three zeros on the right half of the Title Bar.  These indicate
the  current  rotation  angles  of the brush.  The numbers are all zeros
because we haven't rotated the brush yet.

The  cross  hair  on your brush makes any brush rotations easier to see,
and  it  will  help  you  position  the brush when it changes sizes.  An
important  feature  of  the  cross hair is that it indicates the X and Y
axes  of  the  brush.  The Z axis of the brush runs perpendicular to the
other  two  axes,  just  like the screen's Z axis.  Figure 5,3 shows the
Brush axis system.

To  rotate  the  brush, use the numeric keypad on the right side of your
keyboard.  Figure 5.4 shows how each of the keys rotates the brush.

All  numerical  keystrokes  in  Perspective  mode  refer  to the numeric
keypad.    You'll use the keypad to rotate images.  Sometimes you'll use
the Shift key in combination with the keypad to rotate an object a fixed
number of degrees (more about this in Angle Step, below).

We'll  try each of the rotations in the next few steps so you get a feel
for  moving in 3D.  We'll start off with the simplest rotation, that is,
a rotation on the Z axis with the brush in its normal 0,0,0 orientation.
This  is  the  simplest rotation, because no part of the brush moves off
the plane of your computer screen.

Hold down 2 on the keypad for about 5 seconds.

The  Dolphin  disappears  and  the  wire  frame rotates clockwise on its
centre  (the  position  of  the  pointer).  Notice that the third number
along  the  right  side  of  the Title Bar has increased as the rotation
angles increased.  Figure 5.5 illustrates rotation on the Z axis.

Press  1  repeatedly until the numbers along the right side of the Title
Bar show 0, 0, 0 as the brush rotation.

When  the  brush  is  back  to the 0,0,0 position, the Dolphin reappears
inside  the  frame.  This is a handy visual cue that the brush is at its
orientation.    Later,  when  you  begin  moving  the   brush   in three
dimensional  space,  you'll see that the same rule applies to movement -
if  the  brush  is  back  on  its original plane it reappears inside the
frame.

Displaying  the brush is dependent on memory availability your brush may
not  appear  even  when  in  its  original orientation if it is large or
memory availability is low.

Rotating  on  the other axes works just like rotating on Z, but when you
rotate  on  the  other axes, the brush moves off the plane of the screen
and  into  the third dimension.  Let's see how this works by rotating on
X.

Move  (don't  drag)  the  brush  to the lower left corner of the screen.
Hold down 7 on the keypad.

When the brush frame has rotated to about -45 dgrees, release the 7 key,
and click to paint the brush.

As you rotate the brush on the X axis, it appears as though the top half
of  the  brush is turning into the screen and the bottom half is turning
outward.    As  a  result,  your painted brush is set at an angle to the
screen as shown in Figure 5.6.

To return your brush to its original orientation, press 0.

Resetting the Brush Rotation

The  last  step introduced an important keystroke.  Any time you need to
reset  the  brush  to  its original orientation of 0,0,0, press 0 on the
keypad.   If you get lost in the world of 3D, you can always get back to
the beginning with this simple keystroke.

The Angle Step

To rotate on the Y axis, you use 4 and 5 on the keypad.  This time we'll
use the Shift key to rotate by a larger increment, automatically.

Move  your brush to the lower right corner of the screen.  Hold down the
Shift  key  and  press 4 on the keypad.  Your brush instantly rotates 90
degrees on the Y axis.  Click to paint the brush.

Press 0 on the keypad to return to the brush to its original orientation.

When  you  use  the  Shift  key  with  one of the keypad keys, the brush
rotates  by  the  Angle Step.  The default Angle Step is 90 degrees, but
you can change it to any angle you like in the Perspective requester.

Choose  Perspective>Settings  from  the  Effect  menu  to   display this
requester,  or right click on the Grid tool while you are in Perspective
mode.

When using perspective, 90 degrees is the most common angle, so leave it
there for now.

Click OK to return to the painting screen.

Rotation around the Handle

When  you  rotate  a  brush  in  Perspective, the rotation always occurs
around the brush handle to the preceding examples, the brush was held by
the  centre  (the  default  position),  so the rotations always occurred
around  the  centre  of the brush.  Let's look at the difference between
rotation  around the centre and rotation around the corner of the brush.

Click  CLR  to  clear the screen.  Position the brush near the middle of
the screen.  Hold down the Shift key and press 2 on the keypad to rotate
90  degrees  on  the  Z axis.  Press Shift 2 three more times to set the
brush back to 0,0,0 or press 3 on the keypad to reset the Z axis.

You've  seen  this  rotation before, but we had you repeat it to compare
this with rotation around the corner of the brush.

Keep the brush in the same location. Press Alt-x on the keyboard.

This moves the brush so that it is held by the lower right corner.  Note
the  position  of  the  arrow  cursor.  You can also do this by choosing
Handle>Rotate from the Brush menu.

Press Shift-2 to rotate the brush around the new handle position.

Figure 5.8 illustrates the difference between rotation around the centre
and rotation about the corner.

So  far  in  our discussion of brush rotations, we've always rotated the
brush  on  one of the two possible coordinate systems.  If you look back
to  Figure  5.7,  you'll  see  that  below Angle Step in the Perspective
requester  there  is  an item labelled Type with two buttons: Screen and
Brush.    We've  been  rotating in the Screen coordinate system.  In the
next  few  steps,  we'll  demonstrate  the  difference  between  the two
rotation systems.

INFORMATION

If  you  are  familiar with rotation systems, you'll recognise that this
Screen coordinate system is based on Euler angles.

Before  beginning  this  brief  example, make sure your screen is clear.
When it is:

Choose  Handle>Rotate  from  the  Brush  menu (or press Alt-x until your
handle  is  at  the  centre);  and  press  o  to reset your brush to its
original orientation.

To  make  this example clearer, it will help if the Angle Step is set to
something other than 90 degrees.  In the next step we'll have you change
it to 45 degrees.

Choose  Perspective>Settings  from  the  Effect menu (or right click the
Grid icon) to display the Perspective requester.

Click in the right side of the Angle Step edit field, backspace to erase
the 90 setting and type 45.  Click OK to close the requester and use the
new setting.

Now let's try a rotation in the screen coordinate system:

Position  your  brush  in  the  lower  left corner of the screen.  Press
Shift-2 to rotate 45 degrees on the Z axis.  Now press Shift-7 to rotate
-45 degrees on the X axis.

Click to paint the brush down.

Notice  that when you rotated the brush on the X axis, the Screen's axis
was  used.   The brush's X axis was tilted sideways, but the brush still
rotated back ward into the screen.  Also notice that the rotation angles
appear in the Title Bar.

NOW we change see the difference.

Right  click  the Grid tool to display the Perspective requester.  Click
the button labelled Brush and click OK.

Press 0 to reset your brush to its original orientation.

Position  the  brush  in  the  lower  right corner of the screen.  Press
Shift-2 to rotate 45 degrees on the Z axis.  Now press Shift-7 to rotate
45 degrees (or the X axis.

Click to paint the brush down.

In  the  Brush coordinates system, rotations always take place about the
brush axes, regardless of the current orientation of the brush.  In this
example,  the  X  axis  was  positioned  diagonally after you rotated 45
degrees  on  the  Z axis; as a result, the brush rotated on the diagonal
axis instead of rotating straight backward into the screen.

You'll  also  notice  that the angles shown in the Title Bar are not the
angles that you rotated.  The Title Bar always shows the rotation angles
for  the  Screen  coordinate  system.  This allows you to reproduce your
brush  rotation  by  switching to Screen angles and rotating the amounts
indicated in the Title Bar.

Deluxe  Paint  offers  both  Screen  and  Brush  coordinate  systems for
rotation, because each of the systems has unique merits:

The Screen coordinates system is often consistent with the notion of the
three  screen  coordinates defining the 3D space.  More importantly, the
Screen coordinates system is reproducible: you can jot down the rotation
numbers  in the Menu Bar and reproduce the same brush orientation simply
by  rotating  to the same angles.  The results of multiple rotations are
the same no matter what order you rotate in.

The  Brush  coordinates system is usually easier to visualise if you are
rotat  ing  at  angles  other  than  90.  So you can usually produce the
desired  brush  orientation without much difficulty.  Unfortunately, the
cumulative  effect  of  separate  rotations  on  the  brush axes are not
reproducible  unless you make the exact same rotations in the exact same
order.    You'll  notice  that the angles given in the Menu Bar when you
rotate  using  the  Brush  coordinates  are  actually the angles for the
Screen coordinates system: this is so you will be able to reproduce your
brush rotation, though you will have to use Screen angles to do it.

Now  that  you've seen how to rotate your brush in three dimensions, the
next  section will show you the ins and outs of moving a brush around in
all three dimensions.

Moving in 3D Space

Before you begin this section clear the screen.

Choose  Perspective>Reset  from the Effect menu to reset all perspective
settings, including Angle Type, to their defaults.

Load  the  brush  named  Block.brush  from   the   Media   disk.  Choose
Palette>Use Brush Palette from the Colour menu.

Make sure you are in Perspective mode.

Moving on the Z axis.

When  your  brush  is in its original orientation (0, 0, 0), moving your
mouse moves your brush along the X and Y axes.  Try it right now:

Move your mouse forward and watch how your brush moves up on the screen.
Move  your  mouse  backward  and  your  brush  moves down on the screen.
Likewise,  moving the mouse left or right moves the brush left or right.

Because  your mouse can move in only two dimensions (the third direction
would  require  you  to lift it off the desk), it can move your brush in
only  two directions.  you can move your brush in the third dimension by
using the keyboard.  One method is to move the brush straight back along
the Z axis only:

Position  your  brush  in the lower left corner of the screen, hold down
the Shift key and press the quote key (") several times.

Each  time you press Shift-" the brush moves backward along the Z axis.
It  appears  as  though  the  brush is getting smaller but in fact it is
moving  away  from  the  front of the screen.  To move the brush forward
along the Z axis, you use the colon key(:).

Hold down the Shift key and press the colon key (:) once.

Notice  that  the  "  and : keys move the brush toward and away from the
cross  hair  in  the  middle of the screen.  This cross hair defines the
Perspective  Centre,  which is best thought of as the point of view.  No
matter  where  you  place the brush in the screen, if you move the brush
using  the  quote  key, the brush will move into the distance and toward
the Perspective Centre.

When you use Perspective, you'll often want to move your brush backwards
and  left  and  right  along  a  plane.  The effect is of a brush moving
across  the  floor.    Deluxe Paint lets you do this by holding down the
Ctrl key while in Perspective

Press 0 to reset your brush to its original position.

Position the brush near the bottom of the screen, hold down the Ctrl key
and move your mouse forward and backward.

With  the Ctrl key held down, the brush moves away along the Z axis when
you  move  the  mouse forward.  In this way you can easily move in the X
and Z axes instead of the usual X and Y axes.

3D Coordinates

Deluxe  Paint  V  lets  you  see  the  position  of your brush the three
dimensional  space  when you are in Perspective mode.  This is useful if
you need to align your brush precisely.

Press the \ key and look at what happens to the angles in the right side
of  the  Title  Bar.   Now hold down the Ctrl key and move the mouse for
ward and backward.

Pressing  the  \  key  toggles  the  Display  option  in the Perspective
requester between Angle and Pos (position)

Press the \ key again to return to displaying angles in the Title Bar.

Laying Down the Brush to move in 3D.

Another  way to move into the distance is to lay the brush down and then
move  it on its own Y axes.  Rotating the brush 90 degrees on its X axis
makes the brushes Y axes act like the screens Z axis.  Figure 5.11 shows
what happens to the different axes during perspective rotation.

Let's try it once to see how it works.

Press  0 to reset the brush to its original orientation and position the
brush in the lower left corner of the screen.

Press  Shift-keypad  7 to flop the brush down into the screen.  Now move
the mouse around.

You  will  quickly  discover  that moving the mouse forward and backward
moves  the  brush  into  the screen and back out instead of up and down.
This  is  because  the mouse moves the brush on the plane defined by the
brush's X and Y coordinates.

Move  the  brush to any new position and press Shift-keypad 8 to turn it
back up on end.  Paint the brush down.

Use  the  combination of Shift-keypad 7 and Shift-keypad 8 several times
until you are comfortable with how these keys help you move in the third
dimension.

Perspective Plane

You  might have noticed that when you flopped the brush down by rotating
on  its X axis, the brush moved on a plane below the Perspective Centre.
Remember  that  when  the brush is in its original 0,0,0 orientation, it
moves  on a plane that is roughly the equivalent of the computer screen.
When you rotate the brush, you change the orientation of the plane.  The
plane can be at almost any angle to Perspective Centre.  The easiest way
to see this is to fill the perspective plane you've defined.

Press  0 to reset your brush.  Position the brush so that your cursor is
at the bottom of the screen.

Press Shift-7 to rotate the brush on the X axis.

Choose  Perspective>FillScreen  from the Effect menu and watch as Deluxe
Paint fills the perspective plane with a pattern of your brush.

The results of this last step should look something like Figure 5.12

As  we  said,  you can set your perspective plane at almost any angle to
the  Perspective  Centre.    In the next step, we'll draw a plane to the
right  of  centre  with  the brush rotated sideways.  This will create a
"wall" on the right.

Press  0  to  reset  your  brush to its original orientation.  Place the
brush in the lower right corner of the screen.

Press Shift-4 to turn the brush into the screen.

Choose Perspective>FillScreen from the Effect menu.

Practice  creating  different  planes.   For example, position the brush
above perspective centre to create a "ceiling" from your brush.

The Perspective Horizon

The  position  of  perspective  centre  plays  an  important   role   in
determining  the  angle  of the plane to the viewer.  It also determines
the  horizon point.  The horizon point is the farthest edge of the plane
when  you  rotate a brush to 90 degrees.  To demonstrate how this works,
we'll  load  a  picture that has a horizon and fill the plane out to the
horizon.

Load  the  picture  Seascape   from   the   Examples   disk   and choose
Palette>Default Palette from the Colour menu.

You  might  remember this picture from the Guided Tour.  In the picture,
the  ocean stretches to a flat horizon on the right side.  We'll set our
Perspective Centre in line with this horizon and then fill a perspective
plane.

Choose  Perspective>Centre from the Effect menu.  Your cursor changes to
a large cross hair.

Position  the  cross hair so that it is halfway across the screen and so
the  horizontal line of the cross-hair lines up with exactly the horizon
in the picture.  Click to place the perspective centre.

Now load your Block.brush brush, and enter Perspective mode.

Press Shift-7 to rotate your brush 90 degrees.

Choose  Perspective>FillScreen  from  the  Effect  menu  to fill the per
spective plane.

When  you  are  done,  your screen should look like Figure 5.13.  Notice
that  the  horizon of your perspective plane exactly matches the horizon
of the original picture.

The Angle of the Plane

In  the example above, the perspective plane matches the horizon because
you rotated the brush by 90 degrees.  If you had rotated by more than 90
degrees  the  plane  would  not  reach  the horizon, as though the plane
sloped  downward  If  you  had rotated by less than 90 degrees the plane
would  extend  above  the  horizon  as  though  it  sloped upward like a
mountain.    It  is  difficult to see the differences unless you have an
existing  horizon  to  compare  the  plane  with.    Without an existing
horizon, the sloping of the plane will appear to be only a difference in
the  distance  between  the  position  of  the brush and the perspective
centre when the brush was rotated.

When you create a perspective plane, the position and angle of the plane
are determined by three things:

The position of the Perspective Centre.

The position of the brush handle (cursor) when you rotate the brush.

And the degree of rotation.

In  our  examples above, we rotated the brush in 90 degree increments so
the  plane was always either parallel to our point of view or at a right
angle.    If you want to create a sloping surface, you do so by rotating
the brush to an angle less than 90 degrees.  Here's a quick example:

Choose Perspective>Reset from the effect menu or press Shift-keypad 0.

Position  your  brush  so  that  the cursor is at the very bottom of the
screen.    Hold  down  7  on  the keypad until the brush has rotated -60
degrees on the X axis.

Move  the  mouse forward and backward to see how the brush moves on this
new plane.

You'll notice that the vanishing point of the brush is above the horizon
in  your picture, this is because the plane is not parallel to the point
of view.  It is as though you were looking at a gradual incline.

Putting Things in Perspective

We've  covered  the  fundamentals  of perspective.  Now it's time to put
what  you've  learned  into  practice.  In this exercise, we'll create a
perspective  land  scape  and build a three dimensional arch as shown in
Figure 5.14.  In the process you'll learn some of the tricks about using
perspective that you can only understand when you see them in context.

Creating the Plane

The  first  step  of our tutorial is to create a perspective plane.  You
don't  need  to  create  a  plane every time you use perspective.  We're
doing it here, so you can readily see the "depth" of your picture.

Load the Block.brush brush from the Media disk.

Notice that this brush is held by the lower right corner.  If you expect
to  use  a  brush  in Perspective, it is best to save the brush with the
handle in the lower right corner for two reasons:

1.    Rotations  always occur around the handle, so holding the brush in
the corner helps make the rotations consistent and useful.

2.    If  you  establish  a  Perspective  grid, you can make all of your
brushes conform to that grid if their handles are in the same corner.

Choose Coords (short for Coordinates) from the Prefs menu or press the |
key (Shift \)

Press the Enter key on the keypad to enter Perspective mode.

Position  the  cursor  at  196, 25 and press Shift-G, which turns on the
grid and uses 196, 25 as one of the grid points.

If  you  turn on Coordinates and take note of the cursor position before
you  rotate your brush, you'll be able to recreate the perspective plane
exactly.

Press Shift Keypad 7 to rotate the brush 90 degrees on X.

Notice  that at this point you don't have angles in your Title Bar.  You
can  turn  off  Coordinates if you want to see the angles, but you don't
need  them  for  this  exercise,  since  all  of our movements are on 90
degrees and based on sight, not numbers.

Choose Perspective>FillScreen from the Effect menu.

Building the Arch

Load the RedBlock brush from the Media disk.

A  this  point  you  are  no longer in Perspective mode, but the Grid is
still on.

Press the Enter key on the keypad to enter Perspective mode.

Your  brush  is  automatically laid down on the perspective plane in the
same orientation you left it in last (that is, rotated 90 degrees on the
X  axis)  This  is an important point to remember, because it means that
you  can  easily bring in new brushes at the right perspective simply by
loading  them with the per spective plane defined by the previous brush.

You'll  notice  that  the grid has been adjusted to your new brush size.
It  is  not  necessarily true that your new brush will line up currectly
with  the grid point you used to define the plane (196, 25), because the
brush  handle  is  tied  to  the  closest  grid  point  when  you  enter
perspective  and there is a three-in four chance that it will be tied to
one  of  the  other  corners.  If you want the brush to line up with the
grid  point  you  specified when you created the grid, press Keypad 0 to
reset  the  brush to 0, 0, 0 orientation, align the handle with the grid
point, and rotate the brush again.

If  you  don't  want  your  perspective  grid automatically sized to new
brushes, turn off the AutoGrid option in the Prefs menu.

Press  G  to  turn  off the Grid so you can move the brush freely on the
plane.

Position  the  brush so that the Y axis of the brush is aligned with the
Perspective  Centre and the bottom of the brush is aligned with the edge
of the second full row of tile on the floor.  (The coordinates will show
this point as 175, 46).

Press  Shift-G  to  turn on the grid and use your new handle position as
one of the grid points.

Press  Shift  Keypad  8  to rotate the brush up on the X axis.  Move the
brush  two  grid  points to the left and stamp it down.  Paint the brush
three times above the current brush position so you create the face of a
column.

Paint  the brush four times to the right to form the top of the arch and
the  top  of the right column.  Then paint the brush three times down to
form the right column.

At  this  point  you  have a two dimensional arch on a three dimensional
plane.  Our next task is to give the arch a third dimension.

Move  the  brush  so that it is directly on the bottom block of the left
column  of  your  arch.    Press  Shift Keypad 4 to rotate the brush -90
degrees  on  the y axis.  Paint the brush where it is and twice above to
form the left side of the column.

Move  the  mouse  a  bit to the right to move the brush back along its x
axis and paint another set of blocks so your column is one block wide at
the face and two blocks deep as shown in Figure 5.14.

Press  Shift  Keypad 5 to rotate the brush back on its Y axis so that it
is  facing you head on.  If the brush is not the same size as the facing
blocks  of your arch, hold down the Ctrl key and move the mouse for ward
or backward to bring it closer or move it back.

As  we  explained  in  Chapter  Five,  Using  Perspective,  the Ctrl key
temporarily  fixes  the  Y axis of your brush so that you can move it on
its Z axis.  As you become adept at painting in Perspective, you'll find
yourself using this key often.

Position  the  brush to the left of the bottom block of the right column
Press Alt-x to change the brush handle to the other side of the brush.

Your  brush  jumps  so  that  it  is  over the bottom block of the right
column,  but  the, brush is now held by the lower left corner.  Remember
that  Alt-x  repositions your brush handle.  This keyboard equivalent is
especially  useful while working in Perspective, since you usually don't
want to move your mouse to choose from the menu.

Press  Shift  Keypad  5  to  rotate  the brush 90 degrees on the Y axis.
Paint the brush where it is and twice above to form the left side of the
column Paint another column just behind this first one so your column is
one block wide at the face and two blocks deep.

Press  Shift  Keypad  4  to rotate the brush back on the Y axis.  If the
brush  is not the same size as the facing blocks of your arch, hold down
the Ctrl key and move the mouse forward or backward to bring it clos- er
or move it back.

Move  the brush up so that it is over the block in the upper left corner
of  the  arch.   Press Shift-Keypad 7 to rotate the brush -90 degrees on
the X axis.  Move the brush to the right and stamp it once below each of
the  three blocks that form the top of the arch.  Paint another row just
behind  this first row so the top of your arch is one block high and two
blocks deep.

Now  your  arch is complete and should look just like the arch in Figure
5.14.

Inserting the Seascape Picture

To give your perspective painting a bit more colour, and a landscape for
the  background,  we'll  load the Seascape picture and add it behind the
arch.

Choose  Spare>Swap  from  the Picture menu to display the spare page (or
press j).

Load the Seascape picture from the Picture drawer on your Examples disk.
Choose Palette>Default Palette from the Colour menu.

Jump back to your main page (press or choose Spare>Swap from the Picture
menu).

Choose Spare>Merge in back from the Picture menu.

In a flash, your arch has a nice seascape backdrop.

This  exercise gave you a quick example of perspective, but you can do a
lot  more.    For  an excellent example of perspective at work, load the
picture New Star-Hall on your Examples disk.

This  chapter introduces you to Deluxe Paint V's animation features.  It
begins  by explaining the basic model for animation and then covers such
as  the  different  ways  to  create  animations  with  the program.  We
recommend  that  you  work through this chapter in one sitting.  It will
take you approxi mately 45 minutes to complete.

Before You Begin

If  you've  been  experimenting  with  Deluxe  Paint  for a while before
starting  this  chapter  it would be a good idea to quit the program and
restart.   If you start the program fresh, there is less chance that the
results  you get from fol lowing our instructions will be different from
what we describe.

When the Choose Screen Format requester appears, select Lo-Res, 320x200,
and 32 colours, and click Use.

The Basic Model

The  basic  idea  behind  animation  in  Deluxe Paint is that instead of
having  a  single page to paint on, you have multiple pages that you can
paint on and flip through.  By creating images that differ slightly from
page  to page and then playing them back in rapid succession, you create
the illusion of motion

This section shows you how to:

Create frames for your animation
Paint on individual frames in the animation
Paint while the frames are flipping - this is called Animpainting
Use the Animation Control Panel

Creating Frames

The first step in building an animation is to create the frames to paint
on

Choose  Frames>Set  # from the Anim menu.  The Set Frame Count requester
appears.

Click in the count edit box, change the frame count to 10 and click OK.

You now have 10 frames to paint on.  Notice the numbers 1/10 at the left
side of the Title Bar.  This means you are positioned on the first frame
of a 10 frame animation.

Painting One Frame at a Time

The most basic way to create an animation is to paint on each successive
frame individually.

Select  the  largest  round  built-in brush and paint a dot in the upper
left area of your screen

The dot you just placed is on frame 1.  The trick of animation in Deluxe
Paint is to paint a slightly different picture on successive frames.  So
you need to move to the next frame.

Choose  Control>Next from the Anim menu to move to frame 2.  (Notice the
Title  Bar  shows  2/10).   Click another dot to the right of where your
first dot was.

Now  you have a dot on frame 1 and a dot on frame 2.  To create a series
of  dots  that  move across the screen, you just need to repeat the last
step.    You'll  notice  that  changing frames from the menu is a little
cumbersome,  and it forces you to move the mouse from the painting area.
It's  much  more efficient to move through the animation frames by using
the  keyboard  equivalents  (listed  in  the  menu  beside the options).
Follow  the  numbered  steps below and we'll use keyboard equivalents to
complete and play our little animation.

1.    Position  your  brush  just to the right of the dot you painted on
frame 2.

2.    Press  2  on  the keyboard once to advance to the next frame, then
click to paint a new dot.

3.    Repeat step 2, painting each dot to the right of the previous one,
until your first dot appears again in the left side of the screen.  (The
Title Bar will show 1/10 as your frame position).

You've just created a brief animation. Now let's play it.

4.  Choose Control>Play from the Anim menu (or press 4 at the top of the
keyboard).  You should see your dot moving from left to right across the
screen.

5. To stop the animation, press the space bar.

Animation Control Panel

Selecting  animation options from the Anim menu or using keyboard equiv-
alents  for those commands are only two of the ways Deluxe Paint has for
controlling  your  animations.   Those two methods are handy but perhaps
the  most  efficient  way  to  control  your  animation  is  through the
Animation Control Panel.

Select Control>Panel from the Anim menu

The  Animation  Control Panel appears at the bottom of the screen.  It's
use-  ful to have it visible while you work on your animation sequence.
If  you  want  to remove it while you're animating, choose Control>Panel
from  the  Anim  menu again.  (Notice that there are check marks next to
items when they're on; no check mark when they're off).

The  Control  Panel  contains a Frame slider, scroll arrows, and fifteen
control buttons for working through and playing with your animation.

Frame Slider

The Frame slider helps you keep track of where you are in your animation
sequence,  when you've hidden the Title Bar.  Even when the Title Bar is
showing  you  can  move to a specific frame by dragging the slider or by
click  ing  on  it.  One click to the left or right of the slider handle
moves the ani mation one frame.  Clicking on the scroll arrows will take
you to the first (left arrow) or last (right arrow) frame.

Anim Control Buttons

Play Backwards Continuously
Play  your  animation  sequence in a continuous loop, from last frame to
first frame.  Press the space bar or click to stop play.

Play Backward Once
Click  to  play  through your animation sequence one time, from the last
frame to frame 1.  Animation ends on the first frame.

Previous Frame
Click  to  move backward one frame.  Steps from the current frame to the
pre  vious frame in the animation sequence.  If the current frame is the
first framc in the sequence, the position is set to the last frame.

Next Frame
Click  to  move  forward one frame.  Steps the current frame to the next
frame in the animation sequence.  If the current frame is the last frame
in the sequence, the position is set to the first frame.

Play Forward Once
Click  to play through your animation sequence one time, from Frame 1 to
the last frame.  Animation ends on the last frame.

Play Forward Continuously
Play  your  animation sequence in a continuous loop, from first frame to
last frame.  Press the space bar or click to stop play.

Play Ping Pong
Plays  your  animation  sequence  continuously  as  above, but plays the
sequence  forward then backward then forward and so on.  Press the space
bar or click to stop play.

Add a Frame
Adds  a  frame  after  the current frame, and copies the contents of the
current  frame  to  it.  Press Ctrl while choosing this icon to bring up
the Add Frames requester.

Delete a Frame
Deletes  the  current  frame  and  makes the following frame the current
frame  (unless  you're  already  at  the  last frame).  Press Ctrl while
choosing this icon to bring up the Delete Frames requester.

You  can't  UNDO  a  delete command, so Deluxe Paint asks you to confirm
that you really want to delete a frame.

Repeat Last Go To
Takes  you  to  the  frame  last  defined  in  the Go To Frame requester
(default  =  frame 1) of your animation.  Press Ctrl while choosing this
icon to bring up the go To Frame requester.

The  LightTable  and  the four associated icons on the right side of the
Control Panel will be described later in this chapter.

Painting With Animation

You  saw above that one way to create an animation in Deluxe Paint is to
paint  on a series of frames individually.  For creating animations that
involve  simple  movement  of  an  object,  Deluxe Paint provides a much
easier  method  called  animpainting.    Essentially,  the   frames flip
automatically while you paint.

Right click CLR in the Toolbox. The Clear requester appears.

HINT
Left-clicking  on  CLR when there are animframes clears only the current
frame.

When  you  click  CLR  with  multiple frames, Deluxe Paint gives you the
option  of  clearing  only  the current frame, a range of frames in your
animation, or all frames.

Click All Frames in the requester. Click OK.

In a moment all of your frames are cleared and you are automatically set
back at frame 1.  Now let's do some animpainting.

Select the large round brush, and the Dotted Freehand tool

Hold  down the Alt key, and paint by holding down the left mouse but ton
and dragging across the screen from left to right.

As you paint, the frames flip automatically so you place only one dot on
each  frame  of  your  animation.   Notice that the frame counter in the
Title  Bar  changes  to  show what frame you are on.  When you reach the
last  frame  you  loop  back to frame 1, where you'll see your first dot
again.

The  Alt  key is your animpainting key.  If you hold down the Alt key at
the time you press the mouse button down, the animation frames will flip
with  each stamp of the brush so that you stamp only once on each frame,
Remember  that  you  only need to hold down the Alt key as you press the
mouse  button down.  Then you can release Alt to press other keys if you
need to.

After  you  have painted for a few seconds, stop and choose Control>Play
from the Anim menu or press 4 on the keyboard

You  can  also  use  the  Animation Control Panel to activate any of the
commands that are called for in this chapter.

Press the space bar or click to stop the animation

Now you know these basic elements of animation:

How to create frames,
How to move through the frames one by one and paint How to animpaint

Animpainting  is  especially  powerful  if you have an animated brush to
paint  with:  we'll  show  you  how  to create and use one later in this
chapter.  Right now we want to show you more ways to move objects on the
screen

Automatic Animation Using the Move Requester

The Move requester lets you automatically move and rotate a brush over a
number  of  animation  frames.  More importantly you can move and rotate
the  brush  in all three dimensions.  In essence, you are painting using
Perspective,  but  Deluxe  Paint  makes  all of the calculations for the
individual frames.

This  section  will  take  you  through  a  detailed explanation of each
feature  of  the  Move  requester  and  give  examples  for  most of the
features.

To  begin,  right  click  CLR  and  clear  All  Frames from the previous
animation sequence

Choose  Frames>Set  # from the Anim menu.  Change the frame count to 20,
and click OK.

Press Shift-1 to move to frame 1.

Load the brush DPaint Title from the Brush Drawer

Choose Palette>Use Brush Palette from the Colour menu.

These  instructions  assume  that your memory method (Method in the Anim
menu)  is  set  to  Compressed  -  the default setting.  Amigas with two
megabytes  of  RAM  can  create  only  9 to 10 frames using the Expanded
method.    You'll  find a brief description of the two memory methods in
Reference.

Simple Moves in Three Dimensions

The  Move  requester  does exactly what its name implies - it moves your
brush  on  the  screen.    There  are many impressive animations you can
create  with  only  the Move requester and a brush like our DPaint Title
brush,  but  to create those impressive animations, you need to know how
each  feature  of the Move requester works.  This brief section explains
the most basic Moves.

Stamp your brush in the centre of the screen.

Choose Move from the Anim menu. The Move requester appears.

The first row in the Move requester lists the three axes (X, Y and Z) in
the  three  dimensional  space of your screen.  If you are familiar with
Perspective  you  know  that these axes run left and right, up and down,
and  in  and  out  from  the  screen respectively.  Figure 6.7 shows the
orientation of the three axes to the screen.

Directly  below  the  X,  Y, Z letters there are edit boxes for entering
Distance  (Dist:)  numbers.  You enter numbers here to tell Deluxe Paint
how  far  to  move  your  brush  in  any  direction  or  combination  of
directions.    (If  your  brush  is moving only on the X and Y axes, the
numbers  are  equal  to  pixels, but once you move along the Z axis, the
units  are either smaller or larger than pixels).  Lets look at a simple
example:

Click in the Dist edit box below X and set the number to 200.

Make sure that the Count edit box (in the middle of the requester) shows
20  as  the current setting.  If the number is not 20, click in the edit
box and change the number.

Click Preview to see a preview of the movement of your brush.

You  will  see  your  brush  enclosed  in a wire frame move to the right
across  the  screen.    If  you want your brush to move to the left, you
enter a negative number for the X Distance.  Try it.

Set the X Dist edit box to -200. Click Preview.

This  time  your  brush  moves to the left across the screen.  A similar
rule  applies  to the other two axes: Y Distance moves your brush upward
if  the  number  is  positive and downward if the number is negative.  Z
Distance  moves  your  brush  out to the distance (away from you) if the
number  is  pos itive or inward to the screen (coming toward you) if the
number is negative

You  can  use  any combination of the three Dist edit boxes to move your
brush  anywhere  in three dimensional space.  Try it if you like.  Set a
number  for  each  of the three boxes and click Preview to see where the
brush would move.

Simple Rotation

In addition to moving the brush along an axis or several axes in combina
tion,  the  Move  requester lets you rotate the brush around one or more
axes You rotate the brush by entering numbers in the Angle edit boxes.

In  the  Move  requester,  click  Zero,  which  clears all data from the
Distance and Angle edit boxes.

Click  in  the  Z Angle edit box and enter 360 as the angle of rotation,
(This tells Deluxe Paint that you want to rotate the brush 360' on the Z
axis).  Click Preview.

You'll see a wire frame representation of your brush rotate clockwise on
the  screen.   Just as negative numbers change the direction of movement
when  using  Distance  moves,  negative  numbers change the direction of
rotation when you use Angle moves.

Change the Z Angle setting to -360 degrees and click Preview.

The wire frame rotates counter clockwise.

If  you're familiar with Deluxe Paint, you'll notice several new buttons
here  in the Move Requester that will make it easier for you to position
and  move  your  brushes  around.  Using the knowledge you learned about
perspective in Chapter 5, you'll feel right at home with the way the key
frame "Adjust" button works.

Again using the DPaint Title brush, let's try it out.

Click the Zero button to reset the distance and angle settings

Select  the  Start  key  frame  button  and  choose the Adjust key frame
button.

You  will see a wireframe representation of the DPaint Title brush as if
you were in perspective.

While  in  this  Adjust  mode you can move your brush around and set the
starting position you would like your brush in.

Click  and  drag  the  brush to the top of your screen.  Press Return or
Enter  (Either  key will accept your position and exit you out of Adjust
mode).

Press  the  End  key  frame button and choose the Adjust button one more
time.

Click  and drag the brush to the bottom of your screen.  Press Return or
Enter.

Select the Preview button to see the move you just created.  Notice that
Deluxe  Paint  enters  the distance for you automatically.  You can edit
the values manually as you learned in the previous section as well.

The  Fade slider will fade in or fade out your move using a translucency
value  between  0  and  255.    0  is  full  opaquness  and  255 is full
translucency.

The  effect  Deluxe  Paint  will  achieve  for  you is dependant on your
palette  and  screen  mode.    The  more  colours  to transition to full
translucency  the  better  the fade effect will be.  You can have a fade
value for both the Start key frame and the End key frame.

As  explained earlier, "Adjust" mode is very similar to perspective, not
only  can you move your brush in the screen's X and Y axes, you can also
rotate  your  brush using the perspective rotation keys (1, 2, 4, 5, and
7,  8  on  the  keypad)  and reset your axes using (3, 6, 9, and 0).  In
addition,  you can move your brush in the Z distance by holding down the
Ctrl  key and clicking and dragging until you set the brush size to your
liking.

We  hope  the  addition  of  setting  Start  and  End key frames and the
addition  of  a  fade  effect over a move will make it easier for you to
create  the  animations  in  your  head.   Click Zero and try some brush
rotation  and  moving  your  brush in the Z distance while in the adjust
mode  and  press  Preview to check it out before you move on to the next
section.  Have fun!

Brush Check Boxes

At  this  point  you  may  be wondering about those two options labelled
Brush  beside  the  Distance  and Angle edit boxes.  The short answer is
that  these options determine whether your brush moves and rotates based
on  the  screen axes or based on the brush axes.  The default setting is
for  the  brush  to  move along the screen axes and to rotate around the
brush  axes.    To  fully  understand  this  feature,  you'll need to be
fimiliar  with how Perspective, described in Chapter Five, works.  We'll
explain the Brush check boxes in more detail later in this chapter.  For
now just leave them as they are.

The Go Back Command

The  Go  Back button has a similar function to the Clear button, only it
affects  the  location of the brush rather than the settings in the Move
requester.   When you use the Move requester to move your brush in three
dimensional  space,  Deluxe  Paint  remembers the ending position of the
brush  when  the move is complete.  If you want to do a second move from
the final brush position, click Go Back to reset the brush

We'll  show  you  the  results  of two different move paths, one without
using  Go  Back  and  one  using  Go  Back.  In this example you'll also
actually draw and play the animation instead of simply previewing it.

Successive Moves without Go Back.

Click  Cancel in the Move requester.  Click CLR and clear all frames (if
you've been following the steps, the frame count should still be 20)

Choose Perspective>Reset from the Effect menu to reset your brush to the
original orientation.

Position the brush at the bottom of the screen, and paint it down.

Choose Move from the Anim menu to display the Move requester

Click  Zero  to  clear the edit boxes and then set the Y Distance to 200
and the Z Distance to 400.

The  frame  count  should  be  set to the number of frames you currently
have.  If it's not, make it so.

Click Draw

You  just  created  the  first  part  of the brush's movement, now we'll
create the second part to continue from where the brush ended.

Instead  of  choosing Move again, this time press Shift-m to display the
Move requester.  M is keyboard equivalent of choosing Move from the Anim
menu.

Set  the  X  Distance to 800, leave the Y distance at 200, and set the Z
distance to 0.  Click Draw.

Choose  Control>Play  from  the  Anim  menu  (or press 4) and watch your
animation.  Press space bar when you've seen it enough

In  the  animation  you  created, your brush moves into the distance and
upward  and then shoots off the screen diagonally to the right.  Because
you  didnt  use  the  Go  Back  button,  the  second part of the brushes
movement follows directly from the end of the first part.

Successive Moves with Go Back

In  the  next  set  of  steps, you'll use the same settings as the first
example,  but  you'll  also  click the Go Back button before drawing the
second part of the brush movement.

Click CLR and clear all frames.  This time press Shift-KeyPad 0 to reset
your  brush  to  the  original  orientation.   Position the brush at the
bottom of the screen, and paint it down.

Press  m  to display the Move requester.  Set the X Distance to 0, the Y
Distance to 200, and the Z Distance to 400.  Click Draw.

Press  m again.  Set the X Distance to 800, leave the Y Distance at 200,
ans set the Z Distance to 0.  Click the Go Back button.  Click Draw.

When Deluxe Paint is finished drawing the animation, choose Control>Play
from the Anim menu and watch your animation.

This  time you see your animation shows a title splitting into two, with
one  title  moving  into  the  distance  and upward and the other moving
diagonally off the screen to the right.

Cyclic and Non-Cyclic Moves

You  use  the  Cyclic  button to tell Deluxe Paint which of two kinds of
animation you want:

An  animation  that  will  loop back on itself (cycle) or chain from the
current move to another move of a similar type: or

An animation that is linear and will end at the last frame you requested
in the Move requester.

Deluxe Paint draws your move differently depending on whether or not the
Cyclic  button is selected.  In this section we'll give you a very quick
example of the difference between the two moves.

Cyclic Animation

Load  any  brush  that contains features to help you tell whether or not
the brush has been rotated.  (The DPaint Title brush will do very well).

Right-click  CLR  and  clear  all  frames.  Choose Perspective>Reset (or
press  Shift Keypad 0) to reset your brush to the original orientation.
Stamp the brush in the upper half of the screen.

Display  the  Move  requester.   Click Zero in the requester.  Set the Z
Angle to 360.

Click the Cyclic button so a tick appears in the box. Click Draw.

When  Deluxe  Paint  is finished drawing your animation, notice that you
are  on  frame 1 of your animation.  Deluxe Paint moved you to the frame
past the ending frame of your Count.

Press  Shift-2  to go to the last frame of the animation, (20/20 appears
in Title Bar).

Notice  that  on  the  last  frame  of  your animation, the brush is not
rotated  360  degrees,  even  though you asked for a 360 rotation in the
Move  requester.   This is because Cyclic tells Deluxe Paint to create a
"cyclical" animation one that completes the move on the same frame where
it  began.    With  this ani mation, you can play continuously without a
seam.

Press  4  and  watch the animation for a moment.  Press the space bar to
stop the animation.

Non-Cyclic Animation

If  Deluxe  Paint had painted the brush fully rotared on the last frame,
you  would  have  the  same  image on frames 1 and 20, and the animation
would hiccup when you played it continuously.  Let's draw the same thing
with Cyclic turned off to see how that works.

Press Shift-1 to move to frame 1 of your animation.  Paint your brush in
the lower half of the screen.

Display  the  Move  requester.   Click Cyclic to turn it off (remove the
tick), and click Draw.

Even as the new move is being drawn you can see that the new rotation is
in larger steps than the first one.  When the draw is complete, you will
be  left  at frame 20, where you can see that the new move completed the
360  degree  rota tion on frame 20 unlike the Cyclic move which left you
on frame 1

Press  4 and watch the animation.  Press the space bar to stop the anima
tion.

You  should be able to see that the rotation at the top of the screen is
smooth, but the rotation at the bottom of the screen hiccups noticeably.

You might ask yourself at this point why anyone would want Cyclic turned
off.   The answer is simple: you might want to rotate exactly 90 degrees
by  a  particular frame or you might want to move an object from point A
to exactly point B.  Generally if you are creating an animation sequence
that runs for less than the full number of frames you have allocated for
your animation, you don't want Cyclic turned on.  For a clear example of
why you would want Cyclic turned off follow the next set of steps.

Clear  all  frames of your animation.  Press Shift-2 to move to the last
frame.

Select  the  Unfilled  Circle tool and the single-pixel brush and draw a
small circle on the right side of the screen.

Choose  Coordinates  from  the  Prefs  menu to turn on Coordinates.  The
coordinates are displayed on the menu bar.

Select  the  Dotted Freehand tool and the largest round built-in brush.
Position  the  brush in the middle of your unfilled circle and note what
the Coordinates show as the location of the brush.

Move the brush 200 pixels to the left of that position, press Shift-1 to
move to frame 1 and stamp down your brush.

TIP
When  you  need  to  move  your brush in a straight line horizontally or
vertically  as you did in the step above, hold down the shift key.  This
constrains  your  cursor to horizontal or vertical movement depending on
which direction you move in first.

Display  the Move requester, click Zero, set the X Distance to 200, make
sure Cyclic is selected, and click Draw.

When  Deluxe  Paint  finishes drawing the animation, notice that you are
left on frame 1.  Now look at frame 20 (Press Shift-2).  You'll see that
even though the distance from where you stamped your brush to the centre
of the circle was exactly 200 pixels and the move you requested was 200,
the  dot  did  not  reach the centre of the circle.  If you want to move
your brush to a specific location by your ending frame, turn Cyclic off.

Although  you can't see it, Deluxe Paint has positioned the brush in the
cen  tre  of  the  circle  on frame 1.  If you want to prove this, go to
frame  20  and display the Move requester.  Click 0, change the Count to
1, and click Draw

When  you  complete  a  move  with   Cyclic   selected,   Deluxe   Paint
automatically advances you to the frame beyond the end of your Count and
the  brush position Deluxe Paint remembers is the position you specified
in the Move requester.

Smooth Moves Slowly

The  Slow  Out and Slow In edit boxes let you specify a number of frames
over  which  the  brush  can accelerate or decelerare in your animation.
The  primary  advantage of these features is that you can make the brush
move ment smooth at its beginning and ending points.  Also, some effects
require  a  gradual  acceleration and deceleration to be realistic.  For
example,  a  bounc  ing  ball  should  accelerate  on the way down.  The
bouncing  ball is a good example of how this feature works, so let's try
it.

Clear  all  of  your  frames.  Load the Ball.brush brush from your Brush
direcrory  and  then  choose  Palette>Use  Brush Palette from the Colour
menu.

Press h to halve the size of the ball.

Display the Move requester.  Click Zero to zero the location values, and
then click Start.

Click Adjust.  The screen changes to a blank background with ball brush.
Click and drag within the boundaries of the box that surrounds the brush
and  position  the  brush  near  the  top of the screen.  Press Enter or
Return to accept the positioning and return to the Move requester.

Click  End,  and then click Adjust again.  This time, position the brush
near the bottom of the screen.  Press Enter or Return.

Change  the  Slow Out Edit box to 10.  Make sure the Count is set to 20,
and  then  click Draw.  The animation of the ball moving from the top to
the bottom of the screen is created.

After  the  animation  is  drawn, choose Control>Ping-pong from the Anim
menu  (or press 6) to play the animation forward and backward You should
see a bouncing ball.  Press Tab for added effect.

Let's  take  a  moment  to review what you just did.  You positioned the
Start and End frames to make the ball move from the top of the screen to
the bottom of the screen.  When you entered 10 in the Slow Out edit box,
you told Deluxe Paint that the brush should gradually increase its speed
over  the  first  10 frames and then move at the same speed for the lasr
ten.   You could have achieved the same effect by typing values into the
X  and  Y  edit boxes for the Start and End positions, but the method we
used is simpler and more intuitive.

More on the Move Requester

What  remains  in the Move requester is fairly straightforward.  For now
we'll  summarise  what each of the buttons does.  You'll find additional
explanat  ions and more examples of the features below, in the following
chapter, and in Reference.

Direction

The  Direction  options  control  the  direction  of  the  move  and the
direction of the recording.

The  Go  From  button  is  the  default setting for movement.  With this
option  selecred,  the  settings in the Move requester are used to paint
motion  away  from  the  point  where  you last stamped your brush.  For
example,  an X Distance of 200 moves to the right from where you stamped
your  brush,  over  the number of frames set in the Set Number of Frames
requester.

With the Come To option selected, the settings in the Move requester are
used to paint motion toward the point where you stamped your brush.  For
example,  an  X  Distance of 200 moves to the right to where you stamped
your  brush.  This option is most useful when it's easier to specify the
posi-  tion  where  you  want  the move to end than it is to specify the
beginning.    Remember that you want to stamp the brush on the frame you
want your animated move to end on.  Here's a practical example.

Assembling the Pieces

Suppose you want pieces of a picture to fly onto the screen and assemble
neatly  on  the  last  frame.  If the pieces are coming from off screen,
it's  diffi_  cult  to position the brush there for the beginning of the
move!    And  you  don't  want  to  calculate  backwards from the ending
position  to  figure  out  just  where  the  starting position should be
anyway.    The answer is to go to the last frame, paint down your brush,
and  tell  Deluxe  Paint  to  paint  the brush moving toward this point.
That's what the Come To option is all about.  Let's do it.

Clear all frames.

Choose  Frames>Set  # from the Anim menu and set the number of frames to
20.

Press Shift- 2 to go to the last frame of the animation.

Remember,  when  you  use the Come To option, you always paint the brush
down on the frame where you want the move to end.

Choose  Load  from  the Brush menu.  Load the file named pie1.brush from
the  Media disk.  Choose Palette>Use Brush Palette from the Colour menu.

Paint the brush down in approximately the middle of the screen.

Display the Move requester, and click Zero.

Set the X distance to 200.  Set the Y distance to -150.  Set the Z angle
to 180.  Click the Come To option.

Set Slow In to 5, and click Draw. Reset Slow Out to 0.

Play the anim that you have so far.

You'll  see  the  piece of pie chart fly in from off the screen.  Notice
how the Slow In setting of 5 frames smoothed the landing of the pie.  If
you  continue with the other two pieces to construct the full pie chart,
you'll  see  that  this Slow In element is very important to the look of
the animation.

NOTE
You can also accomplish these types of assembly moves with the Start and
End buttons as well, without having to use Come To.

If  you  get  the  point of this exercise and don't want to complete the
flying  pie  chart,  you can continue on.  Otherwise, (or if you want to
continue  for fun) there are two more pieces of pie chart to load.  Load
each  one  and  stamp  it  in  place (with the black edges of the slices
overlapping)  and  set any move you want that will send the slice flying
onto the screen.

This  is  a  great  opportunity  to  experiment  with the Move requester
settings;  no  matter  what  numbers you enter, the pie will come to the
proper end point on frame 20.

Record

The  Record  options let you specify the direction in which Deluxe Paint
paints the frames of your move.

Forward is the default and prints the frames by flipping forward.

In  Place  causes  Deluxe  Paint to print all of the move on the current
frame.

Backward  paints the frames by flipping backward - this option is useful
with Trails.

Trails  and  Fill  are best explained by vivid example - you'll find two
exam ples of each in the next chapter.

Load

Displays  the Load Move requester.  From here you can load Move settings
that  you entered and saved with the Save Move requester.  When you load
a  move,  you are loading only the settings for the Move requester.  You
still  need  to  startup  your  brush in the correct position and on the
correct  frame  to  duplicate  the  move you had in mind.  If you aren't
absolutely  sure  of the setting you want to load, try using the feature
this  way:  stamp  your brush in the centre of the screen: load the move
settings  you  think you want; click Preview to see the move as it would
look  if it started from the middle of the screen.  This will give you a
good  idea of what the move looks like when it is actually drawn, and it
will  also  help  you  determine  where  your brush should be stamped to
produce the best move for these settings.  The requester works just like
the Load Picture requester.

Save

Displays  the  Save  Move  requester.    Deluxe  Paint lets you save the
settings  (though  not  the  images)  of any move you set up in the Move
requester.    You  can  load  a saved settings and use them as a kind of
template to automatical ly describe the movement of another object.  The
requester works just like the Save Picture requester.

Animated Brushes

So  far  we've  shown  you  how  to create an animation by painting on a
series  of  frames.    Deluxe  Paint  also  lets  you  select an area of
animation  as  a  brush and paint with it.  The result is that the brush
changes  while  you  paint,  and,  depending on whether or not the frame
changes, you create either anima tion or interesting effects.

In  Guided  Tour  (2),  we  showed  you  how  to load and use one of the
AnimBrushes  included on the Examples disk.  In this section, we'll show
you how to create a simple AnimBrush of your own and paint with it.

Creating an AnimBrush

To  begin, let's create a simple animation that we can easily pick up as
a brush.

Choose Palette>Default Palette from the Colour menu.

Clear  all of your animation frames.  Print a circle about the size of a
quarter  and  filled  with  a  gradient.  Pick your sphere up as a brush
using the right mouse button to pick it up off the screen.

Paint  your brush down and rotate it 360 degrees over twenty frames.  To
do this:

Display  the  Move  requester.   Click Zero to set all of the options to
their  defaults.  Set the Z Angle to 360 and select Brush angle.  Select
Cyclic and make sure the Count is 20.

Make sure Slow In and Slow Out are set to 0.

Click Draw.

Your  brush  will  rotate  in  place to create an animation that looks a
little like a spinning planet.

Picking Up an Animbrush

When  Deluxe  Paint  is finished painting the animation, step to frame 1
and choose AnimBrush>Pick Up from the Anim menu.

A  large  cross  hair  like  the one you use to pick up standard brushes
appears,  bur it is special in that it picks up from a series of frames.

Pick  up the sphere animation as a brush as you normally would using the
left mouse button.

In the Pick up AnimBrush requester that appears, 20 should appear in the
Number of Cels edit box.  If it does, click OK.

After  you click OK, you will see each of the frames flip as the area is
picked  up.    When  it's done, you have your AnimBrush.  Another way to
pick  up  an AnimBrush is to select the Brush Selector and hold down the
Alt key as you pick up an area of your animation.

Painting with the AnimBrush

To prove that you have an animated brush, paint with it a little

You'll see that the brush spins as you paint.  This is one way to use an
ani mated brush.  But better yet, try animpainting:

Clear  all  frames.    Hold down the Alt key.  Position the brush in the
lower  left corner of the screen and paint from left to right across the
screen.

The frames flip as you paint, so you only place one cel of the AnimBrush
on  each  frame  of  your  animation.  When you play the animation back,
you'll see a ball roll from left to right across the screen.

AnimBrush Settings

When you begin to combine AnimBrushes into large animations, you'll find
that  occasionally  you  want  to  change the rate at which an AnimBrush
trans  forms.    You might even want to change the direction in which an
AnimBrush  plays.    For  example,  you might want the gradient ball you
creat  ed above to turn in the opposite direction.  You can do this with
the AnimBrush Settings requester.

Choose AnimBrush>Settings from the Anim menu.

Direction

Click the (backward) direction button and click OK.

Now  your gradient circle will rotate in the opposite direction when you
paint with it.

The  other  direction  setting is called Ping Pong.  This setting causes
the brush to alternate between forward and backward play.

Duration

The  Duration  box in the AnimBrush Settings requester let's you specify
how  many stamps of the brush the AnimBrush uses to complete its cycle.
If  the  Duration  number  is  larger than the number of cels, the brush
seems  to  move more slowly.  If the Duration number is smaller than the
number  of  cels,  the  brush  seems  to  move  more quickly.  Let's try
painting  normally  with  a  brush  and then paint with the Duration set
higher.

Choose  AnimBrush>Load  from  the  Anim menu.  Load the file named Sweep
from  the AnimBrush directory of your Examples disk.  Choose Palette>Use
Brush Palette from the Colour menu.

Display  the  AnimBrush Settings requester and set the Direction to play
forward.  (Notice that this animated brush has 1O cels).  Click OK.

Position  the  karate  figure on the left side of the screen.  Hold down
the  Alt  key  and  click the mouse button repeatedly without moving the
mouse to paint one cel of the animbrush on each of the 20 frames of your
animation.

You  now have an animation of a karate character performing a sweep kick
twice.    You'll notice that the sweep kick is fairly rapid.  Next we'll
paint  the same animbrush with a longer duration to slow down the motion
of the character.

Choose  AnimBrush>Settings  from the Anim menu.  Set the Duration box to
2O.   Set the Current box to 1 to put the brush at its first cel.  Click
OK.

Now  position  the  karate figure on the right side of the screen.  Hold
down  the  Alt  key and paint one cel of the AnimBrush on each of the 2O
frames.

When you've finished painting your AnimBrush on the 2O frames, press the
4 key at the top of the keyboard to play the animation.

Compare the speed of the two characters.  If you step through the frames
of  your  animation  one at a time, you'll see that the man on the right
takes  two  frames  before  changing position, while the man on the left
moves  on  every  frame.    You  can  also  use  Duration to speed up an
animbrush  by  setting the Durarion number lower than the number of cels
in  the  brush.  In that case, cels of the brush would be skipped as you
painted with the brush.

Note:  If you increase the duration of an AnimBrush, it is best to set a
durarion  that  is  a multiple of the number of cels in your brush.  For
example, an animbrush that has 10 frames will generally look best if you
set the duration to 10, 20, 30, etc.

Metamorphous AnimBrushes

Another way to create AnimBrushes is to transform the image and shape of
one  custom  brush  into  those  of a second custom brush.  This special
feature,  called metamorphosis, can create some stunning effects.  We'll
show  you  a  couple  of very simple examples just to give you the idea.
The  first  example  metaomorphoses between very different brushes.  The
second  example  meta  morphoses between two transformed versions of the
same brush.  In both examples, you'll use the Spare options in the Brush
menu to work with two custom brushes at the same time.

The Chicken and the Egg.

In  this  example,  you'll  load two different custom brushes (a chicken
egg) and create an AnimBrush that metamorphoses between the two.

Clear all frames of your animation.

If  the  Animation  Control  Panel is NOT on your screen, press Alt A to
display it.

Choose  Load from the Brush menu, and load the file named egg brush from
the  Brush  drawer  of the Media disk.  Choose Palette>Use Brush Palette
from the Colour menu.

Choose Spare>Brush>Spare from the Brush menu.

The  Brush>Spare  option  copies  your  custom brush to the spare custom
brush  buffer.    Now that you have the first brush in the spare buffer,
you can load a second brush without losing the first one.

Choose  Load from the Brush menu, and load the file named "chicken" from
the Brush drawer on Media.

Now you have two custom brushes what you can swap back and forth between
by  choosing  Spare>Brush<->Spare  from  the  Brush menu.  Try it if you
like.    Make  sure  that  the  chicken is your current brush before you
proceed.

Now  choose  Spare>Morph>Spare  from  the Brush menu (The Make AnimBrush
requester appears).

Enter  11  in  the edit box as the number of cels in your new brush, and
click OK.

It  will  take  a little while for Deluxe Paint to morph your two custom
brushes into one AnimBrush.

Go to AnimBrush settings on the Ping Pong direction button and click OK.

The  Ping  Pong option automatically plays your AnimBrush to the end and
back  again  repeatedly  without  doubling  the first or last cel of the
brush  This  means  that  the brush is effectively twice as long minus 2
cels.  (In this case, we had you create an 11 cel brush so that the Ping
Pong  version  would play over exactly 20 frames).  You'll find the Ping
Pong option very useful for converting linear brushes into cyclical ones
without having to create the extra frames.

Hold  down  the  Alt  key,  and click the brush repeatedly, to paint the
brush over 20 frames.  Press 4 to play the anim.

You'll  see an egg meramorphose into a chicken and back into an egg over
and over until you press the space bar to stop the animation.

The LightTable

The  LightTable lets you view a few frames of animation overlaid on each
other  like  clear  sheets of cellophane to help you position brushes or
paint  the  in  between frames of a character animation.  The LightTable
also  allows  you to set multiple levels of dim so that you can view any
frames  in  your  animation  behind (or after) your current frame.  This
enables  you  to  more  easily  see the frame you are working on.  (This
dimming effect is available in all modes except HAM)

Traditional  animators  work by painting the key positions or poses of a
char  acter  and then paint the "in-between" frames to create the smooth
transition  between  poses.    The  LightTable  is  ideal   for creating
animation with this tra ditional approach.  In the next few pages, we'll
introduce the basics of using the LightTable.

A  new  LightTable  feature   is   the   LightTable   Settings requester
(Effect>LightTable>Settings...)  You  can  use this requester to control
all  four LightTable layers - you can turn each layer on or off, set the
anima-  tion  frame  associated with the layer, and set 'dim' levels for
each  layer.  The Dim level for each layer can be set with a slider from
-255  (Maximum  brightness; even lighter than the original frame) to 255
(completely dimmed out).

Simple Tweening

We'll start out with a simple example of painting some in between frames
of an animation.

Choose  Load  from  the  Anim  pull  down  menu  and  load the animation
LightTable.anim

When  you  load  this  animation  you will notice that this is a 5 frame
animi-  tion  showing a face moving left to right.  You will also notice
that  the  smile  and  the  eyes  are  missing from frame 2 and frame 4.
Normally  adding  these  features  to  the face may not be as easy as it
seems,  especially  if  the face is moving.  This tutorial will show you
how  to  add the smile and the eyes to the face to the in-between frames
fairly easily using the LightTable.

Choose  LightTable>Settings...    from  the Effect menu.  The LightTable
Settings requester appears.

Click  on  the  first  two boxes on the far left of the requester.  This
will  activate  layer  #1  and  layer  #2.  You will notice a check mark
appear next to box #1 and #2.

Now  we  need  to tell it which frame you want it to affect and how much
dim  you want to add to this layer.  On Layer #1 change the frame box to
I and move the slider on the right until it is at -200.

This  means  that  layer  1  shows  1  frame  ahead of the frame you are
currently  on and it will appear somewhat transparent because of the dim
setting  that  you  adjusted.    Moving the slider to the left adds more
white to the image and moving it to the right will add more black.

NOTE
The  LightTable settings will have optimum perfomance if your background
is  either  black  or white.  Once you are finished using the LightTable
you  can  colour  in  your  image  and change the background to whatever
coloyr you desire.

On  Layer #2 change the frame box to -1 and move the slider on the right
until it is at -175.

This  means layer 2 will show 1 frame behind the frame you are currently
on.

Click OK to leave this requester.

Press  the  3 key on your keyboard (not the numeric keypad), to bring up
the GO TO FRAME requester.  Enter 2 in this requester and click OK.

Hold  Down  the  Alt key on your keyboard and press A at the same time.
This  will bring up the anim control panel.  You will notice that button
#1  and  button  #2 to the right of the light bulb button is activated.
This is because we selected these two layers in the light table settings
requester.

Press  the  light  bulb  button  on  this panel.  Notice that their is a
dimmed version of frame 1 and frame 3 superimposed on the current frame.
This gives the illusion of drawing on very thin paper.

Now  that the LightTable is activated draw the eyes and the mouth on the
face  on frame 2.  You may need to toggle the LightTable on and off with
the L key on your keyboard.

Go to frame 4 and draw the in-between frame here as well.

Pres  play  on the Anim control panel, turn on some music, and watch the
face move his head to the beat.

If  you  like  your  animation, save it before moving on to the next sec
tion.

For more information, check our Chapter 8: Reference

Evolution of an Animation

In  this  section  we'll  look at how a traditional animation evolves in
Deluxe Paint V.

The Background

Turn off the LightTable

Delete all of your animation frames.

Choose   Load   from   the   Picture   menu   and    load    the picture
DoggieBackground.LoRes  from  the  Picture drawer on your Examples disk.
When the message appears asking whether or not you want to change format
to that of the file, click Yes.

The  picture  you  see  is a simple background image of a lawn and tree.
This  image  is  the background for the DoggieOutline animation.  Before
anima  tors  begin  to draw an animation, they create a background image
against  which  the animated characters will move.  The background image
can  be  as  complex  as a city scene or as simple as a straight line to
indicate  the  ground level for the characters to walk on.  Whatever its
level  of complexity the background helps keep all of the pieces working
in harmony.

In  the  next  brief section, we'll load a wire frame animation over the
back- ground image.

The Outline

Now  we'll take a look at the first step of creating an animation over a
background.

Choose Spare>Swap from the picture menu to put the background picture on
the spare page.

Load  the anim DoggieOutline from the Anim drawer on your Examples disk.
When  the  message  appears  to  ask if you want to change the number of
colours to that of the file, click No.

Note!  You just performed an important operation; you loaded an 8 colour
wire  frame  animation  into 16 colour mode.  Deluxe Paint lets you load
animations  into  screen formats that use more colours and thus makes it
possible  for  you to create the initial animation outline in just a few
colours  and  load  it into a format with more colours later on when you
want to paint the frames.

DoggieOutline  is  a few frames of a simple wireframe animation that was
created  by an animator who uses the traditional method of first drawing
the  outline  version  of  the  animation and then filling it with solid
colours or pat- terns to create a finished piece.  Traditional animators
call the outline version of an animation the "pencil test".

Turn  on  the  LightTable  to  view the animation frames overlaid on one
another.

Click  the  4  button  in  the Anim Control Panel to view the Spare page
behind the animation.

See how useful it is to view the background image through your animation
frames?   With the background visible, the animator can easily align the
ani- mated characters without having to worry about accidentally ruining
the  background  image.  Even if you aren't working on an animation, you
might find it useful to view a background image while you paint.  If you
turn  off  the  Dim  option  (from the LightTable submenu of the Effects
menu) you can view the background in its original colours and thus treat
your anima tion frame as a transparent page.

Choose  different  combinations  of  settings  (1,  2,  3, and 4) in the
LightTable  area  of the Anim Control Panel.  Move the Frame Slider back
and forth to view the different animation frames and background combined
with the various settings.

Merging in the Background

One of the powerful features of the LightTable is its ability to let you
merge  your  viewed  frames.    We'll  try  it  right now by merging the
background image into the image on one of the frames

Make  sure  LightTable is on, but turn off all of the LightTable options
other than 4 (for Spare).

You  should  see  your current frame against the background on the Spare
page with no other frames visible.

Choose LightTable>Merge from the Effects menu.

In  a  moment, your background is merged with your wireframe animation.
Notice  that  the  LightTable  is automatically turned off after a merge
opera  tion.  This is done so you will see the frame in its actual state
and not be confused by LightTable effects.  One caution is in order: you
can't  Undo a merge, so you should be very careful that the image as you
see it in the LightTable is correct before you merge it.

Another  way to merge the background image with the frames is to use the
Spare>Merge  in  Back  option in the Picture menu.  This option lets you
merge  to the current frame, to a range of frames, or to all frames in a
single  operation.  This is generally the last step an animator takes in
the creation of a finished traditional piece.

The Painted Animation

Before  we  leave  this  section,  we'd  like  you  to load in a painted
animation  that  was  created  using  the  techniques  described in this
chapter.

TIP
If  you  are  going  to  be saving your animations to video tape and you
don't  have  a lot of RAM in your Amiga, it might be best not to merge a
back  ground  into  your  animation.   Instead, you can create a painted
background  and  use a GenLock device to combine the video signal of the
Amiga  with  the signal of a camera focused on the painted background as
you record the two to a videotape.

Load the walk.anim from the Gallery drawer of the Extras disk.

This  High  Res  16  colour  animation  was  created  by  an animator at
Elecrtonic Arts using Deluxe Paint and traditional animation techniques.

Brush Axes vs Screen Axes

Now  that  we've covered pretty much everything else, it's time to cover
the  sticky  issue  of  brush  vs  screen axes.  We've tried to make the
example very clear but if you feel you need further help, review Chapter
Five:  Working  with  Perspective.  We should also mention that you will
not need to change the default settings for these options very often.

Movement Along the Brush Axes

So  far  in  our  examples, we've been moving the brush along the screen
axes When your brush is in a standard orientation (0, 0, 0), movement on
the  brush  axes  is  the  same  as movement on the screen axes.  If you
rotate  your  brush  using  Perspective,  the  brush  axes may no longer
correspond  to  the  screen axes, and movement on the brush axes will be
different.    In  this exam ple we'll use the Load Move requester to set
some of our movements

Choose  Screen  Format  from  the Picture menu and change your format to
Lo-Res 320 x 200, Screen size page, and 32 colours palette.

Choose  Page  Size  from the Picture menu and change page size to Screen
320 x 200.  Click OK.

Choose  Frames>Set  # from the Anim menu and set the number of frames to
20.

Choose  Load  from  the  Brush menu and load the brush named DPaintTitle
brush from the Brush drawer on your Media disk.

Choose Palette>Use Brush Palette from the Colour menu.

You should now have a clear page and the DPaintTitle brush ready to work
with.

Choose Perspective>Do from the Effect menu to enter Perspective mode.

Move  the  brush  down  near  the  bottom of the screen and Press Shift-
Keypad 7 to flop the brush over on its back.

Click to paint down the brush.

To  flop  the brush over on its back you rotated it -90 degrees on the X
axis  (see  the  Title  Bar)  and shifted the brush axes so that they no
longer correspond to the screen axes.  Figure 6.8 illustrates the change
in the brush axes.

Now  if  you  use the Move requester to move the brush along the Y axis,
you  will  get  different  results  depending on whether or not you have
selected the Brush button.

Display the Move requester, and click Load.

When  the  Load   Move   requester   appears,   load   the   file called
Animbasics1.Mov from the Move drawer of Examples.

Click Preview from the Move requester.

The  wire  frame  model  of  your  brush moves upwards just as you would
expect when moving along the screen axis.

Click  the  Brush  button  beside the Distance edit boxes.  A check mark
appears in the box.  Now click Preview and watch the direction the brush
moves.

This  time  the  brush  moved  into the distance along the Y axis of the
brush.    As  Figure 6.15 above shows, the brush's Y axis is the same as
the screen's Z axis when you rotate backwards 90 degrees on X as we did.

Rotation on the Brush's Axis

You  may  have already guessed what will happen when we rotate the brush
on  its  own  axes rather than on the screen axes, but this is sometimes
difficult to visualise, so we'll give an example.

Click Cancel to close the Move requester.

Right-click  CLR  and  select  All  Frames in the requester to clear all
frames.

Choose  Perspective>Reset  from  the  Effect  menu  to  reset all of the
Perspective settings.

At this point you once again have your brush in the original orientation
and  are in Perspective mode.  Now we'll rotate the brush on the Z axis,
so  that  the X and Y axes of the brush no longer match the X and Y axes
of the screen.

Hold  down 2 on the keypad until the brush has rotated 45 degrees on the
Z  axis.    You'll  see the degrees of rotation in the right side of the
Title Bar.

Paint down the brush in the middle of the screen.

Press M to display the Move requester.

Click Zero in the requester.

Click  Load.  When the Load Move requester appears, load the file called
Animbasics2.Mov from the Move drawer of the Media disk.

Make sure the Brush button beside the Angle edit boxes don't have a tick
on it.

Click Preview.

With  the  settings above, you'll see the brush tumble toward the screen
on  the  X  axis.  Remember that the brush is rotating on the Screen's X
axis.  Now let's look at a rotation on the brush's X axis.

In  the  Move  requester  click  the  Brush button beside the Angle edit
boxes; click Preview.

This  time  the  brush  spins  around its own X axis instead of tumbling
toward  the  screen.   The idea is the same for all rotations, though it
isn't  always  easy to predict what a complex set of rotations will look
like.   You'll probably find that most of your moves can be accomplished
with rotation around only.

TIP
If  this  last  exercise  was  less  informative than you had hoped, you
should  probably review the chapter on Perspective.  There you will find
more  examples  that  might  help  you  better understand the difference
between screen and brush angles.

Now  that  you've  seen  some  of Deluxe Paint's animation features, you
might  like  to  play  around  a  little.   Load the animations from the
Examples  disk and play them.  There are several AnimBrushes on the disk
that  you  can  combine  with  the  Ocean  Background.picture to form an
aquarium  scene.   When you feel you're ready to see some more of Deluxe
Paint's  animation  features,  move onto the next chapter.  It shows you
how  to create some interesting animation effects by combining different
features of the program.


CHAPTER 7 - ANIMATION EFFECTS
-----------------------------

This chapter introduces several interesting animation effects and a host
of  animation  tips.    We strongly recommend that you work through this
chapter  and complete the Amazing Bouncing Ball section, which serves as
a good test of your knowledge of Deluxe Paint.

Effects

In  the  following  sections  you'll  create  some interesting animation
effects.      Many of these effects are not obvious, so it is worth your
time to follow closely and work along.

NOTE:  As you begin each section that uses the Move requester, reset the
requester  to its default settings.  Our instructions will tell you only
which  settings  you  need  to change out of the defaults when you first
open  the requester.  Figure 7.1 shows the Move requester in its default
settings; use this as a guide if you need to check your own settings.

Before You Begin

Make  sure  you  are in Lo Res mode with 32 colours.  Set your number of
frames to 40.  Make sure you are using the Compressed memory model.

Make sure FastFB is selected in the Prefs menu.

Quick Effects

These effects are good examples of how multiple features of Deluxe Paint
combine to make simple animation easy to create.

Receding or Approaching Shapes

This  technique  creates  the  effect  of  a  shape  moving off into the
distance  Notice  that  this involves using a keyboard command while you
paint with the mouse button down.

Right  click  the  largest round brush and stretch the brush to be about
the size of a nickel.

Select the Dotted Freehand tool.

Position the brush near the upper left corner of the screen.

Hold  down the Alt key and begin animpainting in a curve downward toward
the  lower  right area of the screen.  As you paint, release the Alt key
and  press the - (minus) key repeatedly to shrink the brush as it moves.

When  you  play  back  the animation, the gradual shrinking of the brush
makes  it  look  as  though  it is receding into the distance.  Play the
animation  backwards,  or  create a new one using the = (equals or plus)
key to enlarge the brush, and the brush will appear to approach from the
distance.    This example used a built-in brush, but you can do the same
thing with a custom brush.

Brush Erosion

The  Edge>Trim command in the Brush menu makes it easy to have an object
dissolve into nothing.  You stamp the brush, trim some away, step to the
next  frame,  and stamp again.  The real trick is to use the keyboard to
do all of your frame changes, trimming, and brush stamps.

Select black as your background colour and clear all of your frames.

Load  the  DPaintTitle  brush  from your Media disk.  Choose Palette>Use
Brush  Palette  from  the Colour menu.  Stamp the brush in the middle of
frame 1.

Display  the  Move requester.  Click Zero to set all of the Distance and
Angle edit fields to 0.

Set  the Count to 1.  Make sure that all of the other options are set to
their defaults.  Click Draw.

Press  Shift  0  to  trim  the brush.  Press Shift-m to display the Move
requester  and  click  Draw.    Repeat this step until the brush has com
pletely disappeared, (It will take about 11 frames).

Using  the  Move  requester to stamp your brush saves you from having to
carefully  position  the  brush  on each frame.  You can also accomplish
this  by  positioning  the  brush  once  and  then  using  the  keyboard
equivalent Amiga Left Alt to click the left mouse button.  (We recommend
that  you  press  the Amiga key first and then press the Alt key quickly
once for a single stamp, because pressing the keys in the opposite order
will start animpainting over many frames).

Since  you  didn't  use all 40 of your frames, we'll use the Control>Set
Range option in the Anim menu to play just the frames you painted.

Choose  Control>Set  Range in the Set Play Range requester, set the From
field to 1 and the To field to 12.  Click Range.  Click OK.

Now  press  4  to play your animation and you'll see your brush dissolve
repeatedly  until you press space bar or click to stop the animation (If
the  animation is moving too quickly press the left arrow key to slow it
down).

Before  you leave this example, choose Control>Set Range again and click
the All Frames button.

Animated Fades

This  example  shows you how to use the Fade feature in Deluxe Paint V's
Move  requester.   We will create a simple 40 Frame animation of a title
fading out to the background.

Load the DPaintTitle brush from the Brush drawer on your Media disk.

Choose  Palette>Use Brush Palette from the Colour menu.  Select the dark
grey from your palette as your background colour.

Clear all frames of you animation and go to frame 1 (Shift-1)

Press  M  (Shift  m) to display the Move requester.  Click Zero to clear
out  the  distance and angle fields.  Set the count to 40 if not already
so

Click  Start  and then click Adjust and place the Brush in the centre of
your  screen.  Press Return or Enter to exit Adjust mode.  Make sure the
Fade slider is it 0.

Click  End  and  then  change the Fade slider to 255 (all the way to the
right).

For  added effect, type 360 in the Z angle edit field with Brush checked
on.

Click  Draw  and  when  the move requester is done with your anima tion,
press  6  to  watch it fade out and back in as it ping pongs.  Keep your
animation  in  memory  you  may  want to use it for the next animi- tion
effect tip.

The  larger your palette size and the more like colours you have between
the brush and your background, the better your fade turns out.

Often  an  animator  wants  to  pause on a certain frame for a second to
several  seconds  to  give an animation that certain effect or feel.  In
the  past,  the  only  way  you  could  do  that  in Deluxe Paint was to
duplicate  the  frame  you wanted to pause on several times.  This works
fine, but it wastes precious memory you could be using for other things.

Deluxe  Paint  V now allows you to perform Anim Pauses on a single frame
or  multiple  frames without adding the memory overhead.  Here's how you
can use it:

Using  the  animation  you  created in the last effects tutorial we will
modify  the  animation  so  that  the  first  frame pauses for 3 seconds
continues  at full speed, then pauses in the last frame for 3 seconds as
well.  Here's how to do it:

Go to frame one (Shift-1).

Select Frames>Set Frame Rate from the Anim menu.

Click on the Vary by Frame button (this tells Deluxe Paint you are about
to create a variable frame rate animation).

Click in the Jiffies edit field and type in 180 (this is assuming you're
in  NTSC  1/60 frame rate).  Hence to get a 3 second pause we have multi
plied 60 X 3 = 180.  In PAL modes you would type in 150 or 50 X 3.  As a
rule  of  thumb just remember this: Scan Rate or Frame Rate multi- plied
by  the number of seconds you would like to pause is equal to the number
of Jiffies you must enter in the edit field.

Make  sure  that  Current Frame is selected in the bottom portion of the
requester.  Click OK.

Play  the animation (press 4), you'll notice that the first frame pauses
for approximately 3 seconds.

Let's put a pause at the end. Go to the last frame (Shift-2).

Select Frames>Set Frame Rate from the Anim menu again.

Click  in the Jiffies edit field and type in the same number you did for
frame 1 (180 for NTSC, 150 for PAL).

Again, make sure Current Frame is selected and click OK.

Play  the  animation  forward  (press  4)  or ping pong it (press 6) and
you'll see that you've easily modified an existing animation to pause at
the  beginning  and  end very easily.  You may never have to duplicate a
frame for speed effect ever again.

Animations you have modified using vary by frame will save out with that
information,  so  that  when  you play them back in the Deluxe Player or
reload them into Deluxe Paint you don't have to set up the pauses again.


Expanding Circles

This  example  shows  you how to create the effect of a circle expanding
out ward like a "sonar blip".  You use two Deluxe Paint features to help
you  align  the circles and make them grow uniformly: Grid and the 2 key
(the Next Frame keyboard equivalent).

Clear  all frames of your animation and go to frame 1.  Turn on the Grid
with X and Y spacing of 8.

Select  the  second  largest round built in brush and paint a dot in the
centre of the screen.

Choose the Unfilled Circle tool.

Start  from  the  dot  in the centre of the screen and drag out a circle
that  is  just  one grid point wider than the dot, but don't release the
mouse  button.   Press the 2 key to move to the next frame.  Now release
the mouse button.

At this point you have a dot on frame 1 and a small circle on frame 2.

Continue  to  follow  the  last  step  above  to paint larger and larger
circles  on successive frames until your circle reaches the sides of the
screen.

When  you play your animation, you'll see one circle expanding outward.
If  you're  adventurous,  try  picking  up  your  entire animation as an
AnimBrush and animpainting it onto your existing animation by sitting it
on  frame  5  This  will  give you an animation of two circles expanding
outward.

Trails

This example demonstrates the use of Trails.  You'll find this option in
the Move requester makes it easy to create impressive title effects.

Clear all frames.

Load  the  brush  DpaintTitle  from  the Media disk.  Choose Palette>Use
Brush Palette from the Colour menu.

Press Shift-2 to go to the LAST frame. You should be on frame 40.

Stamp  the  brush  at  the  bottom  of  the  screen.    Display the Move
requester.    Click Zero.  Set the Z Distance to -1500.  Select the Come
To  option  for your Move Direction, (Make sure the Fade slider is reset
to 0)

The  Come To option tells Deluxe Paint that the position of the brush is
where  you  want the animation to end - you want the animation to " come
to" the brush position and frame.

Click Preview.

There  is  a  slight  delay, and then the preview plays, starting at the
distant position [Z=1500] and coming closer.

Instead of clicking Draw, click Trails, and let it record.

By clicking Trails, you tell Deluxe Paint to carry the cumulative effect
of  each frame forward as it draws.  The result is that the brush leaves
a trail as it moves through three dimensional space in your animation.

Press 5 on the main keyboard for a singly play of the animation.

For added effect, add a Fade to the start or end of the animation.

The Slinky

The  Slinky  is a modified version of the standard Trails title.  You've
probably  seen  this  effect on many television sports shows.  A special
feature  of  this effect is that it uses the Stencil in combination with
the  Move  requester  This  combination  can  be very powerful when used
properly.   When a stencil is used with the Move requester, Deluxe Paint
remakes the stencil for each frame as it renders the move.

Clear all frames.

Load  the  DPaintTitle  brush  if  you  don't  already  have it.  Choose
Palette>Use Brush Palette.

Step  to  the  middle  frame of your total.  For example, if you have 40
frames as we suggested, move to frame 20 by typing 3 to access the Go To
Frame requester.  Stamp the brush down near the centre of the screen.

Display  the  Move  requester.    Click Zero.  Make sure that both Brush
buttons are unchecked.  Also, be sure Fade is set to 0 at Start and End.

Set the Z Distance to -1500, and set the Z angle to 0.  Set the Count to
20.  Select the Come To option.  Click Trails.

As  in  the Trails effect above, Deluxe Paint paints your title with the
cumula tive image carried forward to each successive frame.

Step to frame 40 (use Shift-2 to go to the last frame quickly).

Now you need to create a stencil so you can "paint behind".

Choose  Stencil>Make  from  the  Effect  menu.     In   the Make stencil
requester,  click the background colour (black), click Invert, and click
Make to lock all colours but the background.

Display  the  Move requester.  Leave all of the other settings the same,
but select the backwards Record Direction («).  Click Trails.

Because you reversed the Record direction, Deluxe Paint begins this move
by  by  painting  on  frame  40.   It then steps one frame backwards and
paints  the the cumulative effect of frame 40 and the new brush position
on  frame  39.    This  39.   This is where the Stencil comes into play.
Because  the  colours  in  the title the title are stenciled, the second
brush  stamp  appears  to  be painted "behind" the single image that was
stamped  on  frame  40.  Though, in fact, it was painted over the single
image.

The  resulting animation should have your brush moving from the distance
leaving  Trails,  until  it gets to the nearest position, at which point
the Trails start erasing from the back forward.

Before  you  move  on  to  the next effect, choose Stencil>Free from the
Effect menu.

Curving Titles

This example shows you how to create the effect of a title moving across
the  screen  on  a  curved path using the curve tool instead of the Move
requester.

Clear all frames.

Load  the  DPaintTitle.brush  from  your Media disk.  Choose Palette>Use
Brush Palette from the Colour menu.

Go  to  the last frame (frame 40) and stamp the brush near the bottom of
the screen.  Click Undo.

TIP
Clicking  UNDO  immediately  after  stamping the brush helps ensure that
your results are what you expect.  This is particularly important if you
are  using a Brush Mode in your move, because Deluxe Paint paints on the
screen you stamped on when it paints the move, and stamping twice on the
same screen will give a different result from a single stamp.

Of course, with Deluxe Paint V you can also use the Start and End Adjust
buttons to place your starting or ending positions without stamping down
the brush at all.

Display  the  Move  requester  and click Zero.  Be sure Record is set to
forward (») and set the Count to 40.

Set the Z distance to -1200. Select the Come To option. Click Draw.

Deluxe  Paint  paints  the  brush  moving  toward  the  screen  from the
distance.

Pick up the animated title as an AnimBrush.  (Be sure you are on frame 1
when  you  pick up the brush and that you enclose the entire area of the
move - the bottom half of the screen in this case).

Press  Alt-x  to place the brush handle in the lower right corner of the
brush so you will be able to click it off-screen.

Clear all frames.

Right  click the Curve tool to display the Spacing requester.  Click the
N Total button and set the total to 40.  Click OK.

The  Spacing requester lets you tell Deluxe Paint exactly how many brush
stamps you want to use to paint your curves, lines, and unfilled shapes.
By  setting  the  Spacing  to N Total of 40, you'll get 40 stamps of the
brush.    Since you have 40 frames, when you use the brush to animpaint,
you'll get one stamp of the brush on each frame

Position the brush at the left side of the screen and midway between the
top and bottom.

Hold  down  the  Alt  key and the left mouse button and drag down to the
lower  right  corner  of the screen.  (You'll see your title drawn along
the path of your curve).

Release  the  mouse button and define the shape of the curve while still
holding  down  the  Alt  key.    When  the  curve  is  a shape you like,
left-click to begin animpainting.

When  Deluxe  Paint is finished painting your curve, press 5 to play the
ani  mation once.  You'll see the brush move into view and curve its way
down to the lower right corner of the screen.

Tumbling 3D Objects

Like  the  Curving  Title  effect above, this effect also uses the curve
tool to move an AnimBrush along a curved path.  However, in this effect,
you use an object that looks three dimensional, and you tumble it at the
same time you move it towards the screen.

Clear all frames.

Load  the  brush  named  GradientCube  from the Brush drawer on your Art
disk.  Choose Palette>Use Brush Palette from the Colour menu.  Go to the
last  animation  frame (frame 40).  Stamp the brush in the centre of the
screen.  Click Undo.

Display the Move requester.  Set the Z Distance to -1200 and the Z Angle
to 720 (with Brush check).  Select the Come To option.  Click Draw.

Deluxe  Paint  paints  your cube rotating 720 and moving toward you from
the  distance.  Now you need to pick up this tumbling object as a brush.
You  must  pick  up the entire animated area, beginning at frame 1 where
you see only a tiny object.  Here's how:

Click the Brush Selector.

Go to frame 40, where the object is largest.

From  this frame you can easily see how large an area you need to select
to enclose the entire animated area of the gradient cube.

Hold  down  the  Alt key and enclose the object with your crosshair, but
don't release the mouse button.  (You can release the Alt key).

Press 2 to step forward to frame 1. Release the mouse button.

Now  you  have  your  AnimBrush of the object tumbling and moving toward
you.   In the next step, you use the curve tool and Spacing to give it a
trajec tory across the screen.

Clear all frames.

Right click on the Curve tool. Set the Spacing requester to N Total 40.

Place  the  brush  handle  in the lower right corner of the brush so you
will be able to click it off-screen.

Press Shift 7 to go to the first cel of the AnimBrush.

Position the brush at the left side of the screen and midway between the
top and bottom.

Hold  down  the  Alt  key and the left mouse button and drag down to the
lower right corner of the screen.

Release  the  mouse button and define the third point of the curve while
still  holding  down  the  Alt key.  When the curve is a shape you like,
click to begin animpainting.

Notice that even though the cube has only two true dimensions, the combi
nation  of  the three-sided view and the tumble make it appear as though
the brush is three dimensional.

Planetary Orbits - Brush Handles.

This  example  shows  you  how to create an animation that simulates the
orbit  of a planet.  This demonstrates the importance of brush handles -
when  you  rotate  a  brush,  the rotation always takes place around the
brush handle.

Paint  a circle about the size of a quarter and filled with a gradient.
Pick the circle up as a brush.

Clear all frames.

Stamp a copy of the brush in the middle of the screen.

Display  the  Move  requester  and  click Draw to draw 40 frames of your
brush.

If  you  are holding the brush by its corner, first choose Handle>Rotate
(Alt-x)  from  the  Brush  menu  until the brush is centred.  Now choose
Handle>Place from the Brush menu.

Your brush now has a cross-hair running through the centre of it.

Position  the  brush about an inch and a half above the circle you paint
ed  in  the middle of the screen.  Hold down the left mouse button, drag
straight  down  to  the  centre of the ball you painted, and release the
mouse button

Now your brush is offset from the cursor by about two inches.  We'll use
this brush to create an orbiting planet.

Point  at  the  centre of the stamped circle with the cursor and click.
(This  stamps  your  circle  brush above the circle in the middle of the
screen).

Display the Move requester. Set the Z Angle to 360. Click Draw.

Play  the  animation  back and you'll see that your planet orbits around
the central circle!

Using  the  brush  handle  effectively becomes a little more complicated
when  you  rotate over more than one axis, but you might want to spend a
little time trying different settings to see the effects you can create.


Scrolling Backgrounds

This  section  shows  you  how  to  create a scrolling background from a
single picture.  We'll use the new Camera Move requester to do this.

Horizontal Panning

First,  we'll  pan  horizontally  across  a background.  All you need to
create  this  effect is a picture with left and right edges that meet to
form a seamless image.

Load  the picture named WorldMap.lores from the Picture drawer (from the
Examples disk).

Type  Ctrl-j  (or  select  Spare>Copy to Spare from the Picture menu) to
copy  to  the blank spare page.  (We will use the spare page as the main
animation page).

Now  we'll  use the Camera Move requester to make the background picture
scroll seamlessly from left to right.  Because the image was designed to
wrap  seamlessly  from  edge  to  edge, the edge of the picture won't be
noticeable  -  it  will  appear that we are continually scrolling to the
right.

Open  the Camera Move requester (Anim>Camera Move...) by typing Shift-n.

Change the Count to 32 - this means that we will be creating a scrolling
animation  over 32 frames.  Make sure Wrap and Cyclic check mark gadgets
are  checked.  When Wrap is checked, the left edge of the screen appears
when you scroll past the right edge of the screen.

Press  Start.    This  means that we will be setting the position of the
first  frame  of  animation.   Click Adjust, and the Adjust bounding box
appears on the screen.

Click  and drag on the "field guide" bounding box so that the right edge
of the box is flush with the left edge of the screen.

You  can  use the Shift key to constrain your mouse movement so that you
only move in the X plane.  Press Shift, then left click and drag to move
the bounding box.

Press  Enter  or  Return to exit the "Adjust" mode (just like in perspec
tive).

Press End, and then Adjust

Place  your  screen  cursor  directly  on  top  of the crosshair that is
already  on  the  screen, and press .  (period key) on the keypad.  This
centres your field guide under your cursor (use it as a short cut).

Press Enter or Return to exit the Adjust mode.

Your  X  Dist box should read 319 or 320, and all other values should be
0.    Click Preview to check the preview to make sure the box moves from
the left edge of the screen.

If the Preview looks OK, press New to create new animation frames.

When Deluxe Paint has finished, press 4 to loop play the animation.  You
now have a scrolling Earth animation.

Press  s while in the animation to view the new frame rate speedome ter,
which shows the current frames per second value.

Save  the  animation  you've  just  created - you'll need it for another
effects  tutorial  later  in  this  chapter  where we'll show you how to
create a revolving globe animbrush from this animation.

This  example showed you how to create a scrolling background that moves
left  to  right,  but  you can create one that moves in any direction by
follow  ing  the  same  basic  steps  You can also use a picture that is
larger  than an animation frame to create your scrolling background.  To
do this you create or paint your large picture on the spare page without
changing the dimen sions of the main page.  Then repeat the steps above,
substituting  a  larger  X  move distance to move the width of the spare
page.

Vertical Panning

In  the following example, we'll pan upward on a screen background using
the Camera Move requester.

Load  the  EarthCore.HAM  image  from the Picture drawer of the Examples
disk.   Press Yes if the program asks if you want to switch screen modes
to  the image.  (The image is in 32Ox200 HAM6 mode with a screen size of
320x1080).

Press j to switch to the spare page.

Choose  Page  Size...  from the Picture menu, and click Screen to change
the animation page size to 32Ox200 pixels.

Select  Camera  Move  from  the  Picture  menu (Shift-n) to bring up the
Camera Move requester.

Click Zero to clear the distance paramerer boxes to 0.  Change the Count
setting to 40.

Click Start, and then Adjust.

Click and drag on the bounding box so that the bottom edge of the box is
flush  with  the bottom edge of reduced image on the screen.  If the box
isn't visible, press period (.) on the keypad.

Press Return or Enter to exit Adjust mode.

Click End, and then Adjust.

Click  and  drag  on the bounding box so that the top edge of the box is
flush with the top edge of the reduced image on your screen.

Press Return or Enter to exit Adjust mode.

Do  a  Preview to see if the box moves from the bottom edge of the image
to the top of the image.

Press New to create a new 40 frame animation.

Press  6  to  ping pong play the animation you've just created.  Use the
Set Frame Rate requester to slow down the animation if it's too fast (or
press  the  left  cursor  key  repeatedly while the animation is playing
back).

For added effect, add a pause at the beginning and end of the anima tion
using the Set Frame Rate requester

Filled Plane Effects

The  following  effects  use  the  Fill  option in the Move requester to
create  filled  planes that move.  In the first example, the plane moves
toward  you  so that it seems as though you are traveling, in the second
example,  the  filled  plane  rolls as though you are doing a roll in an
aeroplane.

Set the number of frames to 20.

Create  a simple filled circle brush to use for your filled planes.  (If
you  are  on a 1 megabyte Amiga, don't add any gradient or other detail,
because  these  filled  plane  moves require a lot of memory even with a
simple brush).

TIP
For  the  Moving  Ground  example,  it  helps  if your brush height is a
multiple  of  the number of frames you have.  This will produce smoother
results.  (Use Coordinates in the Prefs menu when you draw the brush and
pick it up to confirm that it has the dimensions you want).

Moving Ground

Enter Perspective. Press the Enter key on the keypad.

Position  the brush near the bottom right corner of the screen and press
Shift  Keypad  7  to  rotate the brush -90 degrees on the X axis.  Stamp
down the brush.  Click Undo.

Right-click  the  Grid  tool  and  note the number listed for the Y Grid
value in the Perspective requester.  Click OK.

Display  the  Move  requester.  Set the Y Distance to the same number as
the Y Grid value only make the number negative.  Click the Brush but ton
beside  the  Distance  boxes  so  that  you  move along the brush's coor
dinates.  Make sure the Count is set to 20.  Click Fill.

Deluxe  Paint  will  take  a  while to paint your 20 frames.  When it is
finished,  the animation will show a plane of circles moving toward you.


Rolling Horizon

Clear all frames. Choose Perspective>Reset from the Effect menu.

Press  Enter  on the keypad twice (this takes you out and then back into
Perspective).

Position  your brush near the bottom of the screen.  Rotate the brush to
-90 degrees on the X axis.  Stamp down the brush.  Click Undo.

Display the Move requester.  Click Zero.  Set the X Distance to -640 and
the  Y  angle to 360.  Make sure both Brush buttons are selected.  Click
Fill.

Again  Deluxe  Paint  takes a while to paint your 20 frames.  When it is
fin  ished  the animation will show the filled plane of circles rotating
around the perspective centre.

Spinning Effects

Here  are  two  terrific  spinning  effects.  In the process of creating
these  effects  you'll need to use a range of Drluxe Paint features.  At
this  point we assume you are familiar with all of the features, and our
instructions  are  at  times general.  These exercises are a good way to
test your knowledge of the pro gram; if you get stuck you should look up
how to perform the task we describe.

Amazing Bouncing Ball

A bouncing ball sounds complicated, doesn't it?  With traditional media,
it  would  indeed  be  tedious, but with Deluxe Paint you can master the
effect in no time at all.

To  produce  the spinning effect we want for the bouncig ball, you would
ordinarily need to do several things:

Create a range of colours to cycle.

Create a checkerboard pattern and wrap the pattern onto a circle to make
it appear spherical.

Create a ball shaped brush and rotate it so the ball spins on an angle.

These  steps  are  not  necessary for this exercise, however, because we
have cre ated a ball for you to use.

Load the brush named Ball.Brush from the Media disk.  Choose Palette>Use
Brush Palette from the Colour Menu.

Set the number of frames to 10 and clear all frames.

Press h to make the ball half its original size.

Go to Frame 1.

Display the Move requester, and click Zero.

Click Start, and then Adjust.  Place the ball so that the bottom edge is
near  the  bottom  of  the screen.  Press Enter or Return to exit Adjust
mode.

Click  End,  and  then  Adjust.   Place the ball close to the top of the
screen.  Press Enter or Return to exit Adjust mode.

Set  Slow  In  to  10.    Set  the  Count to 10.  Select Go From.  Click
Preview.

The  brush  should  move  upward  until it almost reaches the top of the
screen.    If it goes too far or not far enough, adjust the end position
and try Preview again.

Click Draw.

Noew  that  you've given the ball some bounce, you pick it up as a brush
and  send it bouncing off into the distance by using the Move requester.

Pick  up  the  animated  ball as an AnimBrush (make sure you enclose the
entire  area over which the ball moves).  Choose AnimBrush>Settings from
the Anim menu.  Click the Ping Pong icon.  Click Ok.

Clear  all  frames.  Set the number of frames to 40 and Go to Frame 1 of
the animation.

Move the brush handle to the lower right corner of the brush.

Go to cel 7 of the AnimBrush.  Place the cursor in the lower left corner
of frame 1 (so the brush is off the screen) and stamp down the brush.

Display  the  Move requester, and click Zero.  Set the X Distance to 600
and  the  Z  Distance  to 500.  Set the Count to 40.  Set Slow In to 0.
Click Draw.

Turn on Colour Cycling and play the animation.

You'll see a remarkably realistic animation of a spinning bouncing ball.
If  you are adventurous try creating a plane for the ball to bounce on.
You'll  need  to  adjust  the planes position to match the bottom of the
ball  where it bounces.  Then you create the plane on the Spare page and
merge  it behind the animation.  When you choose the Spare>Merge in back
option,  Deluxe  Paint  asks  if  you  want  to merge behind all of your
frames.  This fea ture makes it easy to build up animations from several
elements.

Creating the Spinning Ball

Here  are  the  steps for creating the spinning ball.  first you need to
create  a  range  of  colours to cycle.  These will ultimately produce a
spinning effect.

Display  the  Colour  Mixer dialogue and create a spread of eight identi
cal reds and eight identical whites.

Choose  Ranges  from  the  Colour  menu to display the Range requester.
Select  an empty range or clear the first range and define these colours
as a range by setting the eight whites and eight reds next to each other
along the Range bar.  Set the Rate for colour cycling to the maximum.

Select Random Dither and move the slider all the way to the left to turn
dither  completely  off.  (Make sure that your reds and whites aren't in
any other ranges.)

Now you create a checkerboard pattern and wrap the pattern onto a circle
to make it appear spherical.

Display  the Fill Type requester.  Select the first gradient fill option
for a plain horizontal fill.

Select the red and white range you created.  Select the Filled Rectangle
tool.   Turn on Coordinates.  Select black as your background colour and
clear  the  screen.    Paint  a  rectangle that is 44 pixels wide and 22
pixels high.

You should now have a rectangle thar is white on one side and red on the
other.

Pick  up  your  rectangle  as a brush and create a red and white checker
board  pattern.   Then pick up exactly a 5 square by 5 square section of
the checkerboard as a brush.

Tip
Using  the grid tool can help.  Set the spacing to 22x and 22y to easily
place the brush.

Clear  the  screen.  Display the Fill Type requester.  Select Brush Wrap
fill.

Turn  on  BeSquare  in  the  Prefs  menu (so your circle will be truly a
circle  cle).    Paint  a  filled  Circle that is approximately 3 inches
across.

There it is.  Press the Tab key to see the ball cycle.  You'll find more
informa  tion  about colour cycling and colour ranges in Tutorial Two of
Chapter Four: Paint Tutorials.

The Spinning Globe

This  example shows you how to create a spinning globe from the WorldMap
picture  on your Examples disk.  To accomplish this effect, you create a
scrolling  background,  pick  up  a  section  of  the  background  as an
AnimBrush, and use it to animfill a circle using the Wrap fill type.

If  you  are  working  on  a 2MB Amiga, we recommend that you start this
example from a fresh start of the program.  This fresh start will ensure
that you have no memory fragmentation and you have enough memory to work
with.    This  example is very memory intensive and may not work on some
2MB configerations.

Load  the  scrolling  earth animation you created and saved a few tutori
als  ago.    (If  you didn't save it, or haven't done that tutorial yet,
please do so now and then continue the steps below).

Press  the  4  key  to confirm that you have a scrolling map without any
glitches.   If it's moving too fast for you, slow it down using the left
arrow key.

Now you need to pick up half the scrolling image as an AnimBrush.

Go to frame 1.

Choose  Free  from the Brush menu to free up any brushes you may have in
memory.

Choose  AnimBrush>Pick  Up  from the Anim menu.  Select the left half of
the  image.   Enter 32 in the requester to pick up the left half of your
animation as an AnimBrush.

Now  you  have an animbrush of a scrolling map.  The trick is to convert
that to a ball shape.

Clear all frames to a black background.

Choose BeSquare in the Prefs menu.

Draw  a  solid colour filled circle in the middle of frame 1.  (Make the
circle about 3 inches across, and preferably a blue colour).

Choose  Frames>Copy  frames from the Anim menu and select the All Frames
button.  This will copy frame 1 to all of the animation frames.

Right click on the Fill tool to display the Fill Type requester.  Choose
Wrap as your fill type, and click OK.

Choose  AnimBrush>Use  from  the  Anim menu.  Press Shift-7 to posi tion
your  AnimBrush on its first cel.  (You will not actually see the brush,
but it will be ready in memory).

Press F3 to place your animbrush in replace mode.  (This is done so that
your globe's background is the same as your animbrushes).

Select  the Fill tool.  Hold down the Alt key and click on the centre of
your solid coloured circle.

Deluxe  Paint  will  automatically "animfill" to wrap the map image into
each  of  your  circles.   When it's finished, play the anim to see your
spinning  globe All that's left now is to pick it up as an AnimBrush and
move  it through three dimensions.  We'll leave that part up to you.  Or
if  you  like, try creating spinning balls with other images, like faces
or interesting patterns.  Once you've mastered this feature, you'll find
it hard to resist.

Multiple animation palettes

Deluxe  Paint  now  supports  multiple  palettes  in an animation.  This
tutorial  will  show  you how to force a different palette in a specific
amount of ani mation frames.

The  last tutorial showed you how to create a spinning globe.  Before we
show  you  how to force a multiple palette let's add an animation with a
dif ferent palette to the end of the spinning globe anim.

First save your spinning globe animation somewhere on your hard drive or
to a floppy disk.

Press Shift-2 to go to the last frame.

Go  to  your  spare page by pressing the letter j on your keyboard.  The
title bar should say SCRATCH.

Load DOGGIE BACKGROUND from the picture pull down menu.

Toggle back to your globe animation by pressing j again.

Let's  use  the Camera Move Requester to create a new animation which we
will put after the current one.

Press N to bring up the Camera Move Requester.

Lets  adjust the starting frame by pressing Start followed by the Adjust
button  in the requester.  This will bring up the Doggie Background from
the Scratch page.

Move  your  cursor  all  the  way up to the far upper left corner of the
screen and press the "." key in the perspective keypad.

The  period  key  centers  the camera view where the cursor is currently
posi tioned.

Press the Enter key in the perspective keypad to exit the adjust screen.

Press  End  followed  by  the adjust key again to adjust the end of this
camera move.

Move  your  cursor  all  the way up to the far lower right corner of the
screen and press the "." key in the perspective keypad.

Press the Enter key in the perspective keypad to exit the adjust screen.

You  will  notice  that  when you are adjusting these frames the palette
does not appear correctly.  Do not worry about this.  We will fix this a
bit later.

Make sure that you have WRAP checked in the requester.

Set the Frame count to 20.

Press  AFTER  in the requester to tell Deluxe Paint that you want to add
this new animation after the spinning globe.

Play  the  animation  to see the results.  You will notice that spinning
globe  animation  is  followed  by  a  diagonal  wrap  animation  of the
DoggieBackground  Picture.    You  will  also   notice   that the Doggie
Background  animation has scrambled colors.  Let's solve this by forcing
a palette to the second animation.

First  let's  tell  Deluxe  Paint  what  frames you want to add this new
palette to.

Select SET FRAME PALETTE...  from the ANIM/FRAME pull down menu.

Since  the  new  DoggieBackground animation covers frames 33 through 52,
enter these numbers in the range frame count.

Select the Range button, then select Make Palette.

This tells Deluxe Paint that you want a separate palette for these range
of frames.

Click OK.

If  you  look at FRAME PALETTE INFO in the ANIM/FRAME pull down menu you
will see that there are two separate palettes assigned for two ranges of
frames.  Now all we need to do is change the palette for the second anim
so it looks correct.

Press  3  on  your keyboard to open the Go To Frame requester, and enter
33.

Press j to go to the spare page.

Pick up any part of the screen as a brush.

Press j to go, back to frame 33.

Select USE BRUSH PALETTE from the COLOR/PALETTE pull down menu.

Now the two anims have their correct palettes.

NOTE:
There are three other ways you can force a specific palette.

1.    You  can save a color set for a particular picture and then reload
the color set into frame 33.

2.    You  can  save  a  color palette for a particular picture and then
reload the color palette into frame 33.

3.    You  can go to frame 33 and adjust the palette manually by editing
the colors in the color mixer or the arrange palette requester.

TIPS

This  brief  section  lists some tips for using Deluxe Paint's animation
features.   This is not a complete list of tips, so be sure you at least
scan  the rest of the manual if you are not inclined to read everything.


You  can  use Fixed Background to see the current frame as you modify it
for  the  next  frame.    This  is  very useful for freehand animations.
Here's how it works:

Create  some  animation  frames  and  draw  a figure on frame 1.  Choose
Background>Fix from the Effect menu.  Choose a different colour to paint
a  modified  version  of the first figure.  Press 2 to step to frame 2.
Choose Background Free to stamp the modified figure on frame 2.  You can
repeat this process to paint the next modification, and so on.

If  you  want  your  brush  to grow (move toward the screen) in your ani
mation,  but  you need to stamp it in the small size for proper position
ing,  you  will  get nicer results if you paint the brush large and then
use  the  '  or Ctrl key in Perspective to shrink it before you paint it
down  for  the move.  This way the brush moves toward its original large
size  as  it  is drawn by the Move requester and the large size will not
suffer from "jaggies"

Slow  Out  and  Slow  In  from the Move requester always affect both the
Distance  and  Angle  motions.  So a falling, tumbling object won't look
right  -  the  tumble  accelerates  along  with the fall.  Here's a work
around:  Use Move to make a tumbling object without Slow Out or Slow In.
Pick the object up as an AnimBrush.  Now use Move to make this AnimBrush
fall  with  Slow  Out  for acceleration.  The tumble stays at a constant
rate, but the fall accelerates!

Sinmilarly Move can't Slow Out one Distance parameter and not the other.
That  means  it  can't make a cannonball fly at a constant x speed but a
decelerating  Y  speed  (to  form a parabola).  You can overcome this by
creating  the animation in steps as in the Amazing Bouncing Ball effect:
Use  Move  to paint a ball falling with Slow In Pick up the falling ball
as  an  AnimBrush.    Use  Move  (or the Straight Line tool with N Total
spacing)  to  paint  the  falling  ball  moving  across  the screen at a
constant rate.

If you want an object to completely disappear when it flies off to infin
ity  heres  a  trick: Set the x rotation to 90 degrees so that the brush
turns  "edge  on"  as  it  approaches infinity.  This way no more than a
single pixel line will remain of your brush.

When  you  paint your brush down to begin a move, Undo immediately after
you  stamp the brush.  This guarantees that the brush appears cor rectly
on the current frame when the move is painted.  Painting down your brush
before a move is how you tell Deluxe Paint where to start the move from.
You  don't  need  to leave the paint in place, since Deluxe Paint paints
that frame again as the first frame of the move.

You can't stamp the brush behind you, but you can Move it there.  If you
want  an object to start from behind the viewer and drop into the screen
with a perfect, unbroken motion, do this: Start from the centre position
and  use the Move requester set to a Count of 1 to move the brush out to
the position you want (for example, -1000 from the front of the screen).
Now  clear  the screen or reload the background for the aninmation.  Use
the  Move  requester  to  move the brush forward enough Z Distance to go
from behind you past the centre position and off into the distance.

If  you  have  a  series of pictures that use the same screen format and
palette,  you  can  use  Deluxe Paint V to give a slide show.  Just load
each  picture  into  a  frame  (see Load in the Picture menu for loading
multiple pictures) and set a slow frame rate or flip the frames manually
with the 2 and 1 keys.

Spacing Tips

When  you  animpaint  with the shape tools, use the Spacing requester to
control  the  number of brush stamps used to draw the shape.  In effect,
this setting determines how many frames you will paint over.

Instant Marquees: Set the Spacing requester to N Total and the number of
frames  you have, and animpaint unfilled shapes using a built in brush.
Using  the  Spacing  set  to N total for animpainting is especially good
with  the  Circle  tool,  which otherwise paints a non cyclical pattern.
Also try set ting Spacing to Every Nth Dot, especially with the unfilled
Polygon tool.


CHAPTER 8 - REFERENCE
---------------------

Deluxe  Paint  V's Reference chapter contains all the information you'll
need  to  master the program, arranged in a way that's easy to use.  The
Tools  sec tion covers the Toolbox, explaining how to select, modify and
use the tools to draw basic shapes or otherwise manipulate your image by
colour,  size,  shape, or orientation.  The Menus section covers all the
options  available  in  the  pull  down  menus.  The menus are described
individually  moving left to right across the Menu Bar, and down through
each option.

Some  entries  in Reference cross-reference other parts of the manual or
other  sections  of  Reference.  We recommend that you look at the cited
section for more information about any cross-referenced entry.

Tools

When  you  start Deluxe Paint V the Toolbox appears on the right side of
the  screen.  It contains built in brushes, tools, the Colour Indicator,
and the Palette.

Select a tool by clicking its icon in the Toolbox.

You can hide the Toolbox to expose more of the painting area by pressing
F10 (this hides the Toolbox and the Menu bar).  You can then press F9 to
display  the  Menu  Bar  without  the Toolbox.  Press F10 to display the
Toolbox again.

The  following  tool  desctiptions include any keyboard equivalents that
are  available.    And  to  help  you  learn  these, we have suggested a
mnemonic  for each one.  You'll find these especially useful if you want
to  hide the Toolbox as explained above.  You can also find all keyboard
equivalents in Appendix B.

Built-In Brushes
There  are  ten  built in brushes you can paint with in the Toolbox.  To
select any built in brush, click on it.

Right-clicking  a  brush invokes the resize brush option.  When you move
the  brush  to  the  screen,  your  cursor  has diagonal arrows pointing
outward.  To increase or decrease the size of the brush, drag the mouse,
and when the cursor is the size you want, release the button.

You can also change the size of the current brush dynamically even while
you're  painting.    Press the plus (+) key to increase the size of your
brush  (no  need  to  press  the Shift key).  Press the minus (-) key to
decrease  its  size.    The icon in the Toolbox reflects any changes you
make.

The  smallest  a  resized  built  in  brush can be is 1 x 1 pixel.  The
largest it can be is 100 x 100 pixels.

Dotted Freehand
Keyboard Equivalent: s - mnemonic - sketch
Lets  you  paint  freehand  with the current built-in (or custom) brush.
Hold  down the left mouse button to paint with the foreground colour, or
the  right  mouse  button to paint with the background colour.  The tool
paints in a series of "splats" or "stamps" of the current brush shape.

The  spacing  between  each stamp depends on how fast you move the mouse
the  faster you move the mouse, the greater the spacing between stamps.
If you move the mouse slowly there is no space between splats.

We  recommend you use this mode for drawing with custom brushes, or when
using the different paint modes.

Holding  down  the  Shift key while painting constrains the tool to move
either  horizontally  or  vectically depending on the direction you move
the cursor immediately after pressing Shift.

Continuous Freehand/ Filled Freehand Shape
Keyboard Eqnivalenr: d - mnemonic - draw D - Filled draw
Click  in  the  upper  left  corner of the icon to select the Continuous
Freehand  tool.    Click  in the lower right corner to select the Filled
Freehand Shape tool.

The  Continuous  Freehand  tool paints the brush in a continuous line as
you  drag  the  mouse.    This tool works like the Dotted Freehand tool,
except that

The  slower  you draw the smoother the lines.  Fast freehand drawing may
result in angular looking shapes, especially in higher resolutions.

Holding  down  the Shift key while painting with the Continuous Freehand
tool  constrains  the  tool  to  move  either horizontally or vertically
depending  on  the  direction  you  move  the  cursor  immediately after
pressing Shift.

Use the Filled Freehand Shape tool to draw filled freehand shapes.  When
you  release  the  mouse  button, your shape is filled using the current
setting  of  the  Fill  Type  requester (If you release the mouse button
before  you reach the starting point for your filled shape, Deluxe Paint
completes  the  shape  by drawing a straight line from the current mouse
position to the stating point of the shape).

Holding down i as you click on the Filled Freehand Shape tool causes the
tool  to paint shapes that are filled and then outlined with the current
brush  using  the  settings of the Spacing requester.  (See the Straight
Line  Tool below for an explanation of the options in this requester) If
you  use  a  custom brush as your current brush, it is possible to paint
shapes  that  are filled with one colour and outlined with another.  The
outline  is  painted  by tracing the shape with the current brush.  Note
that  the  shape  is traced by the brush handle; if the handle is offset
from the brush, the outline will be offset from your filled shape.

Right-clicking  on the Filled Freehand Shape tool displays the Fill Type
requester.   From here you can set the fill type for all filled shapes.
See Fill Tool for an explanation of the options in this requester.

Straight Line Tool
Keyboard Equivalent; v - mnemonic - vector V - Spacing requester
Paints  a  straight  line  in  any  direction.  The width of the line is
determined by the current built in (or custom) brush.  To paint a line:

Select  the  Straight  Line tool, and position the cursor where you want
the line to begin.

Use  the  left  mouse button to paint with the foreground colour, or the
right mouse button to paint with the background colour.

Drag in any direction to create a line.

Holding down the Shift key while painting a straight line constrains the
line to be either horizontal or vertical, depending on the direction you
move the cursor immediately after pressing Shift.

Holding  down the Ctrl key as you paint a straight line, causes the line
to leave "traces" as you paint.

Right  clicking  the  Straight Line tool displays the Spacing requester.
The  Spacing  requester  lets  you  specify  the space between the paint
"splats"  deposited  by  the  brush.    Click  to choose any of the four
options in the requester.

N Total
Defines  the  total  number  of "splats" that will occur along the line.
You  can  define  the  number  of  "splats"  by  clicking  the edit box,
backspacing  or delet ing over the existing value, and typing in the new
value.    This  setting  is  espe  cially  useful for ensuring that when
animpainting over a series of frames you get exactly the number of brush
stamps you need.

Every Nth dot
Spacing  sets  the  number  of pixels between each "splat" of the brush.
This lets you space your brush splats accurately.

Airbrush
Paints  using  the  Airbrush  tool  along  the  path defined by any tool
affected  by  the  Spacing  requester.    The number to the right of the
button  sets  the  number of airbrush sprays to be applied at each pixel
along  the  path.  This creates a fuzzy line or shape.  You can use this
feature  with  the  painting  modes  from  the  Modes  menu  to   create
interesting  effects.  For example using Smear with the Airbrush spacing
can  create interesting textured effects on a coloured background.  This
option  can only be used with the "splatter" Old Style airbrush, not the
Standard airbrush.

Continuous
This  spacing  paints  an  unbroken  path  with  no space between pixels
Continuous is the default setting.

Curve Tool
Keyboard Equivalent; q - mnemonic qurve
Use  the Curve tool to draw an arc between two points.  The width of the
line is determined by the current built-in (or custom) brush.  The Curve
works like the Straight Line tool, except that the line remains attached
to your cursor, so you can specify the third point in the arc.

Select  the Curve tool, and position the cursor where you want the Curve
to begin.

Drag  to where you want the curve to end, and release the mouse but ton.

Move  the  mouse  in  any  direction to form the arc shape you want, and
click.

Holding  down  the  Shift  key  while  painting  with  the  Curve  tool,
constrains  the  tool  to  move either horizontally or vertically as you
paint  the  initial line, depending on the direction you move the cursor
immediately  after  pressing Shift.  This is useful if you want the ends
of your curve to line up horizontal ly or vertically.

Holding  down  the  Ctrl  key  as you paint a curve, causes the curve to
leave "traces" as you paint.

Right  clicking  the  Curve  tool  displays  the  Spacing requester (see
Straight  Line  Tool,  above,  for an explanation of the options in this
requester).

Fill Tool
Keyboard Equivalent; f - mnemonic fill. F - Fill Type requester
Use the Fill tool to fill an enclosed area using the current settings in
the Fill Type requester.  To use the tool:

Move  the  paint  can cursor over the enclosed area you want to fill, so
that the tip of the spout is within the area.

The spout is the one pixel opening at the bottom of the "splash,"

Click to fill the enclosed area.

Holding  down  i when you click with the Fill cursor fills any irregular
shape,  including gradients, outward to the background colour.  In other
words,  the  fill  spreads outward until it reaches areas of the current
background colour.

Holding  down the Alt key when you click with the Fill cursor, animfills
the  shape.  This means that the frames of your animation will flip, and
the  fill  tool will fill outward on each frame from the point where you
clicked.    This  option  works  with  all  of the Fill Types except the
gradient  fills  that  use  the  gradient  direction  line to define the
gradient.

Right-clicking  the  Fill  tool  displays  the Fill Type requester.  The
options  in  the  requester  are  explained in the following paragraphs.
When  you  return to the painting screen after choosing a fill type, the
current  gradient  (or  pat tern, if Pattern or Perspective is selected)
and  its  orientation  are shown in the Colour Fill box in the Title Bar
(see User Feedback in Title Bar later in this chapter)

Fills  with  the  current colour.  If you paint or fill your shape using
the left button, the shape is filled with the foreground colour.  If you
paint or fill your shape using the right mouse button, it is filled with
the background colour.  This is the default mode.

Brush
Fills with one image of the current custom brush and sizes it to fit the
filled area.  See Figure 8.8.

Wrap
Fills  with  one image of the current custom brush and adjusts it to the
hori  zontal  and  vertical  shape  of  the filled area.  This gives the
illusion  of  wrap ping the brush around a 3D solid.  The effect is most
pronounced if you use it to fill a shape that is very different from the
shape of the custom brush.  See Figure 8.8.

Perspective
Fills  with  a  pattern  of the current brush in the current perspective
setting (see Perspective under the Effect menu).

Rub
Fills  using Rubthru mode, where the picture on the spare page is rubbed
through  to  the  area  to  be filled.  The current Translucency setting
determines  how much of the picture is rubbed through (100% translucency
equals  0%  of  the image being rubbed through).  This option is ghosted
unless a space page is available.

Hbrite
Fills using the Hbrite painting mode.  In effect, this is a special form
of  tint  ing  that  only works if you are working in a Halfbrite screen
mode  (see  HBrite  in  the  Mode  menu,  below).  When you are not in a
Halfbrite screen mode, this option is ghosted in the requester.  Drawing
with  the  right mouse button over Halfbrite areas reverts them to their
full colour counterparts.

Pattern
Fills  with  a  pattern made from a brush.  To use this option, you must
first  click  the  From  Brush button to create a pattern of the current
brush.    This  pattern remains the current fill pattern until you click
From Brush again to create a new pattern from your new custom brush.

Range
Fills  a  enclosed  object  with  a  spread  of colours (a gradient, see
Gradients  below) from the selected range.  Type in a number from 1-8 to
specify  the  range  you  want  to use.  Click to select one of the fill
options, which specify the direction and type of the gradient fill.  You
can only use one fill option at a time.

Horizontal paints the gradient horizontally.

Vertical paints the gradient vertically with an even distribution.

Horizontal  Line  paints the gradient one line at a time and adjusts the
gradi  ent  on  each  line  so that it follows the contours of the shape
being filled.

Gradients

Deluxe  Paint  supports  two  types  of gradients: Linear and Radial.  A
Linear  gradient  fills  an object in one direction (in a line), and can
either  take  the  object's  shape into account, or ignore it.  A Radial
gradient  fills  an  object  in all directions (radially) from the point
where  you  click,  until it reaches the boundaries of the object.  Like
Linear  gradients,  a Radial gradient can either take the object's shape
into account, or ignore it.

Linear Gradients
The  linear  gradients  are  Line and Shap(ed).  When you fill an object
with either of these options, a gradient directional line stretches from
the  centre  of  the object to the cursor.  Use this line to tell Deluxe
Paint  the  direction in which to fill the shape with the gradient.  For
example,  if  you move the directional line to the top of your shape and
click, Deluxe Paint fills your shape with the selected gradient from top
to  bottom.   The first colour in the gradient (in the far left position
in the range) appears at the bottom of the shape.

Line fills the object with a uniform linear gradient, ignoring the shape
of the object.

Shaped  fills the object with a linear gradient, taking the shape of the
object  into  account,  so  gradient  lines  tend to follow the object's
contours.

Radial Gradients
The  radial  gradients  are Cir(cular), Cont(ours), and (Hi)light.  When
you select any of them and click on a shape, a gradient directional line
stretches  from the centre of the object you filled to the cursor.  Move
the  cursor which is attached to the directional line, to the spot where
you  want  the gradient to begin and click.  Deluxe Paint will fill your
shape  radially  outward  from  the  point  where  you  clicked.  Radial
gradients are especially useful for drawing shadows and other consistent
three dimensional lighting effects.

Circular  fills  the  object with a circular (shaped) gradient radiating
outward  from the point where you click.  Like the Straight linear fill,
above, Circular does not take the shape of the object into account.

Contours  fills  the  object  with  the gradient taking the shape of the
object  into  account.    This  creates a contour effect, reminiscent of
topographical maps.

Highlight  is  similar  to Contours, but optimised to create a highlight
effect.    Like Contours, the object is filled with its shape taken into
account.  See Figure 8.12 for a comparison between the two methods.

Dither
Deluxe  Paint  draws patterned gradients by dithering, which reduces the
con  trast  between  adjacent  colours  (without  changing  the  colours
themselves).    Clicking  the  cycle button cycles through the following
choices:

Random
When  Random  is selected, you can adjust the degree of colour mixing in
the  gradient fill.  Drag the Dither slider left or right to decrease or
increase  the  amount  of dither.  Setting the slider all the way to the
left  gives  almost  no mixing between shades.  Moving the slider to the
right increases the amount of mixing at the colour boundaries.

Pattern
When  Pattern is selected, Deluxe Paint creates a fixed pattern dither.
This mode is useful for creating fills in modes with fewer colours.

Smooth
When  Smooth  is  selected,  Deluxe  Paint  utilizes  a  Floyd Steinberg
dithering  technique  that  smoothes the contrast between the colours in
your  gradient as best as possible.  This mode is most useful in HAM and
24-bit backing store modes, where more colours are available.

Airbrush Tool

Simulates  the action of an airbrush by spraying with the current brush.
Two  styles  of spray distribution are available: Old Style (random) and
Standard.

Select  the Airbrush tool.  Position the cross hair on the page and drag
to paint.

Click twice on the Airbrush tool to select Standard mode rather than Old
Style (the default).

Holding  down  the  Shift key while painting with the Airbrush tool, con
strains  the tool to move either horizontally or vertically depending on
the direction you move the cursor immediately after pressing Shift.

Press  the + and - keys to increase or decrease the size of the airbrush
when it is active.

Airbrush Settings requester

Keyboard  Equivalent:  Alt-A  - open requester.  A - Cycle Airbrush Type
Right  clicking  the  Airbrush  icon  displays  the  Airbrush   Settings
requester This requester lets you select the type of airbrush and radius
and flow para meters.

Airbrush Type
Choose between Old Style or Standard.  Old Style is the airbrush used in
previous  incarnations  of Deluxe Paint; pixels of the foreground colour
are  randomly  sprayed  within the radius settings of the airbrush.  You
can  per  form brush stamp painting with the Old Style airbrush, but not
in Standard mode.

In  Standard  mode,  the program paints similar shades of the foreground
colour  to  create  a  seamless,  blending  effect.    Just  like a real
airbrush,  paint  builds  opacity  gradually as you continue to spray an
area  (the  rate  your colour becomes opaque is controlled with the Flow
slider below).  In Standard mode the colours you paint with are affected
(tinted)  by  the  colour  you  paint on.  Note that only the four round
brushes  are  available with a Standard airbrush; the square brushes are
grayed out.

To  cycle between Old Style and Standard airbrush types without open ing
the Airbrush Settings requester, type A.

Radius
Use  the  slider  or  text  gadget to set the airbrush radius from 1-100
pixels The larger the number, the larger the sprayed area.

Flow
Changes  the  rate  of paint opacity build up in Standard mode on higher
settings equate to faster opacity.  Use the slider or text gadget to set
a value from 100.

Size
This button lets you resize the nozzle.  After clicking the button, move
the cursor onto the page and drag the mouse until the nozzle is the size
you want, then release the mouse button.

Clear Area
Clear  the  test  area, which is a window/view onto your page.  Clearing
this area doesn't affect the underlying image.

NOTE
Airbrushes  are  palette  dependent.    Therefore,  if  you paint with a
Standard  airbrush,  but  see  nothing,  you  need more contrast between
background and foreground colour.

Unfilled/Filled Rectangle

Keyboard Equivalent: r unfilled. R - filled; mnemonic - rectangle

Use  the Rectangle tool to paint a rectangle shape using any brush.  The
upper left half of the tool paints a rectangle outline using the size of
the  cur  rent  brush and the current settings of the Spacing requester.
The  lower  right  half  of the tool paints a filled rectangle using the
current settings of the Fill Type requester.

Select the Rectangle tool, and position the cursor on the page where you
want the rectangle to begin.

Drag  the  cursor diagonally to form a rectangle.  When the rectangle is
the size you want, release the mouse button.

Holding  down  the Shift key while painting with the Rectangle tool, con
strains  the  rectangle  to  be the same number of pixels wide and high.
You'll  notice  that  this  shape  is not necessarily a square.  This is
because  the  pixels  in  the  Amiga display are not square.  To paint a
square,  turn on the Be Square option in the Prefs menu.  When Be Square
is  on,  Deluxe  Paint  V adjusts the height and width of your square so
that it appears square rather than being square in terms of pixel count.

Holding down the Ctrl key as you paint a rectangle, causes the rectangle
to leave "traces" as you paint.

Holding down i as you click on the Filled Rectangle tool causes the tool
to paint shapes that are filled and then outlined with the current brush
using  the  settings of the Spacing requester.  (See Freehand Shape Tool
for more information).

Right  clicking  on  the  Unfilled  Rectangle  tool displays the Spacing
requester.    Use  this requester to set the spacing between "splats" in
the sides of your rectangle (See Straight Line Tool, above).

Right  clicking  on  the  Filled  Rectangle  tool displays the Fill Type
requester.   Use this requester to set the type of fill you want in your
rectangle.    See  Fill  Tool  for an explanation of the options in this
requester.

Unfilled/Filled Circle

KeyboardEquivalent: c - unfilled. C filled; mnemonic - circle

Use  the  Circle  tool to paint circles using any brush.  The upper left
half of the tool paints a circle outline using the current brush and the
current-set tings of the Spacing requester.  The lower right half of the
tool  paints a filled circle using the current settings of the Fill Type
Requester.

Select  the  Circle  tool, and position the cursor on the page where you
want the centre of the circle.

Drag the cursor in any direction to from the circle.  When the circle is
the size you want, release the mouse button.

The  circles  that  Deluxe  Paint  V  paints  may  not  appear perfectly
circular.    Circles are painted to be the same number of pixels high as
they are wide.  The circles do not appear perfectly circular because the
pixels of the Amiga display are not square.  If you want your circles to
appear  circular,  turn  on  the Be Square option in the Prefs menu (see
Prefs Menu below).

Holding  down  the  Ctrl key as you paint a circle, causes the circle to
leave "traces" as you paint.

Holding down i as you click on the Filled Circle tool causes the tool to
paint  shapes  that  are filled and then outlined with the current brush
using  the  settings of the Spacing requester.  (See Freehand Shape Tool
for more information).

Right-clicking  on  the  Unfilled  Circle  tool  displays  the   Spacing
requester.    Use  this requester to set the spacing between "splats" in
the sides of your cir cle (See Straight Line Tool, above).

Right  clicking  on  the  Filled  Circle  tool  displays  the  Fill Type
requester.   Use this requester to set the type of fill you want in your
circle.    See  Fill  Tool  for  an  explanation  of the options in this
requester.

Unfilled/Filled Ellipse

Keyboard Equivalent: e - unfilled. E - filled; mnemonic - ellipse

Use  the  Ellipse  tool to paint an ellipse.  The width and shape of the
line  is  determined  by  the current brush.  The upper left half of the
tool paints an ellipse outline using the current settings of the Spacing
requester.    The  lower  right half of the tool paints a filled ellipse
using the current setting of the Fill Type requester.

Select  the Ellipse tool.  Position the cursor where you want the centre
of the ellipse to be and click.

Move the cursor in any direction to form the shape you want.

Drag  the  mouse in a circular motion to rotate the ellipse.  The degree
of rotation is shown in the menu bar.

When  the ellipse is positioned in the orientation you want, release the
mouse button.

Holding  down the Ctrl key as you paint an ellipse causes the ellipse to
leave "traces" as you paint.

Holding  down  i as you click on the Filled Ellipse tool causes the tool
to paint shapes that are filled and then outlined with the current brush
using  the  settings of the Spacing requester.  (See Freehand Shape Tool
for more information).

Right  clicking  on  the  Unfilled  Ellipse  tool  displays  the Spacing
requester.    Use  this requester to set the spacing between "splats" in
the sides of your ellipse (See Straight Line Tool, above).

Right  clicking  on  the  Filled  Ellipse  tool  displays  the Fill Type
requester.   Use this requester to set the type of fill you want in your
ellipse.    See  Fill  Tool  for  an  explanation of the options in this
requester.

Unfilled/Filled Polygon

Keyboard Equivalent: w - polygon; W - filled polygon

Use  the  Polygon  tool  to  paint a polygon shape using any brush.  The
upper  left  half of the tool paints a polygon outline using the current
settings  of  the  Spacing  requester.  The lower right half of the tool
paints  a  filled  polygon  using  the current settings of the Fill Type
requester.

Select  the  Polygon tool, and position the cursor where you want one of
the corners of the polygon.

Click and then move the mouse in any direction to pull out a side of the
polygon.

Click  to  tack  down  each  corner  of  the  polygon.   Clicking on the
Polygon's point of origin completes it.

You can complete a polygon without having to search for the point of ori
gin by pressing the space bar.  This automatically completes the polygon
by  connecting  your last corner with the origin however if you're using
the  Unfilled Polygon tool, pressing the space bar will not complete the
polygon.    You'll  need  to  connect  the last corner with the point of
origin yourself.

Holding  down  the  Ctrl  key as you paint a polygon, causes the polygon
sides to leave "traces" as you paint.

Holding  down  i as you click on the Filled Polygon tool causes thc tool
to paint shapes that are filled and then outlined with the current brush
using  the  settings of the Spacing requester.  (See Freehand Shape Tool
for more information).

Right  clicking  on  the  Unfilled  Polygon  tool  displays  the Spacing
requester.    Use  this requester to set the spacing between "splats" in
the sides of your polygon.  (See Straight Line Tool, above).

Right  clicking  on  the  Filled  Polygon  tool  displays  the Fill Type
requester.   Use this requester to set the type of fill you want in your
polygon.    See  Fill  Tool  for  an  explanation of the options in this
requester.

Brush Selector

Keyboard  Equivalent:  b  -  new  brush, cycle through pickup modes; B -
previous brush; mnemonic - brush

Use  the  Brush  Selector to create a custom brush from any image on the
page, or to recall your most recent custom brush.

To select a rectangular brush:

Select  the  Brush  Selector  and  move the cursor to the page, where it
becomes a large cross-hair.

Drag diagonally to enclose the area you want to use as a brush.  Release
the mouse button to select it.

To select a polygonal brush:

Double  click  the Brush Selector to select it.  The Brush Selector icon
now looks like the Polygon tool.  In this mode you can select an area to
use as a brush in both polygonal and freehand modes.

Polygon
You  can  now surround the area you want to pick up as a brush as though
you  were  drawing  with  the  Polygon  tool.  As with the Polygon tool,
pressing the space bar completes the brush selection automatically.

Freehand
If you hold down the left mouse button, you can draw in freehand mode to
select  the  area  you  want to pick up as a brush.  As in Polygon mode,
pressing  the  space  bar  completes the brush selection automati cally.
You can also combine straight line clicking and freehand drawing to pick
up a brush area.

To select a magic pickup brush:

Triple  click  the Brush Selector to select it.  The Brush Selector icon
now looks like a magic wand.

Clicking  the left mouse button picks up the entire area contiguous with
the  selected  pixel  (ie.   the contiguous shape connected to the pixel
without  being  broken  by the background colour).  For instance, if you
click  in  the middle of a filled circle, the entire circle is picked up
as a brush.

NOTE
If the selected colour is the same as the background colour, the program
will pick up a 1 pixel transparent brush.

The  Magic  Pickup tool provides a quick way to pick up irregular shapes
in one simple action.

Holding  down the Ctrl key while selecting with the magic pickup selects
only  the contiguous area the same colour as the selected pixel.  If the
pixel  is  the same colour as the brush's transparency colour, the Magic
Pickup  tool  will pick up a completely transparent brush, the bounds of
which match the shape of the contiguous background-coloured pixels.

Left vs. Right Button
Using  the  left  mouse  button  to  pick  up  a brush simply copies the
selected  area  as  a brush.  Using the right button to select the brush
cuts the selected area from the page to make the brush, and replaces the
area with the current background colour.

When  you pick up a brush, any colours that match the current background
colour  are  transparent.  If you have AutoTransp turned on in the Prefs
menu,  this  additional rule applies: if all corners of the brush are of
the  same colour, that colour becomes transparent, regardless of whether
it is the back ground colour.  (See AutoTransp in the Prefs menu).

You  can  retrieve  your  most recent custom brush or AnimBrush by right
clicking the Brush Selector or pressing Shift-b.

Holding  down the shift key while selecting a brush with the rectangular
Brush Selector will constrain the brush to be a square.  This means that
it  will  be  the same number of pixels high as it is wide.  Because the
pixels  of  the  Amiga display are not square, your brush may not appear
square.    If  you want the brush to appear square, turn on Be Square in
the Prefs menu before you select the brush.

Text

Keyboard Equivalent: t - mnemonic - text. T - Choose Font requester

Use the Text tool to add text to your picture.

Select the Text tool, and move the cursor to the page.

Click  to  place the text cursor.  Type on the keyboard to enter text in
the current foreground colour.

The  text  will automatically wrap around the right edge of the page and
restart below the original cursor position.  If your page size is larger
than  the  screen,  the  page  scrolls  as  you type off the edge of the
screen.    The  text  tool  does not automatically word-wrap like a word
processor.

You can use the Backspace key to erase text, and the Return key to begin
a new line.  To exit text mode, press Esc or click a painting tool.

You cannot backspace over typed characters if the screen scrolls.

Right  clicking  the  Text Tool displays the Choose Font requester.  Use
this requester to choose fonts, sizes, and styles for your text.  Deluxe
Paint  V  uses  the  standard Amiga ASL font requester.  For information
about how this requester operates, consult your system's user manual.

The  scrolling  font  list  displays the fonts that are available in the
FONTS: directory.  To choose a font, click on its name.

Choose a size for the font by clicking on the up and down arrows next to
the  size  edit  box.   The scrolling list of sizes is restricted to the
currently avail able sizes for the font that you have chosen.  To choose
a  font size that is not available from the menu, type the point size in
the size edit field.

Choose  a  style  for  the  font  by  clicking  on the Bold, Italic, and
Underline  check  boxes.    You can use these styles in any combination.
Clicking an active (checked) button turns it off.

The  display  box  under the font gadgets shows a sample of the selected
font at its current point size.

Some  fonts are CAPS only fonts, so if you are typing and all you see is
an outline, turn on the Caps Lock key and try again.

FONT TIPS
To Load and Assign Fonts from other Disks or Directories:

Make  sure  that  you  know the correct disk name or storage device name
and/or  the  full path name of the fonts location.  For example, say you
have  some  video  fonts  stored on a disk called EXTRAFONTS in a drawer
called  FORVIDEO,  then in the Drawer field of the Font Dir requester in
the Prefs menu you would type EXTRAFONTS : FORVIDEO and press the Return
key or simply choose it from the file list.  Similarly if the fonts were
stored on a hard drive partition called dh0 in a subdrawer called FONTS1
under  a  drawer called PAINT then you would select or type dh0 : PAINT/
FONTS  T  to access them.  Note that changing the font directory affects
your system globally not just in Deluxe Paint.

If  you  have  a hard drive and keep your fonts in several drawers or in
drawers  a  couple  of  levels deep, you may want to add assigns to your
existing  FONTS:  assign  so  that  you  can access your font collection
quickly in the Font requester.  Please consult your Amiga owners manu al
or  Amiga  DOS  manual  to  learn how to properly use the Assign command
before  you  experiment with this.  Following is an example of an Assign
you  can  use  to access the two Colourfonts included on the Media disk.
The assign to access the fonts would be:

ASSIGN FONTS: dh0:DpaintV/Karafonts Add

After  this  Assign  has  been executed, the Karafonts subdirectory auto
matically  is added to your existing FONTS: Assign.  When you reopen the
Choose  Font  requester  the new fonts are listed.  (If they aren't list
ed, choose Rescan Disk from the Choose Font requester's Control menu).

This  example can be used widely for other font drawers as well.  In the
LOAD  and  SAVE  requesters throughout the program.  Assigns can also be
quite  useful for saving and loading Pictures, Brushes, AnimBrushes, and
Animations to long path names.

Please  note that not all font sets have complete attributes, some fonts
may  not  be  able  to be Italicised or Underlined; most fonts should be
able to be set to Bold.

Deluxe  Paint  V  is  compatible with most Standard Amiga fonts, and can
also  load  Colour  Fonts of up to 16 colours.  Your Amiga dealer, local
Amiga  Users  Group,  or Amiga magazines are good sources for obtain ing
Public  Domain  fonts or for Purchasing additional commercial fonts like
the KaraFonts included with Deluxe Paint V.

Grid

Keyboard Equivalents: g - grid on/off.  G - grid on and use brush handle
location as a grid point; mnemonic - grid

The  Grid  constrains some of the painting tools so that they paint only
on  the coordinates of a grid.  If you press G to turn the grid on while
using  a  brush,  the grid will use the current brush handle position as
one of its grid points.

The tools affected by the grid are:

Dotted Freehand
Straight Line
Rectangle
Circle
Ellipse
Brush Selector
Text

Right  clicking the Grid icon displays the Gridding requester.  Use this
requester to adjust the x and y spacing of the grid.

You  can  specify  the  grid values in pixels by deleting or backspacing
over  the existing values and typing in the new ones.  Alternatively you
can  click  Adjust,  which  lets  you visually place and adjust the grid
cursor  on  the work area.  The upper left corner of the adjustable grid
is  anchored  as  you  drag  the  lower right corner.  Release the mouse
button to complete the adjustment.

Right  clicking the Grid tool while you are in Perspective mode displays
the  Perspective Settings requester.  See Perspective>Settings under the
Effect menu.

Symmetry

Keyboard Equivalent: /

The  Symmetry tool helps you print symmetrical patterns around a central
point or based on a tiling scheme.  Symmetry works with all tools except
Text and Brush Selector.

Right-clicking  the  Symmetry tool displays the Symmetry requester.  Use
this requester to choose between the two symmetry modes (Point and Tile)
and to set parameters for each of the modes.

Point Symmetry
Works  around  a  central  symmetry point in either Mirror (mirror image
duplication  of  each  point)  or  Cyclic  (direct  duplication  at each
symmetry  point) In Point Symmetry you can select the number of symmetry
points  by  using  the Order edit box.  You can also set the location of
the  symmetry  centre by clicking Place and then the point on the screen
where you want the centre of symmetry to be.

Place
Lets  you  position  the  central point of your symmetrical pattern.  To
reposi tion the central point, click Place, move the large cross-hair to
the  new  loca  tion, and click.  Subsequent symmetrical drawing will be
centred on the new location.

Tile Symmetry
Creates  "tile"  patterns.    You  can  set  the horizontal and vertical
dimensions  (in  pixels)  of the tile in the width and height edit boxes
(Tile  Symmetry  requester  only).    Tile  is  useful  in creating fill
patterns  once  you've created your symmetrical pattern, set the Grid to
the  same  spacing  as the tiles to pick up exactly one tile as a brush.
Tile  lets  you  create  an  entire  pattern  just by drawing one of its
elements, and is an ideal tool for textile designers.

Because  Tile  Symmetry gives immediate feedback as you draw it replaces
the  picture  beneath  each  of  the  tiles  in the symmetry.  This will
effectively destroy any picture that was on the screen before you turned
on Tile Symmetry.

If  you  want  to  use  Tile Symmetry to paint over an existing picture,
choose  Background>Fix  from  the  Effect  menu  before you turn on Tile
Symmetry.   This will protect your existing picture from any inadvertent
alteration.

Magnify

Keyboard Equivalent: m - mnemonic - magnify

The  Magnify  tool  divides  the  screen into two parts and displays the
right  hand  side  in magnification.  This tool is especially useful for
detail  work.   When you are in Magnify mode, you can use any other tool
on either side of the screen.

Select  the Magnify tool.  Position the Magnify box over the part of the
image you want to enlarge and click with either button.

This  divides the screen into two parts, with the right part magnified.
You  can  scroll  the magnification window using the arrow keys or the n
key, which centres the area under the cursor.

To  change  the  magnification  scale  click  the  Zoom icon (beside the
Magnify  tool).    Clicking  Zoom  enlarges  the  magnified  area: right
clicking shrinks it.

You  can  set  the  Zoom level before you magnify an area.  Changing the
Zoom  setting will change the size of the rectangle attached to your cur
sor when you are in the process of magnifying an area.

To return to normal display mode, click the Magnify tool again.

The  Magnify  tool  is especially useful for detailed work.  You can use
any other tool on either side of the screen in Magnify mode.

Zoom

Keyboard Equivalent: > - enlarge < - shrink

Changes  the scale in Magnify Mode (see Magnify Tool, above).  Click the
Zoom tool to enlarge the image; right-click to shrink the image.

Undo

Keyboard Equivalent: u - mnemonic - undo

Reverses  the last painting action (including UNDO) as long as there has
not  been  an intervening mouse click or a refresh of the screen such as
that  caused by pressing F9 or F10 to hide or show the menu and toolbox,
bring  ing  up  any requesters or control panels through the keyboard or
menu, or scrolling the screen.

WARNING You must type u to undo when painting without the toolbar.

CLR

Keyboard  Equivalent:  K  - clear current screen or activate clear frame
requester when there is an animation - mnemonic - Klear

Clears (erases) the current screen to the current background colour.  If
you  have  multiple  frames,  right  click on CLR to bring up an Options
requester where you can select which frames you want to clear.

Colour Indicator

Indicates the current foreground and background colours.

Clicking  the  Colour  Indicator (or pressing the comma "," from the key
board)  selects  the  eye  dropper  cursor.   This lets you select a new
foreground  or  background colour by clicking a colour on screen.  Click
the  on  screen colour to select a new foreground colour, or right-click
to select a new back ground colour.

Right  clicking the Colour Indicator displays the Colour Mixer.  Use the
Mixer to arrange modify and mix colours for your palette.

Deluxe  Paint  V  lets you modify colours with either the RGB or the HSV
colour  mixing  systems.  See Palette under the Colour Menu, below for a
detailed description of the Mixer.

Palette Area

Clicking a colour in the palette selects that colour.  Click to select a
new foreground colour and right click to select a new background colour.

You can scroll through the colours in the palette to select a foreground
colour  by  pressing  the  [  and  ]  keys on the keyboard.  Shift-[ and
Shift-] to scroll through and select a background colour.

In  colour  modes greater than 64 colours an indicator appears below the
palette to show which area of the Colour Set you are viewing.  Click the
arrows  to  move  forward  or  backward.    Shift  click  to move to the
beginning or end.

To change the colours in your palette, use the Palette and/or Colour Set
options from the Colour menu.

MENUS

Deluxe Paint menus work just like standard Amiga menus.  In Deluxe Paint
V  the  file  requesters  (Load,  Save,  etc,) follow standard Amiga ASL
conven tions.

Point  to  the Title Bar and press the right mouse button to display the
Menu Bar.

Point to a menu name to open that menu.

Drag  the pointer down to one of the menu options, and release the mouse
button to select that option.

In  a  file requester, press F1 to toggle the Options panel on/off.  The
Options  panel  provides information about the selected file and in some
cases, file loading or saving options.

File requesters have a Control menu that is available when the requester
is open.  The Control menu options are:

Last  Name  and  Next  Name  move  up  and down through the file list.
Restore  recalls  the  list and text gadget contents that were displayed
when the requester was opened.  The Parent, Volumes, OK, and Cancel menu
items work just like the corresponding gadgets in the requester.

Delete  deletes  the  file  currently  selected  in  the  requester.   A
requester  appears,  requiring  confirmation before the file is actually
deleted.    Select  OK  to  delete  the  file or Cancel to return to the
requester without deleting the file.

Some  menu  options  have  submenus  indicated  by » to the right of the
option.    You  can drag the highlight down to the option to display the
sub  menu, then drag the highlight to the right and down again to select
an option from the submenu.

When  we reference a submenu option in this manual, we use the following
convention: "Choose menu option>submenu option from the X menu " So, for
example,  "choose  Spare>Swap  from the Picture menu - means display the
Picture menu and highlight Spare".  This exposes the Spare submenu, From
the submenu highlight Swap and release the mouse button to activate your
command.

In  many  cases,  you  can  select  a  menu  item  by using its keyboard
equivalent  A table of keyboard equivalents is included as Appendix B at
the back of this manual.

TIP
One  keyboard  equivalent  deserves  special mention: a, the "Again" key
invokes your last menu command, whatever it may have been.

The  menus  are  discussed in the order they are displayed, reading from
left to right across the Menu Bar.

Picture Menu

The  Picture  menu lets you save, load, and print your pictures, as well
as  allowing  you  to make various global changes to the colour palette,
screen resolution, and page format.

Keyboard Equivalent: Right-Amiga-l

The Load... command displays the standard Amiga file requester.

Clicking  the  Volumes gadget displays a list of available floppy disks,
hard  disk  partitions, and assigned directories.  Click on drawer names
to  list their contents.  The file size, date, and time are displayed to
the  right  of  each  file  name.  Use the sizing gadget to increase the
window size if the window isn't wide enough to display this information.

Clicking the Parent action button moves you into the parent directory in
which the current subdirectory resides.  This may or may not be the root
directory.    If you click a drawer [subdirectory] name you will see all
the files in that subdirectory.

If  you swap disks while this requester is displayed, Deluxe Paint reads
the  new  disk's  directory  but does not display it until you click the
Volumes but ton.

If  there  are  more  items  in  the directory than there is room in the
window,  you  can  scroll through the window by clicking the up and down
arrow keys, or by dragging the scroll box up and down.

Note  that  devices, volumes, and directories are shown in the requester
in white type, while files are shown in black type.

Assigns  are denoted as Assign in the file window and are shown in white
type.   Assigns are beneficial to users with large storage devices, such
as  hard  disks,  removable  media,  etc.   You can create assigns to go
directly  into  deep  levels  of  subdirectories.    By  using an assign
command,  you can avoid having to move through multiple drawer levels to
find an image file.  Please consult your Amiga owners manual or an Amiga
DOS manual for more informa tion regarding this feature.

Pattern Edit Field
When  used  with the proper pattern matching parameters, this field lets
you  selectively  view  the  files  you want.  You may have noticed that
there  are  two types of character extension patterns that were used for
files  in  the  Picture drawer of the Examples disk, filename.LoRes, and
filename.Ham  for  example,  if you only wanted to look at the filenames
that  end  with .LoRes, you would type #?,LoRes.  Your file window would
show you only the files that end in .LoRes.  A good practical example of
how  this  could be used is for the loading of a sequence of pictures as
an  animation.   If your sequence of Pictures were numbered sequentially
or  alphabetically  and  started  with  the  word Space and ended a .Ham
extension  then  you type Space#?.Ham in the Pattern edit field and only
those  files  would  be  viewable.   Select the first file, set the # of
frames  (see  below  for  a more complete explanation of the # of frames
edit  box),  click  on  load,  and  your  animation will be put together
automatically for you.

The recognised pattern parameters for this edit field are:

?            Matches single characters
#<pattern>   Matches occurrences of <pattern>.
^<pattern>   Matches only occurances of <pattern> at the beginning of the
             line.
~<pattern>   Filters out all entries that contain <pattern>,

Examples:

#?                  Shows all files
#?A#?               Shows all files whose name contains the letter A
AN#?                Shows all files that begin with letters AN and end
                    with a period followed by a 3 character extension.
#?.ANIM             Shows all files that end with an ANIM extension.
^NTSC               Shows only files that start with NTSC.
~NTSC#?HALFBRITE    Filters out all NTSC and DBLNTSC Halfbrite modes.

Control menu
The  Load  Picture  file  requester has a Control menu with eight items.
Last  Name and Next Name move up and down through the file list, Restore
recalls  the  list and text gadget contents that were displayed when the
requester  was  opened.   The Parent, Volumes, OK, and Cancel menu items
work just like the corresponding gadgets in the requester.

Delete  deletes  the  file  currently  selected  in  the  requester.   A
requester  appears,  requiring  confirmation before the file is actually
deleted.    Select  OK  to  delete  the  file or Cancel to return to the
requester without deleting the file.

Loading a File
Click  the  file  you want to load, and then click the OK button to load
the  selected file.  Or if you prefer you can simply double-click on the
filename  to  load  the  file.  Pictures load with all their attributes:
palettes,  stencils,  and per spective information.  Click Cancel if you
don't want to load a file.

When  you  load  a  picture,  the  loaded  picture replaces any existing
picture.    If you have multiple frames, the loaded picture replaces the
current  frame,  and  is  remapped  to  the Anim frame's palette.  A new
palette isn't automatically loaded.

Load Picture Options panel
The Options panel displays attributes of the selected file, and lets you
load multiple images as an animation.

Bytes:            File size in bytes
Screen/Page Size: Screen/Page dimensions in pixels
Colours:          Number of colours in the file
Name:             Name of the file or Name chunk if available
Author:           Author name (if available)
(c):              Copyright information (if available)

Load  #  of frames: Check this box to load multiple pictures at one time
as  frames  of  an  animation.  To select multiple files, Shift click on
files  that  you  wish to be placed in the animation.  The pictures must
all  be  in  the same format, and the files are loaded in the order that
they're  listed,  not  necessari ly the order that they're selected.  To
create multiple frames from a single pic ture, select one file and enter
a  number  in  the  text  gadget  to  set  the  number of frames for the
resulting animation.  If you already have animation frames, those frames
are discarded and Deluxe Paint creates new frames as you load.

If you want to add pictures to your animation without discarding it, you
must load the pictures one at a time.  Deluxe Paint loads a single image
in your current frame.

Deluxe  Paint  loads the pictures starting with the picture you selected
in  the  requester  and  continuing  down  the listing shown to load the
number  of  frames you requested.  If any of the files in the list is an
animation,  Deluxe  Paint  loads the first frame of that animation as an
animation  frame  in  the  new animation.  The newly assembled animation
uses  the palette of the picture loaded, and adds additional palettes as
needed.

Save

Keyboard Equivalent: Right-Amiga-s

Displays the Save Picture ASL file requester.  This requester works like
the Load Picture requester, except that it saves the file to disk rather
than load ing it.

To save a picture from the requester, click on the disk name you want to
save  to.    Click  on the subdirectory you want to save your picture in
(Both  the  disk  drive  and directory you selected appear in the Drawer
edit  box,  for  example  DF0:Examples).  Click in the File edit box and
type a name for your picture.  Finally click OK to save the file.

You can save in a particular subdirectory by clicking in the Drawer edit
box and typing in the subdirectory name, or by clicking the subdirectory
name directly from the file names displayed in the window.

When you type in either the Drawer or File edit boxes, you can erase the
existing  type  by  clicking  at  the  end  of  the  existing  name  and
backspacing  or  by  clicking at the beginning of the name and Deleting.
You  can move over the text without deleting it by using the arrow keys.

Tip
Typing Right Amiga X deletes the current line of text.

You can save a picture under an existing file name by clicking that file
name  in  the  file  listing  or you can enter a new file name (up to 29
characters  long)  by  clicking  the  File edit box and typing the name.
Whenever  you  save  a  picture  under  an  existing  name, Deluxe Paint
displays  a  requester for you to confirm that you want to overwrite the
existing file.

Pictures  are  saved  and  reloaded  with  all their attribures, such as
palettes,  stencils and perspective information, 24 bit pictures are not
saved  with  any  palette  information.    See the Appendix E: The 24Bit
Backing Store for more information.

Save Picture Options panel
Press F1 to toggle the Options panel on/off.

Name:  Enter  the  name of the picture image in this text box (this name
can be different from the filename if you wish).

Author: Enter the name of the author of the image here.

(c): Enter copyright information in this text box.

Frames:  Specify a frame range to save, if applicable when you save more
than  one frame, each frame is saved as a separate picture, and a number
is  appended to the end of the filename.  For example, if you enter 5 to
10  as the frames you want to save, frames 5-10 are saved as Filename005
through Filename010.

Control menu
The  Load  Picture  file  requester has a Control menu with eight items.
Last  Name and Next Name move up and down through the file list, Restore
recalls  the  list and text gadget contents that were displaycd when the
requester  was  opened.   The Parent, Volumes, OK, and Cancel menu items
work  just  like  the  corresponding gadgets in the requester.  Keyboard
short Cuts for the options are listed in the menu.

Delete  deletes  the  file  currently  selected  in  the  requester.   A
requester  appears,  requiring  confirmation before the file is actually
deleted.    Select  OK  to  delete  the  file  or  Cancel to turn to the
requester without deleting the file.

The Pattern edit box and Volumes gadget work just as in the Load Picture
requester (see Load, above)

Delete

Keyboard Equivalent: Right-Amiga - d

Displays ASL Delete File requester which lets you delete a file from the
disk without leaving the program.  This is especially useful if you find
that your data disk is full and you need to delete a file before you can
save  your  work  The Delete File requester works just like the Load and
Save  requesters described above.  You can enter a file name by clicking
that  name  in  the requester window or by typing the name directly into
the File edit box.

You can use this option to delete any kind of file on the disk, not just
pictures.  Thus, you can delete brushes, animations, etc.

Print

Keyboard Equivalent: Right-Amiga - p

Displays  the  Print  Picture  requester.    Before you start to print a
picture,  make  sure  you  have selected the correct printer driver from
Preferences, and that your printer is connected and turned on.  See your
Amiga Users Guide for information on Printer Preferences.

The Print Picture requester provides the following options:

Frame  Range:  Click All to print all the frames (if applicable), or use
the  From  and  To text boxes to select a range of frames to be printed.
This option is only available if an animation is loaded.

AnimBoards:  This cycle gadget can be used to print multiple frame anima
tions on a single page by selecting 1Up, 2Up, 4Up, 6Up, 9Up, or 16Up sto
ryboards.    Note  that  4,  9,  and  16Up AnimBoards preserve the tiled
picture  aspect  ratios  best.    This  option is only available when an
animation is loaded.

Copies: Specifies how many copies of the picture you want printed.

Shade: Cycle between B & W, Grey, or Colour to specify whether the print
out will be in black and white, shades of grey or colour.  Make sure the
set  ting  is  appropriate  for your printer.  If you are using a single
colour  ribbon,  click  B  &  W.   If you want to translate your image's
colours  into shades of grey use the Grey setting.  If you have a colour
printer and wish to print in full colour, click Colour.

Density: Use the slider to set the print density.

Image:  Specifies  whether  the  printout will be a positive or negative
image, Click to cycle between Positive and Negative.

FF: Lets you set whether or not you want the printer to move to the next
sheet of paper before printing each image.  This lets you easily print a
single picture per sheet of paper.

Placement:  Specifies  whether the picture should be printed against the
left margin of the page or centred on the page.

LF:  Specifies  the  number  of  line  feeds  you want to insert after a
picture  is  printed.  This way you can easily print two pictures on the
same page with a specified amount of space in between the pictures.

Aspect:  Specifies  the  orientation of the picture on the paper, either
Portrait,  the  default,  or Landscape.  Click to cycle between Portrait
and Landscape.

Scale:  Cycle between Dots Wide or Percent.  When Dots Wide is selected,
use  the  Wide  and High text boxes to enter the height and width of the
printout  in printer pixels.  Values of 0 for width or height will cause
the  aspect  ratio limitations to be ignored and the printout will be as
large  as the margins will allow.  When Percent is selected, you can use
the  Wide  and  High  text  boxes to set the aspect ratio for height and
width.

You  can use the Percent feature to compensate for elongated squares and
cir  cles  that result when you change screen formats.  If you just want
to  shrink  the  picture while maintaining the same aspect ratio, change
the  Wide  value and leave the High value at 0.  To change either value,
click  the  appropriate  gadget,  Backspace  or Delete over the existing
value, and type in the new one.

Cancel  if don't want to print and don't want to save any new settings.
Click Exit if you don't want to print, but want to save your settings to
print  later Click Print to print the current picture, or once you start
printing,  you  can  stop  at  any time by pressing the Stop button that
appears while printing is in progress.

Refer  to  your AmigaDOS documentation for information on how to set any
print  options  not available in the Print Picture requester.  Note that
the  Print  Picture  requester  only  affects  printer options in Deluxe
Paint.    To  permanent  ly change your system printer settings, use the
Workbench Printer Preferences requester.

Flip >>
Flip  lets  you  flip  a  picture  about  its  X or Y axis.  If you have
multiple  frames,  you  can  flip  one  frame, a range of frames, or all
frames  of  your animation The submenu offers two ways to flip an image,
horizontally or vertically.

Horiz
Flips the current picture about the horizontal or X axis.

Vert
Flips the current picture about the vertical or Y axis.

Spare >>
The Spare option presents a submenu with options for manipulating Deluxe
Paint's  spare  page.    Note that the spare page now has its own unique
colour palette.

Swap

Keyboard Equivalent: j

Conceals  the  current page and displays a second or "spare" page.  This
means  you  have two pages to work on.  The concealed page is always the
spare page.

When  you  first  select the spare page, it is the same size as the main
page.    If you wish to use a larger page size on the spare page, you'll
need  to  make  the appropriate selection from the Page Size option (see
below).  Note, however, that you can increase the size of a page only if
you  have sufficient memory available.  Note also that a spare page uses
up memory even if there is noth ing on it.

Copy to Spare

Keyboard Equivalent: Ctrl-j

Copies  the picture and palette on the current page to the spare page so
you  can  experiment with your picture on the spare page without fear of
losing anything.  If you do not have sufficient memory for a spare page,
save  the  image to disk if you wish to experiment with it.  If you copy
to the spare from a page that is larger than the spare, only the visible
portion  of  the page is copied.  If you copy to a spare which is larger
than  the  screen,  a  copy  is made to the spare at the location in the
spare that was visible when you last viewed it.

Merge in Front

Merges the spare page in front of the current page.  When the spare page
is  brought  forward,  all pixels matching its current background colour
will  appear  transparent,  allowing  images on the current page to show
through  You  must  be  viewing  the  page you want to merge to when you
choose this option.

Merge in Back

Merges  the spare page in back of the current page.  When the spare page
is put behind the current one, all pixels which match the current page's
back ground colour will appear transparent, allowing images on the spare
page to show through.  You must be viewing the page you want to merge to
when you choose this option.

Delete this Page

If  you  no  longer  wish  to have memory allocated for a second "spare"
page,  use  this  option  to  delete the current page (the one currently
showing  on  the  screen) and to deallocate the memory set aside for it.
Be  sure  you  have  saved a copy of the picture you are deleting if you
think  you  may need it later.  When you select Delete this Page, Deluxe
Paint  asks  you  to  confirm the deletion, and then switches you to the
other page.

Page Size

Displays  the Set Page Size requester.  Select the page size (in pixels)
you  wish  to  work on.  Screen is the normal Amiga display size for the
selected resolu tion.

Full  Page  gives  you  a  full  page image (8 1/2 by 11 inches) on most
printers,  Overscan presents a full-screen display which lets you create
pictures  that  fill  the entire screen.  This is particularly useful if
you  wish to videotape your images.  In order to paint on the edges of a
full  video screen, you need to scroll the image around using the cursor
keys  or  the  n  key  unless you set the screen format to Overscan (see
Screen  Format, below).  Alternatively you can view the entire screen by
selecting Show Page, below.

Clicking  one  of the first three settings automatically sets the height
and  width  in  the  corresponding edit hoxes.  You can also type in any
other  size  you  wish  by  selecting  Custom  and  then  clicking   the
appropriate edit field, Backspacing or Deleting over the existing value,
and  typing  in the new size.  Although Deluxe Paint will recognise page
sizes up to 1008 x 1024, you may need to reduce the number of colours in
your palette to create a picture this large.

Show Page

Keyboard Equivalent: S

Hides  the  Toolbox  and  Title Bar and displays the entire document, if
neces  sary in a reduced format.  For example, in 640 x 400 page size in
Lo  Res,  it  shows  only  every  other pixel.  If the page is oversized
(larger than the screen), you can move the rectangle to view a different
area  of  the screen by holding down the left mouse button: dragging the
rectangle  to the area you want to view: and releasing the mouse button.
You  are  returned to the current page with the area of the rectangle in
view.    Pressing  any  key  returns  you  to  the  current page without
repositioning the view.

For  more  exact  positioning  of the rectangle you can move it with the
arrow  keys.   The arrow keys move the rectangle one unit at a time.  (A
unit  is  the  page  size dimension divided by the screen size.  So with
320x200  screen  for mat with 640x400 page, the rectangle moves 2 pixels
at  a time).  Holding down the Alt key and pressing the arrow keys moves
the rectangle in screen size increments.

Screen Format

Displays  the  Screen Format requester.  The items in this requester are
arranged  a  little  differently  than  in Deluxe Paint IV, and some new
options  have been added.  Be sure to save a copy of your current screen
before  changing screen formats because once you have reduced the number
of  colours, the original colour information is lost.  In addition, note
that  changing  formats  eliminates most items from memory including the
Font Directory.

Choose  Display  Mode:  Click  on  one of the available display modes to
select  that  mode.  The display modes that appear are dependent on what
is  in  your  Monitors  drawer  at  boot  up.   Deluxe Paint reads which
monitors you have available for use and automatically makes their screen
modes available in the Screen Format requester.  Note: Your monitor must
be  capable  of  displaying  the modes you have in your Monitors drawer.
For example, a 1084 monitor isn't capable of displaying Multiscan modes.

In 640x200 modes pixels are tall and narrow compared to other screen for
mats.    This  means if you switch from a 320x200 mode to a 640x200 mode
such  as  NTSC:Hires, objects will become flattened or elongated because
of  the different pixel shape.  You can compensate for this by using the
Double Horiz and Double Vert options from the Brush menu (see below).

Screen Size: Click the button to cycle through the available sizes.  The
Custom  option allows you to choose the size of the screen using the two
text  boxes (width, height).  The maximum height and width of the screen
is listed in the Max Size parameter in the Display Information window.

Page  Size:  Select Screen to make the page size the same as the current
screen  size  dimensions.    Select Keep Same to retain the current page
size  for  new documents.  If the current Page size is too small for the
current  screen dimensions, it is increased, but won't affect the image.

Example #1: Screen - If you start in 320 x 200 screen format and move to
640  x 400 format, your image will fill only one quarter of the screen.
If  you  go  from 640 x 400 to 320 x 200, you will only retain the upper
left quarter of your image.

Example #2: Keep Same - If you start in 640 x 400 format and move to 320
x  200  format,  you  will  retain the entire image but you will need to
scroll the screen to see all of it.

Palette  Size:  This  slider  defaults  to  the  maximum colours for the
selected display mode, but can be set to a lower number if desired.

Backing  Store:  Cycle  between None (default) or 24-bit RGB for using a
backing store to enable 24-bit colour.

Retain  Picture: Click this checkbox to retain the current picture (this
is on by default).

Display  Information:  This  box  displays  information for the selected
display mode.

Credits:  A  listing of the people who created Deluxe Paint V appears in
this box.  Use the scroll bar to scroll up and down through the listing.


Menus

Right  click  the  Menu  Bar to reveal the four menus available when the
Screen  Format  requester  is  displayed.    Menu shortcuts for the menu
options are listed in each menu.

Control:  The Control menu provides another way to move through the list
of  display modes, as well as Use the selected mode or Cancel out of the
requester.    FirstMode  and  LastMode select the first and last display
modes  in  the list respectively.  NextMode and PrevMode select the next
or  previous display modes.  Use and Cancel work like the Use and Cancel
buttons in the requester.

Edit:  Reset  To  Defaults  restores  the  system  default display mode.
Restore  Last  Saved  restores the display mode last saved as a tooltype
Save Settings saves the current display mode as a tooltype.  The Default
Pattern  »  item  allows  you  to  Use or Define the default pattern for
listing display modes The Deluxe Paint default pattern is '#?' (show all
files), but you can Define any pattern you like to constrain the listing
to your desired parameters.

Monitors:  This  menu lets you constrain the display mode listing to ALL
monitor  types  or a specific monitor type (DOUBLENTSC, MULTISCAN, NTSC,
or SUPEG72).

Settings:  The  Display  Names » item lets you view the display modes by
standard  Monitor  name  or  by Mode ID.  The History >> item displays a
list of the last ten patterns you've entered, so you can use the menu to
select a pattern you've set previously rather than typing in the pattern
again.    The  patterns  are  maintained in memory only for your current
Deluxe Paint ses sion: they are not saved when you exit the program.

HAM
The  Hold  and  Modify display mode (HAM) uses either 64 colours for the
262,000+  AGA colours or 16 colour registers to display 4,096 colours on
the  screen  at the same time.  A HAM colour is formed by taking the RGB
value of the preceding pixel on the screen, and substituting a new value
for one of the RGB components.

Because  HAM  colours are based on colour values of the preceding pixel,
and  only  one  colour value can be changed at a time, it may take three
pixels  to  reach the colour you really wanted.  In Figure 8.25 it takes
three  pixels  to  change  black  (R0, G0, B0) to white (R15, G15, B15).
Note  that  this example assumes there are no intermediate colour in the
normal  colour  registers.  This gradual change from one colour the next
is sometimes referred to as "ramping" the colour, and appe on the screen
to  the  left  of  HAM pixels.  If you need fine details in picture, you
will  want  to  use  a  colour from one of the sixteen colour registers,
because those colours do not require ramping.

When  you paint with a brush over an area made up of HAM pixels, you may
see  streaks of colour running to the right from the edge of the brush.
This  is a temporary effect called "fringing".  When you paint the brush
onto  the  picture,  Deluxe Paint corrects the fringing, but you may see
the  "ramp ing" effect where the program recreates the HAM colour to the
right of your brush.

In  HAM  mode  there is a selector button displayed under the palette on
screen.    Click on the arrows to move through the 16 sets (A through P)
of  colours  available  in your total colour set.  The "a" group is your
palette  or  base register colours; the other colours in the set are HAM
colours.

Overscan
The  system  Overscan  preferences  are  used  by default.  Std puts the
screen  into  standard  Overscan mode allowing you to view and edit your
image in the border area around the normal viewable screen area.  Notice
that  the  dimensions  of  all  four  screen formats get larger.  If the
Toolbox  or  Title  Bar  are  showing when you choose Overscan mode, the
screen  is  Shifted  down  and  to the left to make sure you can see the
controls.

At  Max setting the viewing area gets even larger.  The new vertical and
hori zontal dimensions of the screen appear beside the screen formats.

If  you  need  to  adjust  the position of your screen, you can do so by
holding down Ctrl and using the cursor keys.  This saves you the trouble
of exiting the program to adjust your screen through Preferences.

About

Keyboard Equivalent: ?

The  About  requester  shows  the  program  version number, the authors'
names,  the  copyright  notice,  and  information  about  the  amount of
available  memory  and  the size of your brush, animation, or AnimBrush,
and the number of palettes currently being used.

Quit

Keyboard Equivalent: Right-Amiga - q

Exits Deluxe Paint

Brush Menu

Load

Keyboard Equivalent: Right - Amiga - b

Displays the Load Brush requester.  This is identical in function to the
Load  Picture requester, except that you are loading brushes rather than
pictures.   When you load a brush that has a palette different from that
of  the  current  picture,  the  picture   palette   remains   in place.
Nonetheless,  the  brush  palette  information  is loaded along with the
brush:  you  can  change  to the brush's palette at any time by choosing
Palette>Use  Brush  Palette from the Colour menu.  If you wish to revert
to the previous palette, use Palette>Restore Palette option.

The  Load  With  Palette  option  in  the Load Brush Options window auto
matically uses the brush's palette.

Save

Displays  the  Save  Brush  requester.    This requester is identical in
function  to  the  Save  Picture requester (see Save in the Picture Menu
above).    Brushes  are saved with their palettes, which includes ranges
and colour cycling informa tion.

The Save with Mask option in the Save Brush Options window allows you to
choose  whether you want to save the brush with its transparency or not.


Copy

Keyboard Equivalent: Right - Amiga - c

Copy  the  current  brush to the system clipboard.  You must have a user
defined  brush selected for this command to work.  This is a good way to
transfer bitmaps from one program to another.

Paste

Keyboard Equivalent: Right - Amiga - V

Paste the current contents of the system clipboard to a brush.

Restore

Keyboard Equivalent: B

Restores  as  the  current  brush  the custom brush you last used, after
you've  used  an  AnimBrush,  a  built-in brush, or modified your custom
brush  with an option from the Brush menu.  Restore does not reverse the
effect  of  all  brush  manipulations  in the Brush menu.  Generally the
options that cannot be reversed with Restore can be reversed by choosing
the  option again.  For example, Restore does not reverse the Flip>Horiz
option,  but  choosing  Flip>Horiz  again (with no intervening commands)
returns your brush to its previous state.

It's  a  good  idea  to  save your custom brush, or stamp it down on the
spare  page  if  you want to do a lot of experimenting.  This way you'll
have your original brush to go back to.

Spare >>

The  Spare options submenu has options for using and manipulating Deluxe
Paint's spare brush.

Brush->Spare

Keyboard Equivalent: Alt-n

Moves  the current brush to the spare brush position (which is hidden).
If  your  current brush is an AnimBrush, the current cel of the brush is
copied to the spare brush position.

Brush <-> Spare

Keyboard Equivalent: Alt-b

Swaps the current brush and the spare brush positions.

Morph -> Spare

Keyboard Equivalent: Alt-m

Lets you create a special AnimBrush that metamorphoses between the shape
and  colours of the current brush and the shape and colours of the spare
brush.    To  use  this option, you must first have a custom brush and a
"spare" custom brush.

When  you  choose  Metamorph, the Make AnimBrush requester appears Enter
the  number of cels you want in the AnimBrush.  Enter a number and click
OK.  Deluxe Paint creates the AnimBrush automatically.

For  best results, your custom brush and spare brush should be picked up
with the same dimensions.  This does not mean that the brush images must
be  the same size; but the area that you surrounded to pick up the brush
images should be the same size.

The  resulting  first  and  last  cels of the AnimBrush generally do not
contain  exactly the same images as your original custom brush and spare
brush.   Usually you will see some change in the colours of the first or
last frames.

See  the metamorphosis exercise in Chapter 7: Animation Effects for more
information.

Size >>

The Size option lets you resize the current brush.  The submenu presents
the following options.

Stretch or Shrink
Keyboard Equivalent: Z
Lets you freely stretch the current custom brush in any direction to any
size.    To  stretch  the  brush,  drag  it to the desired size.  Select
Restore from the Brush menu to negate the effect of the stretch.

Holding down the Shift key constrains the stretch operation so that your
brush maintains the same aspect ratio (relative width and height).

Stretching  a  brush uses a lot of memory; if you try to stretch a brush
to  a  size  bigger than the available memory can accommodate, the brush
will snap back to its original size.

Halve
Keyboard Equivalent: h
Reduces  the  size of your brush by 50% in vertical and horizontal dimen
sions.  For instance, a 20 X 20 brush is resized to 10 X 10.

Double
Keyboard Equivalent: H
Doubles  the size of your brush in both dimensions, for a quadrupling of
the total area.  For instance, a 20 X 20 brush is resized to 40 X 40.

Double Horiz
Keyboard Equivalent: X
Doubles the size of your brush in the horizontal dimension.  This option
is uscful for reproportioning images that you created in Lo Res and then
moved to Med Res (see Screen Format under the Picture menu).

Double Vert
Keyboard Equivalent: Y
Doubles  the  size of your brush in the vertical dimension.  This option
is  use  ful for re-proportioning images that you created in Med Res and
then moved to Lo-Res (see Screen Format under the Picture menu).

Doubling  the  size  of  a  brush  may require more memory than you have
available.    In  that  case,  the  resized  brush may appear only as an
outline.

Flip >>

Lets  you  flip  a  brush  about  its  X  or  Y  axis.  When you Flip an
AnimBrush, all frames of the animated brush will flip.

Horiz
Keyboard Equivalent: x
Flips the current custom brush about the horizontal or X axis.

Vert
Keboard Equivalent: y
Flips the current custom brush about the vertical or Y axis.

Edge >>

Modifies a one pixel boundary around the current brush.

Outline
Keyboard Equivalent: o
Adds  a one pixel boundary around the current custom brush using the cur
rent  foreground colour.  This is ideal for outlining text.  To increase
the  thick  ness  of  the  outline,  one pixel at a time, select Outline
repeatedly.

Outlining  in  HAM  mode  with a HAM colour may supply different reults.
The boundary colour you get may be different from the fore ground colour
if one pixel is not sufficient to "ramp" to the HAM colour.

Trim
Keyboard Equivalent: O
Deletes  a  one  pixel  boundary around the current brush.  You can trim
repeatedly.

Rotate >>

Rotate the current custom brush in any of three ways.

90 Degrees
Keyboard Equivalent; z
Rotates the current brush clockwise 90 degrees.

Any Angle
Lets you rotate the current brush any number of degrees.

Choose  Rotate>Any Angle from the Brush menu.  Hold the left button down
and  drag  the  rectangular outline about its bottom left corner Release
the button at the desired orientation.

If  you  select  this  option  more than once, your brush reverts to its
original orientation before you rotate it again.

Shear
Gives  you  controlled distortion of the current brush.  The top part of
the  brush  is  anchored,  and  you  can drag the bottom of the brush in
either direction.

Bend >>

Use this option to bend a brush horizontally or vertically.

Horiz
Lets you bend the current brush in a horizontal direction.

Choose  Bend>Horiz  from the Brush menu.  Drag the brush outline left or
right until it is the desired shape.  Release the mouse button.

The  vertical  position  of the cursor to the brush determines where the
brush bends.

Vert
Lets you bend the current brush in a vertical direction.

Choose  Bend>Vertical from the Brush menu.  Drag the brush outline up or
down until it is the desired shape.  Release the mouse button.

The  horizontal position of the cursor to the brush determines where the
brush bends.

Handle >>

Lets  you  specify  whether the cursor holds a custom brush by is centre
(the  default),  by  one  of its four corners, or by an offset position,
which  you can define.  Use the keyboard equivalent to rotate your brush
handle  when you need to move your cursor without moving the brush.  You
can move the brush handle with the mouse button down this way.

Rotate
Keyboard Equivalent: Alt-x
Rotate the arrow cursor, which represents the handle, from the centre of
the  brush  (the  default  position)  to  any of the four corners of the
brush.    Selecting  the  command  or typing Alt-x cycles from centre to
bottom right, bottom left, top left, top right, and back to centre.

Place
Keyboard Equivalent: Alt-z
Lets  you  position  the  brush  handle  at any position relative to the
brush.   To place the handle, pick up your brush.  Choose Handle>Place.
Drag  in  any  direction  to offset the cursor from the brush.  When you
release  the  mouse  button,  the  cursor  will  hold  the  brush as you
specified.

Once you set a new brush handle.
The  location  of  the  arrow  cursor  the next time you pick up a brush
depends  on the direction you drag the mouse when you pick up the brush.
If  you  drag down and to the right, the cursor will remain at the lower
right.   If you drag up and to the left, the cursor will move to the top
left.    The same prin ciple applies if you drag down and to the left or
up  and to the right.  In other words, the corner you drag to is the one
to which the arrow cursor will attach.

Positioning the cursor on a corner is particularly useful in Perspective
mode (see the Effect Menu, below).

Solid Body
Turns  the  translucent pixels of a custom brush that are completely sur
rounded  by any non transparent colour to the solid colour.  The outside
area of the brush remains transparent.

Frame Only
Keyboard Equivalent; Alt-f - mnemonic frame
Displays  only  the bounding box of a custom brush as you move the mouse
This speeds up movement when you have a complex brush or are running low
on  memory.    When  you press the mouse button, the brush is stamped on
your page.

When  memory is very low custom brushes are displayed in frame only mode
automatically.

Free
Deletes all custom brushes from memory.

Mode Menu

The  Mode  menu  contains  different brush modes.  These modes determine
which  colour(s)  in  your  brush  are used when you paint.  Most of the
modes have keyboard equivalents, using the function keys (F-keys) on the
top row of your keyboard.

With  the  exception  of Shade, none of the modes affect the colour used
when  you  paint  with the right mouse button.  In any mode except Shade
mode  the right mouse button paints using the current back ground colour
in Colour mode.

Matte
Keyboard Equivalent F1
Uses  a  custom  brush  in its original form.  These areas of the brush,
which  match the background colour that was in effect when the brush was
first  created  are  transparent.    Matte  is the default mode when you
create a custom brush using the Brush Selector.

Colour
Keyboard Equivalent: F2
Uses  the  shape  of  the brush and fills it with the current foreground
colour  Those areas of the brush, which match the background colour that
was in effect when the brush was first created, are transparent.

Replc
Keyboard Equivalent: F3
Uses  the custom brush in its original form (ie Matte see above), except
that no colours are transparent.

Smear
Keyboard Equivalent: F4
Smears any colours on the page when you drag a brush over them.  This is
like  smearing  a  wet water colour with your fingers, so the bigger the
brush,  the  more  pronounced  the  effect.  Smear uses only the colours
under the brush, and does not add any new colours.  Current brush colour
is irrele vant.

Shade
Keyboard Equivalent: F5
Shade  helps  you create subtle shading effects on those colours in your
pic  ture  that  are-in  a  cycle  range.  Like Smear, Shade ignores the
current  brush  colour  but  uses its shape.  By dragging the brush over
those  colours  in your picture that are in the currently selected cycle
range, you can paint over each colour with the next colour in the range.
You  can  paint  with  the  next-higher  colour  by using the left mouse
button, and the next lower colour by using the right mouse button.

"Higher"  and  "lower" are relative to the colour under the brush at the
time.    Shade  has no effect on colours outside the current range.  You
select  a  range  equivalent from the Range requester, ant the Fill Type
requester, or by using the keyboard equivalent (Alt-[ and Alt-]) to step
through the ranges.

Blend
Keyboard Equivalent: F6
Like  Smear,  Blend  affects the colours under the brush by running them
together.    Unlike  Smear,  however  Blend  uses  additional  shades by
averaging the blended colours, whereas Smear uses only the colours under
the  brush.   Thus, when you Blend two shades by painting over them, you
are  selecting  a  third  shade  from  the  palette, the closest one the
program can find to the average of the two original shades.

Cycle
Keyboard Equivalent: F7
Uses  the  current brush shape and cycles through all the colours in the
cur  rently  selected  range as you draw.  A range is selected if one of
its  members  is  selected.    If  a  colour  is a member of two ranges,
selecting  it  selects  the  first of those two ranges.  If your current
brush  colour  is  not  within a cycle range, it paints with that colour
only.    Use  MultiCycle  (in the Prefs menu) to achieve the same effect
with  a  multicoloured  brush,  where  each  colour  in the brush cycles
through its range independently of the others.

Smooth
Keyboard Equivalent: F8
Softens  hard  lines  and reduces the contrast between adjoining areas.
Deluxe  Paint  finds  colours  in  the palette between the two bordering
colours and paints the boundary in intermediate shades.  Smooth looks at
the cur rent palette and finds the colours closest to the ones under the
brush.    Thus if the palette contains a wide selection of colours close
to  the  ones  under the brush (eg the selection of greys in the default
Palette),  it will have more colours to draw from to create its weighted
averages.    Smooth  is  useful  for  creating  airbrush effects and for
eliminating jagged edges.

Mix
The colour of your brush mixes interactively with the colours already on
the screen (in your image).  This is particularly effective in HAM.

HBRITE
This  mode  is  only  available if your computer supports it, and if you
have  selected  a Halfbrite screen mode from the Screen Format option in
the  Picture  menu.  When you are in HBrite mode, painting with the left
mouse  button  darkens  colours  on  your  painting  to  their Halfbrite
equivalent;  painting  with  the  right button lightens colours that are
Halfbrite.    This mode is especially useful in pictures with shadow and
highlight effects.

The  Amiga supports only 32 colour registers directly but Halfbrite uses
a  trick  to  double the number of colours available on the screen.  The
first  32  registers  are  standard  colour registers; the second 32 are
Halfbrite  equiva  lents  of the original 32.  Pixels that use Halfbrite
colours  point to one of the standard colour registers and indicate that
the colour should be displayed at half its normal intensity.  This means
that  the second 32 pixels are not inde pendent of the first 32; you can
change  the colour values only in the first 32 registers, and the change
is automatically reflected in the Halfbrite equiva lent.

Not  all  Amiga  computers support Halfbrite.  If there are no Halfbrite
screen  modes  in  your  Screen  Format  requester  your machine doesn't
support it.

Rubthru
Use  this  mode  to 'rub through' portions of the current picture to the
spare  page  -  sort  of like using a crayon and tracing paper to make a
rubbing  of  a  texture.   The current Translucency setting controls how
much of the picture is rubbed through (0% equals 100% of the image being
rubbed through).

Rubthru also works with textures, translucency and process modes

To rub through an image;

Press  j  to go to your spare page (j toggles between the spare page and
your picture).

Paint on the spare page.  Adjust the Translucency (Effects>Translucency)
slider to control the amount of the image that is rubbed through.

NOTE
If  your  spare  palette  is  different from the current palette, Deluxe
Paint will use the closest colours to do the rubthru.

Anim Menu

Load
Displays  the  Load  Anim requester.  This requester works like the Load
Picture  requester  (see Load under the Picture menu).  When you load an
ani mation, it replaces the one currently in memory.  When you append an
ani  mation,  the appended animation is added to the end of your current
anima tion.

It  is also possible to load individual pictures into the frames of your
anima  tion using the Load Picture requester.  To do so, go to the frame
you  wish to load a pictute into, display the Load Picture requester and
select  the  picture  you wish to load.  Your animation will take on the
palette  of the picture loaded unless you are editing a multiple palette
animation,  in  which  case  the  picture  you load will only affect the
palettes  of  the  frames associated with the key palette you load into.
If  you want to restore your animation's palette, choose Palette>Restore
Palette  from  the  Colour  menu.  If you want to remap the picture just
loaded to the Animations original palette, choose Remap from the colours
menu and select current frame from the requester that appears.  See Load
in the Picture menu for more information.

Press  F1  to toggle the Load Anim Options panel, which displays informa
tion  about  the  selected animation file.  There are two options in the
panel;  Show  Loading  and  Append.   When Show Loading is checked, each
frame  is shown as the animation is loaded.  When Append is checked, the
loaded file is appended to any listing animation frames.

Save
Displays  the  Save  Anim  requester,  which works like the Save Picture
requester  described under Save in the Picture menu.  The one difference
is  that  the Framnes edit boxes in the Save Anim Options requester lets
you  save  a  section of your animation as an animation rather than as a
series of pic tures as in the Save Picture requester.

Move...
Keyboard Equivalent: M
Displays  the Move requester.  Use this requester to define a path along
which  your  brush  is painted in 3D, either on a single frame, or while
stepping through an animation sequence.

To use the Move requester:

Stamp your brush on the screen at the starting position you want.

Choose Move from the Anim menu.

Click  Start,  and  then click Adjust to interactively set the beginning
position and size of the brush.

Click and drag the bounding box to set the position of the brush.

Ctrl-click and drag up/down to set the size (Z axis) of the brush.

Press  Enter  to  accept the current position of the brush and return to
the Move requester.

Click  End,  and  then click Adjust to interactively set the ending posi
tion  and  size  of  the  brush.    Press  Enter to return to the Move -
requester when the brush is properly positioned.

Set  the Count edit field to the number of frames over which you want to
animate the brush.

Select any other settings that apply to your animation.

Click Draw to paint the animation with the settings you specified.

Dist:  The  Dist edit boxes let you specify the total distance in pixels
that the brush will move along the X, Y and Z axes in your animation.

You  can set the brush to move along the brush axes (tick) or the screen
axes  (no  tick) by clicking the Brush action button to the right of the
Dist edit boxes.

Angle: The Angle edit boxes let you specify the total angle, in degrees,
that the brush will be rotated about the X, Y and Z axes.

You  can  set  the  brush  to rotate around the brush axes (tick) of the
screen  axes  (no tick) by clicking the Brush action button to the right
of  the Angle edit boxes.  Brush axes are active by default, which means
the rotation is always based on the brush coordinate system.

The  brush  coordinate system will change during the course of a Move if
you are rotating on more than one axis.

If  the  Brush action button is unchecked any angle rotation takes place
along  the  current  axes of the screen coordinate system.  The "screen"
rotation sys tem is an Euler (pronounced oiler) system, and the order of
rotation  is always X, Y and Z.  When you rotate on more than one angle,
or  when the brush has been rotated previously the rotations produced by
the screen angle system are not always around the axes that are used for
the  Distance  moves  along  the  screen axes.  Generally it's better to
think of the screen angle rotations as "non-brush" rather than screen.

All  rotations occur around the brush handle.  If you want your brush to
appear  as though it is orbiting around a point away from the brush, you
would want to offset the handle from the brush.

Brush:  Click  these  action  buttons  to toggle a tick on and off.  The
options  select whether the Dist and Angle movements are relative to the
coordinate  system  (tick  =  on)  or  relative to the screen coordinate
system (no tick = off).

Zero: Click to zero out all of the Move and Angle numbers.

Go  Back:  Click  to  restore the brush's sitting position (for the next
move ment) to the last place you manually clicked it down.

Cyclic: Click this button to turn it on (tick), if you are creating that
is cyclic (that is one that starts and ends at the same position).

For  example,  if you have 10 frames, and you want a brush to rotate 360
degrees over the 10 frames to make it look as though it is spinning when
you  play the animation, you would turn Cyclic on.  Deluxe Paint V would
calculate  the  rotation  to  end  on the 11th frame (which in this case
would be the 1st frame).  The result is that the brush is not rotated to
a  full 360 degrees on Frame 10.  Instead, the brush reaches 360 degrees
on  Frame  1,  Deluxe  Paint  doesn't print the brush on the last frame,
since  its  position  would normally be the same as your original frame,
but  it  does move for ward to that frame and positions the brush in the
event that you want to click it down.

Slow  In:  Set the number of frames over which you want the brush motion
to gradually decelerate.

Slow  Out: Set the number of frames over which you want the brush motion
to gradually accelerate.

Count:  Set  the  number  of  times the brush is printed to complete the
total  movement  and  rotation  as  specified by the Dist and angle edit
boxes.

Move: The Move action buttons control the direction of your move and the
order  in  which the frames of the animation are printed.  There are two
choices:

Go  From  starts  the  movement  of  the  brush from the point where you
stamped your brush (indicated by the large dot) and prints forward.

Come To starts the animation at an earlier frame and moves the brush for
ward to the point where you stamped your brush.

Record  lets you choose the order in which the frames of the brush moves
are printed.  These buttons are available only if you have more than one
anima tion frame.

Forward  paints  the  move  by stepping forward from the point where you
stamped  your  brush.   This is the default setting and the one you will
use most often.

In Place paints all of the move on the current frame.

Backward paints the move in reverse order by advancing to the last frame
and  painting  backwards.    This  option  is  useful when you are using
Trails.

Start: Set the starting frame to the current values.

End: Set the ending frame to the current values.

Fade:  Specify  a  value  from  0-255 to control the amount the brush is
faded  from  its  original colour values.  A setting of 0 has no effect,
while  a  setting of 255 completely fades the brush from view.  The fade
effect  you  get  is  very  dependent  on  the number of colours in your
palette, as well as the number of transitional colours.

Adjust:  Click this button to go to a screen where you can interactively
adjust the X, Y and Z positions of the brush for the beginning or ending
frames.  Which frame you set depends on whether Start or End is selected
when you press adjust.

While  in Adjust mode you can use the perspective control keys to change
the Z axis as well as the brush's X, Y, and Z angles.  Refer to Appendix
B:  Keyboard  Command Summary for a more complete listing of the perspec
tive keyboard commands.

Click and drag with the mouse to move the bounding box on the screen.

Press  the  Ctrl key while dragging the mouse up/down to adjust the size
of the bounding box (Z axis)

Press Keypad 0 to set the size of the box to the screen resolution.

Press  Enter  to set the Start or End position to the current values and
return to the Move Camera requester.

Press  Esc  to  return  to the Move requester without saving the current
values.

Preview:  Click  to view (in "wire-frame" mode) the move you have set up
When  the preview is complete, the Move requester returns.  To interrupt
the preview and return to the Move requester, hit the space bar.

Trails:  This  button  is  available  only  if  you  have  more than one
animation frame allocated.  Clicking Trails is like clicking on the Draw
button except on each frame you get the sum total of all of the draws up
to  this point.  The net effect is that of leaving "trails" of the brush
as it moves.

Fill:  Works  like  draw  except  that  when  you click it, the move you
specified is used to draw a filled perspective plane on the whole screen
based on the rotation of the current brush.

Draw: Executes the move that you have specified, causing the brush to be
drawn into animation sequence.

Exit:  Exits  the  requester and keeps all of the settings that you have
entered.

Load: Load listing Move file from Load Move requester.

Save: Save current settings to a Move file using Save Move requester.

Cancel:  Restores  any  settings  that  have been changed and exits this
requester.

Camera Move

Keyboard Equivalent: N

The  Camera  Move  requester is used to create scrolling backgrounds and
camera zoom in/out moves.  The appearance and operation of the requester
is  very  similar  to the Move requester except that you're manipulating
the  entire  screen  background  rather  than  a brush.  The Camera Move
requester  requires  a  spare  page  (which can be larger than your main
page).  When in Adjust mode the Camera Move requester displays a reduced
size spare page so you can more effectively position your camera view.

Dist: Set X, Y, and Z distance that the camera will move in pixels.

X  and  Y  are the horizontal and vertical positions, respectively and Z
con trols the camera in/out position.  Negative Z values display more of
the  background  screen;  positive  values  zoom  into display a smaller
portion of the background.

Zero: Set X, Y, and Z values to 0.

Cyclic:  Click  a check mark in this button to make an animation that is
cyclic  -  ie  it ends and begins in the same place for seamless looping
animations.

Slow  In: Set the number of frames over which you want the camera motion
to gradually accelerate.

Slow Out: Set the number of frames over which you want the camera motion
to gradually decelerate.

Count:  Enter  the  number  of frames over which you want to animate the
camera move.

Move:  Set the direction to either Go From (start animation from the cur
rent  frame  and move forward) or Come To (start animation at an earlier
frame and end at the current frame.

Wrap:  Put  a  check  in this box to automatically wrap the edges of the
image in a camera move when the camera moves off screen.

Start: Set the starting frame to the current values.

End: Set the ending frame to the current values.

Adjust:  Interactively  place  the  beginning  or  ending  frame  of the
animation  sequence that Deluxe Paint will build.  Which frame is set is
determined by whether Start or End is selected when Adjust is activated.

Click and drag the mouse to move the bounding box on the screen.

Press  the  Ctrl key while dragging the mouse up/down to adjust the size
of the bounding box (Z axis).  Use this feature for camera zoom effects.

Press Keypad 0 to set the size of the box to the screen resolution.

Press  Enter  or  return to set the Start or End position to the current
values and return to the the Camera Move requester.

Press  Esc to retuen to the Camera Move requester without saving the cur
rent values.

Preview:  View  a  wireframe preview of the camera move animation.  When
the  preview  is  complete,  the  Move  Camera  requester  returns.   To
interrupt the preview hit the space bar.

New:  Create  a new animation in memory using the current settings.  Any
listing animation is deleted (no warning is issued).  This action cannot
be undone.

Before:  Insert  an animation generated from the current settings before
the cur rent frame

After: Insert an animation generated from the current settings after the
cur rent frame.

Exit: Exit the requester while maintaining the settings you have entered

Load: Load an existing camera move file.

Save: Save current settings as a camera move file.

Cancel:  Restores  any  settings  that  have been changed and exits this
requester.

AnimBrush >>

An  AnimBrursh  is  a  special  type of brush that has more than one cel
associ ated with it.

Load
Displays  the  Load AnimBrush requester.  This requester is identical in
func  tion  to  the  Load  Picture requester described under Load in the
Picture menu, except that you are loading an AnimBrush.

When you load an AnimBrush that has a palette different from that of the
current  picture,  the picture's palette remains in place.  Nonetheless,
the  brush  palette  information is loaded along with the brush; you can
change  to the brush's palette at any time by choosing Palette>Use Brush
Palette from the Colour menu.

Press  F1  to cycle the Load AnimBrush Options panel on/ off.  Check the
Load  With  Palette  check  gadget  to load the brush's palette with the
AnimBrush file.

Save
Displays  the  Save AnimBrush requester.  This requester is identical in
func  tion  to  the Save Brush requester described in the Save option of
the Brush menu.

Press F1 to cycle the Save AnimBrush Options panel on/off.

Pick Up
Selecting  Pick  up  is  similar  to  selecting   the   Brush   Selector
(rectangular  mode)  from  the  Toolbox.    However, when you pick up an
AnimBrush, you pick up all the "cels" that make up the animated sequence
in the AnimBrush.

Cels are to an animated brush what frames are to an animation.

When  you  paint  with an AnimBrush, the brush cycles through its frames
automatically  :as  you paint.  The brush will continuously cycle on the
current  animation frame unless you hold down the Alt key when you press
the  mouse  button  down, in which case the brush will paint each of its
cels sepa rarely into each of the animation sequence frames.

Choosing  Pick  up displays the Pick up AnimBrush requester.  To pick up
the  whole animation, click OK; drag the cross-hair to select the entire
"animat  ed"  area.    When  you  release the mouse button, Deluxe Paint
attaches  an  ani  mated brush to your cursor.  You can use an AnimBrush
with any painting tool, just as you would use a custom brush.

If  you  want  to  make  an  AnimBrush  from  only  a few frames of your
animation,  you  only  need  to pick up those frames.  Move to the first
frame  in your intended AnimBrush, and choose AnimBrush>Pick up, Type in
the  number  of  cels  that  will  compose your AnimBrush in the Pick up
AnimBrush requester, Click OK.

For  example,  let's  say you have an animation of 5 frames and that you
want  to  make an animated brush out of what appears on frames 6 through
10.    You  would  move  to  frame  6,  type  5 in the Pick up AnimBrush
requester and click OK.  Frames 6 through 10 make up cels 1 through 5 of
your new AnimBrush.

Note, however that you cannot pick up an AnimBrush of only one frame.

Holding  down  the  Alt  key  while  picking  up  a brush with the Brush
Selector  is  the  same  as  choosing  AnimBrush>Pick  up.   The Pick up
AnimBrush  requester  appears.    Type  in  the number of cels that will
impose your AnimBrush and click OK.

Settings
After  you  have  picked  up  an  animated  brush, Settings displays the
AnimBrush  Settings  requester.    Use  this  requester  to  control the
AnimBrush.

Number  of  cels:  Shows  you  how  many  cels  of animation are in your
AnimBrush.

Direction:  These  three  icons give you the choice of flipping forward,
flip  ping  backward, or ping ponging through the cels of your AnimBrush
as you paint.

Duration:  Lets  you  set the number of frames it takes the AnimBrush to
move  completely  through  its  cels.  You can also think of this as the
rate  at which the AnimBrush transforms.  For example, if your brush has
10  cels  and  you set duration to 20, your brush will stamp each of its
cels twice before flipping to the next cel.

Current:  Lets you type in the value for the brush cel you want to start
with.    This  is  very  useful  if you want to continue painting from a
particular cel of your brush.

When  the  requester is not displayed, you can step backward and forward
though  the  cels  of  your AnimBrush by pressing 7 or 8 on the keyboard
(not  the  keypad) shift-7 steps to the first cel, and shift 8 steps you
to the last cel.

Use
Makes  the  last AnimBrush you "picked up" the current brush.  This lets
you  pickup  an AnimBrush, then pick up a regular brush, and then return
to  your  AnimBrush.    You   can   also   restore   your   AnimBrush by
right-clicking  the  Brush  Selector.    This toggles between a standard
custom brush and an AnimBrush.

Free
Releases the memory used by the current AnimBrush.

You  cannot retrieve the brush once you free it!  Any time you think you
are  low  on  memory  but before you throw away brushes or frames, press
Ctrl-a.    This  displays information about available memory in the menu
bar.

Frames

Presents  a submenu of options for manipulating the frames in your anima
tion.

Set #
Displays  the  Set  Frame  Count  requester.    Deluxe Paint will try to
allocate as many frames as are requested.  If there is not enough memory
to  allocate  the requested number of frames, Deluxe Paint will allocate
as many as memory will allow.

You  can ,use this requester to add or delete frames to your animation.
For  example,  you  could  add  several  frames  to  the  middle of your
animation  stepping  to  the  frame  you  want  to add frames after, and
changing  the  num ber of frames to the current count plus the number of
frames you want to add.

Similarly,  you  could  delete  several  frames  from  any point in your
animation by stepping to the first frame you want to delete and changing
the number of frames to the current count minus the number of frames you
want  to  delete.    For example, if you have 100 frames and you want to
delete  frames  41 to 50, step to frame 41 and set the number off frames
to 90.

Add frames
Displays  a  requester  that lets you add any number of frames after the
cur  rent  frame.  Deluxe Paint copies the contents of the current frame
to the added frames, and makes the last new frame the current one.

Keyboard  Equivalent:  Ctrl-click on the + icon in the Animation Control
Panel.  Alt-= will automatically add a single frame to the animation.

Copy Frames

Keyboard Equivalent: Ctrl-f

Displays  a requester that lets you copy the current frame to a range of
frames  or to all the frames in your animation sequence.  Use the Insert
Before  Frame edit box to place the copied range of frames in your anima
tion  before  a  certain  frame.  This is the only requester option that
will actu ally add/insert newer frames in your animation.

Delete Frames
Displays  a requester that lets you delete the current frame, a range of
frames  or  all  frames  in  your animation sequence.  If you delete the
current  frame, Deluxe Paint makes the following frame the current frame
unless you are already at the last frame.

Keyboard  Equivalent:  Ctrl-click on the - icon in the Animation Control
Panel.    Right-Amiga  - (A-minus key) automatically deletes the current
frame of your animations

Set Frame Rate

Keyboard Equivalent: Right Amiga - R

This  requester controls the frame rate(s) of your animation on a global
or frame by frame basis.

Play  Rate:  Click  either a Global (fps) rate or Vary By Frame setting.
If  Global  (fps)  is  selected, type the desired frame rate (frames per
second)  in the text gadget at the right.  The maximum frames per second
is  deteremined  by how large your animation is, your Amiga CPU, and the
screen  mode  and  resolution the animation is displayed in.  If Vary By
Frame is selected, use the options at the bottom of the requester to set
the frame rate for a single frame, a range of frames, or all frames.

Specify Frame Rate In: Use the slider or text gadgets to set the Vary By
Frame  rate  in  Frames  per  Second  or  Jiffies (a jiffie is a unit of
measurement equal to one divided by the frame rate of the current mode).
Note  that dou ble-buffered modes are'nt as fast as regular modes.  When
using  the  Frames  Per Second slider, you can select a legal frame rate
(based on even divisibles of the frame rate of the current mode; see the
Display Information window in the Screen Format requester).

The  jiffies  text gadget lets you set a pause based on Jiffies (1/frame
rate  of  the  current  mode).   To set a frame pause in seconds, type a
number that is the multiple of the frame rate for the current mode.  For
example,  in NTSC Lo-Res the maximum frame rate is 60 fps, so to pause a
frame for 3 sec onds, you would enter 180 jiffies (3x60).

After  you  have chosen a variable frame rate, you can apply the rate to
the following frame choices:

Current Frame: The default, this will make the current frame use the fps
or jiffies value entered above.

Range:  This  radio button applies the frame rate to the range of frames
speci  fied in the text gadgets (first frame to last frame) to the right
of the button.

All  Frames: Apply the frame rate in fps or jiffies to all frames in the
anima tion.

Set Frame Palette
Displays  the  Set Frame Palette requester where you can set up multiple
palettes  for  an  animation.  To create multiple palette animations you
must first create unique palettes, then apply the palettes to the frames
you  wish  to change.  Once you've made a unique palette, you can modify
its  colours,  load  in  a  new  palette,  or  load an image and use its
palette.

Palette  Number:  Enter the number of the palette you wish to apply to a
sin gle frame or a range of frames.

Current  Frame:  Apply  the selected palette to the current frame of the
ani mation.

Range:  Apply  the  selected  palette to the specified range (set in the
text boxes to the right of the box).

All  Frames:  Apply  the  selected  palette  to  all  the  frames of the
animation.

Make  Palette:  Creates a new palette from the palette currently used in
the  selected frame(s).  On exit, Deluxe Paint creates a unique palette,
which  you  can  modify without affecting the palettes used in any other
frames.

Frame Palette Info
Displays  the  Frame  Palette  Info  window which shows a list of frames
associ ated with the current palette.

Palette  #:  The  number of the current palette - the one applied to the
cur rent frame.

Frames  Using  Current  Palette:  A  list of frames that use the current
palette.

Free:  Click this button to purge the selected palette from memory.  The
frames  using this palette are given the palette from the frame previous
to the first occurrence of the 'freed' palette.  Use the close gadget in
the top left cor ner of the window to exit this requester.

Control
Control  displays  a  submenu of options for moving around in your anima
tion frames and for playing the animation.

Panel

Keyboard Equivalent: Alt-a

Displays  the Deluxe Paint Animation Control Panel.  It contains a Frame
Counter  scroll  bar  and  15  control  buttons  for working through and
playing  your  animations.    Click an option on the Panel to select it.
When  the panel is displayed, a check mark appears next to the option in
the menu.

The options represented by the control buttons can also be selected from
the  Anim  and Effect menus, which is where these features are described
in  detail.  It is conveinient to have them all in the Control Panel, so
you  don't  have  to  access  a  menu,  or use the keyboard while you're
working on your animation.

Frame Counter
The  number  of the current frame and the total number of frames in your
animation appear in the left corner of the Title Bar.  You can move to a
spe  cific  frame  by dragging the Frame Counter scroll bar, clicking on
either  side  of  the  scroll  box,  or  by  clicking  the Next Frame or
Previious  Frame  icons  in the Control Panel.  Any movement you make is
reflected in the numbers on the Title Bar.

Set Range
Displays  the  Set Play Range Requester.  Use this requester to instruct
Deluxe  Paint  to  play  any  range  of  frames  or  all  frames in your
animation.

The From number in your range must be smaller than the to number for the
range to play correctly.

The  range setting is used by the Play Once and Ping Pong options in the
Control submenu, but the Play option is not affected.

This option is especially useful if you are editing a small section of a
large  animation.   You can edit the frames and play only the frames you
are editing to see your changes.

Previous

Keyboard Equivalent: 1

Steps the current frame to the previous frame in the animation sequence.
If the current frame is the first frame, the position is set to the last
frame.

Next

Keyboard Equivalent: 2

Steps the current frame to the next frame in the animation sequence.  If
the  current  frame  is the last frame, the position is set to the first
frame.

Go to

Keyboard Equivalent: 3

Displays  the  Go  to Frame requester.  This requester lets you position
the  cur  rent  frame to any of the available animation frames.  You can
also  display  this  requester  by  Ctrl-clicking  the Go to icon on the
Animation Control Panel.

Repeat Last Go To

Keyboard Equivalent: Shift-3

Clicking  on  this  icon brings you to the frame number set in the Go To
requester.  You can display this requester either by choosing Control>Go
to from the Anim menu, or by Ctrl-clicking on this icon.

Play

Keyboard Equivalent: 4

Plays  the  animation  at  the speed set in the Set Rate requester.  The
anima tion sequence will continue cycling until you press the space bar.
(You can reverse the direction of playback by pressing r on the keyboard
while the animation is playing).

Play Once

Keyboard Equivalent: 5

Plays the animation sequence once through from Frame 1 to the last frame.

Ping-Pong

Keyboard Equivalent: 6

Plays  the  animation  sequence continuously as in Play above, but plays
the sequence forward then backward then forward then backward and so on.
Click or press the space bar to stop the animation.

Method >>

The  Method  menu  contains  two  submenu  options  which can be used to
specify the "memory model" of the animation sequence frames.  The memory
model  refers  only to the animation in RAM, not to the disk file.  When
you load an animation it is loaded into your current memory model.

Compressed
The  Compressed  Method  while  a  little more complex than the Expanded
Method, offers the advantage of permitting many more animation frames in
memory  at  one  time.    The  compressed memory model only needs enough
memory to store the differences between frames.  While this model allows
for more frames, it has a couple of disadvantages: it is slower than the
expanded  method  while  animpainting, loading and saving are slower and
memory tends to fragment, making it easy to run out of memory.

Expanded
The  Expanded  Method  represents  the simplest of the two memory models
where  all  of the memory for each animation frame is allocated.  If you
are  in  low  resolution mode, 320x200 and you have 10 animation frames,
then  you would need enough memory to hold 10 complete 320 x 200 images.
Two  advantages  of  this  method  are  that  the  frame  flipping   for
animpainting  is  very smooth, and you will not run out of memory to add
an element to your animation within the allocated frames.

If  you  set this option and then request animation frames, Deluxe Paint
auto matically inserts the maximum number of available frames in the Set
Frame  Count  requester  so that you don't have to guess how many frames
you can create.

Colour Menu

Ranges

Keyboard Equivalent: Ctrl-r

Displays  the  Range  requester  which  you can use to define customised
colour  ranges for the colour cycling, gradient fill, and Shade features
of DeluxePaint.

Range

The  Range requester lets you specify the colours in a range (maximum of
256 colours) and how the colours are mixed.  You can define eight ranges
for each picture or animation.

To define a range:

The  RANGE slider indicates the number of the current range.  By default
this  is  range  1.    You can see the range of colours displayed on the
range  bar.   Click to the right of the slider or drag the slider to the
right to access an empty range bar.

All  range  based  features  depend  on  the  Range  number  set in this
requester.    Once  you've created ranges to work with, you can step for
ward  and  backward  through  them  without  entering  the  requester by
pressirng Alt-] and Alt-[.

To  select  a  colour for the range, move the arrow cursor to the row of
colours in the requester and click on a colour.

When  you  click  a  colour, it appears in the sample square.  The arrow
cursor  becomes  the  colour  bead cursor.  If you don't want to use the
colour  you  chose, click another with the colour bead cursor.  When the
colour you want is in the sample square:

Move  the  bead  cursor to the range bar.  Position the cursor where you
want  the  selected  colour to fall in the range, and click.  The colour
appears in the range.

The  position  of  colours  in the range control the cycle direction for
each  range, and also sets the direction of the range when it is used as
a  gra dient.  The start colour is the colour furthest left on the range
bar.  Any colour cycling begins with this colour.

Each  colour  you  place  on  the  bar appears in the range sample.  The
gradient  between  colours,  that  is  the transition of shades from one
colour to the next, is calculated automatically.  You can place original
colours  far  apart  to  create  subtle  blending  of  colours, or close
together to create more abrupt transitions between original shades.

In  modes  other than HAM or 24 bit backing store mode, Deluxe Paint can
use only colours currently in the palette to make these transitions.  If
the  transitional  shades  are not in the palette, colours may appear as
discrete  or  unevenly  mixed bands in the range.  You can overcome this
limitation by adding the transitional shades to the palette.

COPYING TIP
It  is possible to copy a range to the next range set in the requester.
To  do  this:  Move  to a defined range you want to copy; drag the Range
slider  to  the  range  number  you  want to copy to; click Undo.  (It's
important to click Undo with no intervening clicks after you display the
range number you want to copy to.

Rate
The  Rate  slider  lets you control the speed of colour cycling for each
range.  Drag the slider to the right for faster cycling.  While dragging
the  slider  you  can  monitor  the  colour cycling on the page, even if
Colour  Cycling  is  turned  off.   The number to the rate of the slider
indicates  the  current  speed setting.  This number is intended to help
you  set  different  ranges  to  the  same  speed.   The number does not
indicate  the  relative speed of the cycling since the increments from 0
to 63 are not equal.

Fade
This  slider  sets  the  gradient  translucency  mount for the currently
selected  bead  in  the range bead line.  The values range from 0 (fully
opaque)  to  255  (fully  translucent).   Deluxe Paint will allow you to
place  fade values on any individual colour bead in your range up to 256
colours.

To create a gradient with translucency values, select a colour and place
it on the range bar.  While the colour is still selected (if you want to
select  a colour that is already on the range bar click to select it and
then  put  it  back  down on the bar in its original position), drag the
FADE  slider to set the translu cency value for the selected colour.  As
you  do  this you will notice that a small square bead appears below the
selected colour and changes from black to white as you increase the fade
slider.    Black is an indication of pure colour or opaqueness and white
is an indication of colourless 100% translucency.

When  you manipulate fade values for any colour in the range bar, Deluxe
Paint  interpolates to create a spread of fade values between the select
ed  colour and the nearest colour that has a fade value assigned to it.
You  can  set  fade values for beads in the range bar even if no colours
are  assigned to the bead location - a box will appear below the bead to
show the selected fade setting.

Show
Click  SHOW to see the results of your colour selections and placements.
The  band  beneath  the  bar shows the gradual transition from colour to
colour  as  it would appear if you had access to all 4096 colours in the
colour  universe  (as  you  do  in  HAM mode).  The band above the Range
requester  shows  the  gradient  as  it  will appear using the available
colours in the palette of your current mode.

Select
To  select  a range of colours, click the first colour in the range, and
click  SELECT.   The dropper icon appears attached to the cursor.  Click
the  second  colour,  and all the colours up to and including the second
colour are select ed.

Clear
To  eliminate  a  colour from the bar click it, move the bead cursor off
the bar, and click again.  The arrow cursor returns.

To eliminate all colours from the range, click the CLEAR action button

Rev

Keyboard Equivalent: Alt-r

You  can  reverse  the  direction of the colour range, and therefore the
direction of cycling and gradient by clicking the REVERSE action button.

Select  another  colour  and  position  it on the bar.  Repeat this step
until  all  the colours you want are on the bar.  To reposition a colour
on the bar click it, move the bead cursor to another position, and click
again.

Dither
There  are  three dither options.  When Smooth is selected, Deluxe Paint
tries  to  blend  the  colours  of  the  range  as smoothly as possible.
Pattern splits the colours more, but uses a slight dither at each colour
border.    Random allows you to set the dither from no dither to smooth,
using the dither slider

Dither Slider
The  slider  beneath the Random button reduces the contrast between adja
cent colours (without changing the colours themselves).  Drag the Dither
slider  to  the  right  to  increase  the amount of dither.  Setting the
slider  all  the  way  to the left gives almost no random mixing between
shades.    Moving the slider to the right increases the amount of mixing
at the colour boundaries.

If  you are not in HAM or 24 bit backing store mode, and you have placed
colours  on the gradient bar with empty notches between the colours, you
may  not  see  the  dither  effect  you  expect.  When you leave notches
between colours on the bar Deluxe Paint calculates the spread of colours
that  would  fill  the  notches  and  then  looks in the palette for the
closest  matching  colours  to  fill  in  the range.  In many cases, the
closest  colour will be one of the colours already on the bar.  A dither
between two identical colours will look like no dither at all.

In  modes  other  than  HAM  or 24 bit backing store, it is advisable to
always  place  all the colours you want in your gradient on the bar with
no  empty  notches  between  them.    This  way you will get exactly the
colours you expect, and the dither will appear as you would expect it to

If  you  are working in HAM mode, you won't see the dither effect in the
gradient  sample  painted  in  this requester.  To see the gradient with
dither effects, go to the Fill Type requester.

OK
Click Ok to accept the changes and exit.

Undo
You  can  reverse  the  last  change  you  made  in the palette or Range
requester by clicking UNDO.

Revert
This  returns  the Range requester to the condition it was in before you
dis played the requester.

Grid
Click  this  check  box  to  display  a  grid  around the colours of the
palette.   Register colours have a white grid highlight and non-register
colours have a blue grid highlight.  The grid is off by default.

Cycle
Keyboard Equivalent: Tab

Toggles  colour  cycling  on/off.  Colour cycling uses the colour ranges
you  define  in the Range requester.  (See Range above).  If a colour is
not  included  in  any  range,  it  does not cycle.  See "Animation with
Colour Cycling" in Tutorial One of Chapter Four: Painting Tutorials

Palette >>

Mixer On/Off
Keyboard Equivalent: p

Displays/removes  the  Colour Mixer.  You can also display this Mixer by
right-clicking  the  Colour  Indicator  (between  the  Palette  and  the
Toolbox).

There  is  a subtle but important difference between removing the Colour
Mixer  by  choosing the menu option and by clicking OK.  When you choose
the  menu  option  or  press  p,  the  Colour Mixer is hidden behind the
current  screen  and the data in the Mixing Area remains intact when you
redisplay  the  requester.    Clicking  OK  in the requester accepts all
changes in the Colour Mixer and clears the Mixing Area.

The  Colour Mixer is the master colour control panel.  From here you can
mix and modify colours, create spreads, and copy or exchange colours.

The  Colour  Mixer and the Arrange Palette requester described below let
you  work  with  a  256  colour  Colour Set, regardless of the number of
colours  you  are  actually using in your current screen format.  If you
are  in  a mode other than HAM, you can paint only with the colours that
are in the Palette.  The Palette colours are arranged in the first slots
of  row  0.  You can identify them by the white highlight on the top and
left  edge  of each colour when the Grid is turned on.  The other Colour
Set  colours  have  a light blue highlight on the top and left edge when
the  Grid  is  turned  on.   Occassionally you will see us refer to your
Palette colours as your "base register" colours.

In  Extra  Halfbrite mode (64 colour mode) you cannot modify the colours
in  rows  2-3.    These  are  the  Halfbrite colours and always take the
Halfbrite  value  of  the corresponding Palette colours in rows 0-1.  If
you  attempt  to copy to, exchange with, delete, or spread the Halfbrite
colours, nothing will happen.

In  HAM,  HAM8  or 24-bit RGB mode, you can paint with any colour in the
available  colour universe (4096 colours in HAM, 262,144 in HAM8 etc.).
The  Colour  Set  is merely a holding spot for extra colours beyond your
"base register" colours.

COMPATABILITY NOTE
We  have  found  that  several other painting and viewing programs incor
rectly  assume  that  the  palette will contain no more than the maximum
number of colours in the pictures display mode.  These programs will not
correctly  load  a picture saved with the Colour Set.  At this time, for
maximum  compatability any pictures you are distributing should br saved
with  no  colours  in  the Colour Set beyond the Palette colours You can
delete  the  colours in your Colour Set with the Delete button in just a
few  steps.   We hope that in the near future these other pro grams will
correctly  ignore  the  extra  colours in the Colour Set if they are not
able to use them.

Modifying Colours
DeluxePaint  V  lets  you  modify colours with either the RGB or the HSV
colour  mixing  systems.    Let's  say  you want to modify an individual
colour to use in the foreground.  Here's how to do it.

Click  the  colour  you  want to modify either in the requester's row of
colours or wherever the colour appears on the page.  The selected colour
is displayed in the sample-colour box.

You  can  use  the up and down arrows at the right end of the palette to
expose  the  next  row  of  16 colours.  You can also Shift click on the
arrows to scroll directly to the first or last row of colours.

Move  the box(es) inside the slider(s) to modify the selected colour, by
varying  the  proportions of Red, Green, and Blue (RGB).  To move a box,
click  on  either side of it (inside the slider) or drag the box left or
right.

The  HSV  method  of colour mixing yields identical results.  HSV breaks
each colour down into its Hue, Saturation, and Value.

Hue  refers to the colours position on the colour spectrum.  As you move
the  box  along  the  Hue  slider (starting from the left), your current
colour  changes  to  a  shade  of  the  following colours - Red, Orange,
Yellow, Green, Blue, Purple, and Red.

Saturation  refers  to the strength of the particular hue and the extent
to which the strength is "diluted" by some proportion of white.  If your
current  colour  has  a  saturation  setting  of  zero,  your  colour is
necessarily white.

Value refers to the amount of light a colour reflects off a surface (and
therefore,  the  absence  or  presence  of black).  A colour with a high
Value  setting  has  little  or no black, whereas colours with low Value
settings contain more black.  No matter what settings you've entered for
Hue and Saturation, a Value setting of zero produces pure black.

In  the  requester,  the  RGB  system uses a 256 point scale (0-255) for
colour values in AGA or 24-bit mode, while HSV method uses two different
types of measurement.  Hue is referred to in degrees of the Coloyr Wheel
(0-360  degrees)  and  saturation  and Value are measured in percentages
(0-100%).

(See Tutorial One in Chapter Four: Painting Tutorials for an explanation
of colour mixing in RGB or HSV).

Copy
Use the COPY button to copy a colour from your picture or the palette.

Select the colour you want to copy.

Click COPY. The dropper icon cursor appears attached to the cursor.

Click  the  slot  in  the  requester into which you want to copy the new
colour.

Spread
Spread helps you quickly create a spread of shades between two colours.

Select the first colour from the palette

Click SPREAD. The dropper icon cursor appears attached to the cursor.

Click the second colour.

Deluxe  Paint  creates  a uniform spread of colours, taking into account
the  beginning and ending shades and the number of colours in between in
your palette.

EX
Use  the  EX  button  to  exchange  the  positions of two colours in the
palette.

Select the first colour from the row of colours.

Click EX. The dropper icon cursor appears attached to the cursor.

Click the second colour.

If  you  use  EX to rearrange the colours in your palette, the resulting
screen  image will likely be in the wrong colours.  You can correct this
by choosing Remap from the Colour menu.

You should remap immediately after you change the colour arrange ment in
the  palette.    If  you  modify the palette a second time without first
re-mapping, you will not be able to remap to the original palette.

SELECT
SELECT lets you select a range of colours from the palette.

Select the first colour from the palette.

Click SELECT. The dropper icon cursor appears attached to the cursor.

Click the second colour.

The  colours from the first colour up to and including the second colour
are selected.

You  can  also  use  keyboard shortcuts to select a contiguous or discon
tiguous range of colours:

To  seolect  a  contiguous range of colours, click the first colour, and
then hold the Alt key while clicking the second colour.

To  select  a  discontiguous range of colours, Shift-click on any colour
The  colour  you  Shift  clicked  on is added to the previously selected
colours, which are still selected

DELETE
Use DELETE to remove one or more colours from the colour set.

Click a colour you want to delete.

Click DELETE. The dropper icon cursor appears attached to the cursor.

If  you  want  to  delete  only  one colour, click on that colour in the
colour  set.  The colour will be deleted and the slot it occupied in the
colour set will be empty.

If  you  want to delete more than one colour, a range for example, click
the  first  colour  in  the  range;  click SELECT; move the dropper icon
cursor  to  the  last  colour in the range; and click the colour.  Click
DELETE, and Deluxe Paint deletes all colours between the selected colour
in the sample colour box and the colour you clicked on.

Use  the  eye  dropper  icon  in  the lower right corner of the panel to
select a new foreground or background colour for your palette.

Click  the  Dropper  icon.  The pointer changes to an eye dropper cursor
(You  can  also display the eye dropper cursor by pressing the comma key
",").

Position  the  point of the eye dropper on the colour you want to become
the new foreground or background colour.

Click  to  make  the  colour  you clicked on the new foreground colour.
Right click to make it the new background colour.

To copy your new colour into the palette, use COPY.

REVERT
You  can  clear  the  changes  you  made in the Colour Mixer by clicking
REVERT.    With  the  exception  of  the  mixing  area, this returns the
requester to the condition it was in before you displayed the Mixer.

UNDO
You can reverse the last change you made in the Colour Mixer by clicking
UNDO.

SCALE
You  can  convert your old IFF RGB4 values (0 to 15 - almost any of your
IFF  pictures created with previous programs) to RGB8 values (0 to 255).

GRID
Click  the GRID check gadget to turn the highlight on the top left edges
of the colours in the palette on and off.

Colour Mixing Area
Use  the  mixing  area  to interactively mix colours to create new ones,
and,  if  you wish, add colours to your palette.  You can use colours in
the picture, colours from the palette, and colours you mix to create new
shades.    Using  your  current  built in or custom brush you can select
colours  from the palette (one at a time), paint with them in the mixing
area, and mix them with other colours.

Creating a New Colour
You can create a new colour in the Mixing Area in three basic ways:

1.    Mix  a  selected  colour in the mixing area with one or more other
select  ed  colours.  The resulting colour can be a new colour.  Use the
Pick icon to select the colour and add it to the selected colour cell.

2.bb  Edit a colour by adjusting its values with the RGB/HSV sliders.

3.    Drop  colours  in  the  mixer 'wells' at either end of the mixer.
Deluxe  Paint  creates a spread between the two colours at either end of
the  mixer.   You can then add any of the spread colours to your palette
or colour set one at a time.

Here's  a  step  by  step example of how to select a colour from the cur
rent  picture,  edit  it,  mix it with another colour, and add it to the
palette.

Selecting a Colour

With  a  picture  on your screen and the Colour Mixer exposed, click the
dropper action button.

Move the dropper cursor to the picture and click on a colour.

The  colour you clicked on automatically becomes the current fore ground
colour.    It appears in the sample colour box, so you can paint with it
immediately.   The colour slot of the new colour appears high lighted or
indented in the colour set.

To  select  multiple  colours from the palette, use the SELECT button or
Shift-click to select each colour.

To select a range of colours from the palette, click to select the first
colour  in  the range, and then Alt-click on the last colour you wish to
select in the range.

Only one colour can be edited at once. To edit the selected colour:

Drag  one  or  more of the RGB/HSV sliders to change the colour val ues,
which changes the colour itself.

Mixing a Colour

Click a medium sized built-in brush and paint in the mixing area.

Choose  another  colour  and  paint  over the first colour in the mixing
area.   As you combine the two colours, new shades are created.  You can
repeat this step as often as you like.

When  you  have  created a colour you want to use, click the slot in the
colour set where you want to place the new colour.

Click  the  eye  dropper  button: click the colour in the mixing area to
make that shade the new colour.

Clearing the Mixing Area

You can clear the Mixing Area to any colour by copying the colour to it.
Here's how:

Select the colour you want to clear the Mixing Area to.

Click COPY. The dropper icon appears attached to the cursor.

Click the in the Mixing Area. It is cleared to the colour you selected.

Arrange
Keyboard Equivalent:P

Shows  the  Arrange  requester.  It displays all 256 colours of a Colour
Set  (8  rows  [128  colours]  at  a time).  Clicking on the up and down
arrows scrolls through the colour set one row at a time (16 colours in a
row).  Shift-click ing on an arrow scrolls 4 rows at a time.  Arrange is
helpful  if  you  want to copy exchange or spread colours over more than
one  row at a time.  The Arrange requester will replace the Colour Mixer
if it is open.

Use the Arrange requester to create and organise colours in your palette
or  delete  colours.    It  lets  you  delete colours easily so that new
colours can be added to the current 256-colour set.

The  action  buttons in the Arrange requester work exactly as they do in
the Colour Mixer.  See above.

Use Brush Palette
When  you  load  a  brush  from  disk, Deluxe Paint continues to use the
current  picture  palette,  even though it may be different from the one
the  brush  was  created  with.  Use Brush Palette switches to the brush
palette,  and  includes  any  information  about colour cycling that was
saved  with the brush.  If the newly loaded brush uses more colours than
the current picture, Use Brush Palette switches to the brush palette and
reduces  the  number of colours to that of the picture palette.  It does
so  by  recomputing  the  palette  to  match  the original as closely as
possible  with fewer colours.  After choosing Use Brush Palette, you can
still revert to the original picture palette by choosing Restore Palette
(see below).

Compare  Use  Brush Palette with Remap in the Colour menu: this com mand
lets  you  keep  the  current picture palette, but maps the brush to the
picture palette to match the original brush as closely as possible.

Restore Palette
Returns  you  to  the palette you were using before the current palette.
Thus,  if  you  load a picture with a different palette, Restore Palette
reverts  to  the  palette in effect before the load.  See also Use Brush
Palette, above, and Default Palette, below.

Default Palette
The  default  palette  is  the  palette Deluxe Paint uses when you first
start  the  program.    The Default Palette command replaces the current
palette  with  the  default  palette  and resets any ranges you may have
created to its (their) default state.

Load
Load a palette that you have previously saved, without loading an image.
The  Load  Palette  requester works just like the Load Picture requester
(see Load under the Picture menu).  When you load a palette, the palette
colours  overwrite  your  current  palette  directly.    Compare this to
loading a Colour Set, explained below.

Save
Save  a  palette  without  saving the image.  The Save Palette requester
works  just  like the Save Picture requester (see Save under the Picture
menu).   Only the Base Register colours (those colours that appear below
the Toolbox) are saved, NOT the entire colour set.

Colour Set

Load
Displays  the Load Colour Set requester.  This requester works just like
the Load Picture requester (see Load under the Picture menu).

Once  you've  selected  the Colour Set file you want to load and clicked
Load in the first requester, a second Load Colour Set requester appears.

This  requester lets you choose which colours from the Colour Set are to
be  loadcd  into  your  current colour set.  To select colours, click on
them.    Click on a colour a second time to deselect it.  The All button
selects  all  colours  in the Colour Set.  The None button deselects all
colours.   The Base button selects only the colours in the palette (base
registers).

Once  you have selected the colours you want to load, you can either Add
them  to  your  Colour  Set or Overwrite the current Colour Set.  If you
choose  Add,  the colours are added beginning in the first empty slot of
your  current  Colour  Set.  Colours will be added only until the Colour
Set is full.

If  you choose Overwrite, the colours you have selected are entered into
your  current  Colour  Set  beginning  at  colour  0 and the new colours
overwrite the previously existing colours.

If you change your mind and decide not to load any colours, click Cancel
in the requester.

Save
Saves  a  256  colour  set  as  a  separate  file.   The Save Colour Set
requester works just like the Save Picture requester (see Save under the
Picture menu).

Bg>Fg
Changes  all  pixels  that  use the current background colour to use the
current  foreground  colour.    This provides an easy method of changing
colours  glob  ally  all  pixels in the current background colour in the
picture are changed to the current foreground colour.  The change occurs
on-screen  only  and  does  not  affect the order of color in the colour
palette.   This is a quick and easy way to swap the colors of your image
without modifying the palette.

Undo does not reverse this change.

Bg<->Fg
Swaps  all pixels in the current background colour with the current fore
ground  colour.  This is similar to the Bg->Fg option above, except that
the  change occurs in both directions.  The change occurs on screen only
and does not affect the order of colours in the colour palette.

Undo does not reverse this change.

Remap
When  you  create a picture, Deluxe Paint "remembers" each colour on the
screen  by remembering its location in the palette.  If a picture on the
screen  was  created  with a palette other than the current palette (for
example,  if  you  have modified the palette since loading the picture),
Remap finds the loca tions in the current palette of the colours it used
in  the  original  palette  and  tells the picture to look there for its
colours.    Bg->Fg  and Bg<->Fg, above, are special cases of Remap.  See
also Remap under the Brush option of the Colour menu, below.

Undo does not reverse this change.

Recompute
This  option  is  only  available  in HAM mode or higher.  Choosing this
option  recomputes  the  picture  data by doing a remap with the current
palette.    If  you  have  loaded  a HAM image from a different program,
Recompute  may  reduce  the fringing effects you see when moving a brush
across the screen.

In  24-bit  mode,  Recompute  produces  the best screen palette from the
24-bit  data  currently  in  memory.  See Appendix E: The 24-Bit Backing
Store for more information.

Brush >>

Use the options in the submenu to modify the current brush colours.

Bg->Fg
Changes  all  pixels  in  the  brush  that are in the current background
colour into the current foreground colour.  This provides an easy method
of  making  a  global  colour  change  - all instances of the background
colour  in  the  brush  are  changed  to  the current foreground colour.
Because  you can select any colour in the brush as either the foreground
or  the  background  colour  at  any time, you can make intricate colour
changes  easily.  This operation affects the brush colours only and does
not affect the picture or the order of colours in the palette.

Bg<->Fg
Swaps  the  current background colour in the brush with the current fore
ground  colour.    This is similar to the Bg->Fg option, except that the
change  occurs in both directions.  The change affects the brush colours
only  and  does  not  affect  the picture or the order of colours in the
palette.

Remap
Use  Remap  when you load a brush that uses a palette different from the
current palette.  Remap looks at the colours used in the brush and tries
to  find  the  closest  fit  within the current palette.  This option is
different  from Use Brush Palette in that it does not change the picture
palette.    Instead  it changes the palette locations the brush looks at
for its colours.  You can per form this operation on AnimBrushes and all
frames of the animated brush will be remapped.

Change Transparency
Lets  you change the transparency colour of the currently selected brush
to the current background colour.

Effect Menu

The  Effect menu contains several special features.  Its options let you
create  stencils, "freeze" the background, and define planes for drawing
in perspec tive.

Stencil >>

Creating  a stencil allows you to paint around an image without painting
on it, as though it were protected by a frisket.  Create a stencil of an
image  in  either  of  two ways (painting and locking), or by using both
ways  together.   You can "paint" an area to mask.  See Paint, below, or
"lock" the colours that comprise that image.

A  stencil  will  also apply to the brush when it is captured.  Whatever
colours  in  the  brush  were  locked  when  the stencil was made become
transparent in the brush.

When you have a stencil active, an "S" appears in the Title Bar.

Show
Show  dims the colours in your picture and displays the stencilled areas
of  your  picture  (if any) in a contrasting lighter colour.  The "S" in
the  Title  Bar  changes  to "s".  You can't paint on your picture while
Show is active.  Click to return to your picture.

Make
Keyboard Equivalent: ~ (tilde, below Esc)
This  displays  the  Make  Stencil  requester.    You can reposition the
requester anywhere on the screen by dragging the Title bar.

To make a stencil:

Click the colours you want to use to create the stencil.  You can select
colours by clicking them in the requester's palette, by clicking colours
in your picture, or by clicking colours in the main palette.

When you have clicked all the colours you want to protect, click MAKE.

The  colours  you  select define a mask that protects an area from being
paint  ed  over.  The shape of the stencil is what is created and saved,
not  the colour information, which means you can change the colours of a
"stencilled" shape, and still retain the stencil.

If you have several animation frames, Deluxe Paint automatically remakes
the  stencil  as you move from one frame to the next, either manually or
while using the Move requester.

CLEAR: Clears the current colour selections in the requester.

INVERT:  Inverts  the  current colour selections.  This is useful if you
want to mask more colours than you want to leave unmasked.

When  you  are using HAM or 24 bit backing store mode, your Make Stencil
requester  also  contains  a  Show  button,  a  Fine  Tune  button and a
Tolerance  edit  field.    These  options  are explained in detail, with
examples, in Turorial Five of Chapter 4: Painting Tutorials.

Show  toggles the show stencil function on and off.  This works like the
Stencil>Show option in the Effect menu.

Fine Tune lets you add or subtract individual colours from the stencil.

The  Tolerance  edit  field  lets  you  click on a singlc colour in your
picture  and  simultaneously  lock (or unlock) all "similiar" colours in
the  image.   The Tolerance number determines how different a colour can
be  and  still be considered "similar" to the one you clicked on.  A low
Tolerance number requires that the colours be very similar, while a high
Tolerance  number  locks  colours  that  may  be very different from the
colour  you  clicked.  The range of Tolerance values from 0 to 48.  At 0
tolerance,  only  colours  that are identical to the colour you click on
will be affected.  At 48 tolerance, all colours will be affected.

Remake
When  you  have  a stencil active and you apply colours to your picture,
the  colours you apply are not protected, even though they may be locked
in  the  Make  Stencil requester.  You can lock newly applied colours by
bringing  up  the  Make  Stencil  requester  and  clicking  Make,  or by
selecting Remake from the Stencil submenu.

If  you  have  several  animation  frames and you make a stencil, Deluxe
Paint  automatically  remakes the stencil as you move from one screen to
the next.

Paint
Keyboard Equivalent: Ctrl-s

Uses  your  current  built-in or custom brush to paint the area you want
sten  cilled.   The image under the stencil will be displayed in a "half
tone"  mode.    When  you've finished painting the stencil, choose Paint
again  to  exit this mode and activate the stencil.  Stencils you create
using  Stencil  Paint  are  "area  based".   Also, if you choose Make or
Remake  to  create  a  "colour  based"  stencil, your painted stencil is
discarded.

Reverse
Has  the  sanme  effect as clicking Invert in the Make Stencil requester
(see Make, above).

On/Off
Keyboard Equivalent: (below Esc).

Toggles the stencil on and off.  This maintains the stencil but turns it
off temporarily so you can paint on the protected colours.

Free
Creating  a  stencil  uses memory even though you may have it turned off
(see On/0ff above).  Free deletes the stencil and unallocates the memory
it was using.

Load
Stencils can be loaded as separate items.  They are full screen only and
can be loaded only to the position they occupied when they were created.
In  other  words,  you  cannot create a page larger than screen size and
load  the stencil into the middle of the page.  The Load requester works
like  all  other Load requesters in the program (see Load in the Picture
menu).

When  you  load  (or save) a stencil, you are loading (or saving) only a
layer of data that indicates which pixels in your picture you can or can
not  paint  in.    You  are  not  loading  settings for the Make Stencil
requester.    In other words, stencils you load are area based, like the
sten  cils you create in the Stencil>Paint mode.  Area based stencils do
not  apply  across  animation  frames  and  are replaced by colour based
stencils you subsequently create using the Make Stencil requester.

Save
You  can  save stencils just as you can any other file, such as pictures
or  brushes.   The Save requester for stencils works like all other Save
requesters  in the program (see Save in the Picture menu).  See the note
above  regarding  the  nature of the data you are saving when you save a
stencil

LightTable >>

On/Off
Keyboard Equivalent: 1

Turns  the  LightTable  on  or  off.    The  LightTable lets you see the
animation  frames that immediately precede and/or immediately follow the
current frame (or the spare page), which gives you greater control while
creating  your  animation.    This  effect  simulates  the  "onion skin"
techniques  used  by  traditional  animation  artists.      By   using a
combination  of LightTable options, you can see a maximum of four frames
simultaneously.

The  lighttabled frames appear behind the current image (in the BG area)
and  can  be dimmed to a darker colour in all screen format modes except
HAM.

Merge
Merges  all  of  the currently viewed images into the current frame, and
turns  off  the  LightTable  so  you  can  see the result as it actually
appears.

WARNING
You cannot UNDO this Merge command.

Dim
Keyboard Equivalent: Alt-1

When  Dim  is  On,  all  frames  displayed on the LightTable, except the
current  frame,  appear  dimmed.   You can easily see at a glance, which
frame you are working on.  Dim is on by default.  This option applies to
all screen format modes except HAM.

If you dim a frame that contains very dark colours, those colours may be
difficult to see.

Layer 1-4
Keyboard Equivalent: Ctrl-1 to Ctrl-4

Shows/hides the frames defined for each Layer in the LightTable Settings
requester (see below).  If a layer is checked, it is shown: if it is not
checked, it is hidden.

Settings
Displays the LightTable Settings requester.

Layer:  You  can  use these checkboxes to show/hide the four Layers just
like selecting the Layers directly from the Effect>LightTable menu.

Frame:  Define  the  frame associated with the Layer 0 = spare page, 1 =
next frame, -1 = previous frame, -2 = 2 frames back, etc.

Dim: Click this box to activate the current dim slider values.

<  >:  Click  the  left  and  right arrows (< >) to globally increase or
decrease the dim values for all four layers.  Each mouse click moves the
values  up  or down by 5 units.  Alt Click adjusts the values by 1O, and
Ctrl Click adjusts the values by 1.

Sliders:  The  sliders set the dim values for each Layer.  The dim value
(-255  to  255)  is  the  amount  of  black to add to the colours in the
selected  layer.    The  larger  the number, the darker the colours: the
smaller  the  number,  the lighter the colours.  Zero leaves the colours
unaltered.    Adding  a  negative  amount of black will make the colours
lighter (ie, add White).

Anim  Lock:  Click this checkbox to lock out any page that is not within
the current animation play range.  This will lock out the first frame of
an  anima  tion  if  a  layer  is set to show the next frame (1) and the
current  frame  is the last frame in the animation, or lock out the last
frame  of  a animation if a layer is set to show the previous frame (-1)
and the current frame is the first frame of the animation.

Background >>

Fix
Fixes  the background by "locking" the current picture.  This allows you
to  draw  on it without losing any of the background.  You can erase any
paint  you  apply  after  fixing  the  background  by clicking CLR or by
painting with the right mouse button.

Fixing  the  background  uses additional memory.  When the background is
fixed, no colours may be picked up from that background.

Free
This  "unlocks"  the  background,  and  merges it with anything that was
paint  ed  over  it, so that clicking CLR will clear the entire picture.
It also frees up the memory that was allocated to fixing the background.

LockFG
The  Make Stencil requester lets you create stencils based on colours in
the  palette.    By locking a colour, you make it impossible to paint on
that  colour  wherever it may be on the page.  By using a combination of
Fix  Background  (see  above)  and  Lock  FG,  however, you can define a
stencil by area rather than colour.  When you select Lock FG, you define
as  a stencil those areas on the page that you have painted since fixing
the background, regardless of the colour of those areas.

Anti-alias >>

Anti-aliasing  is  a  smoothing  process which eliminates or reduces the
jagged  edges  apparent  in  lines  that  aren't  precisely  vertical or
horizontal.    The  effec  tiveness of anti aliasing is dependent on the
range of colours in the palette.  For example, to draw a smooth, oblique
black  line  on a white background, you'll need to have two intermediate
shades  of  grey  in the palette.  Anti aliasing works with straight and
curved  lines,  and  with  filled and unfilled shapes.  It is especially
good  at smoothing the jagged lines in a brush that result from rotating
or shrinking it in Perspective mode.

None, High, Low
Keyboard Equivalent: Alt-/

Set  the level of anti aliasing used on your brush when you paint.  None
is  the  default  setting  and  applies  no anti aliasing.  Low lets you
eliminate  some  of  the jagged outline in your images and brushes.  The
cost  of removing jagged lines is painting speed, but it is still faster
than  smoothing  out  an  image  by  hand.  To use anti aliasing, select
either  Low  or High before you lay down the brush image.  Anti-aliasing
is  most effective when you have reduced the size of your original brush
(for example, by moving it back along the Z axis).  Anti aliasing in the
High setting can be very slow if your brush or fill area is large.

Process >>

The  effectiveness  of  the  Process options is dependent on the colours
availablc  in the palette.  Deluxe Paint combines your foreground colour
with  the  colour  in  your  image and then looks for the colour in your
palette  that  most  closely  matches  the  colour  it  needs.  For best
results,  your  palette  should  contain  a range of colours between the
colours  in  the  palette  and  the  colour  you are using to tint.  The
Process  option  obviously  give the best results in higher colour modes
because all Amiga colours are available for painting.

You can combine Translucency with any of the Process options to increase
your  control  over the effect of these options.  For example, Hue would
nor mally directly substitute the hue of your brush for the hues in your
picture  If  you  turn  on Translucency with a setting of 50% instead of
substituting  the  hue  directly,  the  resulting  hue  will  be a 50/50
combination of the brush hue and the picture hue.

On/Off
Keyboard Equivalent: Alt-p

When you choose Process On a P appears in the middle of the Title Bar

Tint (default setting)
The  colour  you  are painting with tints the colour(s) underneath it in
the  direction  of  the colour you are applying.  Use this option if you
want  to cre ate a shading or tinting effect over a number of colours on
the screen, or to colourise a black and white or greyscale image.

Hue
Use  this  option with any painting tool to adjust the hue of a coloured
area  of  your  image.    This  option  is   useful   for   converting a
multi-coloured  image into a monochromatic image.  Note that this option
will  have  no  effect  on  greyscale  images  because  a colour with no
Saturation is grey regardless of its hue.

Value
Use this option to paint the Value of the current brush into the colours
in  the  image.  This is an effective way to create shading effects.  If
you  choose  a  light colour to paint with in Value mode, darker colours
you  paint on will become lighter.  If you choose a dark colour to paint
with, lighter colours will become darker.

Translucency >>

On/Off
Keyboard Equivalent: Alt-t

When you choose Translucency a T appears in the middle of the Title Bar.
Painting with Translucency on has the effect of laying a transparency or
coloured  filter  over  a  portion of your picture.  The transparency is
tinted  toward  the current foreground colour.  The degree of tinting is
determined  by  the level (percentage) set in the Translucency requester
(below).

Settings
Keyboard Equivalent:Ctrl-t

Displays the Translucency requester. The default setting is 50%.

To  change  the  setting click on either side of the slider, or drag the
slider  to a particular position.  Click OK to confirm your new setting.

Here's  an  example of how Translucency works.  Let's say you have a red
object  in  your  painting with the RGB values R: 15 (100%) G:0 B:0, and
that  blue  (R:0  G:0 B:15 (100%) is your foreground colour.  If you set
the  translucency  level  to  50%  and  painted over the red object, the
resulting  colour  would be equal to 50% of the objects colour, red, and
50%  of  the  foreground  colour,  blue.  The RGB value of the resulting
colour  is  R:7  (50%)  G:0  B:7.  If this colour (purple) is not in the
current palette, the clos est colour to this value will be used instead.
Like  the  Process functions, Translucency gives the best results in HAM
mode.

The  percentage  value  for  translucency  refers  to  the amount of the
original  object  that  will  show  through the newly applied foreground
colour.    For  instance, in the above example if the translucency level
was  set to 75%, the resulting colour would be 75% of the listing colour
in  the  painting, red, and 25% of the foreground colour, blue.  The RGB
value of the resulting colour would be R:11 G:0 B:3.

Translucency  works  with  all  the  painting tools (except text, single
pixel  Airbrush,  or  the  3-  and  5-pixel  built-in  brushes),  and in
combination  with  the  Process options.  By combining Translucency with
Tint for example, you can control the degree of tinting.

Perspective >>

The  Perspective  submenu  contains  options for manipulating a brush in
three dimensions.

Do
Keyboard Equivalent: Enter (on keypad)

Puts  you  into  Perspective  mode.  Your brush is represented by a four
cell matrix, which you can manipulate with keypad commands (listed later
in  this  section).  The amount of rotation for axes x, y and z is given
in  degrees  on  the  right  side  of  the  Title  bar.    The centre of
perspective  (see  Centre, below) is indicated by a cross hair.  You can
paint an image of the rotated brush at any time by clicking.

To  exit Perspective mode, click a tool in the toolbox or press Enter on
the keypad.

FillScreen
Keyboard Equivalent: - (minus) keypad

Fills  the  screen  with  the  current  brush,  in  its current state of
rotation in 3D.  The entire brush size (not just the opaque part) is the
default size for the Perspective Fill pattern.

Reset
Keyboard Equivalent: 0 on keypad

Resets  the brush to its original state before rotation, and returns all
of  the settings in the Perspective Settings requester to their defaults
(see Settings below).

Note: The keyboard equivalent does not reset the perspective centre This
is  useful  if  you need to reset your brush to its original orientation
without changing your perspective plane.

Centre
Keyboard Equivalent: . (period) keypad

Allows  you to set the Perspective centre or horizon in your perspective
"landscape".

When  you select Centre, your cursor changes into a large cross hair The
smaller  stationary  cross  hair  on  the  screen indicates the existing
centre.   Move the large cross hair to the new centre you want and click
either mouse button.

Once your have set the Perspective centre, the position of the unrotated
brush relative to that centre determines the position of the perspective
planes  when  you  rotate  the brush.  the greater the distance above or
below Perspective centre, the less pronounced the perspective effect.

Settings
Displays  the  Perspective  requester.  When you are in Perspective mode
you can also display this requester by right clicking the Grid tool.

The following options are available:

Grid
You  can  use these edit boxes to set the dimensions for a grid in three
dimen  sional  space.  When you first open the requester, the numbers in
these  boxes correspond to the dimensions of your brush: the Z dimension
automatically  takes the same value as the Y dimension.  It is important
to remember that the entire brush size (not just the opaque part) is the
default size for Perspective Grid and Perspective Fill.

From Brush
Clicking  From  Brush  sets the X and Y grid values to correspond to the
width  and height of the brush.  This is the quickest way to restore the
per  spective grid settings to the same dimensions as your brush without
affect ing any other settings.

Angle Step
Specifies  the rotation increment used in conjunction with the Shift key
and  the  appropriate  keyboard rotation key (see Perspective Rotations,
below).  This value defaults to 90 degrees.

Screen
The default setting, uses the screen coordinate system when rotating the
brush  on  the  x,  y, and z axes.  (If you are familiar with coordinate
systems, you will know this coordinate system as the Euler method, which
measures all three angles of rotation from absolute zero).

Brush
Rotates the brush relative to the current brush coordinate system.

Display
The  Angle and Pos buttons let you choose whether the angles of rotation
or the position of the brush in three dimensional space are displayed in
the Title Bar.

If  Coords  from  the  Prefs  menu is turned on, the Title Bar shows two
dimensional  coordinares; be sure to turn Coords off if you wan't to see
three dimensional coordinates.

Perspective Rotations
All  perspective rotations are controlled through the keypad on your key
board.

Pressing  Keypad  0  resets  all three axes to zero and fixes the Z axis
below),  but  retains the apparent distance settings.  Pressing Keypad 0
in  con junction with the Shift key resets all perspective values to the
default state

Other Perspective Keyboard Commands

Ctrl temporarily fixes the Y axis so that you can move the brush forward
or backward in 3D space by moving the mouse forward or backward.

The  ;  and  ' keys move the brush plane forward or back along its fixed
axis  (see  below)  without  changing  its  orientation,  moving it in a
direction  per  pendicular  to the brush plane.  This is the same effect
described  in the above discussion on brush position prior to rotation.
Thus,  with  the Z axis fixed brush position relative to the Perspective
centre  at  the moment of rotation determines the brush's distance above
or  below eye level.  You can achieve the same effect after the brush is
rotated  by using the ; and ' keys to move it for ward or back along its
Z axis.

Up Arrow
Pressing  these  keys  with  the  shift  key held down results in larger
increments  of  movement.    In  addition  you  can  modify the apparent
distance  from  the  observer  by  pressing  the  < and > keys (ie.  the
Shifted  "," and "." keys) Thus when the apparent distance is great, the
perspective foreshortening is at a minimum, becoming greater as apparent
distance decreases.

Fixing Axes: Whenever you start in Perspective mode, the Z axis (the one
perpendicular  to  the  screen)  is "fixed," that is, the mouse does not
move  the brush through that axis.  You can selectively fix any axis, as
follows:

To fix the X axis, press Shift-9
To fix the Y axis, press Shift-6
To fix the Z axis, press Shift-3

As  noted  above, you can move along the axis that is currently fixed by
using  the  Shifted or un Shifted ; and ' keys (use the Shifted keys for
larger incre ments).  You can also temporarily fix the Y axis by holding
down the Ctrl key.

Pressure >>

On/Off
Deluxe  Paint  supports  pressure  sensitive  tablets.   (TriMedia, Inc.
software  dri ver required).  When painting on canvas with a traditional
brush,  your  strokes  vary  in colour intensity and width depending how
hard  you press the brush down.  Pressure sensitivity allows duplication
of  this  effect, as well as other effects not possible with traditional
media.

Settings
Keyboard Equivalent: Ctrl-p

Displays the Pressure requester and turns on pressure on exit.

Translucency:  When  this  option is on, your brush paints from the back
ground  colour  to  the foreground colour, so the order of light to dark
changes  depending  on the background colour.  For example, if your back
ground  colour is white and you're painting with a red foreground colour
your  brush  strokes  change  from  light  pink  to  red with increasing
pressure.    You  can  change  the  amount  of  translucency  with   the
Translucency  Settings  requester.  The higher the Translucency setting,
the wider the variety of shades available for pressure.

Cycle:  This option causes pressure to be translated into colour cycling
using  the current colour cycle range.  The colour cycle range must have
a cycle speed associated with it for this option to work.

Size:  When  this  box  is checked, the setting of the slider is used to
modify the brush size (in pixels) depending on how hard you press on the
tablet.

Reverse  Size: Invert the Size modification so that pressing harder will
reduce the brush size by the selected amount.

Pressing OK from the requester automatically turns Pressure on.

Media >>

Open
Use  a  standard  open  requester  to  open a Media Library file.  Media
Library  files  shipped  with Deluxe Paint (in the Media drawer) include
chalk, felt tip marker, oil pastel, crayon, and water-colour.

Media types and textures work together - in order to use a Media type, a
texture must also be turned on.  When both Media and Textures are turned
on,  you  can  duplicate natural drawing effects such as water-colour on
paper, oil on heavy canvas, etc.

The  use  of media and textures and their effects will vary depending on
which  colour  you  are  using  and  what  kind of effects you are using
Experiment  with  media types, translucency options, and colour modes to
get different effects.

Close
Close the currently open Media Library file.

Texture >>

On/Off
Keyboard Equivalent:Right Amiga-t

This  turns  the  current  background texture on or off.  If there is no
texture the Load Texture requester is displayed.

Load
Use  standard  ASL  requester  to  load  any  IFF  image as a background
texture.   For optimum effect, images should be tile-able and 16 colours
or  greater but different effects can be achieved with even simple black
and  white  or colour images.  Only bitmap data for the selected file is
read; any palette data associated with the file is ignored.

Invert
Keyboard Equivalent; Right-Amiga - I

Inverts the data of the Current background texture.

Free
Clear the current background texture from memory.

Macro Menu

The  Macro  menu is a new menu that lets you record, load, save, assign,
and  execute  Arexx  macros.  Macros enable you to save actions and then
repeat  them  -  you  can  even  assign macros to function keys for easy
access.

Record Macro
Keyboard Equivalent: Right - Amiga - M

When  this  check  item  is selected, Deluxe Paint begins recording menu
choices  and  mouse actions.  When selected again to stop recording, the
Assign  Macro  requester appears.  Select one of the ten slots and press
OK  to  assign the macro you've just recorded to a function key.  Macros
are kept in RAM:T until you save them.

Record Details

When this option is checked, all mouse drawing movements are recorded in
the  macro.   When unchecked, only necessary mouse drawing movements are
recorded.    For  instance,  when unchecked, only the two endpoints of a
straight  line  would be recorded.  If checked all the mouse movement in
between  the  two clicks to set the endpoints would be recorded, leading
to a more complex macro file.

Execute Macro

Opens  an  "Execute  Macro"  window  in  your  default  open ARexx macro
directory.    Choose  an  ARexx  macro file, and press OK to execute the
macro file immediately.

Load
Open  a requester to simultaneously open a macro file and assign it to a
function key

Click on the question mark next to a macro slot to bring up an open file
requester.    Select  a macro file and press OK to load the macro in the
macro slot.

Save As
Opens  a  standard ASL "Save File" requester to save the macro currently
in memory to an ARexx file

Prefs Menu

The  Prefs menu contains a list of options that you can toggle on or off
to  suit  your  work  habits.    When you choose an option, a check mark
(tick) appears to the left of the option to indicate that its turned on.
Choosing the option again turns the option off and removes the tick.

You  can  toggle  multiple  options  by clicking on the option while the
Prefs menu is exposed.

The  AutoGrid  is  turned on by default for all Deluxe Paint users.  For
artists  using  HAM  screen  format,  FastAdjust  is  also  turned on by
default.

New  additions  to  the  menu allow you to save and restore your default
pref erences to and from disk.

Coords
Keyboard Equivalent: Shift-\

This  option  turns  on  the  coordinate display in the upper right hand
portion  of the Title Bar.  Simply moving the mouse displays the current
position  of  the  cursor  with  the origin (0, 0) set to the lower left
corner of the screen Holding down either mouse button temporarily resets
the origin to the cur rent cursor position and displays the displacement
value  from  that  tempo rary origin as you move around the screen.  The
readout is scaled in pixels.  See also OriginUL, below.

FastFB
Fast  feedback.   Turn on Fast FB when working with large or complicated
brushes  while using the line or unfilled shape tools.  Fast FB lets you
draw  your  lines  and  shapes  using the smallest (one-pixel) brush for
feedback  and  then  completes  the  design using the currently selected
brush.  This increase response speed while you are drawing, but does not
affect the final image

MultiCycle
Works  in  conjunction with the Cycle paint mode from the Mode menu With
MultiCycle  turned on, painting with a multicoloured brush in Cycle mode
cycles  each  colour  in in the brush, provided the colour is in a cycle
range.    When Multicycle is turned off (the default) using Cycle with a
multicoloured  brush  treats the brush as though it were a single colour
(the current foreground colour).

Be Square
Because the Amiga's pixels are not perfectly square, circles and squares
drawn  with  the  shape tools are not perfectly round or square.  If you
wish  to  draw  "true"  circles or squares, select Be Square.  This will
square  all  the  built  in  brushes,  the  appropriate shape tools, and
symmetry.  Be Square does not square gridding or perspective, and should
be turned off when you are using those features.

Workbench
Toggles the Amiga Workbench on and off. Default setting is off.

ExclBrush
If  you pick up a brush with ExelBrush (and the Grid) selected, you will
exclude  a  one-pixel border on the right and bottom edges of your brush
(see  Figure  30).    This is useful if your brush has a coloured border
around  it  and  you  want  to use the brush to create a pattern fill or
perspective  fill  (using  the  Fill Type requester).  When Deluxe Paint
creates  your  pattern, the border will be uniform throughout instead of
being  twice  as  wide  where  one  copy  of the brush is placed next to
another.

ExelBrush has no effect on brush pickup when the Grid is off.

AutoTransp
Modifies  the way brush pickup works.  With AutoTransp turned on, Deluxe
Paint determines the transparent colour by looking at the corners of the
capture  rectangle  or  the points of the polygon to see if they are the
same  colour.    If  the  four  corners are the same colour, that colour
becomes  the transparent colour, otherwise the current background colour
remains the transparent colour.

AutoGrid
With AutoGrid turned on the perspective grid is resized automatically to
match  any  custom  brush you choose to load or pick up.  lt's as if you
had  clicked  the From action button in the Perspective requester.  When
AutoGrid is off, the perspective grid is not automatically resized.

This option affects only the grid in Perspective, not the standard grid.

OriginUL
When Coords from the Prefs menu is on, Deluxe Paint displays the current
position  of  the cursor on the right side of the Title Bar.  By default
the  pro gram calculates the origin, or zero point of coordinates (0, 0)
of the cursor position from the lower left corner of the screen.  If you
would  rather  have  the  origin  calculated from the upper left, choose
OriginUL.  To return to the default origin, choose OriginUL again.

FastAdjust
This  option  is  available  only  in HAM mode, where it is turned on by
default.    FastAdjust  tells Deluxe Paint NOT to attempt to correct the
fringing  effects  that  appear along the right side of your brush while
the  brush  is moving.  This improves the speed of brush movement and is
especially  help ful if you are using large custom brushes.  If you find
the  fringing  to be annoying or difficult to work with, turn FastAdjust
off and the fringing will be reduced.

MouseTrack
This  check  option  is  available  only  on  Amigas with a 68020 CPU or
greater.    When mouse track is on, Deluxe Paint buffers your mouse move
ments during freehand drawings so that your lines look smoother.

Toolbox >>

This submenu allows you to open requesters for the various toolbox items
directly  from the menu rather than right clicking on the toolbox icons.
See the Tools section for an explanation of the requesters.

Fill
Keyboard Equivalent: F

Displays the Fill Type requester

Spacing
Keyboard Equivalent: V

Displays the Spacing requester

Fonts
Keyboard Equivalent: T

Displays the Choose Font requester

Airbrush
Keyboard Equivalent: Alt-A

Displays the Airbrush Settings requester.

Grid

Displays the Gridding requester

Symmetry

Displays the Symmetry requester.

Icons
Opens  the Icon Preferences requester for setting icon options for files
creat ed with Deluxe Paint.  Icons are saved using the current workbench
palette  settings.    Your results will vary depending on your workbench
settings.

Save Type
None: Files are saved without any icon information.

Standard: Files are saved with standard Deluxe Paint icon.

Preview:  A  miniature version of the picture is created and used as the
file icon.

Save Options

Size  from  Brush:  Uses  the  custom  brush dimensions to save the Icon
Preview.

Embed  Preview:  This  option  saves the preview to the file.  If a Save
Type of Preview is selected, a preview is saved as an icon as well.

Preview Smoothing

Set the anti-aliasing options for the preview icon to None (no smoothing
at  all),  Low (some smoothing) or High (maximum smoothing).  only takes
effect in non-HAM modes.

Preview Size

Set  the icon preview size in pixels.  Icon sizes are limited from 20x20
to 320x200 pixels.

Font Dir

Displays  a  requester  you can use to select a different font directory
than the default Amiga Font directory.

Default

Resets Deluxe Paint's preference settings to the factory defaults.

Last Saved

Restore  the  preference  settings from the last time they were saved as
tooltypes.

Save

Save  current  preference  settings  as  tooltypes  to  the Deluxe Paint
program's  icon.  In addition, the program saves the current Directories
for  Picture,  Brush,  Anim,  Palette,  Animbrush, Stencil, Texture, and
Media  as  your  default  directories,  and saves the currently assigned
macro files.

User Menu

Keyboard Equivalent: A-1 to A-0 execute user macros 1 to 10.

This  menu  allows  you  to  execute one of the ten macro files.  Deluxe
Paint can store at one time.

User Feedback in the Title Bar

Painting Mode
Displays  the current printing mode (Matte, Colour, Replc, Smear, Blend,
Cycle, Smooth) beside the program title [Deluxe Paint] on the Title Bar.
See Mode menu, above, for information on painting modes.

Colour Fill Box
Displays  the  currently  selected  fill pattern, or perspective fill or
gradient  fill  in a small box in the middle of the Title Bar.  This box
previews  the pattern or gradient you'll get when you fill a shape.  The
Colour  Fill  Box  is  absent  if  your  Fill Type is set to Solid.  See
discussion under Fill tool, below, for more information on the Fill Type
requester.

A
Appears  in  the middle of the Title Bar when Antialias>High is selected
from the Effect menu

a
Appears  in  the  middle of the Title Bar when Antialias>Low is selected
from the Effect menu.

B
Appears in the middle of the Title Bar when the background is fixed.

P
Appears in the middle of the Title Bar when you have selected one of the
Process  options  (Tint, Hue, Value) from the Effect menu.  Process>None
does not display the P.

S
Appears in the middle of the Title Bar to show a Stencil is active

s
Appears  in  the  middle  of the Title Bar when a stencil is active, and
Stencil>Show or Stencil>Paint is selected.

T
Appears in the middle of the Title Bar when Translucency from the Effect
menu is turned on.

Axis Rotation
When  you  are  in  Perspective mode, the rotation of the selected shape
about  each  axis (x, y, and z respectively) appears in the right corner
of  the  Title  Bar.  The axis rotation information is superseded by the
cursor coordinates if you turn on Coordinates in the Prefs menu.

Coordinates
When  Coords  is  active,  the  coordinates  of  the cursor position are
displayed in the right corner of the Title Bar.

Memory Availability
Press  the  Ctrl  key  and  the  letter  a  at  the same time to display
available  Fast memory/Chip memory in the left corner of the Title Bar.
See Appendix A for information on Deluxe Paints memory usage.

Startup Tooltypes
The  tooltypes  options  listed  in  the  following section allow you to
specify  program  defaults.  You can specify startup tooltypes using the
options  in  the  following  sections  with  the  Information requester,
accessible  through  the  Deluxe Paint V icon and Workbench menus at the
Workbench  screen.  Most of these tooltypes can be saved directly out of
Deluxe  Paint  V  from  either  the  Prefs  menu  or  the  Screen Format
requester.

Preference Tooltypes
These  tolltypes  correspond  to  your  menu  choices  in  the Pref menu
Tooltypes are in brackets () if unchecked or off.

AutoGrid
FastAdjust
Be Square
Coords
Fast FB
MultiCycle
Workbench
ExclBrush
AutoTransp
OriginUL
MouseTrack

Icon Tooltypes
These tooltypes correspond to the icon preferences.

IconSizeFromBrush (Default=off)
IconSaveType= < None/Standard/Preview> (Default = Standard)
IconSmoothType= < None/Low/High> (Default = None)
IconSize= <Width, Height> Min = 20,20 Max = 320x200
IconEmbedPreview (Default = off)

Macro Tooltypes
Macro   1...10   =   <path:arexx   filename>   (Example:   Macro   1   =
progdir:rexx/ani mate.dprx)

Display Tooltypes
These tooltypes are saved only from the screen format requester.

DefaultPattern = <Pattern Matching> (Example:
DefaultPattern = NTSC#?HAM)
DisplayModeld (Default = off)

Assign Tooltypes
AnimDir      = <Path:Drawer Name> (Default = DPaintV:Anim)
AnimBrushDir = <Path:Drawer Name> (Default = DPaintV:AnimBrush)
BrushDir     = <Path:Drawer Name> (Default = DPaintV:Brush)
MoveDir      = <Path:Drawer Name> (Default = DPaintV:Move)
PaletteDir   = <Path:Drawer Name> (Default = DPaintV:Colours)
PictureDir   = <Path:Drawer Name> (Default = DPaintV:Picture)
StencilDir   = <Path:Drawer Name> (Default = DPaintV:Stencil)
TextureDir   = <Path:Drawer Name> (Default = DPaintV:Textures)
MediaDir     = <Path:Drawer Name> (Default = DPaintV:Media)

Advanced Tooltypes
Advanced Tooltypes are not saved by the program.

NoKeyPad (Default = off)

NOTE
If this tooltype is on for an A600 machine, pressing CAPS LOCK activates
an alternate keymap that enables Perspective keyboard commands.

AutoInfoPanels (Default = off)
ToolLimit = <Min X>, <Min Y>, <Max X>, <Max Y>

<Min  X> is the position of the left edge of the Anim Control Panel.  It
accepts values between -1 and 49.

<Min Y> is the position of the top of the Anim Control Panel.

<Max  X>  is  the position of the right edge of the Toolbox.  It accepts
values of 320 and higher.

<Max  Y>  is  the  position of the bottom of the Anim Control Panel.  It
accepts values of 200 and higher.

Language = francais (Uses the foreign language catalog)
Deluxe  Paint  V  ships with both Francais (French) and Deutsch (German)
strings.


APPENDIXES
==========

Appendix A: Memory Management
-----------------------------

The amount of memory available varies from machine to machine depend ing
on the machine model, amount of RAM installed, version of the operat ing
system,  the  screen mode and colour depth you're working in, floppy dri
ves  connected,  ARexx,  and  tablet support.  You can measure available
memo ry by selecting About from the Picture menu (or by pressing Ctrl-a)
any  time  you need a memory check.  Deluxe Paint will warn you when you
have  insufficient memory to accomplish a task, or when you run the risk
of los- ing data.

Memory  shortage is manifested in various ways.  For example, if you are
at  the  limits of available memory and you select a large brush, Deluxe
Paint  conserves  memory  by  displaying  just the outline of the brush.
When you paint with the brush the image will appear on the screen in the
normal fash ion, even though in may not be visible as you move the brush
around  the screen.  When this happens and your brush is not larger than
the screen and the Brush Frame Only option is not checked, consider it a
sign  that avail able memory is low.  In that case, you should take some
action  to reallocate memory (for example, by deleting the spare page or
by  removing any sten cils, see below), or at least to save your current
image or animation to disk.

Here are some of the ways Deluxe Paint V consumes memory:

Increasing  the  amount of change in an animation after you've allocated
frames for animation (see below for further discussion).

Creating  and  holding  a large brush.  When you see just the outline of
the  brush  (and  your brush is not larger than the screen and the Brush
Frame  Only  option is not checked) this is a sign that you are near the
edge of yoyr memory limits.

Creating and holding a large AnimBrush.

When  your  spare page is active, it uses up as much memory as the first
page  even  if you cleared the image from it.  You can regain the memory
used  by  the  spare  page  (40K or more) by selecting Delete This Page,
while viewing the spare page, from the Picture menu.

You  use  memory  by  leaving  the  WorkBench open while you work Deluxe
Paint.   The WorkBench can be opened and closed through the Prefs menu.
The  Workbench  can  only be closed if there are no other custom screens
open.

Creating  a  stencil  uses up one bit plane.  The exact amount of memory
used depends on the screen format and page size you've selected.  Fixing
the background has a much larger overhead, similar to that required by a
spare page.

AnimBoard  printing  requires  slightly  more  memory than the currently
displayed page for printing.

Multiple  Palettes  can  use as little as .25K per Palette (in black and
white modes) to a little over 1K per Palette in 256 colour modes.

The  Standard airbrush uses a little more memory than 1 bitplane for the
screen mode you are currently using.

Other  things that require memory are loading the disk directory loading
the system fonts, and creating a fill pattern from a brush.

Animation and Memory Management

You've probably discovered that animation requires a lot of memory.  And
the  two  animation  methods,  Expanded  and  Compressed, have different
memory requirements.

The Expanded method of animation requires that there be enough memory to
duplicate  the  entire screen for every frame.  So if you are in 320x200
32  colours,  which  takes  40K  per  screen, you'll need 800K to get 20
frames.

Memory requirements for animation in the Compressed mode is based on the
difference  between each animation frame.  The more a frame is different
from  the  one  before it, the more memory will be needed to store it in
mem  ory and on the disk.  The frame that requires the minimum amount of
memory  is  simply a copy of the frame before it.  The maximum amount of
memory  is  required  when  every pixel in a frame is a different colour
than in the frame before it.

It's possible to set the number of frames to a large number and then, in
the course of painting on the different frame:, run out of memory.  What
is  hap  pening  is  that  you are increasing the amount that the frames
differ  from  each  other.   When this happens you'll see a message that
explains  that  you  don't  have enough memory to save the change you're
making.

What If You Run Out of Memory

Eventually  everyone  gets  in  a situation when they run out of memory.
The  first  thing you should do when you get messages saying "Not enough
mem  ory"  is  to save your work.  The following is a list of things you
can do to get a little more memory to finish your work.

Close the WorkBench from the Prefs Menu.

Delete your Spare page.

Delete your custom brush by choosing Brush>Free from the Brush menu.

If  you  have  an  AnimBrush, choose AnimBrush>Free option from the Anim
menu to free it.

If  you have a stencil, choose Stencil>Free from the Effect menu to free
it.

If you have an animation, delete some frames.

If you have an open Media library close it.

If you have a texture in memory free it.

Reduce your page size if it is larger than the screen.

Work  with  the  minimum  number  of colours that you can to achieve the
effect that you want.  Choose the screen format you are working with and
reduce the number of colours.

If  you receive the System Message "Not enough memory for requested page
size"  when  you try to change the Deluxe Paint V screen format from one
to  another you may be experiencing memory fragmentation.  To solve this
problem, either reset screen format from the Screen Format option in the
Picture  menu,  or  quit the program and restart Deluxe Paint V fresh in
the mode you wanted.


Appendix B: Keyboard Command Summary
------------------------------------

Brush Commands

F1     Matte
F2     Colour
F3     Replc
F4     Smear
F5     Shade
F6     Blend
F7     Cycle
F8     Smooth
-      Brush smaller
_      Custom brush smaller by 2 steps
=      Brush larger
+      Custom brush larger by 2 steps
Alt-n  Copies custom brush to spare brush
Alt-b  Swaps current and spare custom brush
Alt-m  Morph from spare to current custom brush
Z      Stretch/shrink (size)
h      Halve
H      Double
X      Double horizontal
Y      Double vertical
x      Flip horizontal
y      Flip vertical
z      90 Degree rotate
o      Edge>Outline
O      Edge>Trim
Alt-x  Rotate brush handle through 4 corners and centre
Alt-z  Place brush handle

Right Amiga-b  Load brush
Right Amiga-c  Copy brush from Clipboard
Right Amiga-v  Paste brush from Clipboard
Alt-f          Toggle brush frame only on/off

Toolbox Commands

A      Cycle Airbrush Type
Alt-A  Airbrush Settings requester
b      Brush Selector
B      Restore last custom brush/AnimBrush
c      Unfilled Circle
C      Filled Circle
i-c    Filled and Outlined Circle
d      Continuous Freehand
D      Filled Freehand
i-d    Filled and Outlined Freehand Shape
e      Unfilled Ellipse
E      Filled Ellipse
i-e    Filled and Outlined Ellipse
f      Fill
F      Fill requester
g      Grid on/ off
G      Grid on/off using current brush handle position as a grid point
K      CLR (clear screen)
m      Magnify on/off
p      Palette Mixer requester
P      Arrange Palette requester
q      Curve
r      Unfilled Rectangle
R      Filled Rectangle
i-r    Filled and Outlined Rectangle
s      Dotted freehand
t      Text
T      Choose Font requester
u      Undo
v      Straight Line
V      Line Spacing requester
w      Polygon
W      Filled Polygon
>      Increase magnification
<      Decrease magnification
,      Dropper colour cursor
.      One pixel brush
[,]    Change foreground colour
{,}    Change background colour
/      Toggle Symmetry on/off

Special Keys

?                 Display About/memory info box
Delete            Cursor arrow on/off
F9                Menu Bar on/off
F10               Toolbox and Menu Bar on/off
Shift F10         Hide all panels (Toolbox, menu, etc,)
Alt-F10           Show panels
Cursor keys       Scroll Page (except in text mode)
Ctrl-Cursor Keys  Adjust Screen positioning (Adjusts the position of
                  Mixer, Arrange Palette, and Range panels when the
                  cursor is over the panel)
n                 Centres area under the cursor
Shift             Constrain cursor
Ctrl              Leave traces with line or shape tools
Ctrl-a            Displays available Memory in the menu bar
Tab               Colour Cycle on/off
S                 Show page
CtrL-S            Toggle Paint Stencil mode
~ (Tilde)         Make Stencil
' (Grave)         Stencil on/off
a                 Again key - repeats last menu command
| (Shift \)       Coords on/off
Spacebar          Cancel operation in progress
Esc               Stop operation in progress
j                 Spare page
Ctrl-j            Copy to Spare
Alt-/             Step through Antialias settings
Help              Selects Freehand tool and single pixel brush
Ctrl-P            Pressure settings requester

Right Amiga-t          Texture on/off (if no texture loaded, activates Load
                       Texture requester)
Right Amiga-i          Invert texture
Right Amiga-m          Start/Stop macro record
Right Amiga-1-0        User macro keys
Right Amiga-p          Print
Right Amiga-q          Quit
Right Amiga- - (minus) Delete current page
Right Amiga-l          Load Picture requester
Right Amiga-s          Save Picture requester
Right Amiga-d          Delete Picture requester

Colour Controls

Ctrl-r           Range requester
Alt-r            Reverse direction of range
Alt-] and Alt-[  Step forward/backward through available ranges
Alt-t            Translucency On/Off
Ctrl-t           Translucency Setting requester
Alt-p            Process On/Off (Tint is default)
p                Colour Mixer requester
P                Arrange Palette requester

Perspective Commands

Enter                Enter/Exit perspective mode
Keypad 7 and 8       Rotate about the X axis
Shift Keypad 7 and 8 Rotate X axis by Angle Step
Keypad 9             Reset X axis to 0 degrees
Keypad 4 and 5       Rotate about the Y axis
Shift Keypad 4 and 5 Rotate Y axis by Angle Step
Keypad 6             Reset Y axis to 0 degrees
Keypad 1 and 2       Rotate about the Z axis
Shift Keypad 1 and 2 Rotate Z axis by Angle Step
Keypad 3             Reset Z axis to 0 degrees
Keypad 0             Reset all axes to 0 degrees
Shift Keypad 0       Reset all axes, positions, and settings
Shift Keypad 9       Fix X axis
Shift Keypad 6       Fix Y axis
Shift Keypad 3       Fix Z axis
Keypad "-" (Minus)   Fill the screen with the current brush at the
                     current perspective
Keypad "." (Period)  Reset Centre
; and , keys:        Moves the brush along its fixed axis in a direc
                     tion perpendicular to its plane
Shift ; and , keys   Same as ; and , keys but with greater incre
                     ment
< and >              Modify observer distance from screen
Ctrl                 Temporarily fixes the Y axis so you can move
                     your brush on the x and z coordinates
\                    Toggle Angle/Position display

Move and Camera Move Adjust Commands

Enter                Enter/Exit Adjust mode
Keypad 7 and 8       (Move only) Rotate about the X axis
Shift Keypad 7 and 8 (Move only) Rotate X axis by Angle Step
Keypad 9             (Move only) Reset X axis to 0 degrees.
Keypad 4 and 5       (Move only) Rotate about the Y axis
Shift Keypad 4 and 5 (Move only) Rotate Y axis by Angle Step
Kevpad 6             (Move only) Reset Y axis to 0 degrees.
Keypad 1 and 2       (Move only) Rotate about the Z axis
Shift Keypad 1 and 2 (Move only) Rotate Z axis by Angle Step
Keypad 3             (Move only) Reset Z axis to 0 degrees
Keypad 0             Reset all axes to 0 degrees
Shift Keypad 0       Reset all axes, positions, and settings
Shift Keypad 9       (Move only) Fix X axis
Shift Keypad 6       (Move only) Fix Y axis
Shift Keypad 3       (Move only) Fix Z axis
Keypad "." (Period)  Reset Centre
; and , keys:        Moves the brush along its fixed axis in a direc
                     tion perpendicular to its plane
Shift ; and ' keys   Same as ; and ' keys but with greater incre
                     ment
< and >              Modify observer distance from screen
Ctrl                 Temporarily fixes the Y axis so you can move
                     your brush on the x and z coordinates

Animation Keys

1              Step to Previous Frame
2              Step to Next Frame
3              Display the Go To Frame requester to jump
               directly to a specific frame
4              Play Animation continuously until Spacebar
               or mouse button is pressed
5              Play animation once
6              Play animation in ping pong mode
7              Step to previous AnimBrush cel
8              Step to next AnimBrush cel
Shift-1        Go to first frame
Shift-2        Go to last frame
Shift-3        Go to last frame you did a "go to" to
Shift-4        Play animation continuously in reverse direc
               tion
Shift-5        Play animation sequence once in reverse direc
               tion
Shift-7        Go to first AnimBrush cel
Shift-8        Go to last AnimBrush cel
Spacebar       Stop the currently playing animation sequence
r              Reverses animation sequence while playing
Left Arrow     Slows down animation while playing
Right Arrow    Speeds up animation while playing
Alt            Held down while painting, turns on
               Animpainting mode
M              Move requester
N              Camera requester
Right Amiga-o  Load Anim
Right Amiga-a  Save Anim
Ctrl-f         Copy frames
Right Amiga-r  Set frame rate

Animation Control Panel

Alt-a          Anim Control Panel on/off
l              LightTable on/off
Alt-l          LightTable Dim on/ off
Ctrl-1         Layer 1
Ctrl-2         Layer 2
Ctrl-3         Layer 3
Ctrl-4         Layer 4
Alt-=          Adds one frame
Right Amiga-   Delete current frame
Ctrl-l         LightTable settings requester

Holding  down the Ctrl key while clicking on the following control panel
icons will bring up the associated requesters:

Add Frame        (+)
Delete Frame     (-)
Goto Frame       (->.)
LightTable       (light bulb)


Appendix C: The Player Utility
------------------------------

The  Deluxe  Player  utility  on  the  program  disk  lets  you play the
animations  you  have  created  with  Deluxe  Paint V.  You can boot the
utility  from the Workbench or use CLI arguments to start Deluxe Player.
This version of Deluxe Player will display any ILBM or op5/op8 Anim from
hard disk or memory.  It supports AGA multiple palettes, colour cycling,
pictures, AnimBrushes, ARexx and several new options.

From the Workbench, open the Program disk and double click on the Deluxe
Player  icon.    This loads the program in the default screen format (lo
res, 320 x 200, with 32 colours) and displays an Open File requester.

From the Open File requester specify which drive you want to make active
and  then  load  a  picture  or anim from the directory of the drive you
choose.

To play choose a play mode from the Play menu.

The  Deluxe  Player Menu Bar does not display automatically.  To see the
utili  ty's  menu, move the pointer to the upper left part of the screen
and press the right mouse button.  Project, Play and Prefs appear in the
Menu Bar.

Menus
The Deluxe Player menus are described below.

Project Menu
The Project menu lets you load and work with files.

Open
Keyboard Equivalent: Right Amiga-O

The Open command brings up the Open File requester.  Specify which drive
you  want  to  make  active  and  then  load  a picture or anim from the
directory of the drive you choose.  Multiple file loads are allowed.

Next
Keyboard Equivalent: Right Amiga-N

The  Next  command displays the next loaded anim when multiple anims are
loaded.

Last
Keyboard Equivalent: Right Amiga-L

The  Last  command displays the previous loaded anim when multiple anims
are loaded.

Play
Keyboard Equivalent: Right Amiga-P

The Play command loop plays the anim forward. See Loop Forward below

Info
Keyboard Equivalent: Right Amiga-I

Info displays information about the current frame displayed

About
Keyboard Equivalent: Right Amiga-?

About displays the program version and date

Quit
Keyboard Equivalent: Right Amiga-Q

To  exit  Deluxe  Player and retun to the Workbench, choose Quit.  For a
quick exit, click the mouse in the upper left corner or press Ctrl-C

Play Menu

The  Play  menu  contains various play commands.  Deluxe Player uses the
same keyboard commands as Deluxe Paint V to play animations

Previous Frame
Keyboard Equivalent: 1

Moves the display back one frame.

Next Frame
Keyboard Equivalent: 2

Moves the display ahead one frame

Loop Forward
Keyboard Equivalent: 4

Plays the anim continuously.  This is the normal playback mode.  You can
stop  the  animation  by  pressing  the space bar.  (You can reverse the
direction  of a playback by pressing the r key on the keyboard while the
animation is playing)

Once Forward
Keyboard Equivalent: 5

Plays the animation sequence once through from Frame 1 to the last frame.

Ping Pong
Keyboard Equivalent: 6

Plays the sequence forward then backward

First Frame
Keyboard Equivalent: !

Sets the animation to frame 1.

Last Frame
Keyboard Equivalent: @

Sets the animation to the last frame.

Loop Backwards
Keyboard Equivalent: $

Plays the anim continuously in reverse

Once Backward
Keyboard Equivalent: %

Plays  the  animation sequence once through from the last frame to frame
1.

Deluxe  Player  uses the same keyboard commands as Deluxe Paint V to con
trol to view your animation.

KEY                      EFFECT
Tab                      Turns colour cycling on/off
Left Arrow               Slows down play rate
Right Arrow              Speeds up play rate
r                        Reverses play direction
Esc or Space bar         Stops play

Prefs Menu
The  Prefs  menu  contains  options to customise the operation of Deluxe
Player

Play Anim

From Memory             Plays the animation from memory
From Hard Disk          Plays the animation from the

The size of the animation is only limited by the amount of free space on
the hard disk.

Play Style
Style of play when playing from memory.

Forward & Backward     The standard animation play model
Forward (Fast!)        Allows faster play by loading the file for forward
                       play only.

Memory Model

Large                  The standard memory setting
Small                  Sets memory usage to minimum settings. Use
                       this setting if your machine has limited memory

Show Speedometer
Keyboard Equivalent: s

Displays  a meter that indicates the frame rate of the animation.  Shift
s changes display to indicate an average frame rate.

Show Loading
Keyboard Equivalent: Right Amiga-B

Displays frames as they are loaded

Set Rate
Keyboard Equivalent Right Amiga-R

Opens  a  requester that lets you set speed in frames per second to play
the  current  animation.    The  default  setting  uses  the setting the
animation  was  saved with.  Vary by frame plays the animation using its
variable rate per frame info.

Using Deluxe Player from CLI or the Shell

Deluxe  Player  can  be run from the CLI or Shell, open the CLI or Shell
from  the  Woekbench.    On  the command line type cd dpaintv: and press
Return.

This  will  change the current directory to the drawer or disk where the
Deluxe Player utility is located.  At the next prompt, type dplayer (add
a  space)  and the complete path and filename of the picture or anim you
want  to  load.  For example, if you wanted to load the animation called
"walk.anim"  from  Deluxe Paint's Anim drawer, you would type the follow
ing:

dplayer File dpaintv:gallery/walk.anim <enter>

NOTE
For clarity, commands in these examples are capitalized, but that is not
nec essary.  Deluxe Player commands are not case sensitive.

If  you want to show the anim for a certain number of seconds, press the
space bar and type that number after the filename.  For example, to play
the anim "walk" for five seconds type:

dplayer File dpaintv:gallery/walk.anim Time 5
<enter>

If you would like to indicate that the number is a loop count instead of
time  in  seconds,  press the space bar and type the number of loops you
want to run.  Press the space bar again and type loops.  For example, to
play five loops of "Walk" type:

dplayer File dpaintv:anim/walk.anim Loop 5
<enter>

You're now ready to issue player commands for your animation (or you can
press Return right now and your animation will play and take you back to
the CLI when it's finished).

You can also issue commands to Deluxe Player from a script file.  Script
files  are  ASCII  text  files  from  which commands are read.  They are
created  with a text editor such as ED or EMACS included with Workbench.


To  instruct  the  Deluxe  Player utility to read commands from a script
file (we'll call the filename TEST) type:

dplayer Script File TEST

A  sample  script  where  files are stored in a drawer called work would
look like this:

File DH1:work/File1.anim Playdisk
File DH1:work/File2.anim Loop 2
File DH1:work/pictureFile Time 5

Play Commands from CLI or Shell

Here are some sample commands and their meanings.

Command                             Meaning
dplayer                             Load Deluxe Player
dplayer File (path & filename)      Open and/or play file
dplayer (path & filename) Time 10   Open and/or play file for 10 seconds
                                    and exit back to CLI or Shell
dplayer (path & filename) Loop 20   Open and play file for 20 Loops and
                                    exit back to CLI or Shell
dplayer Script TEST                 Read commands from script file
                                    "test"

The  following  command switches will preset the corresponding option in
Deluxe Player.  Some of these options are only available via the command
line.

pd=PlayDisk/S, pf=PlayFast/S, sm=SmallMem/S, ac=AutoCycle/S,s,
sc=Script/S, lp=Loop/N, sec=Time/N, dl=Delay/N, sl=Show
v=VariSpeed/S, nr=NoRequest/S, i=Inherit/S

Deluxe Player Commands

Command                        Meaning

PlayDisk                       Play from disk only
PlayFast                       Load and play forward only
SmallMem                       Load time is slower but may use less
                               memory
AutoCycle                      Cycle anim after loading
Script                         Load script, w/lines of Player argu
                               ments
Loop                           # of times to play anim
Time                           # of seconds to play anim
Delay                          # of seconds to delay after loading
ShowLoad                       Display Anim frames while loading
VariSpeed                      Play using variable rate per frame
                               info
NoRequest                      Suppress initial load requesters
Inherit                        Set defaults to Tooltype icon settings

If  you  hit  the space bar or click while a picture or anim is running,
the  pro  gram will move to the next command, even if the specified play
time has not elapsed

File names with blanks must be enclosed in quotation (" ") marks.

A command line starting with a semicolon (:) is ignored

ARexx Support

For general information about ARexx, refer to Appendix F

Notice:  ARexx  is  an advanced programming language than can be used to
write  macro scripts.  Scripting is only recommended for expert computer
users.    The  ARexx command set and examples listed in this section are
spe  cific only to Deluxe Player operations, and are intended for use by
those  experienced  in  ARexx scripting.  Electronic Arts does not offer
technical  customer  support  for  ARexx  scripting  issues.    For more
information  please  consult  the  ARexx  portion   of   your   system's
documentation (Amiga DOS 2.04 or greater).

The ARexx port is named 'Deluxe Player 1'.

These  are  the ARexx commands used by Deluxe Player Modifiers in braces
are  required  (PROJECT  OPEN  <filename>).  Arguments separated by bars
("|")  are  individual choices.  Only one item from the list can be used
at  a  time  and  only one command per line is allowed.  State commands,
like cycle, that are sent by themselves and return a Return Code of 0 or
1 to indicate their state.

Commands

CYCLE ON|OFF
GETFRAME    Returns current frame #
PLAY BACKWARD [ONCE]
PLAY FIRST | LAST | NEXT | PREVIOUS
PLAY FORWARD [ONCE] [PINGPONG]
PROJECT LOAD | PLAY | ABOUT | INFO | QUIT
PROJECT OPEN <filename>
SETPREF FRAMERATE [FPS]
SETPREF MEMORY <LARGE | SMALL>
SETPREF PLAYANIM <RAM | DISK]
SETPREF PLAYSTYLE <LOOP | FAST>
SETPREF SHOWLOAD <OFF | ON>
SETPREF SPEEDOMETER <ON | OFF>
LOCKGUI     Lock out the menu from the user
UNLOCKGUI   Enable menus
SCREENTOFRONT
SCREENTOBACK


Appendix D: Amiga display Modes
-------------------------------

Deluxe  Paint V supports all of the built-in Amiga graphic display modes
low  resolution, high resolution, extra-Halfbrite, and hold and modify.
You  don't need to know much about the different display modes to create
great  art  with  Deluxe  Paint  V.    But some understanding of how the
display  modes  work,  and  in  particular how they affect the number of
colours available in the palette, can help you work more effectively.

This  appendix  explains  how  a  pixel  derives  its colour and how the
display  mode  and  the  number  of  bit  planes determine the number of
colours  avail  able  in  the  palette.    We've  tried  to avoid overly
technical  explanations,  but  the material is still very technical.  If
you  don't  understand  everything  you read here, don't be discouraged,
just remember that you don't really need to know this.

What Is a Bit Plane

A  bit plane can be thought of as a flat grid of dots - a plane of dots,
where each dot represents a bit.  So when we say "bit" think dot.

If  you look ahead to Figure D-1, you'll see that we drew the bit planes
as  flat  surfaces.   The best way to think of this surface is as a flat
grid  behind  your  computer screen.  (This isn't actually how it works,
but  it may help you visualise how the colours are assigned to pixels).
The grid is the same dimensions as your screen resolution.  For example,
if  your  screen is 320 pix els wide and 200 pixels high, each bit plane
is also 320 x 200 bits.

Bit Planes and Available Colours

Now  imagine  that each dot is either filled in or it's not.  If the dot
is  filled in, it has a value of 1 and is said to be "on".  If it is not
filled  in,  the  dot  has a value of 0 and is said to be "off".  In the
simplest case of a display mode with only one bit plane, the picture can
have  only  two colours.  A pixel is one colour if its corresponding bit
is on or a different colour if the bit is off

The  bit planes themselves don't determine the colour of the pixel, they
sim  ply  determine  which  colour  register  the pixel looks to for its
colour.  With a single bit plane, the pixel points to either Colour 0 or
Colour  1.  If you add another bit plane behind the first, the number of
possible  colour  registers  doubles to four.  Each additional bit plane
doubles  the  number of colours again.  The colour register contains the
numbers for the amount of red, green, and blue in the colour.

Low rsolution and High Resolution Display Modes

Figure  D-1  illustrates  how  the  bit  planes  determine  which colour
register  a  pixel  points  to  in  Low Resolution display with five bit
planes.    Take  a  look at this figure for a moment.  Notice that we've
numbered  the  bit  planes  0 through 4.  Notice also that the number of
each  bit  plane corresponds to the power of two by which each bit plane
value is multiplied.  For example, the dot in bit plane 3 has a value of
1,  and  because  it  is in bit plane 3, the 1 is multiplied by 2 to the
power  of  3 which equals 8 (2 x 2 x 2).  The numbers from the five bits
are  then added together to obtain the number of the colour register the
pixel points to.

Low and High Resolutions work exactly alike, except that High resolution
does  not  support  as  many  bit  planes,  and therefore provides fewer
colours.    Figure  D-2  lists  the graphics modes and the number of bit
planes and colours each supports.  Notice that Hold And Modify mode is a
departure  from  the  notion  that each additional bit plane doubles the
number  of  colours  available.   Hold and Modify is a special case that
we'll explain in a moment.

Extra-Halfbrite Display Mode

Extra Halfbrite uses a trick to increase the number of colours available
on the screen.  The Amiga supports only 32 colour registers directly but
Extra  Halfbrite  uses  a  sixth  bit plane to indicate an additional 32
registers  that don't really exist.  The first 32 registers are standard
colour registers; the sec ond 32 are Halfbrite equivalents.  Pixels that
use  Halfbrite colours point to one of the standard colour registers and
indicate  that  the  colour  should  be  displayed  at  half  its normal
intensity.   This means that the second 32 pixels are not independent of
the  first  32;  you  can  change the colour values only in the first 32
registers,  and  the  change is automatically reflected in the Halfbrite
equivalent.    Figure  D-3 shows how Extra Halfbrite uses the bit planes
and colour registers.

Not  all  Amiga 1000 computers support Extra-Halfbrite.  The easiest way
to  find  out whether or not your computer supports this display mode is
to try it.  Open an Extra-Halfbrite screen and look at the Palette (make
sure  the  pointer  is  not in the Menu Bar or Toolbox).  If the last 32
colours  are  the  same  as  the first 32, your computer doesn't support
Extra-Halfbrite.

Hold and modify Display Mode

Hold  and Modify display mode uses only 16 colour registers, but manages
to  display  all  4,096  colours  on  the  screen  at the same time.  To
accomplish  this,  HAM  display  mode  uses the first four bit planes to
address  the 16 colour registers, and uses the fifth and sixth bit plane
to determine whether the register colour or a HAM colour should be used.

A HAM colour is formed by taking the RGB value of the preceding pixel on
the screen, and substituting a new value for one of the RGB compo nents.
The new value is the number derived from the first four bit planes.

Here's a quick example;

Assume  the  colour values of one pixel (a register colour) are R3, G15,
B11.    The  following pixel (a HAM colour) would have the colour values
R13,  G15, B11, if bit planes 0 through 3 pointed to register 13 and bit
planes  4  and  5  indicated  that  the register value should be used to
modify the red component of the preceding colour.  (Figure D-4 shows how
the six bit planes are used to select a colour in Hold and Modify mode).


Because  HAM  colours are based on colour values of the preceding pixel,
and  only one colour value can be changed at one time, it may take three
pixels  to  reach  the colour you really wanted.  In Figure D-5 it takes
three  pixels  to  change  black  (R0, G0, B0) to white (R15, G15, B15).
Note that this exam ple assumes there are no intermediate colours in the
normal  colour registers This gradual change from one colour to the next
is  sometimes  referred  to  as "ramping" the colour, and appears on the
screen  to  the  left  of  HAM pixels.  If you need fine details in your
picture,  you  will  want  to  use  a  colour from the colour registers,
because those colours do not require ramping.

In  Deluxe  Paint  V  if  you  hold  a brush over an area made up of HAM
pixels,  you  may see an effect called "fringing".  The fringing appears
as  streaks  run  ning  to  the  right from the edge of the brush.  This
effect  is  only  temporary.  When you paint the brush onto the picture,
Deluxe  Paint  corrects  the  fring  ing,  but you may see the "ramping"
effect  where Deluxe Paint recreates the HAM colour to the right of your
brush.


Appendix E: The 24-Bit Backing Store

This  appendix  describes the operation of Deluxe Paint's 24-bit Backing
Store function.

Overview
When the 24-bit Backing Store choice is selected (from the screen format
requester), Deluxe Paint will keep track of the RGB data associated with
each  colour in your picture, animation, custom brush or animbrush, inde
pendent  of  the screen mode you've selected.  This means you can select
any  screen  mode  and any screen depth/number of colours that best fits
your  needs and your available memory.  The program will approximate the
RGB  inforrmation  on  screen  using the colours available to the screen
mode  select  ed the more colours available to the screen mode, the more
accurate the RGB approximation will be.

To  determine  the  number  of colours available for a particular screen
mode,  bring  up the screen format requester click on the desired screen
mode and (screen) palette size, then look at the "Max Colours" attribute
in the "Display Information" area of the screen format requester.

The  Amiga  Hold  and Modify (HAM) screen modes are RGB based modes that
offer  the  widest  range of available colours on the Amiga display hard
ware to date.  In HAM screen modes, the program will convert from 24-bit
RGB to 6 or 8 bit HAM with a slight loss of the RGB accuracy.

In non-HAM screen modes, the program will convert each RGB colour to the
closest  primary  or  secondary  colour  in  the screen palette using an
ordered dither, or chequered-box pattern.

Palette Handling

When using the RGB Backing Store, it is important to distinguish between
the  screen  palette  and  the  user palette.  The screen palette is the
palette  the  program  will  use to approximate RGB data on screen.  The
user  palette  is  the  palette or "colour set" that you, the user, have
complete  control  over.   The user palette is basically a repository of
colours  that  you  will use while painting.  All of the commands listed
under  the  "Colour  Set"  or  "Palette"  submenus  in the "Colour" menu
directly apply to the user palette.

Since  user  palettes are easy to load and save, Deluxe Paint only keeps
track  of  one user palette.  This one user palette is in effect for the
main page.  All ani mation frames, and the spare page.  When you wish to
work/paint  with  a different set of colours, simply load the new set of
colours  into  your  user  palette  and  begin work.  Modifying the user
palette will not change the underlying RGB image in any way.

It  is  important  to remember that the colours displayed in the toolbox
area are only a screen approximation of the colours in the user palette.
To  get a more accurate representation of the user palette, bring up one
of  the colour panels: the mixer, the arrange palett panel, or the range
definition  panel.    The  colours  displayed on these colour panels are
probably  the  best approxi mation possible, on standard Amiga hardware,
to the colours you've defined in your colourset.

The Recompute Option

As you paint with colours in the user palette, the colours in the screen
palette  may  become  inappropriate to accurately represent the range of
colours in your image.  For example, if you select a 320x200 screen mode
with  32  colour  registers,  the  program  will set up a default screen
palette  with a variety of reds, blues, yellows, and grey.  If the image
you're painting contains mostly yellows and oranges, the default palette
may  not  contain enough of the colours you're using and too many of the
colours that you're not using.

When  you  select  "Recompute"  from the "Colour" menu, the program will
analyse  your  image, compute the best screen palette for your image and
the   current   screen   mode,   then   refresh   the   entire   display
re-approximating  your  RGB  data  using  the  new screen palette.  Once
again, it is important to remember that modifying/recomputing the screen
palette does not alter the underlying RGB image in any way.

Multiple Screen Palettes

Since  recomputing  screen  palettes  can  take a considerable amount of
time,  Deluxe  Paint  will keep track of multiple screen palettes.  When
you  create  a  spare  page,  the  program will keep track of the screen
colours  used  for  the spare independent of the screen colours used for
the  main  page  or  anima  tion  frames.  If you select the "Recompute"
option  from  the  "Colour"  menu while viewing the spare page, only the
screen palette for the spare will be recomputed.

When  creating  an RGB animation, the Set Frame palette option under the
Anim>Frame  submenu  allows  you  to  create  or attach different screen
palettes to selected animation frames.  By default, Deluxe Paint creates
one  screen  palette  for  an entire animation.  Whenever you select the
"Make  Palette"  option  in the Set Frame Palette requester Deluxe Paint
will  create  a new screen palette filled with the current set of screen
colours  and  attach  it  to  the  current animation frame.  If you then
select  Recompute  from  the  Colour  menu  while  viewing  the  current
animation  frame,  the  program will compute the best screen palette for
the  current frame then refresh the screen using the new screen palette.


Loading Pictures

When  you load any picture into Deluxe Paint while using the RGB Backing
Store,  the  program will convert the image into RGB data and, if you're
not  loading  the  picture  into  an   animation,   the   program   will
automatically com pute the best screen palette for your image.

When  loading  a  picture  into your current RGB animation, Deluxe Paint
will  convert  the picture to RGB and approximate the RGB data using the
screen palette associated with the current frame.  If you want to better
approximate the RGB data on a particular animation frame, make sure that
the  anima  tion frame has its own screen palette, then select Recompute
Colour menu.

Colour Fonts

This  is  a little tricky.  ColourFonts are non-HAM, non-RGB fonts using
up  to  32  colours.  When you use a ColourFont, with or without the RGB
Backing  Store, the program will ask you if you want to 'use this font's
palette?.  If you select "yes", the program will load the font's colours
into  the  first  32 entries of the user palette.  When you're not using
the  RGB Backing Store, loading the font's colours into the user palette
will change the screen palette; when you are using the RGB Backing Store
loading the font's colours will not change the screen palette.  When you
type using the selected ColourFont and an RGB Backing Store, the program
will use the first 32 colours in the user's palette to render the colour
font.   If you load a different palette or you say "no" to the 'use this
font's palette?' requester, the program will ignore the font palette and
use the palette you have defined instead.

For example;

1. Select the 320x200 32-colour screen mode with a 24-bit Backing Store

2. Set your font directory to the Karafonts directory.

3. Bring up the font requester and select "Chiselscript" 58.

4. Say "Yes" to use the Chiselscript palette.

5. Place the text cursor down somewhere and type something.

6.    Select Recompute from the Colour menu so you can see what the text
colours really look like.

7. Bring up the font requester and select "'KaraGRANITE" is.

KaraGRANITE requires that you have Caps Lock on.

8.   Say "No" so Deluxe Paint will not load the KaraGRANITE palette into
your colourset.

9.  Place the text cursor down somewhere and type something; now you are
typing  with the KaraGRANITE, font using the Chiselscript colours If you
select  Recompute  from  the Colour menu you shouldn't see too much of a
difference.

10. Bring up the font requester and select "KaraGRANITE" is again.

11. This time say "Yes" to use the KaraGRANITE palette.

12.   Type something else and select Recompute from the Colour menu; you
should see a significant difference.

Memory Management

The  24-RGB  Backing Store consumes a lot of memory.  For this reason we
do not recommend using the RGB Backing Store on a machine with less than
4 MB of available fast memory.

For  each colour on the page, the program will use approximately 5 bytes
of  memory.   If your page size 320x200, the program will allocate 320 *
200  * 4 bytes = 250K for the colour information on the main page alone.
The  pro gram will allocate an additional 320 * 200 * 4 bytes = 250K for
its  undo  area.  It is important to remember that your page size may be
different  than  your  screen size; if your page size is larger than the
screen, Deluxe Paint will be allocating RGB data for the larger area.

Deluxe  Paint  will  always try to allocate RGB data in fast or extended
memo  ry  instead  of chip memory whenever possible.  This allows Deluxe
Paint  to  conserve  precious chip memory for the screen and other Amiga
specific  needs  and  to take full advantage of the performance benefits
when  using  the processor to manipulate RGB colour information.  Deluxe
Paint  will  also  try  to allocate memory in large contiguous blocks to
reduce the amount of memory fragmentation whenever possible.  If you are
running low on con tiguous memory Deluxe Paint will try to break the RGB
data up into strips.

If  you're running on a system with lots of available chip memory Deluxe
Paint  will try to allocate a "screen representation" for its undo area.
This screen representation will increase overall performance for the RGB
Backing  Store by allowing Deluxe Paint to simply copy the data from the
"screen  representation"  to  the main page whenever it needs to refresh
the  screen  or perform an UNDO.  If the screen representation could not
be  allo cated, Deluxe Paint will recompute the screen data from the RGB
data whenever it is needed.

When  you create a spare page, Deluxe Paint will allocate and keep track
of only the RGB data for the spare page.  If necessary Deluxe Paint will
reallo cate the undo area.  Since the program only keeps one copy of its
undo  area,  the  screen representation of the undo area will have to be
recomputed each time you swap between the main and spare pages.

When  you  create an animation, Deluxe Paint keeps track of both the RGB
data  and  the screen data for each animation frame.  This allows Deluxe
Paint to play the screen representation of your animation without having
to  do  any  colour  computations.    When  you create a custom brush or
animbrush,  Deluxe  Paint only keeps track of the RGB data.  The program
does  not  keep  track  of  the  screen  data for the brush or animbrush
because  the  actual screen data depends on where the brush or animbrush
is displayed/painted

Printing

Deluxe  Paint  makes  extensive  use  of  Commodore's  printer  device.
Unfortunately  this  means  that  Deluxe  Paint  currently has no way to
output  24 bit data directly to the printer.  Instead, Deluxe Paint will
print  the  screen  reptesentation  of  your  picture or anim.  For best
results, try printing your RGB image when using a HAM screen mode.

Performance Troubleshooting

If  you're having performance problems when using the RGB Backing Store,
please watch for the following:

Are you running very low on memory?  Perhaps there was not enough memory
to  allocate the closest Deluxe Paint colour tables, so dithering to the
screen might be very slow.

Are  you running low chip memory?  If so, Deluxe Paint may not have been
able  to  allocate  a  screen  representation for the undo area and this
means  that  every  time  you  scroll your page or toggle the toolbox or
title  bar  or  bring up a requester Deluxe Paint will have to recompute
the screen representation of your image, dithering if necessary.

Is your memory very fragmented?  If so, Deluxe Paint may have split your
image  up  into  many  strips.    Adding  more  memory   or reducing the
fragmentation (after a reboot) may help.


Appendix F: ARexx Reference
---------------------------

What is ARexx?

ARexx  is  a  programming language designed to allow you to flexibly cus
tomise  your  working  environment.  ARexx acts as a central hub through
which  applications  may  send  data  and  commands to each other.  This
allows software created by different companies to interact, and in turn,
allows  the  user  to  create   custom   applications   by   integrating
off-the-shelf  software  prod  ucts.    For  example,  with  ARexx it is
possible  to  bring  in  a  file  to  Deluxe Paint, perform an automated
operation, and return the modified file to its original application with
the execution of an ARexx script.

ARexx is useful for writing small batch-style programs (called macros or
scripts)  that  allow  the automation of repetitive tasks.  Deluxe Paint
allows  beginning  users to create macros by recording the menu choices,
mouse  clicks,  and  toolbox  choices they make, and allows them to save
those  record  ed  movements  and  menu  choices as macros (simple ARexx
scripts that can be edited by knowledgeable ARexx programmers).  You can
automate  a  process like drawing your signature so that you can save it
out as a macro and use it automatically with all of your images.

Who is ARexx for?

We've  tried  to  make Deluxe Paint's implementation of ARexx useful for
everyone  -  Deluxe  Paint  permits  the   recording   of   mouse/screen
interactions,  menu choices, and toolbox choices, so simple Deluxe Paint
actions  can  be saved as macros.  Nonetheless, keep in mind that custom
ARexx  script  cre  ation  is  for  the  advanced  user  who  has become
well-acquainted  with  the Amiga and with the ARexx programming language
in  general.    A basic understanding of both the Workbench and AmigaDOS
will aid in under standing how ARexx works and how it can be put to use.


ARexx  is  used  to customise the manner in which Deluxe Paint interacts
with other applications and the Amiga's working environment.  You should
be thoroughly familiar with that environment before attempting to tailor
it  to suit your needs.  Using ARexx programs and scripts do not require
previous  Amiga  experience,  but  a  working  knowledge  of the Amiga's
operation  will  permit  you  to  change the scripts to suit your needs.
There  are  many  books and references for ARexx scripting on the Amiga.
Please  consult  with your local user group, dealer, on line service, or
computer bookstore for more information.

Notice about Deluxe Paint ARexx Script Programming

ARexx  is  an  advanced  programming  language that can be used to write
macro  scripts.  Scripting is only recommended for expert computer users
The  ARexx  command set and examples listed in this section are specific
only  to  Deluxe  Paint  operations,  and  are intended for use by those
experi enced in ARexx scripting.

NOTE:
Electronic  Arts  does  not  offer  technical customer support for ARexx
scripting issues.  For more information please consult the ARexx portion
of your sys tem documentation (Amiga DOS 2.04 or greater).

Script Writing

You  cannot  write  actual  ARexx  scripts  from within Deluxe Paint.  A
primitive  command  console  called DPrx.rexx is included, and from DPRX
you  can  execute a script or a 1 line ARexx command like you would with
the Amiga DOS Shell.

To  write  scripts,  use  your favourite text editor to enter the actual
script  text  that  you are programming.  All scripts must be saved with
the  ".dprx"  file  name  extension  in the assigned Macrodir: drawer of
Deluxe  Paint.    Scripts  can  be  assigned  to the User menu using the
Load...   option from the Macro menu in Deluxe Paint.  See the Tooltypes
section  of  the  Reference  section  for more information on setting up
ARexx scripts to automatically load into Deluxe Paint.

DeluxePaint's port nanme is DPaint.#, where the # is the order of Deluxe
Paint's  running.    For  example, if you have two Deluxe Paints running
concurrently  the  first  one  launched will be called DPaint.1, and the
second  one  Dpaint.2,  and  so  forth.   Port names are how you address
information  from  one  application  to  the  other.   Think of it as an
application's mailbox.

The  following  is  a  simple  ARexx script (as viewed in a text editor)
which sets the number of frames of the current page to 30:

/* Sample DPaint ARexx Macro Script * /

Address "DPAINT.1"
LOCKGUI
SETFRAMES NUMBER 30
UNLOCKGUI

/* End Script */

How to Use this Section

This  ARexx  appendix is set up like the Referenee section of the manual
Toolbox  commands  are listed first, followed by menu item commands, per
spective commands, and user feedback commands.  For an alphabetical list
ing  of  the  commands available please check under the ARexx heading in
the  index.  For additional information on how a certain tool or feature
works in the software itself please consult the Reference section or the
tutorials.

ARexx conventions

This  section introduces general guidelines and hints on how ARexx works
within Deluxe Paint.

Here  are  some  of the common parameters used in this section.  We have
attempted to keep them in line with Amiga DOS and ARexx standards.

/s = switch keyword
/a = argument always required for command to work.
/k = keyword required for the command parameter to work
/n = number
/t = toggle keyword

X,Y  coordinates  in Deluxe Paint are always using a system starting 0,0
at the upper left corner of the screen.  If you want the programs visual
coordinates  to  match  your  script  coordinates,  make  sure  you have
OriginUL checked on in the Prefs menu.

Because  DPRX  is  a very basic command console, it converts all text to
uppercase.  Therefore, any saved filename or string issued from the DPRX
shell will be in uppercase.

ARexx  requires a double set of quotes when issuing strings that contain
spaces.  For example: SAVEBRUSH FILE "Ram:My Brush".

Variables and negative numbers must be enclosed in parenthesis.

Strings and load/save paths must be enclosed in quotation marks.

Whether  or  not  the  menu  bar is on affects drawing commands that are
dependent  on  coordinate  areas,  and also affects how you use the UNDO
command.

Animation  playback commands require that the GUI is unlocked before the
commands are issued.

Using more than one switch in your command can have varying results.  As
a  rule  of thumb, you can use these commands as you would use them from
within  the  program.   If you try to use a combination that the program
does not perform, the command will usually default to the last parameter
given.    Consult  the Reference section if you are unsure how a feature
works.

File  I/O  commands.    All Load/Save commands can take file patterns or
directories  in  place  of  the  FILE  parameter.    In  this  case, the
appropriate  requester  will  come  up  with  the  directory and pattern
pre-loaded (directories must end in "/").

Commands for Scripts or Command Line use.


No Operation performed

Format: NOP
Function: Performs no operation.

Command Help

Format: HELP Command/ A
Function: Returns the command structure for the keyword "COMMAND"
Example:  Typing "Help Brush" at the command line would result in: BRUSH
LEFT/N, TOP/N, WIDTH/N, HEIGHT/N, CUT/S, RESTORE/S.


Screen to Front or Back

Format: SCREENTOFRONT
Function: Brings the currently addressed Deluxe Paint Screen to the front.

Format: SCREENTOBACK
Function: Moves the currently addressed Deluxe Paint Screen to the back


Version Checking

Format: VERSION
Function: Returns the internal version number of the currently addressed
Deluxe Paint V.


ToolBox Items

NOTE:  It's  generally a good idea to turn off the menu bar toolbar, and
any other panel while drawing commands are issued, as the panels or bars
may interfere with the drawing and use of the UNDO command.


Built-in Brushes

Format: SETPEN PENNUM/N
Function:  Sets  the  current  brush  to  one  of the toolbox's built in
brushes.   Accepts val ues from 0 (single pixel brush) to 9 (5 dot pixel
brush).
Example:  The command "SETPEN 3" will set the current pen to the largest
circular brush in the toolbox.

Format: SETPENSIZE SIZE/N
Function: Sets the size of the current built in brush.  Different screen
modes will have different maximums.  In lower resolutious the maximum is
approximately  100  pixels  across,  in   higher   resolutions   it   is
approximately 200 pixels across.


Dotted Freehand Drawing

Format: DOTTED
Function: Sets the current draw tool to dotted freehand


Freehand and Filled Freehand Draw Tool

Format: FREEHAND FILL/S,OUTLINE/S
Function:  Sets  the  current  draw tool to Freehand draw.  The optional
switches  set  the tool to its special modes.  Uses the current brush to
draw the Line

FILL
Switches  Freehand  draw  to Filled Freehand Draw which uses the current
Fill Settings as its default fill.

OUTLINE
Switches  Freehand  draw  to  Filled  Freehand Draw and uses the current
brush  to  outline the drawn shape.  This switch is the same as the user
using  the 'i' key in the Deluxe Paint interface to outline their filled
shape  with  their  cur  rent brush.  See the Reference section for more
information.


Line Draw Tool

Format: LINE X1/N,Y1/N,X2/N,Y2/N
Function:  Sets  the  current  draw tool to Line draw.  Starting X,Y and
ending  X,Y  screen positions can be entered optionally to set the start
and  end  location  of  the  line  being drawn.  Deluxe Paint's internal
coordinate  system,  which  starts  0,0  at the upper left corner of the
screen, is used.
Example:  The  command  "Line  100  100 145 130" results in a line being
drawn  with  the current brush and pen colour sitting at screen position
100, 100 and ending at screen portion 145, 130.


Curve Draw Tool

Format: CURVE X1/N,Y1/N,X2/N,Y2/N,X3/N,Y3/N
Function:  Sets  the current draw tool to Curve Draw.  Starting, Offset,
and  End  X,Y  screen  positions can be specified optionally to draw the
curve.    Deluxe Paint's internal coordinate system, which starts 0,0 at
the upper left corner of the screen, is used.
Example:  The  command "Curve 100 100 150 50 200 100" results in a curve
that  starts at screen position 100, 100 has its apex at screen position
150, 50 and ends at screen position 200, 100.


Fill Tool

Format: FILL X/N, Y/N, TOBGCOLOR/S, ANIMFILL/S
Function:  Sets  the current draw tool to the Fill tool.  A starting X,Y
screen position can be specified optionally to start the flood fill at a
specific screen position.

TOBGCOLOR
This  switch  is  the  same  as the user using the 'i' key in the Deluxe
Paint inter face to fill a shape outward from the point specified to the
background colour.

ANIMFILL
Switches on the AnimFill mode, where the fill tool will fill every frame
in  the  current animation outward from the screen position specified or
where a mouse click has occurred.  Doesn't work with fill types that use
a directional line to define the gradient.

Example:  The  command  "FILL  60 75 TOBGCOLOR" results in the fill tool
doing  a  flood  fill  with the current settings and filling from screen
position  60,75 outward until the program detects the current background
colour.


Airbrush Tool

Format: AIRBRUSH
Function:  Sets  the  current  tool  to the Airbrush tool.  Invoking the
command  a  second time cycles the airbrush from Old Style splatter mode
to the new Standard mode.


Rectangle Tool

Format: RECT LEFT/N, TOP/N, WIDTH/N, HEIGHT/N, FILL/S, OUTLINE/S
Function:  Sets  the  current  tool  to  the unfilled Rectangle tool.  A
starting  left  and  top screen position offset, and width and height in
pixels  can be specified optionally.  Uses the current brush to draw the
unfilled Rectangle.

FILL
Switches  the  Rectangle  tool to a Filled Rectangle tool which uses the
current Fill Settings as its default fill.

OUTLINE
Switches  the  Rectangle tool to a Filled Rectangle and uses the current
brush  to  outline  the  Rectangle.  This switch is the same as the user
using the 'i' key in the Deluxe Paint interface to outline filled shapes
with the current brush.
Example:  The  command  "RECT  10  10  100 150 FILL" results in a Filled
Rectangle  that has it top left corner at screen position 10,10, a width
of 100 and a height of 150.


Circle Tool

Format: CIRCLE X/N, Y/N, RAD/N, FILL/S, OUTLINE/S
Function:  Sets  the  current  tool  to  the Unfilled Rectangle tool.  A
Starting  X,Y  screen  position  and radius can be specified optionally.
Uses the current brush to draw the unfilled Circle.

OUTLINE
Switches  the  Circle tool to a Filled Circle and uses the current brush
to out line the Circle.

RADIUS
This numeric parameter specifies one half the diameter of your circle in
pix els.


Ellipse Tool

Format: ELLIPSE X1/N, Y1/N, X2/N, Y2/N, FILL/S, OUTLINE/S
Function:  Sets the current tool to the unfilled Ellipse tool, Starting,
and  End  X,Y  screen  positions can be specified optionally to draw the
Ellipse.  Uses the current brush to draw the unfilled Ellipse.

FILL
Switches  the  Ellipse  tool  to  a  Filled  Ellipse tool which uses the
current Fill Settings as its default fill.

OUTLINE
Switches the Ellipse tool to a Filled Ellipse and uses the current brush
to  outline  the Ellipse.  This switch is the same as the user using the
'i'  key in the Deluxe Paint interface to outline filled shapes with the
current brush.


Polygon Shape Tool

Format: POLY X1/N, Y1/N, X2/N, Y2/N, X3/N, Y3/N, FILL/S, OUTLINE/S
Function: Sets the current tool in the unfilled Polygon tool.  Starting,
and  End  X,Y  screen  positions can be specified optionally to draw the
Polygon.  Uses the current brush to draw the unfilled polygon.

FILL
Switches  the  Polygon  tool  to  a  Filled  Polygon tool which uses the
current Fill Settings as its default fill.

OUTLINE
Switches the Polygon tool to a Filled Polygon and uses the current brush
to outline the Polygon.


Brush Pickup Tool

Format: BRUSH LEFT/N, TOP/N, WIDTH/N, HEIGHT/N, CUT/S, RESTORE/S
Function:  Sets  the current tool to the Brush tool.  It defaults to the
rectangular  brush pickup tool, but multiple invocations of this command
will  set it to the polygonal brush tool pickup and the magic brush tool
pickup  respectively.  Optionally you can restore the last custom brush,
set  starting x,y screen position, the width and height, and whether you
want to cut it off the page.

CUT
Switches Brush pickup mode from coping the brush data from the screen to
picking up or cutting out the brush data off the screen.  This switch is
the  equivalent of a user picking up a brush with the right mouse button
in the Deluxe Paint interface.

RESTORE
Issuing  this switch retrieves the most recent custom brush or AnimBrush
and  is  the  equivalent  of a user right clicking on the brush selector
tool in the Deluxe Paint interface.


Text Tool

Format: TEXT X/N, Y/N, STRING/F
Function:  Sets  the  current  tool  to  the  text tool.  Optionally the
command  will  accept  a string and the starting x,y screen position for
the  text  cursor.  The STRING keyword is a final argument and should be
followed  by  a  text  string.    The STRING keyword requires x,y screen
coordinates to place the text.
Example: TEXT 100 100 STRING Hello This is a Test
TEXT 200 100 "Hello This is a Test"


Grid Tool

Format: GRID ON/S, OFF/S, TOGGLE/S, ALIGN/S
Function:  Sets  the  Grid  tool  mode.  The command is implemented as a
toggle,  with  optional  keyword  switches  to turn the grid on, off, or
toggle  the  current state.  The ALIGN keyword will turn on the grid and
use  the  handle posi tion of the current brush as a centre point of the
grid.
Example:  Issuing  the  command  "GRID  ON ALIGN" would turn on the grid
toolbox  mode  and  align  the  grid  cross  points to the current brush
handle.


Symmetry Tool

Format: SYMMETRY ON/S, OFF/S, TOGGLE/S
Function: Sets the Symmetry tool mode.  This command is implemented as a
toggle,  with  optional  keyword  switches  to turn symmetry on, off, or
toggle the cur rent state.  Symmetry uses the current drawing tool.


Magnify

Format: MAGNIFY X/N, Y/N, ON/S, OFF/S, TOGGLE/S, SPEC/S
Function:  Sets  the  Magnify  tool  on.  Optionally this command can be
given  x,y  screen points, and keyword switches to turn Magnify on, off,
toggle  the  current  state,  or   go   into   interactive   place mode.
Magnification doesn't affect the cur rent tool.

SPEC
This  switch  puts the user into magnify place mode.  This switch is the
equiv alent of clicking the Magnify tool in the toolbox.


Zoom

Format: ZOOM IN/S, OUT/S
Function:  Sets  the  current zoom or magnification level of the Magnify
tool.    There  is no visual representation when the magnify tool is on,
but it does perform the operation.


Undo

Format: UNDO
Function:  Undoes  the last previous printing action as long as no other
mouse click or screen refresh has taken place


Clear Screen or Frames

Format: CLEAR ALL/S, CURRENT/S, RANGE/S, START/N, END/N, ASK/S
Function: Clears the current screen.  If there are animation frames, the
command  has  options to clear all frames, the current frame, a range of
frames, or just bring up the requester by asking for it.
Examples:
"CLEAR" clears current screen
"CLEAR ALL" clears all current animation frames to the background colour
"CLEAR RANGE 1 5" clears frames 1 through 5 to the background colour
"CLEAR ASK" displays the current, range, all requester if there are anima
tion frames.


ToolBox Related Functions

Fill Type Setting

Format:  SETFILL  SOLID/S,  PERSPECTIVE/S,  PATTERN/S,  RUBIS,  BRUSH/S,
WRAP/S,  HBRITE/S,  VERT/S,  HORIZ/S,  HLINE/S,  LINE/S, SHAPE/S, CIR/S,
CONT/S,  HI/S,  RANGE/N,  DITHER/N,   RANDOM/S,   PATDITHER/S, SMOOTH/S,
FROMBRUSH/S
Function:  Sets  the fill type requester settings for all filled drawing
tools.   The settings cannot be combined differently than allowed by the
program.

HBRITE
Only available in Halfbrite screen modes.

RUB
Only available when there is a spare page.

PATTERN
Requires  a  custom  brush and the FROMBRUSH switch be invoked the first
time pattern fill is used.

BRUSH
Uses the current custom brush for its fill.

WRAP
Uses the current custom brush for its fill.

RANGE
Accepts legal values from 1 to 8.

NOTE:  Deluxe  Paint  will  recognise  the first numeric value without a
keyword as the range number.

RANDOM
Switches dither type to random using Dither value..

DITHER
Accepts values from 0 to 100. Numbers refer to a percentage value.

PATDITHER
Does not accept DITHER values, already predefined.

SMOOTH
Does not accept DITHER values, already predefined.

For  more  information on the fill requester please consult the Refernce
sec tion of the this manual.

Examples:
"SETFILL  FROMBRUSH PATTERN" sets the fill requester to use pattern fill
using the current custom brush.

"SETFILL  SHAPE  RANGE  3  SMOOTH"  sets  the  fill requester to use the
HIghlight fill, Range number 3, and the Smooth dither option.

"SETFILL  CIR  2  75 RANDOM" sets the fill requester to use the CIRcular
fill using range number 2, and Random dither set to 75%


Spacing Setting

Format: SETSPACE NTOTAL/S, NTHDOT/S, AIRBRUSH/S, CONTINOUS/S, VALUE/N
Function:  Sets  the  spacing  requester  settings for the line tool and
unfilled shape tools The command by itself will invoke the requester.

NTOTAL
This  switch accepts a Value between 0 and 32767 and controls the number
of stamps a brush will make along a given line - useful for AnimPainting
The Default Value is 20.

NTHDOT
This  switch  accepts a Value between 0 and 32767 and defines the number
of pixels between your brush stamps.  Default Value is 8.

AIRBRUSH
This  switch  accepts a Value between 0 and 32767 and uses the Old Style
airbrush.   The value determines how many airbrush sprays are applied to
the line being drawn.  Default Value is 16.

CONTINUOUS
This  switch  ignores  a Value and is the default setting of the Spacing
requester.
Example:  "SPACING NTOTAL VALUE 15" sets the spacing requester to an NTO
TAL of 15

Airbrush Settings

Format: SETAIRBRUSH OLD/S, STANDARD/S, RADIUS/N, FLOW/N, SIZE/S
Function:  Sets  the  airbrush  requester settings for the Old Style and
Standard airbrush The command by itself will invoke the requester.

OLD
This  switch  cannot  be  used in conjunction with STANDARD, and ignores
values for FLOW

STANDARD
This switch cannot be used in conjunction with OLD.

RADIUS
This  keyword  followed  by  a numeric value defines the spray radius of
both  types  of  airbrushes.    The  radius  of the OLD airbrush is also
affected by the current pensize.

FLOW
This keyword followed by a numeric value defines how fast the "paint" is
sprayed on the screen.

SIZE
This  switch  puts  the user into interactive sizing mode which sets the
radius of the airbrush.

Grid Settings

Format: SETGRID X/N, Y/N, ADJUST/S
Function: Sets the grid settings requester.  The command by itself will,
invoke the requester.  Width in x and Height in y can also be specified.


ADJUST
This  switch  puts  the  user  in  interactive  grid  adjustment mode.
Example:  "SETGRID  20  20"  sets the grid height and width to 20 screen
pixels.


Symmetry Settings

Format:  SETSYMMETRYPOINT/S,  TILE/S,   CYCLIC/S,   MIRROR/S,   WIDTH/N,
HEIGHT/N
Function:  Sets  the symmetry settings requester.  The command by itself
will invoke the requester.

POINT
This  switch sets the symmetry tool to point symmetry mode.  This switch
cannot  be  used  in  conjunction  with  TILE, and ignores any WIDTH and
HEIGHT numeric values given in the same line.

CYCLIC
Switch used only in Point Symmetry.

MIRROR
Switch used only in Point Symmetry

ORDER
This  keyword  is  required  for changing the number of symmetry points.
The  keyword  should  be  followed by a legal value from 2 to 360.  Only
used for POINT Symmetry.

TILE
This  switch  sets  the  symmetry  tool to tile symmetry.  TILE requires
width and height values for the size of the tiling grid.

CENTREX
This  keyword  is  required for placing the screen x position from which
sym  metry  radiates  from.    The keyword should be followed by a legal
screen width value.  Only used for POINT Symmetry.

CENTREY
This  keyword  is  required for placing the screen y position from which
sym  metry  radiates  from.    The keyword should be followed by a legal
screen height value.  Only used for POINT Symmetry.

PLACE
This  switch puts the user in interactive mode that sets the central x,y
sym metry point.  Only used for POINT Symmetry.

WIDTH
This  keyword  is  used  to set the screen width of the Tile grid.  Only
used for TILE Symmetry.  You must also issue Height to use Width.

HEIGHT
This  keyword  is  used to set the screen height of the Tile grid.  Only
used  for  TILE  Symmetry.    You  must also issue Width to use Height.
Examples:

"SETSYMMETRY  TILE  50 50" will set the Symmetry tool to Tile mode and a
tile grid of 50 by 50 pixels

"SETSYMMETRY  POINT  CYCLIC  ORDER 12 CENTERX 160 CEN TERY 100" will set
the  Symmetry  tool  to  Point  Cyclic  mode.  12 symmetry points, and a
centre screen point of 160, 100.


Font Settings

Format:  SETFONT  NAME,SIZE/N,  PLAIN/S, BOLD/S, ITALIC/S, UNDER LINE/S,
USEPALETTE/S
Function:  Sets  the  current  font, font size, font style, or ColorFont
palette  for  the  pro  gram.    The  command  by itself will invoke the
requester.

NAME
This  keyword  allows  the  user to specify a font type from the current
font directory.

SIZE
This keyword requires a number to indicate the font size you wish to load.

USEPALETTE
This  switch  should  be  used  when  indicating that you wish to load a
ColorFont  such  as  KARA  ColorFont and you would like to automatically
load that font's palette.
Example:  "SETFONT Times 24 Bold Italic" would set the current font to a
typeface  of Times (if available on your system) a size of 24 point, and
bold and italic styles on


Misc. Colour Items

Set Foreground Colour

Format: SETFGCOLOR COLNUM/N
Function: This command sets the current foreground colour to that of the
colour  number  indicated.   Legal values for the colour number are 0 to
255.  This is the equivalent of a user picking a colour from the screen,
colour set, or tool palette with the left mouse button.


Set Background Colour

Format: SETBGCOLOR COLNUM/N
Function:  This command sets the background colour to that of the colour
number  indicated.    Legal  values  for the colour number are 0 to 255.
This  is  the  equivalent  of  a  user picking a colour from the screen,
colout set, or tool palette with the right mouse button.


Find Closest Colour

Format: CLOSESTCOLOR RED/N/A, GREEN/N/A, BLUE/N/A, REGISTER/S
Function: This command will search the current colour set and return the
index num ber of that colour that most closely matches the specified RGB
values  RED, GREEN, and BLUE numeric values are required arguments mand.
Legal values are from 0 to 255.

REGISTER
This  switch  will  return  the closest register (palette colour) colour
index  number  that  most  closely  matches  your  specified RGB values.
Please  see  the Tutorial and Reference sections for further information
on the difference between palette colours and colour set colours.

Example:  "CLOSESTCOLOR 255 0 0 REGISTER" searches for a colour with the
closest matching RGB value to red that is a register/palette colour.


Set RGB Values

Format: SETRGB INDEX/N/A, RED/N/A, GREEN/N/A, BLUE/N/A
Function:  This  command allows you to set the RGB values for a specific
colour  (INDEX)  INDEX, RED, GREEN, and BLUE numeric values are required
arguments for this command.  Legal values are from 0 to 255.

Example: SETRGB Index 4 0 255 255


Get RGB Values

Format: GETRGB INDEX/N/A, RED/S, GREEN/S, BLUE/S
Function:  This  command  returns  the  RGB values for a specific colour
(INDEX),  INDEX  is  a required argument for this command.  Legal values
are from 0 to 255.  Using the optional switches returns specific values.

Example: "GETRGB Index 4" might return the following values: RED 0 GREEN
255 BLUE 255


Get Light Table Layer

Format: GETLAYER NUMBER/N/A, STATUS/S, OFFSET/S, DIM/S
Function:  This command returns the LightTable setting; requester status
for a specific layer number.  A layer number must always be specified.

NUMBER
A value of 1 to 4 must be specified for this command to work.

STATUS
This switch returns a value of ON or OFF

OFFSET
This  switch  returns  the  relative  frame offset currently set for the
layer.

DIM
This  switch  returns a value between -255 and 255 to indicate the level
or brightness or darkness attributed to the given layer.

Examples: "GETLAYER 4" (Default return is "ON OFFSET 0 DIM 144")
"GETLAYER 1 DIM" (Default return is "48")


Get Light Table Status

Format: GETLIGHT STATUS/S, LOCKED/S
Function:  This command returns the Status of the LightTable feature (ON
or  OFF).   It also returns the status of the "Anim Lock" toggle (LOCKON
or  LOCK  OFF)  in  the  LightTable  Setting; requester.  Please see the
Reference  section  for  more  information  on  Anim  Lock  or any other
LightTable Features


Keyboard Items

Scrolling the Screen

Format: SCROLL X/N/A,Y/N/A, SCREEN/S
Function:  This command scrolls the screen a specific x,y distance using
the  Cartesian  coordinate  system  of the program where 0.  0 is in the
centre of the screen

SCREEN
This  switch  scrolls  the  entire Deluxe Paint window the specified x,y
distance  This  is  equivalent  to  holding  down the left Amiga key and
mousing down.


Help Key

Format: HELP
Function:  This  command is equivalent to the user pressing the Help key
while in the Deluxe Paint interface.

Reset Colour Palette

Format: RESET
Function:  This  command  makes the toolbox and menu bar visible in case
the palette in use made the toolbox and menu bar invisible.  This action
is not undoable.


F10 - Toolbar On/Off

Format: PANEL ON/S, OFF/S, TOGGLE/S
Function:  This  command  turns  on  and  off the toolbar panel from the
Deluxe  Paint  Interface.   If the menu bar is showing this command will
also  turn  on  and off the menu bar.  This command is the equivalent of
the user pressing the F10 key in the Deluxe Paint interface.

F9 - Menu On/Off

Format: TITLE ON/S, OFF/S, TOGGLE/S
Function:  This  command  turns  on and off the menu bar from the Deluxe
Paint  inter  face.  This command is the equivalent of the user pressing
the F9 key in the Deluxe Paint interface.

Del - Cursor On/Off

Format: CURSOR ON/S, OFF/S, TOGGLE/S
Function:  This  command  turns  on  and  off the screen cursor from the
Deluxe  Paint  interface.    This  command is the equivalent of the user
pressing the Del key in the Deluxe Paint interface.

Canvas Interaction

NOTE
These  commands  cannot  be  used to actually make menu or toolbar selec
tions  either  by  themselves or in conjunction with any other commands.
To  select  a specific toolbar item or menu item you must invoke it as a
separate ARexx command.


Mouse Movement

Format: MOVETO X/N/A, Y/N/A
Function: This command moves the screen cursor to a specified screen x,y
position.    Deluxe Paint's internal coordinate system, which starts 0,0
at the upper left corner of the screen, is used.


Menu Selection

Format: MBUTTONS SELECTDOWN/S, SELECTUP/S, MENUDOWN/S, MENUUP/S
Function:  This command controls the current state of the right and left
mouse  but  tons.    The command can be used to set the left (select) or
right  (menu)  mouse  buttons up or down, respectively.  This command is
the equivalent of a user depressing or releasing the mouse button in the
Deluxe  Paint inter face.  SelectDown and SelectUp are the equivalent of
the  left  mouse  button  MenuDown  and MenuUp are the equivalent of the
right mouse button.


Left Mouse Button

Format: LEFTMOUSE UP/S, DOWN/S, CLICK/S
Function:  This  command  controls  the  current state of the left mouse
button.   The command will allow setting the left mouse button up, down,
or just clicked.


Right Mouse Button

Format: RIGHTMOUSE UP/S, DOWN/S, CLICK/S
Function:  This  command  controls  the  current state of the left mouse
button.   The command will allow setting the left mouse button up, down,
or just clicked.

Locks

NOTE:  Issuing  any  animation  play  commands require that you issue an
unlockGUI  command first.  LockGUI and UnlockGUI commands must be issued
equally  in a script such that for every LockGUI command issued an equal
number of UnlockGUI commands must also be issued.

Format: LOCKGUI
Function:  This command locks out the Deluxe Paint interface from a user
or  other  process  and  is  highly  recommended when performing complex
operations and scripts.

Format: UNLOCKGUI
Function:  This  command  unlocks the Deluxe Paint interface and must be
used  for nor mal user interaction with the program if a LockGUI command
has been issued previously be a script or user.


Picture Menu


Load Picture

Format:   LOADPIC   FILE,COUNT/N,   CHGTOFMT/S,   KEEPFMT/S,   DITHER/S,
NODITHER/S
Function:  This  command  loads IFF ILBM files as pictures using the ASL
(Amiga  Standard  Libraries) Load requester.  Path and File name, screen
format  changing  or  maintaining,  and  dithering  options  can also be
specified optionally.

FILE
This  keyword  specifies  that a path and filename are to follow.  It is
recom mended that paths and filenames be enclosed in quotes.

COUNT
This  numeric parameter accepts the number of files you wish to load and
assemble  as an animation, beginning with the first file specified.  See
the Reference section for more information on this feature.

CHGTOFMT
This switch tells the program that you wish to change the current screen
format and palette depth to that of the image that is to be loaded.

KEEPFMT
This  switch  tells the program that you wish to keep the current screen
for mat and palette depth.  The image to be loaded will be automatically
con verted to the new screen format and palette depth.

DITHER
This  switch tells the program that you wish to dither the image that is
to  be loaded if it is an option.  Generally the program will only offer
the  dither/no  dither  options when the current screen mode is register
based and the image being loaded is a HAM or 24 bit image.

NODITHER
This  switch tells the program that you wish no dithering be done to the
image  that is to be loaded if it is an option.  Please see above on how
Deluxe Paint determines the dither/no dither options.


Save Picture

Format: SAVEPIC FILE.FORCE/S, START/N, END/N
Function: This command saves the current frame as pictures using the ASI
(Amiga  Standard  Libraries)  Save  requester.    Path and File name and
whether to over write an existing file can also be specified optionally.


FORCE
This  switch allows the automatic overwrite of an existing file that has
the same name as the one you are currently saving.  Normally the program
issues  a  warning  requester telling you that the file you are about to
save already exists and allows you to cancel from it.

START
This  numeric parameter specifies the starting frame number of the range
you wish to save as a series of pictures.  Use the End parameters to set
the ending frame.  The option automatically appends a three digit number
to the end of your filename

Print Image(s)

Format: PRINT
Function: This command brings up the Print requester.


Flip Image(s) Horizontal

Format: FLIPPICX ALL/S, CURRENT/S, RANGE/S, START/N, END/N
Function:  This  command  flips the current screen on its x axis.  If an
animation  is  cur  rently  in  memory this command brings up the Flip X
requester.  Optionally you can specify all, current, and range switches,
START  and END keywords require valid frame range values and the keyword
RANGE be used.

ALL
If  an animation is currently in memory this switch will flip all frames
on their X axis.

CURRENT
If  an  animation  is currently in memory this switch will only flip the
current frame on its X axis.

RANGE
If  an  animation is currently in memory this switch in conjunction with
the START and END keywords will only flip a specified range of frames.

START
This numeric keyword requires the switch RANGE and also requires a valid
frame number as a starting point for flipping a range of frames on the X
axis.

END
This numeric keyword requires the switch RANGE and also requires a valid
frame  number as an ending point for flipping a range of frames on the X
axis.


Flip Image(s) Vertical

Format: FLIPPICY ALL/S, CURRENT/S, RANGE/S, START/N, END/N
Function:  This  command  flips the current screen on its y axis.  If an
animation  is  cur  rently  in  memory this command brings up the Flip Y
requester.  Optionally you can specify all, current, and range switches,
START  and END keywords require valid frame range values and the keyword
RANGE be used


Spare Page

Format: SWAPPICTOSPARE
Function: This command swaps the current page with the spare page.  This
command  is  the  equivalent  of  the user selecting Spare>Swap from the
Picture menu or pressing j in the Deluxe Paint interface.

Format: COPYPICTOSPARE
Function:  This command copies the current page to the spare page.  This
command is the equivalent of the user selecting Spare>Copy to Spare from
the Picture menu or pressing Ctrl j in the Deluxe Paint interface.

Format: MERGEINFRONT
Function:  This  command  merges  the spare page in front of the current
page  using  the  current  background  colour  as the transparent or key
colour

Format: MERGEINBACK
Function:  This  command  merges  the spare page behind the current page
using the current backgrouund colour as the transparent or key colour

Format: DELETEPAGE
Function:  This  command  deletes  the current page and frees the memory
allocated  for that page.  Please note that this command does not delete
the  spare page, but deletes the current page (the one that is visible).
The user will be prompted to confirm this choice or cancel it.


Set Pagesize

Format:  SETPAGESIZE  SCREEN/S,  PAGE/S,  OVERSCAN/S, CUSTOM/S, WIDTH/N,
HEIGHT/N
Function:  This  command  brings  up  the   Set   Page   Size requester.
Optionally  this  com  mand  allows  for  the setting of a screen, page,
overscan, and custom page size.

SCREEN
This  switch  sets  the  page  size  to  dimensions equal to that of the
current screen.

PAGE
This switch sets the page size to dimensions that approximate the propor
tions of 8.5" X 11" paper.

OVERSCAN
This  switch  sets  the  page  size  to  dimensions  that equal the "MAX
Overscan" values as they are defined by the current screen format.

CUSTOM
This  switch  in conjunction with the WIDTH and HEIGHT keywords sets the
page  size to custom dimensions as they are specified with the WIDTH and
HEIGHT keywords.

WIDTH
This  keyword  requires  the CUSTOM switch and a valid number to specify
the  width  of the page in pixels.  The theoretical upper limit of width
is 32767.  You must have enough memory to allocate for a custom page.

HEIGHT
This  keyword  requires  the CUSTOM switch and a valid number to specify
the  height  of  the page in pixels.  The theoretical upper limit of the
height  is  32767.  You must have enough memory to allocate for a custom
page.


Show Page

Format: SHOWFULLPAGE
Function:  This  command  puts the program into the showpage mode.  This
command should be invoked only when the GUI is unlocked.


Screen Format

Format:  SETSCREENFORMAT MODEID, SCREENW/N, SCREENH/N, PAGEW/N, PAGEH/N,
COLORS/N, BACK24BIT/S, NOBACK/S, RETAIN/S, NORETAIN/S
Function:  This  command  allows  for  a  screen  format  change  to the
currently  addressed  Deluxe  Paint.  There are options for choosing the
screen height and width, palette depth, 24 bit backing store, etc.

MODEID
This keyword is always required for modifying the current mode or switch
ing to another mode.  Some of the more common ModeID numbers are list ed
below.  ModeID information can be found in the screen format requester's
display information window, or by changing that requester's set tings to
"display  names  by mode ID" from the Settings menu in the Screen Format
Requester.  Be sure to specify the screen and page dimensions when using
ModeID.

SCREENW
This keyword sets the screen width of the current resolution

SCREENH
This keyword sets the screen height of the current resolution

PAGEW
This  keyword  allows the setting of the page width.  Use this parameter
if you desire a different page size than the one currently in use.

PAGEH
This  keyword  allows for setting of page height.  Use this parameter if
you desire a different Page size than the one currently in use.

COLOURS
This  keyword  allows  for  the  setting  of the mode's palette and only
allows  the  input  of  legal  values  for  a  given mode.  For example,
Halfbrite  modes  only  allow  for  a palette of 32 colours, HAM only 16
colours, AA HAM 64 colours, etc.

BACK24BIT
This  switch  turns  on  the  24-bit RGB data backing store.  In backing
store  mode, users will be presented with a screen representation of the
actual 24- bit data.

NOBACK
This switch turns off the 24 bit RGB data backing store.

RETAIN
This switch will retain the current data on the main page and convert it
if  necessary to the mode being changed to.  You must have enough memory
for the conversion for this option to work.  Please be sure to save your
image before attempting this switch.

NORETAIN
This  switch  throws  away the current data on your main page when chang
ing to another mode.


ModelD Reference 11000 Series are the Lo-Res NTSC modes:
                 11000 - NTSC Lo-Res (320x200)
                 11004 - NTSC Lo-Res Laced (320x400)
                 11080 - NTSC Halfbrite
                 11084 - NTSC Halfbrite Laced
                 11800 - NTSC HAM
                 11804 - NTSC HAM Laced
                 19000 Series are the Hi-Res NTSC modes:
                 19000 - NTSC Hi-Res (640x200)
                 19004 - NTSC Hi-Res Laced (640x400)
                 19020 - NTSC ECS (1280x200)
                 19024 - NTSC ECS Laced (1280x400)
                 19080 - AA Halfbrite
                 19084 - AA Halfbrite Laced
                 190a0 - AA-Halfbrite (ECS, 1280 x 200)
                 190a4 - AA Halfbrite (ECS, 1280 x 400)
                 19800 - AA Ham
                 19804 - AA-Ham Laced
                 19820 - AA-HAM (ECS, 1280x200)
                 19824 - AA HAM (ECS, 1280x400)
                 21000 Series are the Lo-Res PAL modes:
                 21000 - PAL Lo-Res (320x256)
                 21004 - PAL Lo-Res Laced (320x512)
        21xxx - For other modes, use the same 3 digit suffix numbers as
                       the NTSC modes listed above.
                 29000 Series are the Hi-Res PAL modes:
                 29000 - PAL Hi-Res (640x256)
                 29004 - PAL Hi-Res Laced (640X512)
                 29020 - PAL ECS (128Ox256)
                 29024 - PAL ECS Laced (1280x512)

29xxx - For other modes, use the same 3 digit suffix numbers as the NTSC
modes listed above.

Example:  "SETSCREENFORMAT  11000  320  200  640  400"  will   change to
NTSC:LoRes  with screen size 320x200 and page size 640x400.  Colours are
set to the maximum allowable by default.

About ? Program Information

Format: ABOUT
Function:  This  command displays the "About Deluxe Paint" window.  This
window  contains  Deluxe  Paint  copyright,  memory,  image,  animation,
palette, regis tration, and ARexx port information.


Quit

Format: QUIT FORCE/S
Function: This command exits the currently addressed program.

FORCE
This switch bypasses the "Save, Don't Save, Cancel" requester and forces
the program to exit.


Brush Menu

Load Brush

Format: LOADBRUSH FILE,DITHER/S, NODITHER/S, PALETTE/S, NOPALETTE/S
Function:  This  command  loads  IFF ILBM files as brushes using the ASL
(Amiga Standard Libraries).  Load requester, Path and File name, keeping
the  screen format, and dithering or no dithering, can also be specified
optionally.

FILE
This  keyword  specifies  that a path and filename are to follow.  It is
recom mended that paths and filenames be enclosed in quotes.

DITHER
This  switch tells the program that you wish to dither the brush that is
to  be loaded if it is an option.  Generally the program will only offer
the  dither/no  dither  options when the current screen mode is register
based and the brush being loaded is a HAM or 24-bit brush.

NODITHER
This  switch tells the program that you wish no dithering be done to the
brush  that  is to be loaded if it is an option.  Please see above about
how Deluxe Paint determines the dither/no dither options.

PALETTE
This  switch  tells  the  program to automatically use the brush palette
when the specified brush file has been loaded.

NOPALETTE
This  switch  is  the  default  mode  of  the program, and turns off the
Palette switch.

Example: "LOADBRUSH "DPAINTV:BRUSH/BALL.BRUSH" DITHER NOPALETTE"


Save Brush

Format: SAVEBRUSH FILE,FORCE/S, MASK/S, NOMASK
Function:  This  command  saves  the  current custom brush using the ASL
(Amiga  Standard  Libraries), Save requester, Path, filename, whether to
overwrite an existing file, and whether to save with a translucency mask
can also be speci fied optionally.

FORCE
This  switch allows the automatic overwrite of an existing file that has
the  same  name  as  the  one  you  are currently saving.  Normally, the
program  issues  a  warning  requester telling you that the file you are
about to save already exists and allows you to cancel.


Copy Brush to Clipboard

Format: COPYBRUSH MASK/S, NOMASK/S
Function:  This  command  copies  the current custom brush to the system
clipboard The Mask, Nomask switches specify whether you want the brush's
translu cency mask copied as well or not.


Paste Brush from Clipboard

Format: PASTEBRUSH
Function:  This  command  pastes IFF-ILBM data from the system clipboard
into Deluxe Paint as a custom brush.


Restore Last Custom Brush

Format: RESTOREBRUSH
Function:  Restores  the last custom brush used and makes it the current
brush.


Copy Brush to Spare

Format: COPYBRUSHTOSPARE
Function:  This  command  copies  the  current custom brush to the spare
brush  memory  This command is useful for doing morphs from one brush to
another and for storing a spare brush in memory.


Swap Brush with Spare

Format: SWAPBRUSHTOSPARE
Function:  This  command  swaps  the current custom brush with the spare
custom brush.


AnimMorph to Spare

Format: MORPHBRUSH NUMCELS/N
Function:  This  command  creates an animbrush of "n" cels (frames) that
morphs from the current custom brush to the spare custom brush.

NUMCELS
This keyword specifies how many cels you wish your morphing animbrush to
be


Stretch/Shrink Brush

Format: STRETCHBRUSH X/N, Y/N
Function:  This command puts the user in brush stretch/shrink mode.  You
can option ally also specify, x and y offsets.


Size Brush in Half

Format: HALFBRUSH
Function:  This  command  shrinks  the current brush to half its current
height and width


Double Brush Size

Format: DOUBLEBRUSH
Function: This command stretches the current brush to double its current
height and width.


Double Brush Width

Format: DOUBLEBRUSHX
Function: This command stretches the current brush to double its current
width (x axis).


Double Brush Height

Format: DOUBLEBRUSHY
Function: This command stretches the current brush to double its current
height (yd axis).


Flip Brush Horizontally (X)

Format: FLIPBRUSHX
Function:  This command flips the current custom brush on its horizontal
(x) axis


Flip Brush Vertically (Y)

Format: FLIPBRUSHY
Function:  This  command  flips the current custom brush on its vertical
(y) axis


Outline Brush

Format: OUTLINEBRUSH
Function:  This  command outlines the current custom brush with a single
pixel using the current foreground colour as the outline.


Trim Brush Outline

Format: TRIMBRUSH
Function: This command trims or strips away a one pixel outline from the
current custom brush


Rotate Brush 90 Degrees

Format: ROTATEBRUSH90
Function:  This  command  rotates  the  current  custom brush 90 degrees
clockwise


Rotate Brush Any Angle

Format: ROTATEBRUSHANYANGLE
Function:  This  command sets the current custom brush to an interactive
mode that allows the rotation of the brush to any angle


Shear Brush Distortion

Format: SHEARBRUSH
Function:  This  command sets the current custom brush to an interactive
mode  that  allows a controlled horizontal distortion of the brush.  The
top  part  of  the  brush  is anchored and the distortion takes place by
moving  the  mouse  either to the left or the right of the current brush
position


Bend Brush Distortion

Format: BENDBRUSHX
Function:  This  command sets the current custom brush to an interactive
mode that allows the bending of the brush to a horizontal direction (x).
Moving the mouse either left or right determines the amount of bend.

Format: BENDBRUSHY
Function:  This  command sets the current custom brush to an interactive
mode  that allows the bending of the brush in a vertical direction (y).
Moving the mouse either up or down determines the amount of bend.


Rotate Brush Handle

Format: ROTATEHANDLE
Function:  This command changes the brush handle from its current offset
and  rotates  clockwise  and  back  to centre.  The default brush handle
position  is  centre.    Multiple invocations of the command rotates the
handle  to lower right, lower left, upper left, upper right, and back to
centre respectively.


Place Brush Handle

Format: PLACEHANDLE OFFSETX/N, OFFSETY/N
Function: This command changes the handle of the current brush to a user
specified  custom  x and y offset.  The coordinate system used is Deluxe
Paint's  internal system.  0,0 is the current location of the handle.  A
positive  x and y direc tion will offset the brush's handle to the right
(x)  and  below (y) the current location.  If a negative number is to be
used,  both  numbers  must  be  enclosed in quotation marks; this avoids
ARexx arithmetic conversion errors.

Examples:
PLACEHANDLE OFFSETX 100 OFFSETY 100
PLACEHANDLE 0 100
PLACEHANDLE "-100 -100"


Solid Body Brush Mode

Format: SOLIDBODY OFF/S, ON/S, TOGGLE/S
Function:  This  command  sets  the  state  of transparency for a custom
brush's body from transparent (default) to solid.


Frame Only Brush Mode

Format: FRAMEONLY OFF/S, ON/S, TOGGLE/S
Function:  This  command sets the state of the "Frame Only" custom brush
mode.    When  on,  this  mode only displays a wire frame of the brush's
mask.  This mode offers improved speed and placement accuracy especially
for odd shaped brushes


Free Brush From Memory

Format: FREEBRUSH
Function:  This  command  frees  memory  of  any  custom brush in memory
including the spare brush


Mode Menu

Matte Mode

NOTE:  For  further information on the function of each of the following
colour modes please consult the Reference section of the manual.

Format: MATTE
Function: This command puts the program into MATTE mode.

Colour Mode

Format: COLOR
Function: This command puts the program into COLOUR mode

Replace Mode

Format: REPLACE
Function: This command puts the program into REPLACE mode.

Smear Mode

Format: SMEAR
Function: This command puts the program into SMEAR mode

Shade Mode

Format: SHADE
Function:  This  command  puts  the  program into SHADE mode.  This mode
requires that an active cycle range be in use.

Blend Mode

Format: BLEND
Function: This command puts the program into BLEND mode

Cycle Mode

Format: CYCLE
Function:  This  command  puts  the  program into CYCLE mode.  This mode
requires that an active cycle range be in use.

Smooth Mode

Format: SMOOTH
Function: This command puts the program into SMOOTH mode

Mix Mode

Format: MIX
Function: This command puts the program into MIX mode

HBrite Mode

Format: HBRITE
Function:  This  command  puts  the program into HBRITE mode.  This mode
requires that the program be in a Halfbrite resolution to be active

RubThru

Format: RUBTHRU
Function:  This  command  puts the program into RUBTHRU mode.  This mode
requires a spare page to be active.


Anim Menu

Load Animation

Format:  LOADANIM  FILE,  CHGTOFMT/S,   KEEPFMT/S,   SHOW/S,   NOSHOW/S,
APPEND/S, NOAPPEND/S
Function:  This  command  loads  IFF  ANIM  files  using  the ASL (Amiga
Standard  Libraries)  Load requester.  Path, filename, and screen format
changing can also be optionally specified.

FILE
This  keyword  specifies  that a path and filename are to follow.  It is
recom mended that paths and filenames be enclosed in quotes.

CHGTOFMT
This switch tells the program that you wish to change the current screen
format and palette depth to that of the anim that is to be loaded

KEEPFMT
This  switch  tells the program that you wish to keep the current screen
for  mat and palette depth.  The anim to be loaded will be automatically
convert ed to the new screen format and palette depth.

SHOW
This  switch  is  the  default  program state and displays the animation
current ly being loaded into the program.

NOSHOW
This  switch  turns  off the show option so that the animation files are
hidden as they are loaded into the program.

APPEND
This  switch turns on the Append option so that the animation file being
loaded  in  will be appended to the end of the pre existing animation in
memory (within normal program restraints).

NOAPPEND
This  switch turns off the Append option and is the default state of the
pro  gram.    Animation  files  being  loaded overwrite any pre-existing
picture of animation.

Save Animation

Format:     SAVEANIM     FIIE,START/N,     END/N,      OP5/S, OP8WORD/S,
OP8LONG/S,FORCE/S
Function: This command saves the current frame as pictures using the ASL
(Amiga  Standard  Libraries) Save requester.  Path, filename, and Screen
format chang ing can also be specified optionally.

START
This  numeric  parameter  specifies  that  you  wish  to save a range of
animation  frames  as  an  animation file, and using the Start parameter
sets  the  starting  frame  number.    Use the End parameter in the same
manner to specify the ending frame number in your range.

OP5
This  switch  is  the  default program state and saves your files in the
IFF- Anim Op 5 format.

OP8WORD
This  switch tells the program that you wish to save your animation file
in IFF Anim OP-8 word format.

OP8LONG
This  switch tells the program that you wish to save your animation file
in the IFF Anim OP-8 long format.

FORCE
This  switch allows the automatic overwrite of an existing file that has
the same name as the one you are currently saving.  Normally the program
issues  a  warning  requester telling you that the file you are about to
save already exists and allows you to cancel from it.

Move Requester

Format: ANIMMOVE
Function: This command invokes the Move requester for user input

Load Move Settings

Format: LOADMOVE FILE/F
Function:  This  command  invokes  an ASL Load requester that allows the
pre-loading of saved settings to the move requester.  Specific paths and
filenames  can  be  used  optionally using the FILE argument.  Paths and
filenames should be enclosed in quotation marks.

Example: "LOADMOVE "DPAINTV:MOVE/ANIMBASICS1.MOVE"

Save Move Settings.

Format: SAVEMOVE FILE/A,FORCE/S
Function:  This  command  invokes  an ASL save requester that allows the
saving  of  the  current move requester settings.  Path and filename and
whether  to  overwrite  an  existing filename can be specified using the
FILE and FORCE parame ters respectively

Move Coordinate Settings

Format:  SETMOVECOORDS  DX/N/K,  DY/N/K, DZ/N/K, AX/N/K, AY/N/K, AZ/N/K,
DISPBRUSH/S,   NODISPBRUSH/S,   ANGBRUSH/S,   NOANGBRUSH/S,    CYCLIC/S,
NOCYCLIC/S, GOBACK/S
Function:  This  command  allows for the setting of the Move requester's
coordinate set tings.

DX
This  numeric keyword followed by a legal integer specifies the distance
in X that you would like to set

DY
This  numeric keyword followed by a legal integer specifies the distance
in Y that you would like to set.

DZ
This  numeric keyword followed by a legal integer specifies the distance
in Z that you would like to set

AX
This  numeric keyword followed by a legal integer specifies the angle in
X that you would like to set.

AY
This  numeric keyword followed by a legal integer specifies the angle in
Y that you would like to set.

AZ
This  numeric keyword followed by a legal integer specifies the angle in
Z that you would like to set.

DISPBRUSH
This  switch  sets  the  distance  movement  relative  to  the   brush's
coordinate system instead of the screen's coordinate system.

NODISPBRUSH
This  switch  sets  the  distance  movement  relative  to  the  screen's
coordinate system instead of the brush's coordinate system.

ANGBRUSH
This  switch sets the angle movements relative to the brush's coordinate
sys tem instead of the screen's coordinate system

NOANGBRUSH
This switch sets the angle movements relative to the screen's coordinate
sys tem insread of the brush's coordinate system.

CYCLIC
This  switch  sets  the move requester to create cyclic animations.  See
the Reference section for a further explanation.

NOCYCLIC
This switch turns off the cyclic animation switch

GOBACK
This switch restores the brush's starting position for your next move to
the last place the brush was manually stamped.


Move Option Settings

Format:  SETMOVEOPTS   SLOWIN/N/K,   SLOWOUT/N/K,   COUNT/N,   GOFROM/S,
COMETO/S, FORWARD/S, INPLACE/S, BACKWARD/S
Function: This command sets the various options for the Move requester

SLOWIN
This  numeric keyword sets the number of frames over which you want your
brush move to decelerate

SLOWOUT
This  numeric keyword sets the number of frames over which you want your
brush move to accelerate

COUNT
This  numeric keyword sets the number of frames over which you want your
brush moved.

GOFROM
This  switch  sets  the  Move  requester such that your move paints from
where  you  first  placed  your  brush  and  moves forward.  This is the
default switch

COMETO
This switch sets the Move requester such that a move paints to where you
last placed your brush and begins at an earlier frame.

FORWARD
This  switch  sets  the  Move requester to record forward from where you
placed your brush starting position.  This is the default switch.

INPLACE
This  switch  sets  the Move requester to record all of the moves on the
current frame frame.

BACKWARD
This switch sets the Move requester to record your move in reverse order
by  going to the last frame in the move count and painting your brush in
reverse.

Fade Move Setting

Format: SETMOVEFADE START/N/K, END/N/K
Function: This command sets the starting and ending fade values for your
move.  This command accepts values 0 (solid) to 255 (translucent).

Record Move

Format: RECORDMOVE PREVIEW/S, TRAILS/S, FILL/S, DRAW/S
Function:  This  command  executes  your  move  presets  in  one of four
manners.    Using  the  appropriate switch you can preview your settings
(PREVIEWS),  per  form  a  trails move (TRAILS), a perspective fill move
(FILL), or a regular move (DRAW).

Camera Move

Format: CAMERAMOVE
Function: This command invokes the Camera Move requester for user input

Load Camera Settings

Format: LOADCAM FILE/F
Function:  This  command  invokes  an ASL load requester that allows the
pre-loading  of  saved settings to the camera requester.  Specific paths
and filenames can be used optionally using the FILE argument.  Paths and
filenames should be enclosed in quotation marks.

Save Camera Settings

Format: SAVECAM FILE/A, FORCE/S
Function:  This  command  invokes  an ASL save requester that allows the
saving  of the current camera requester settings.  Path and filename and
overwriting  an  existing  filename  can be specified using the FILE and
FORCE parameters respectively.

Camera Coordinate Settings

Format:  SETCAMCOORDS  DX/N/K,  DY/N/K, DZ/N/K, DISPCAM/K, NODIS PCAM/S,
CYCLIC/S, NOCYCLIC/S
Function:  This command allows for the setting of the Camera requester's
coordinate settings.

DX
This  numeric keyword followed by a legal integer specifies the distance
in X that you would like to set.

DY
This  numeric keyword followed by a legal integer specifies the distance
in Y that you would like to set.

DZ
This  numeric keyword followed by a legal integer specifies the distance
in Z that you would like to set.

DISPCAM
This  switch  sees  the  distance  movements  relative  to  the camera's
coordinate system instead of the screen's coordinate system.

NODISPCAM
This  switch  sets  the  distance  movements  relative  to  the  screens
coordinate system instead of the cameras coordinate system.

CYCLIC
This  switch sets the camera requester to create cyclic animations.  See
the Reference section for a further explanation.

NOCYCLIC
This switch turns off the cyclic animation switch

Camera Options Settings

Format: SETCAMOPTS SLOWIN/N/K, SLOWOUT/N/K, COUNT/N, GOFROM/S, COMETO/S,
WRAP/S, NOWRAP/S
Function:  This  command  sets  the  various options for the Camera Move
requester

SLOWIN
This  numeric keyword sets the number of frames over which you want your
camera move to decelerate.

SLOWOUT
This  numeric keyword sets the number of frames over which you want your
camera move to accelerate.

COUNT
This  numeric keyword sets the number of frames over which you want your
camera moved.

GOFROM
This  switch  sets  the Camera Move requester such that your move paints
from  where you first placed your camera and moves forward.  This is the
default switch.

COMETO
This  switch  sets  the Camera Move requester such that a move paints to
where you last placed your camera and begins at an earlier frame.

Record Camera Move

Format: RECORDCAM PREVIEW/S, NEW/S, BEFORE/S, AFTER/S
Function:  This  command  executes  your  camera  presets in one of four
manners.    Using  the  appropriate switch you can preview your settings
(PREVIEWS),  create  new animation (NEW), insert an animation before the
current frame of the existing animation (BEFORE), or insert an animation
after the current frame of the existing animation.

Load AnimBrush

Format: LOADANIMBRUSH FILE,DITHER/S, NODITHER/S, PALETTE/S, NOPALETTE/S
Function:  This  command  loads IFF AnimBrush files using the ASL (Amiga
Standard  Libraries) Load requester.  Path and filename and dithering or
no dithering can also be specified optionally.

FILE
This  keyword  specifies  that a path and filename are to follow.  It is
recom mended that paths and filenames be enclosed in quotes.

DITHER
This switch tells the program that you wish to dither the animbrush that
is  to  be  loaded  if in is an option.  Generally the program will only
offer  the  dither/no  dither  options  when  the current screen mode is
register  based and the animbrush being loaded is a HAM or 24-bit brush.


NODITHER
This  switch tells the program that you wish no dithering be done to the
brush  that  is  to  be loaded if it is an option.  Please see above how
Deluxe Paint determines the dither/nodither options.

PALETTE
This switch tells the program to automatically use the AnimBrush palette
when the specified AnimBrush file has been loaded.

NOPALETTE
This  switch  is  the  default  mode  of  the program, and turns off the
Palette switch.

Save AnimBrush

Format: SAVEANIMBRUSH FILE,FORCE/S
Function:  This command saves the current animbrush using the ASL (Amiga
Standard  Libraries)  Save  requester.  Path and filename and whether to
overwrite an existing file can also be specified optionally.

FORCE
This  switch allows the automatic overwrite of an existing file that has
the same name as the one you are currently saving.  Normally the program
issues  a  warning  requester telling you that the file you are about to
save already exists and allows you to cancel the operation.

Pickup Animbrush

Format: PICKANIMBRUSH LEFT/N, TOP/N, WIDTH/N, HEIGHT/N, COUNT/N, CUT/S
Function:  This  command  displays  the  AnimBrush  Pickup requester and
optionally  will  pickup a specified area (left, top, width, height) and
specified  number  of frames (count) and create an animated custom brush
(AnimBrush).

CUT
Switches  AnimBrush  pickup  mode  from  copying the brush data from the
screen to picking up or cutting out the brush data off the screen.  This
switch  is  the  equivalent  of  a user picking up an AnimBrush with the
right mouse button in Deluxe Paint.

Example: PICKUPANIMBRUSH left 110 top 90 width 20 height 20 count 10 cut

AnimBrush Settings

Format: SETANIMBRUSH FORWARD/S, REVERSE/S, PING/S, DURATION/N, CURRENT/N
Function:  This  command displays the AnimBrush Settings requester which
allows  the  user  to  set  the  direction  and  duration of the current
AnimBrush in memory.

FORWARD
This switch sets the current AnimBrush to play its cels forward

REVERSE
This switch sets the current AnimBrush to play its cels in reverse order

PING
This  switch  sets the current AnimBrush to play its cels from beginning
to end to beginning

DURATION
This  numeric  parameter allows you to set the number of frames it takes
the current AnimBrush to move completely through all its cells.

CURRENT
This  numeric parameter lets you set the current AnimBrush cel to be dis
played

Use AnimBrush in Memory

Format: USEANIMBRUSH
Function: This command restores the AnimBrush in memory and makes it the
current brush.  This command is similar to RESTOREBRUSH

Free AnimBrush in Memory

Format: FREEANIMBRUSH
Function: This command removes the current AnimBrush from memory

Set Number of Frames

Format: SETFRAMES NUMBER/N
Function:  This  command displays the Set # of Frames requester and sets
the  number  of  current animation frames to a specified number.  If the
number  specified is less than the current number of frames, the program
will  begin  deleting  frames  from  the current frame forward until the
number of frames is equal to the specified number.

Add Animation Frames

Format: ADDFRAMES NUMBER/N
Function:  This command displays the Add Frames requester which adds the
number  of  specified  animation  frames  to  memory.  This command will
duplicate the current frame or page the number of times specified by the
NUMBER  para  meter  and  insert those frames after the current frame or
page.

Copy Animation Frames

Format: COPYFRAMES ALL/S, RANGE/S, INSERT/S, START/N, END/N, BEFORE/N
Function: This command displays the Copy Frames requester and copies the
current  frame to all frames or a specified range of frames.  Optionally
you  can  also  specify  to  insert  a range of frames before a specific
frame.   Both RANGE and INSERT switches require the use of the START and
END parameters.

Examples:
COPYFRAMES RANGE 2 8
COPYFRAMES INSERT START 1 END 4 BEFORE 20

Delete Animation Frames

Format: DELETEFRAMES ALL/S, CURRENT/S, RANGE/S, START/N, END/N
Function:  This  command  displays  the  Delete  Frames  requester   and
optionally  deletes  the current frame, all frames, or a specified range
of  frames.    The  RANGE  switch  requires the use of the START and END
parameters

Animation Control Panel

Format: ANIMCONTROLS OFF/S, ON/S, TOGGLE/S
Function:  This  command is a toggle for showing or hiding the animation
control panel that displays at the bottom of the screen in Deluxe Paint.
The com mand by itself will use the toggle switch.

Set Animation Frame Rate

Format:  SETFRAMERATE  GLOBAL/S,  BYFRAME/S,  FPS/N,  JIFFIES/N,  ALL/S,
CURRENT/S, RANGE/S, START/N, END/N
Function:  This command displays the Set Frame Rate requester and allows
for  the  set ting of a global frame rate for an animation (GLOBAL) or a
variable  frame  rate  for  the  animation  (BYFRAME).    Please see the
Reference section of this manual for more information on how to use this
feature.

GLOBAL
This switch indicates that the animation will run at a single frame rate
that is set by the FPS parameter.

BYFRAME
This  switch  indicates  that the animation frames specified by the ALL,
CUR RENT or RANGE switches will use a frame rate specified by the FPS or
JIFFIES parameters.

FPS
This  numeric  parameter  will take legal values for setting a global or
variable  frame  rate.   FPS stands for Frames Per Second.  GLOBAL frame
rates are positive whole integers from 1 to the maximum rate allowed for
the  specific  resolution  you  are working in.  This information can be
obtained  from the Screen Format Requesters Display Information window.
BYFRAME frame rates are multiples of the maximum frame rate.  FPS values
that are fraction ally less than 1 become frame pauses in JIFFIES.

JIFFIES
This  numeric  parameter will allow the setting of frame pauses that are
longer  than one second.  The values allowed are positive whole integers
that  represent  a  fraction of the legal maximum frame rate allowed for
the  specific  resolution  you  are working in.  For example, in PAL the
maximum  legal  speed in Hi Res is 25 FPS, so JIFFIES 50 would equal a 2
second pause on whatever frame(s) were specified.

NOTE:
The  following  parameters  will only take affect in BYFRAME mode.  They
will have no effect if used with the GLOBAL switch.

ALL
This  switch  indicates  that the BYFRAME, and FPS or JIFFIES parameters
you  have  specified  will  be  applied to all the frames in the current
animation.

CURRENT
This  switch  indicates  that the BYFRAME, and FPS or JIFFIES parameters
you  have  specified  will  only be applied to the current frame in your
anima tion.

RANGE
This  switch  indicates  that the BYFRAME, and FPS or JIFFIES parameters
you  have  specified  will be applied to the START and END frame numbers
you have specified.


Set Frame Palette

Format:  SETFRAMEPALETTE  NUMBER/N,  MAKE/S,  ALL/S, CURRENT/S, RANGE/S,
START/N, END/N
Function:  This  command  displays the Set Frame Palette requester which
allows  for  the  creation  of  multiple  palette animations, or for the
applying of palettes to specified frames.  See the Reference section for
more information on how to use this feature.

NUMBER
Use  this  numeric parameter for specifying which palette you would like
applied  to  the  frame(s) you have specified with the other parameters.
Do not use this parameter in conjunction with the MAKE switch.

MAKE
This  switch  creates  a new palette entry in memory which allows you to
redefine  a  palette,  or load a new palette, and apply it to the frames
specified  by  the  other parameters.  The default is the CURRENT frame.
Do  not  use  this parameter in conjunction with the NUMBER parameter as
MAKE automatically increments the palette numbers.


Frame Palette Information

Format: SETPALETTEINFO FREE/S, NUMBER/N
Function:  This  command  displays the Palette Information requester and
optionally  can  free  specified palette indices from memory.  Animation
frames  using  freed  palettes  revert to using the palette index in use
before the first frame of the freed palette.

FREE
This switch frees the palette index specified by the NUMBER parameter

NUMBER
This  parameter  specifies  which palette information will be freed when
used in conjunction with the FREE parameter.

Examples:
SETPALETTEINFO FREE 2
SETPALETTEINFO


Set Animation Play Range

Format: SETANIMRANGE ALL/S, RANGE/S, START/N, END/N
Function:  This  command displays the Set Animation Play Range requester
and  has  parameters  to  specify  ALL frames or a RANGE of frames.  ALL
frames is the program default.

Example:
SETANIMRANGE RANGE START 30 END 100.


Display Previous Frame

Format: PREVFRAME
Function: This command displays the previous frame and is the equivalent
of a user pressing 1 in the Deluxe Paint interface


Display Next Frame

Format: NEXTFRAME
Function:  This command displays the next frame and is the equivalent of
a user press ing 2 in the Deluxe Paint interface.


Go To Frame

Foramt: GOTOFRAME NUMBER/N, START/S, END/S, AGAIN/S
Function: This command displays the Go to Frame requester.  Optionally a
frame  number  can be specified using the NUMBER parameter.  This is the
equiva lent of a user pressing 3 in the Deluxe Paint interface.

START
This switch tells the program to go to the first frame of your animation
and  is  the equivalent of the user pressing Shift 1 in the Deluxe Paint
interface.

END
This  switch tells the program to go to the last frame in your animation
and  is  the equivalent of the user pressing Shift-2 in the Deluxe Paint
interface.

AGAIN
This  switch  tells  the program to go to the last frame specified using
the  GOTOFRAME command or the user Interface.  This is the equivalent of
thc user pressing Shift 3 in the Deluxe Paint interface.

Example:
GOTOFRAME 45


Loop Animation Forward

Format: PLAYLOOPFWD
Function:  This command plays the current animation forward and loops it
continu  ously until a mouse click, spacebar key or Esc key press.  This
command  is  the  equivalent  to  a  user pressing 4 in the Deluxe Paint
interface.

WARNING
The  GUI should be unlocked before issuing this and other animation play
commands.  See, LOCKGUI, UNLOCKGUI.


Play Animation Once Forward

Format: PLAYFORWARD
Function:  This command plays the current animation forward once until a
mouse  click,  spacebar  key  or  Esc  key  press.   This command is the
equivalent  to  a user pressing 5 in the Deluxe Paint interface.  Please
see the GUI warning above.


Ping Pong Animation

Format: PLAYPING
Function:  This command plays the current animation in ping pong fashion
until a mouse click, spacebar key or Esc key press.  This command is the
equivalent  to  a user pressing 6 in the Deluxe Paint interface.  Please
see the GUI warn ing above.


Stop Animation

Format: STOPANIM
Function:  This command stops the current animation as if a mouse click,
spacebar  key  or  Esc  key  press  has occurred while the animation was
playing.  Please see the GUI warning above.


Compressed Memory Model

Format: ANIMCOMPRESSED
Function: This command sets the memory model which you would like to use
to  cre  ate your animations to the Compressed memory model.  Please see
the  Reference section for a more complete explanation of this feature.
If anima tion frames exist, the user will be warned that all frames will
be  deleted.    The  compressed  method is the default memory model that
Deluxe Paint V uses.


Expanded Memory Model

Format: ANIMEXPANDED
Function: This command sets the memory model which you would like to use
to cre ate your animations to the Expanded memory model.  Please see the
Reference  section  for  a more complex explanation of this feature.  If
anima tion frames exist, the user will be warned that all frames will be
deleted.


Colour Menu

WARNING:
The  GUI should be unlocked before issuing this and other animation play
commands.  See, LOCKGUI, UNLOCKGUI

Gradient Range Panel

Format: COLORRANGE
Function: This command displays the Gradient Range Panel.

Colour Cycling

Format: COLORCYCLE OFF/S, ON/S, TOGGLE/S
Function:  This command is a toggle for colour cycling.  An active cycle
range and speed must be current set for there to take any effect.  It is
the  equivalent  of  a  user  pressing  the  Tab key in the Deluxe Paint
interface.    Optionally  there  are  switches  for  turning  off on and
toggling the current state of colour cycling.

Palette Mixer Panel

Format: COLORMIXER OFF/S, ON/S, TOGGLE/S
Function: This command toggles the display of the Palette Mixer panel in
the pro gram.

Arrange Palette Panel

Format: ARRANGEPALETTE OFF/S, ON/S, TOGGLE/S
Function:  This command toggles the display of the Arrange Palette panel
in the pro gram.

Use Brush Palette

Format: USEBRUSHPALETTE
Function:  This  command  tells  Deluxe  Paint to use the palette of the
custom brush that has just been loaded.

Restore Palette

Format: RESTOREPALETTE
Function:  This  command restores and sets the palette to the palette in
use before the current palette

WARNING:
Using  this  command  or  any  other  command  that  modifies an image's
palette,  or pixel colour without a good knowledge of colour and palette
management  in  Deluxe  Paint  can  lead  to disastrous and irreversible
results.   UNDO does not reverse this change.  Please save your image or
animation before attempting this command.

Use Default Palette

Format: DEFAULTPALETTE
Function:  This  command  sets  the  current  palette  to that of Deluxe
Paint's internal default palette

Load Palette

Format: LOADPALETTE FILE/F
Function:  This command displays the ASL Load Palette file requester and
when  file  is chosen sets the palette or register spaces of the current
mode  to  that  of  the  file.    Optionally  a path and filename can be
specified.

FILE
This  keyword  specifies  that a path and filename are to follow.  It is
recom mended that paths and filenames be enclosed in quotes

Save Palette

Format: SAVEPALETTE FILE, FORCE/S
Function:  This command displays the ASL Save Palette file requester and
saves  out  the current palette (which can be diffetent from colout set)
to the specified path with the given filename.

FORCE
This  switch allows the automatic overwrite of an existing file that has
the same name as the one you are currently saving.  Normally the program
issue  a  warning  requester  telling you that the file you are about to
save already exists and allows you to cancel the operation.

Example: SAVEPALETTE FILE "dpaintv:colours/test.pal" FORCE

Load Colour Set

Format: LOADCOLORSET FILE/F
Function:  This  command displays the ASL Load Colour Set file requester
and  when file is chosen sets the colour set of the current mode to that
of the file Optionally, a path and filename can be specified.

Save Colour Set

Format: SAVECOLORSET FILE,FORCE/S
Function:  This  command displays the ASL Save Colour Set file requester
and  saves the current colour set (can be different from the palette) to
the specified path with the given filename.

WARNING
UNDO  does  not reverse the following seven background/foreground colour
changes.    Please  save your image or animation before attempting these
com mands.

Change BG to FG

Format: BGTOFG ALL/S, CURRENT/S, RANGE/S, START/N, END/N
Function:  This  command  changes  all  pixels  that  use  the   current
background  colour  to  use the current foreground colour.  If there are
multiple  frames,  you  can  optionally  specify  what frame or range of
frames you wish to apply this function to.  This command does not affect
the palette order.

Swap BG with FG

Format: SWAPBGFG ALL/S, CURRENT/S, RANGE/S, START/N, END/N
Function: This command swaps all pixels in the current background colour
with  the  current  foreground  colour.  This command doesn't affect the
palette order.

Remap

Format: REMAP ALL/S, CURRENT/S, RANGE/S, START/N, END/N
Function:  This command finds the closest colours in the current palette
to  that  of  its  original palette and "remaps" the current frame(s) to
those ocw colours

Recompute

Format: RECOMPUTE ALL/S, CURRENT/S, RANGE/S, START/N, END/N
Function:  This  command  has  not effect in any modes other than HAM or
24-bit  backing.    This command recomputes the picture data.  In HAM it
remaps  the data with the current palette, thereby possibly reducing the
amount  of  HAM  fringing  seen  when  moving  a custom brush across the
screen.    In  24- bit backing mode, this command will give you the best
screen  palette  to  represent  the  24 bit data.  Use this command when
working in 24 bit mode to approximate the best screen palette.  If there
are  multiple  frames, you can optionally specify what frame or range of
frames you wish to apply this function to.

Brush BG to FG

Format: BRUSHBGTOFG
Function:  This  command  changes  all  custom brush pixels that use the
current  back  ground colour to use the current foreground colour.  This
command does not affect the palette ordet or current frame(s).

Swap Brush BG with FG

Format: SWAPBRUSHBGFG
Function:  This  command  swaps  all  custom brush pixels in the current
background colour with the current foreground colour.  This command does
not affect the palette order or current frame(s).

Remap Custom Brush

Format: REMAPBRUSH
Function:  This command finds the closest colours in the current palette
to that of its original palette and "remaps" the current custom brush to
those new colours.

Change Brush Transparency

Format: CHANGEBRUSHTRANS
Function:  This command changes the transparency colour of the currently
selected brush to the current background colour.


Effects Menu

Show Stencil

Format: SHOWSTENCIL
Function:  This  command dims the display of the current frame and shows
the areas that are currently stencilled in a contrasting lighter colour.
A mouse click or keypress returns back to the image.

Make Stencil

Format: SETSTENCIL
Function:  This  command  displays  the  Make Stencil requester for user
input.    Please see the Reference section for more information on using
the Make Stencil requester.

Remake Stencil

Format: REMAKESTENCIL
Function: This command locks colours that have been newly applied to the
screen and are also locked in the Make Stencil Requester.

Paint Stencil

Format: PAINTSTENCIL OFF/S, ON/S, TOGGLE/S
Function:This  toggle  command  puts you into a special mode that allows
you  to  use  any brush or drawing tool to create an area based stencil.
Choosing the command a second time or using the off or toggle parameters
will  set  your  area based stencil.  Creating a colour based stencil or
using  the  SETSTEN  CIL  or  REMAKESTENCIL  commands discards the Paint
Stencil.

Reverse/Inverse Stencil

Format: REVERSESTENCIL
Function:  This  command  inverts the current stencil whether it is area
based or colour based.

Stencil On/Off

Format: STENCIL OFF/S, ON/S, TOGGLE/S
Function:  This  toggle command sets the state of the current stencil in
memory Optionally you can turn it off on, or toggle the current state

Free/Discard Stencil

Format: FREESTENCIL
Function: This command discards the current stencil mask from memory and
reallo cates that memory for usage.

Load Stencils

Format: LOADSTENCIL FILE/F
Function:  This  command  displays  the ASL Load Stencil requester which
allows  the  loading  of  pre  saved stencils.  Please see the Reference
section  for  more  infor mation on what kind of data is actually loaded
in.    Saved  stencils  are basical ly area based pixel masks.  The FILE
parameter  can  be  used  optionally to indicate a path and filename for
your saved files.

Save Stencils

Format: SAVESTENCIL FILE,FORCE/S
Function:  This command displays the ASL Save Stencil file requester and
saves  out  the  stencil  in memory to the specified path with the given
filename.

Example: SAVESTENCIL "work:images/stencils/kedars_toe.msk"

LightTable On/Off

Format: LIGHT OFF/S, ON/S, TOGGLE/S, LOCKON/S, LOCKOFF/S
Function:  This toggle command sets the current state of the LightTable.
Please  see the Tutorials and Reference sections for more information on
the  usage  of  the  LightTable  feature.    Optionally you can turn the
LightTable off, on, or tog gle the current state.

Merge LightTable

Format: LIGHTMERGE
Function:  This  command  merges  the currently viewed LightTable images
into  the cur rent frame and turns off the LightTable so you can see the
results of the merge.

Dim LightTable

Format: DIM OFF/S, ON/S, TOGGLE/S
Function:  This  toggle command sets the current state of the LightTable
Dim  feature.   Dim is on by default and works in all modes.  Optionally
you can turn Dim off, on, or toggle the current state.

LightTable Layer On/Off

Format: LAYER NUMBER/N, OFF/S, ON/S, TOGGLE/S, OFFSET/N/K, DIM/N/K
Function:  This  command  shows  or  hides  the  specifically   numbered
LightTable  layers  that have been predefined in the LightTable settings
requester.

Fix Background

Format: FIXBG
Function:  This  command  fixes  the background by "locking" the current
picture  Fixing  the  background uses additional memory.  Please see the
Reference sec tion for additional information on this feature.

Free Background

Format: FREEBG
Function:  This  command "unlocks" the background and merges it with any
fore  ground  data that was painted over it while it was "locked".  This
also  frees  up  the  extra  memory  that  was  allocated  to fixing the
background.

Lock Foreground

Format: LOCKFG
Function:  This  command  creates an area stencil of the foreground data
you have painted or added to an image that has had its background fixed.
Use this command in conjunction with the FIXBACKGROUND command above.

Anti-Alias

Format: ANTIALIAS OFF/S, LOW/S, HIGH/S
Function: This command controls the programs anti aliasing settings

OFF
This switch turns off the programs anti-aliasing code.

LOW
This switch sets the programs anti-aliasing code to the low setting

HIGH
This switch sets the programs anti-aliasing to the high setting

Processing On/Off

Format: PROCESS OFF/S, ON/S, TOGGLE/S
Function:  This  toggle  command  sets  the  state of the colour process
function  built  into the program.  You can optionally specify the state
by  using  the off, on, or toggle parameter switches.  See the Reference
section  for  additional informa tion on how to use process.  By default
the  PROCESS command turns on Tint, unless another process type has been
set.  See below.

Tint Processing

Format: SETTINT
Function:  This  command  sets the current colour process function to be
Tint.    Use  this command in conjunction with the command PROCESS.  See
above.

Hue Processing

Format: SETHUE
Function:  This  command  sets the current colour process function to be
Hue.    Use  this  command in conjunction with the command PROCESS.  See
above.

Value Processing

Format: SETVALUE
Function:  This  command  sets the current colour process function to be
Value.    Use this command in conjunction with the command PROCESS.  See
above.

Translucency On/Off

Format: TRANSLUCENCY OFF/S, ON/S, TOGGLE/S
Function:  This  toggle  command  sets  the  state  for the Deluxe Paint
Translucency  fea  ture.   You can optionally specify the state by using
the  off,  on,  or toggle parameter switches.  See the Reference section
for additional information on how to use translucency.

Translucency Settings

Format: SETTRANSLUCENCY LEVEL/N
Function: This command displays the Translucency requester that allows a
user  to  set  the global translucency value by percent.  Optionally you
can also use the Level numeric keyword for setting as value Legal values
for the Level parameter are 1 to 100.  The programs default value is 50.


Examples:
SETTRANSLUCENCY 75
SETTRANSLUCENCY level 45

Pressure On/Off

Format: PRESSURE OFF/S, ON/S, TOGGLE/S
Function:  This  toggle  command sets the current state for the pressure
tablet  feature  You  can optionally specify the state by using the off,
on,  or  toggle  parameter  switches.    See  the  Reference section for
additional information on how to use pressure.

Pressure Settings

Format: SETPRESSURE
Function: This command displays the Pressure settings requester for user
input  and  customisation  of  the  pressure sensitive tablet support in
Deluxe Paint.

Open Media

Format: OPENMEDIA FILE/F
Function:  This  command  displays  the  ASL  Open Media requester which
allows  the  loading  of  pre  defined  Deluxe  Paint V Media libraries.
Please  see  the  Reference  section  for  more  information  on   media
libraries.    The  FILE  para meter can be used optionally to indicate a
path and filename for your media libraries.

Close Media

Format: CLOSEMEDIA
Function:  This  command  removes the media library and its effects from
the current project and restores the memory used to store the library

Texture On/Off

Format: TEXTURE OFF/S, ON/S, TOGGLE/S
Function:  This  toggle  command  sets  the current state of the Texture
background  fea  ture in Deluxe Paint V.  You can optionally specify the
state  by  using  the  off  on,  or  toggle parameter switches.  See the
Reference section for additional information on how to use Texture.

Load Texture

Format: LOADTEXTURE FILE/F
Function:  This  command  displays  the ASL Load Texture requester which
allows  the  loading  of  pre  defined  IFF  textures.    Please see the
Reference  section for more information on Textures.  The FILE parameter
can  be  used  optionally  to  indicate  a  path  and  filename for your
textures.    Textures  can be any IFF data, the better it tiles the more
useful.    Ideal  textures  should  be  created  in  a  hi-res 16 colour
greyscale mode.

Invert Texture

Format: INVERTTEXTURE
Function: This command inverts the data currently in memory as a texture.

Free/Discard Texture

Format: FREETEXTURE
Function:  This command discards the current texture in memory and frees
the memo ry that was being used by the texture data

Prefs Menu

Coordinates

Format: COORDS OFF/S, ON/S, TOGGLE/S
Function:  This  toggle  command  sets  the  current state of the coords
preference  in  Deluxe Paint V.  You can optionally specify the state by
using  the  off,  on,  or  toggle parameter switches.  See the Reference
section for additional informa tion on coords.

Fast Feedback

Format: FASTFB OFF/S, ON/S, TOGGLE/S
Function:  This  toggle  command  sets  the current state of the Fast FB
preference  in  Deluxe Paint V.  You can optionally specify the state by
using  the  off,  on,  or  toggle parameter switches.  See the Reference
section for additional informa tion on Fast FB.

MultiCycle

Format: MULTICYCLE OFF/S, ON/S, TOGGLE/S
Function:  This  toggle command sets the current state of the MultiCycle
preference  in  Deluxe Paint V.  You can optionally specify the state by
using  the  off,  on,  or  toggle parameter switches.  See the Reference
section for additional informa tion on MultiCycle.

Be Square

Format: BESQUARE OFF/S, ON/S, TOGGLE/S
Function:  This  toggle  command sets the current state of the Be Square
preference  in  Deluxe  Paint.   You can optionally specify the state by
using  the  off,  on,  or  toggle parameter switches.  See the Reference
section for additional informa tion on Be Square.

Workbench

Format: WORKBENCH OFF/S, ON/S, TOGGLE/S
Function:  This  toggle  command sets the current state of the Workbench
preference  in  Deluxe  Paint.   You can optionally specify the state by
using  the off, on, or toggle parameter switches.  See your User's Guide
for additional information on the Workbench.

Exclude Brush Edge

Format: EXCLBRUSH OFF/S, ON/S, TOGGLE/S
Function:  This  toggle  command sets the current state of the ExelBrush
preference  in  Deluxe  Paint.   You can optionally specify the state by
using  the  off,  on,  or  toggle parameter switches.  See the Reference
section for additional informa tion on ExelBrush.

Automatic Transparency

Format: AUTORANSP OFF/S, ON/S, TOGGLE/S
Function:  This  toggle command sets the current state of the AutoTransp
preference  in  Deluxe  Paint.   You can optionally specify the state by
using  the  off,  on,  or  toggle parameter switches.  See the Reference
section for additional informa tion on Auto Transp

Automatic Grid

Format: AUTOGRID OFF/S, ON/S, TOGGLE/S
Function:  This  toggle  command  sets the current state of the AutoGrid
preference  in  Deluxe  Paint.   You can optionally specify the state by
using  the  off,  on,  or  toggle parameter switches.  See the Reference
section for additional informa tion on AutoGrid.

Origin Upper Left

Format: ORIGINUL OFF/S, ON/S, TOGGLE/S
Function:  This  toggle  command  sets the current state of the OriginUL
preference  in  Deluxe Paint V.  You can optionally specify the state by
using  the  off,  on,  or  toggle parameter switches.  See the Reference
section for additional informa tion on OriginUL.

Fast HAM Adjust

Format: FASTADJUST OFF/S, ON/S, TOGGLE/S
Function:  This  toggle command sets the current state of the FastAdjust
preference  in  Deluxe Paint V.  You can optionally specify the state by
using  the  off,  on,  or  toggle parameter switches.  See the Reference
section for additional informa tion on FastAdjust.

Mouse Tracking

Format: MOUSETRACK OFF/S, ON/S, TOGGLE/S
Function:  This  toggle command sets the current state of the MouseTrack
preference  in  Deluxe Paint V.  You can optionally specify the state by
using  the  off,  on,  or  toggle parameter switches.  See the Reference
section for additional informa tion on MouseTrack.

Format: SETICONS
Function: This command brings up the Icon Settings requester.

Reset to Default Settings

Format: RESETSETTINGS
Function:  This  command  resets the program preferences to the original
factory defaults

Restore Last Saved Settings

Format: RESTORESETTINGS
Function:  This  command  restores  the settings from your program icons
saved tooltypes.

Save Settings

Format: SAVESETTINGS
Function:  This  command saves the current preferences settings and save
directories  to  the  program's  icon  as  tooltypes.    Please  see the
Reference  section  for  more  information  on  setting  the   program's
preferences.


Perspective Commands

Enter Perspective Mode

Format: ENTERPERSP
Function:  This  command sets the program into Perspective Mode.  Please
see  the  Manual's  Tutorials  and  Reference  sections  for  additional
information on how to use perspective.  See also ExitPersp below.

Perspective Fill

Format: PERSPFILLSCREEN
Function:  This  command  fills the screen with the current brush in its
perspective rota tion.

Perspective Reset

Format: RESETPERSP
Function:  This  command  resets  the brush to its original state before
rotation.

Perspective Centre

Format: CENTERPERSP X/N, Y/N
Function:  This  command  puts you into the centre perspective mode.  In
this  mode  you  can set the perspective centre and horizon.  Optionally
you  can  specify  a  screen  x  and screen y position using the numeric
parameters  given.    Deluxe  Paint's  internal coordinate system, which
starts 0,0 at the upper left corner of the screen, is used

Example: CENTERPERSP 120 100

Perspective Settings

Format:  SETPERSPOPTS  X/N/K,  Y/N/K, Z/N/K, FROMBRUSH/S, ANGLESTEP/N/K,
BRUSH/S, SCREEN/S, ANGLE/S, POS/S
Function:  This  command  displays  the  Perspective settings requester.
Additional  para  meters  set  specific  settings.      By   default the
perspective grid is set to the dimensions of your current brush.

X
This  numeric  parameter  requires its keyword and specifics the x size.
For the 3D perspective grid.

Y
This numeric parameter requires its keyword and specifies the y size for
the 3D perspective grid

Z
This numeric parametee requires its keyword and specifies the z size for
the  3D perspective grid.  The Z axis is automatically the same as the Y
axis.

FROMBRUSH
This  switch automatically sets the X and Y grid values to correspond to
the width and height of the brush.

ANGLESTEP
This  numeric  parameter requires its keyword and specifies the rotation
increment used in conjunction with the shift key and the appropriate key
pad rotation key

BRUSH
This  switch  parameter  sets perspective mode so that brush rotation is
done relative to the current brush coordinate system.

SCREEN
This  switch  parameter  sets perspective mode so that brush rotation is
done  relative  to  the  current  screen coordinate system.  This is the
default coordi nate system in use by perspective.

ANGLE
This  switch  tells  the  program  that  angles  of  rotation  should be
displayed  in  the  title  bar when in perspective.  This is the default
switch.

POS
This  switch  tells the program that brush position in three dimensional
space should be displayed in the title bar when in perspective.

NOTE:
If  coords are on, only two dimensional coordinates will be displayed in
the  title  bar.    To  make  proper use of the POS or ANGLE parameters,
coords should be off before going into perspective mode


Perspective Rotations

Format:  SETPERSP  DX/N/K,  DY/N/K,  DZ/N/K,   AX/N/K,   AY/N/K, AZ/N/K,
BRUSH/S, NOBRUSH/S
Function:  This  command  sets the rotation and screen distance for your
brush while in perspective mode.

DX
This  numeric  parameter requires its keyword and specifies the distance
in x that you wish to move the brush.

DY
This  numeric  parameter requires its keyword and specifies the distance
in y that you wish to move the brush.

DZ
This  numeric  parameter requires its keyword and specifies the distance
in z that you wish to move the brush.

AX
This  numeric  keyword requires its keyword and specifies the angle in x
that you wish to rotate the current brush.

AY
This  numeric  keyword requires its keyword and specifies the angle in y
that you wish to rotate the current brush.

AZ
This  numeric  keyword requires its keyword and specifies the angle in z
that you wish to rotate the current brush.

BRUSH
This  switch  specifies that you wish to move or rotate your brush using
the brush's coordinate system.

NOBRUSH
This  switch  specifies that you wish to move or rotate your brush using
the screen's coordinate system.


Exit Perspective Mode

Format: EXITPERSP
Function: This command exits Perspective mode


Fix Perspective Axes

Format: FIXPERSP X/S, Y/S, Z/S
Function:  This  command  fixes  the  specified  axes so that your mouse
cannot  move  your  brush  through  that axis.  The Z axis is fixed as a
program  default.  The X, Y, Z switch parameters are the equivalent to a
user pressing Shift Keypad 9, Shift Keypad 6, or Shift-Keypad 3 while in
perspective mode, respectively.


Set Perspective Depth

Format: SETPERSPDEPTH DEPTH/N
Function: This command modifies the apparent distance from the observer.
At  larger  perspective  depths,  the perspective foreshortening is at a
minimum,  and  becoming  greater  as  the  apparent  distance decreases.
Please  note  that  although,  this  command  will  take any positive or
negative  integer,  we have found that you will want to limit your range
of  input  from  about  (remember, negative numbers must have quotes) to
around  1000, numbers below or above this range will yield unpredictable
results!

Examples:
SETPERSPDEPTH "-100"
SETPERSPDEPTH DEPTH 700


ARexx Requester Functions

Format: REQUESTNUMBER TITLE,PROMPT/K, NUMBER/N/K
Function:  This  command  displays a requester that prompts the user for
numeric  input  and  returns that value to ARexx.  The default requester
has  "User Request" for its Title, "Enter a Number:" as its Prompt and 0
as  its Number.  Optionally you can specify a different title, prompt or
default number PROMPT and NUMBER are required keywords.

Example:
REQUESTNUMBER TITLE "My Request" 'PROMPT "Enter #:"'
NUMBER 5


String Requester

Format: REQUESTSTRING TITLE,PROMPT/K, STRING/K, LEN/K
Function:  This command displays a requester that prompts the user for a
string  entry  and  returns that string to ARexx.  The default requester
has  "User  Request"  for  its  Title,  "Enter  Text:" as its Prompt and
nothing  as  a  String.    Optionally you can specify a different title,
prompt  or  default  string,  or  PROMPT  STRING,  and  LEN are required
keywords

Example: REQUESTSTRING TITLE ' "My Request" ' PROMPT "Your Name Please:"


OK/Cancel Requester

Format: REQUESTOK PROMPT/A/K, TITLE/K, CANCEL/S
Function: This command displays a requester that prompts the user for an
OK.    This  command  always  requires the PROMPT parameter and a string
indicating  what  it  is  you are asking the user to press OK or CANCEL.
Optionally  you  can specify a new title or a cancel button by using the
TITLE keyword parameter and CANCEL switch.

Example: REQUESTOK PROMPT ' "Exiting DPaint...." '  CANCEL

NOTE:
Closing the requester or pressing OK returns a value of 0.  Choosing CAN
CEL returns a value of 2

Format: REQUESTYESNO PROMPT/A/K, TITLE,/K, CANCEL/S
Function:  This command displays a requester that prompts the user for a
YES or NO answer.  This command always requires the PROMPT parameter and
a  string indicating what it is you are asking the user to answer YES or
NO  to.    Optionally  you can specify a new title or a cancel button by
using the TITLE keyword parameter and CANCEL switch.

NOTE:
Pressing  YES  returns  a value of 0.  Pressing NO returns a value of 1.
Closing the requester or choosing CANCEL returns a value of 2.


Get Value Commands

Animbrush

Format: GETANIMBRUSH DIRECTION/S, DURATION/S, CURRENT/S
Function:  This  command  returns  the  values  of the current AnimBrush
settings.  Use the optional switches to return specific values.

DIRECTION
This switch returns the values FORWARD, BACKWARD, or PING.

DURATION
This  switch  returns  the duration in number of frames it takes to move
com pletely through its cells.

CURRENT
This switch returns the current cel the AnimBrush is on.


Animbrush Values

Format: GETAIRBRUSH TYPE/S, RADIUS/S, FLOW/S
Function:  This command returns values of the current airbrush settings.
Using the optional switches returns just the specific values.

TYPE
This switch returns either OLD or STANDARD

Examples:
GETAIRBRUSH might return the following string STANDARD RADIUS 10 FLOW 80


GETAIRBRUSH RADIUS might return the following value: 16


Animation Range Values

Format: GETANIMRANGE RANGE/S, START/S, END/S
Function:  This command returns values of the current animation playback
range  set tings.  Using the optional switches returns just the specific
values.

RANGE
This switch returns either ALL or RANGE

START
This  switch  returns 0 if RANGE = ALL.  If RANGE = RANGE it returns the
start frame.

END
This  switch  Returns 0 if RANGE = ALL.  If RANGE = RANGE it returns the
end frame.


Background Colour Value

Format: GETBGCOLOR COLOR/S
Function:  This command returns the palette index number for the current
back ground colour.  The colour switch is optional.


Camera Move Coordinates

Format: GETCAMCOORDS DX/S, DY/S, DZ/S, DISPLACEMENT/S, CYCLIC/S
Function:  This  command  returns  the values of the current Camera Move
requester  coordinate  settings.    Using  the optional switches returns
specific values.

DISPLACEMENT
This switch returns the current setting of the distance Brush check item
Checked = DISPBRUSH, Unchecked = NODISPBRUSH


Camera Move Options

Format: GETCAMOPTS SLOWIN/S, SLOWOUT/S, COUNT/S, FROMTO/S, WRAP/S
Function:  This  command  returns  the values of the current Camera Move
option set tings.  Using the optional switches returns specific values

WRAP
This switch returns either WRAP or NOWRAP


Coordinate Values

Format: GETCOORD X/S, Y/S
Function:  This  command  returns the current cursor screen coordinates.
The optional switches return specific values.


Get Current Frame

Format: GETCURFRAME FRAME/S
Function:  This  command  returns  the number of the current frame being
displayed.  The FRAME switch is optional.


Foreground Colour Value

Format: GETFGCOLOR COLOR/S
Function:  This command returns the palette index number for the current
foreground colour.  The colour switch is optional.


Fill Requester Values

Format: GETFILL TYPE/S, RANGE/S, DITHER/S, DITHERTYPE/S
Function:  This command returns the values of the current Fill requester
settings Optional switches return specific values

TYPE
This  switch  returns  one  of  the  following values SOLID, BRUSH, WRAP
PERPSECTIVE, RUB, HBRITE, or PATTERN.

DITHERTYPE
This  switch  returns  one of the following values RANDOM, PATDITHER, or
SMOOTH.


Font Values

Format: GETFONT NAME/S, SIZE/S, STYLE/S
Function:  This command returns the values of the current Font requester
settings.  Optional switches return specific values.


Get Frame Palette

Format: GETFRAMEPALETTE NUMBER/S
Function:  This command returns the numeric index for the palette in use
on  the  cur  rent  frame.    Please  see the Reference section for more
information  on  the  Frame  Palette requester.  Using the NUMBER switch
returns just a numeric value.


Get Frame Rate Values

Format: GETFRAMERATE TYPE/S, FPS/S, JIFFIES/S
Function:  This  command  returns  the  values  for  the  current  Frame
Requester settings Please see the Reference section for more information
on the Set Frame Rate requester.

TYPE
This switch returns one of the following values: GLOBAL or BYFRAME


Get Number of Frames

Format: GETFRAMES NUMBER/S
Function:  This  command  returns  the  number  of Frames in the current
animation.  Using the NUMBER switch returns just a numeric value


Get Grid Values

Format: GETGRID X/S, Y/S
Function:  This command returns the current Grid requester X, Y values.
Optional switches return specific values.


Get Move Coordinates.

Format:   GETMOVECOORDS   DX/S,   DY/S,    DZ/S,    AX/S,    AY/S, AZ/S,
DISPLACEMENT/S, ANGLE/S, CYCLIC/S
Function:  This  command  returns  the values of the current Camera Move
requester  coordinate  settings.    Using  the optional switches returns
specific values.

DISPLACEMENT
This  switch  returns  the  current  setting of the distance Brush check
item.  Checked = DISPBRUSH, Unchecked = NODISPBRUSH

ANGLE
This  switch returns the current setting of the Angle Brush check item.
Checked = ANGBRUSH, Unchecked = NOANGBRUSH


Get Move Option Values

Format: GETMOVEOPTS SLOWIN/S, SLOWOUT/S, COUNT/S, FROMTO/S, DIRECTION/S
Function:  This  command  returns  the values of the current Move option
settings.  Using the optional switches returns specific values.

FROMTO
This switch returns one of the following values GOFROM, or COMETO

DIRECTION
This  switch  returns  one  of the following values FORWARD, INPLACE, or
BACKWARD


Get Move Fade Values

Format: GETMOVEFADE START/S, END/S
Function:  This  command returns the values of the current Start and End
Fade  settings in the Move requester.  Using either switch will return a
value from 0 to 255


Page Size Values

Format: GETPAGESIZE WIDTH/S, HEIGHT/S
Function:  This  command  returns  the  width  and  height values of the
current page.  Using the optional switches returns specific values.


Get Current Pen

Format: GETPEN PEN/S
Function:  This command returns a number indicating the current built in
toolbox  brush  in use.  The PEN switch is optional.  The smallest built
in brush (sin gle pixel) returns a value of 0.


Get Current Pen Size

Format: GETPENSIZE SIZE/S
Function:  This  command  returns  a  number  indicating the size of the
current brush in use.  The size switch is optional.


Get Screen Format Values

Format:  GETSCREENFORMAT  MODEID/S,   SCREENW/S,   SCREENH/S,   PAGEW/S,
PAGEH/S, COLORS/S, BACK/S, RETAIN/S
Function:  This  command returns values for the current screen format in
use.    Please  see  the  Reference  section for more information on the
Screen  Format  requester.  Using the optional switches returns specific
values.


Get Spacing Values

Format: GETSPACE TYPE/S, VALUE/S
Function:  This  command  returns  the  current state and values for the
Spacing Requester.  Using the optional switches returns specific values.


TYPE
This  switch  returns  one  of  the  following values: CONTINOUS, NTOTAL
NTHDOT or AIRBRUSH


Get Symmetry Values

Format:  GETSYMMETRYTYPE/S,  MIRROR/S,  ORDER/S,  CENTERX/S,  CENTERY/S,
WIDTH/S, HEIGHT/S
Function:  This  command  returns  the  current  state and values of the
Symmetry requester

TYPE
This switch returns either POINT or TILE

MIRROR
This switch returns either MIRROR or CYCLIC.


Get Translucency Values

Format: GETTRANSLUCENCY LEVEL/S
Function:  This  command  returns  the  current percentage value for the
global translu cency requester.  The value returned can be 0 (completely
opaque) to 100 (completely translucent).  Please note that this value is
different from the fade values in the Move requester.



Artist Bios
-----------

Lee Ozer

When  Lee entered Stanford University she was an aspiring young artist.
Oil  painting  had  been  her  first love at Manhattan's famed School of
Music  and  Art, and college might have been a pleasant diversion before
entering the New York "Art Scene".  At the prodding of some friends, she
took a comput er science course "for the fun of it".

Like  many  of  the creative talents who have worked at Electronic Arts,
Lee's  entry  into big time programming began innocently enough with the
Amiga It's a familiar story: The Amiga was released, it was neat, it was
fun,  it  had  colour,  and  suddenly - note the slightly crazed look of
excitement  typical in these cases "I've got to program this thing!" Lee
was hooked.

The  art world became a sweet memory.  Because Stanford had no undergrad
uate  major  in computer science, Lee desired a major for herself in AI,
and took all the systems and computer science courses the universiry had
to  offer.    She  then  took time away from school to get some graphics
experience,  and wound up working at EA on some of Dan Silva's old code.
Following six months of intensive hacking on the EGA/VGA support for the
Prism  graphics primitives, she returned to Stanford for her degree, and
stayed on for an MS.  in Computer Systems.

Through  all  of  her training and diverse experience, computer graphics
has  remained an enduring passion.  Her belief that high quality artwork
can  be created with a computer led her back to Electronic Arts, and has
resulted in Deluxe Paint IV and V.  And she won't stop there.

When  she's away from the keyboard, Lee's a discriminating sci fi fan, a
con  noisseur  of trashy TV and a dedicated aerobics/workout freak.  She
and  her  husband Ali share their home in Palo Alto, California with two
big cats named Dido and Zack


Dallas J Hodgson

Dallas  got  hooked  on programming in 1978, at the dawn of the personal
computing revolution.  He worked his way through college and high school
consulting and developing, searching for ways to integrate his interests
in  art  and  music with the creative use of technology.  When the Amiga
computer was released in 1985, Dallas rushed to embrace the exciting new
platform  and  soon  released the popular shareware Amiga utility NewZAP
used by thousands of Amigans world wide.

Dallas  moved from the Monterey Bay area of California to Silicon valley
to  get  closer  to where it all began.  He worked on embedded operating
systems,  paint  software, data analysis tools, disk utilities, and game
software  before landing his "dream job" of working with Electronic Arts
on  Deluxe  Paint  V  and AGA.  His goal is to empower the creativity of
individuals through the magic of computers.


Chuck Swan

Chuck's first love was film special effects, but learning how to program
seemed  like  "the  right thing to do".  When the Amiga and Deluxe Paint
appeared,  well,  so  much for film effects.  His desire to add graphics
tablet  Support  to Deluxe Paint led to Chuck coordinating the effort to
reach  a  stan dard for tablet drivers which everyone could agree on and
working with the Deluxe Paint team.  When he heard they were looking for
a  programmer  to  add  ARexx  support  to Deluxe Paint, he begged for a
chance to work on his favourite program.

When  Chuck is not working on Deluxe Paint, he runs his company Trimedia
Inc.  He lives in Gurnee, IL, right next to a Six Flags theme park, with
his  wife  Tina  and  daughter  Lindy.  In his spare time (if any) Chuck
enjoys model railroading & marine aquariums.


Dan Silva

By  the  time legendary Dan joined Electronic Arts in 1983, he'd already
worked with computers and computer graphics for 20 years.  In productive
stints  at  Informatics,  Xerox,  and Lucasfilm, he had designed a video
editor  and  new  generation  bitmap  editor,  as well as an Interactive
language for dis playing equations as graphic images.

At  EA  he  started  work on Prism, a paint program that was to be an in
house  tool  for  software  development.  Prism eventually became Deluxe
Paint  (1985), and was an instant success.  Dan started improving Deluxe
Paint  almost immediately and the result was Deluxe Paint II (1986), the
best  pro  gram  available  for  the Amiga at that time.  As fine as the
program  was,  he  still wasn't satisfied he wanted paintings that could
move.    Dan's  lifelong  fascination  with animation became the driving
force  of  the best-selling Deluxe Paint III.  Dan has moved on to other
projects, but his code lives on.


Credits
-------

Programming:   Lee Ozer, Dallas J. Hodgson
ARexx Extensions: Chuck Swan
Original design and Code: Daniel Silva
Producers: Jack Falk, Hal Jordy III
Associate Producer: Orlando V Guzman
Assistant Producer: Stephen Barry
Technical Director: David Walker
Production Assistance: Doug Shannon, Walter Ianneo
Software Testing: Geoff Rantala, Kedar Roy
Documentation: David Lee, R.J. Berg, with contributions from Orlando
Guzman, Hal Jordy, Andrea Smith, and Lee Ozer
Documentation Layout: Tom Peters
Product Marketing: Ann Williams, Sue Goerss
Public Relations: Dany Brooks
Art: Gene Hamm, Cris Palomino, Ken Costello, Don Woo, Arthur Koch,
Connie Braat, Avril Harrison, Mike Nowak, Greg Johnson, Michael Kosaka,
Michael Lubuguin, Orlando Guzman, Gene Brawn, Doug Shannon, Walter
Ianneo, Geoff Rantala, Tim Kolb
QA: Jonathan Harris, Walter Ianneo

EA UK Production

Associate Producer: Richard Ashdown
Assistant Producer: Danny Isaac
String Translation: Carol Agget
Testing: Jamie Bradshaw

Special Thanks: Friends and family of the production team, Lisa Higgins,
Jana Wilson, MaryAnn Duringer, Paul Armatta, Kenneth Dyke, Colin
McLaughlan, Randy Dillon, Luc Barthelet, Keith MCCurdy, EA Customer
Support, Commodore-Amiga Technical Support, Jim Cooper,
The SPUD Beta Test Team: Kara Blohm, Gene Brawn, Jim Carey, Dennis
Desantis, Gene Hamm, Tim Kolb, Phil Nibbelink, Gerry Paquette,
Algonquin College, Carolyn Sheppner, Eric Schwartz.

Deluxe  Paint V is dedicated to Jay Miner "The Father of the Amiga" Rest
in peace


Technical Support
-----------------

If  you  have  questions  about  the  program,   our   Technical Support
Department  can help.  If your question isn't urgent, please write to us
at:

Electronic Arts Technical Support
PO. Box 7578, San Mateo, CA 94403-7578

Please be sure to include the following information in your letter:

Product name
Model, memory and configuration of your Amiga
Any additional system information (like type and make of monitor
video card, printer etc)
System software version number
Description of the problem you're having

If  you  need  to  talk to someone immediately call us at (415) 572-ARTS
Monday  though Friday between 8:30 am and 4:30 pm, Pacific Time.  Please
have  the  above  information  ready  when  you call.  This will help us
answer your question in the shortest possible time.

If  you  live  outside  of the United States, you can contact one of our
other offices

In the United Kingdom, contact:

Electronic Arts Ltd , PO Box 835, Slough SL3 8XU, UK
Phone [phone].

In Australia and New Zealand, contact:

Electronic Arts Pty Ltd., PO. Box 432, Southport Qld 4215, Australia

Within Australia call:

Phone: [phone]

Within New Zealand call:

Phone: [phone] between 9 am 5 pm Eastern Standard Time


Limited Warranty
----------------

Electronic Arts("EA") warrants to the original purchaser of the computer
software  product  for  a  period  of  ninety (90) days from the date of
original  purchase  (the  "Warranty Period"), that under normal use, the
magnetic  media  and  the  user  docu mentation are free from defects in
materials and workmanship.

Warranty Claims
To  make  a warranty claim under this limited warranty please return the
product to the point of purchase, accompanied by proof of purchase, your
name,  your  return  address, and a statement of the defect, OR send the
disk(s)  to us at the above address within 90 days of purchase include a
copy  of the dated purchase receipt, your name, your return address, and
a  statement  of  the  defect.  EA or its aurhorised dealer will, at our
option,  repair  or  replace  the  product and return it to you (postage
prepaid) or issue you with a credit equal to the purchase price.

To replace defective media after the 90-day warranty period has expired,
send  the original disk(s) to the above address.  Enclose a statement of
the  defect,  your name, your return address, and a check or money order
for £2.50 per disk or £7.50 per set

The  foregoing  states the purchaser's sole and exclusive remedy for any
breach of war ranty with respect to the software product

Limitations

THIS  WARRANTY  IS  IN  LIEU  OF  ALL  OTHER  WARRANTIES  AND  NO  OTHER
REPRESENTATIONS  OR CLAlMS OF ANY NATURE SHALL BE BINDING ON OR OBLIGATE
ELECTRONIC  ARTS.    ANY IMPLIED WAR RANTIES APPLICABLE TO THIS SOFTWARE
PRODUCT  INCLUDING  WARRANTIES  OF  MERCHANTABILITY  AND  FITNESS  FOR A
PARTICU LAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE NINETY (90) DAY PERIOD DESCRIBED
ABOVE.    IN  NO  EVENT  WILL ELECTRONIC ARTS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPEClAL,
INCIDENTAL,  OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM POSSESSION, USE, OR
MALFUNCTION OF THIS ELECTRONIC ARTS SOFTWARE PRODUCT

Some  states do not allow limitations as to how long an implied warranty
lasts  and/or  exclusions  or limitations of incidental or consequential
damages so the above limita tions and/or exclusions of liability may not
apply to you.  This warranty gives you specific rights, and you may also
have other rights which vary from state to state.

NOTICE

ELECTRONIC  ARTS  RESERVES THE RIGHT TO MAKE IMPROVEMENTS IN THE PRODUCT
DESCRIBED IN THlS MANUAL AT ANY TIME AND WITOUT NOTICE.

THIS  MANUAL  AND  THE SOFTWARE DESCRIBED IN THIS MANUAL ARE COPYRIGHTED
ALL RIGHTS ARE RESERVED NO PART OF THIS MANUAL OR THE DESCRIBED SOFTWARE
MAY  BE  COPIED.   REPRO DUCED, TRANSLATED, OR REDUCED TO ANY ELECTRONIC
MEDIUM  OR  MACHINE-READABLE  FORM  WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF
ELECTRONIC  ARTS,  P  O  BOX  7578.  SAN MATEO.  CALI FORNIA 94403 7578.
ATTN: CUSTOMER SUPPORT

SOFTWARE and DOCUMENTATION 1994 ELECTRONIC ARTS ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

Deluxe Paint V 1985- 1994 Electronic Arts. All Rights Reserved

Deluxe Paint is a registered trademark of Electronic Arts

Animboards is a trademark of Electronic Arts



------------------------------------END----------------------------------